Mouseiaan open library of the ancient world
Observations upon the Prophecies of Daniel, and the Apocalypse of St. John
Wide page

Observations upon the Prophecies of Daniel, and the Apocalypse of St. John

Isaac Newton · Plain English translation — Mouseia

18th-century English source edition on gutenberg.org

Part I, Chapter 1, 1

Introduction concerning the Compilers of the books of the Old Testament.

When Manasses1 set up a carved image in the house of the Lord, and built altars in the two courts of the house, to all the host of Heaven, and us'd inchantments and witchcraft, and familiar spirits, and for his great wickedness was invaded by the army of Asserhadon King of Assyria, and carried captive to Babylon; the book of the Law was lost till the eighteenth year of his grandson Josiah. Then2 Hilkiah the High Priest, upon repairing the Temple, found it there: and the King lamented that their fathers had not done after the words of the book, and commanded that it should be read to the people, and caused the people to renew the holy covenant with God. This is the book of the Law now extant.

When3 Shishak came out of Egypt and spoil'd the temple, and brought Judah into subjection to the monarchy of Egypt, (which was in the fifth year of Rehoboam) the Jews continued under great troubles for about twenty years; being without the true God, and without a teaching Priest, and without Law: and in those times there was no peace to him that went out, nor to him that came in, but great vexations were upon all the inhabitants of the countries, and nation was destroyed of nation, and city of city, for God did vex them with all adversity. But4 when Shishak was dead, and Egypt fell into troubles, Judah had quiet ten years; and in that time Asa built fenced cities in Judah, and got up an army of 580000 men, with which, in the 15th year of his reign, he met and overcame Zerah the Ethiopian, who had conquered Egypt and Lybia, and Troglodytica, and came out with an army of 1000000 Lybians and Ethiopians, to recover the countries conquered by Sesac. And after this victory5 Asa dethroned his mother for idolatry, and he renewed the Altar, and brought new vessels of gold and silver into the Temple; and he and the people entered into a new covenant to seek the Lord God of their fathers, upon pain of death to those who worshiped other Gods; and his son Jehosaphat took away the high places, and in the third year of his reign sent some of his Princes, and of the Priests and Levites, to teach in the cities of Judah: and they had the book of the Law with them, and went about throughout all the cities of Judah, and taught the people. This is that book of the Law which was afterwards lost in the reign of Manasses, and found again in the reign of Josiah, and therefore it was written before the third year of Jehosaphat.

The same book of the Law was preserved and handed down to posterity by the Samaritans, and therefore was received by the ten Tribes before their captivity. For6 when the ten Tribes were captivated, a Priest or the captivity was sent back to Bethel, by order of the King of Assyria, to instruct the new inhabitants of Samaria, in the manner of the God of the land; and the Samaritans had the Pentateuch from this Priest, as containing the law or manner of the God of the land, which he was to teach them. For7 they persevered in the religion which he taught them, joining with it the worship of their own Gods; and by persevering in what they had been taught, they preserved this book of their Law in the original character of the Hebrews, while the two Tribes, after their return from Babylon, changed the character to that of the Chaldees, which they had learned at Babylon.

And since the Pentateuch was received as the book of the Law, both by the two Tribes and by the ten Tribes, it follows that they received it before they became divided into two Kingdoms. For after the division, they received not laws from one another, but continued at variance. Judah could not reclaim Israel from the sin of Jeroboam, and Israel could not bring Judah to it. The Pentateuch therefore was the book of the Law in the days of David and Solomon. The affairs of the Tabernacle and Temple were ordered by David and Solomon, according to the Law of this book; and David in the 78th Psalm, admonishing the people to give ear to the Law of God, means the Law of this book. For in describing how their forefathers kept it not, he quotes many historical things out of the books of Exodus and Numbers.

The race of the Kings of Edom, before there reigned any King over Israel, is set down in the book of8 Genesis; and therefore that book was not written entirely in the form now extant, before the reign of Saul. The writer set down the race of those Kings till his own time, and therefore wrote before David conquered Edom. The Pentateuch is composed of the Law and the history of God's people together; and the history hath been collected from several books, such as were the history of the Creation composed by Moses, Gen. ii. 4. the book of the generations of Adam, Gen. v. i. and the book of the wars of the Lord, Num. xxi. 14. This book of wars contained what was done at the Red-sea, and in the journeying of Israel thro' the Wilderness, and therefore was begun by Moses. And Joshua might carry it on to the conquest of Canaan. For Joshua wrote some things in the book of the Law of God, Josh. xxiv. 26 and therefore might write his own wars in the book of wars, those being the principal wars of God. These were publick books, and therefore not written without the authority of Moses and Joshua. And Samuel had leisure in the reign of Saul, to put them into the form of the books of Moses and Joshua now extant, inserting into the book of Genesis, the race of the Kings of Edom, until there reigned a King in Israel.

The book of the Judges is a continued history of the Judges down to the death of Sampson, and therefore was compiled after his death, out of the Acts of the Judges. Several things in this book are said to be done when there was no King in Israel, Judg. xvii. 6. xviii. 1. xix. 1. xxi. 25. and therefore this book was written after the beginning of the reign of Saul. When it was written, the Jebusites dwelt in Jerusalem, Jud. i. 21 and therefore it was written before the eighth year of David, 2 Sam. v. 8. and 1 Chron. xi. 6. The books of Moses, Joshua, and Judges, contain one continued history, down from the Creation to the death of Sampson. Where the Pentateuch ends, the book of Joshua begins; and where the book of Joshua ends, the book of Judges begins. Therefore all these books have been composed out of the writings of Moses, Joshua, and other records, by one and the same hand, after the beginning of the reign of Saul, and before the eighth year of David. And Samuel was a sacred writer, 1 Sam. x. 25. acquainted with the history of Moses and the Judges, 1 Sam. xii. 8, 9, 10, 11, 12. and had leisure in the reign of Saul, and sufficient authority to compose these books. He was a Prophet, and judged Israel all the days of his life, and was in the greatest esteem with the people; and the Law by which he was to judge the people was not to be published by less authority than his own, the Law-maker being not inferior to the judge. And the book of Jasher, which is quoted in the book of Joshua, Josh. x. 13. was in being at the death of Saul, 2 Sam. i. 18.

At the dedication of the Temple of Solomon, when the Ark was brought into the most holy place, there was nothing in it but the two tables, 1 Kings viii. 9. and therefore when the Philistines took the Ark, they took out of it the book of the Law, and the golden pot of Manna, and Aaron's Rod. And this and other losses in the desolation of Israel, by the conquering Philistines, might give occasion to Samuel, after some respite from those enemies, to recollect the scattered writings of Moses and Joshua, and the records of the Patriarchs and Judges, and compose them in the form now extant.

The book of Ruth is a history of things done in the days of the Judges, and may be looked upon as an addition to the book of the Judges, written by the same author, and at the same time. For it was written after the birth of David, Ruth iv. 17, 22. and not long after, because the history of Boaz and Ruth, the great grandfather and great grandmother of David, and that of their contemporaries, could not well be remembered above two or three generations. And since this book derives the genealogy of David from Boaz and Ruth, and omits David's elder brothers and his sons; it was written in honour of David, after he was anointed King by Samuel, and before he had children in Hebron, and by consequence in the reign of Saul. It proceeds not to the history of David, and therefore seems to have been written presently after he was anointed. They judge well therefore who ascribe to Samuel the books of Joshua, Judges, and Ruth.

Samuel is also reputed the author of the first book of Samuel, till the time of his death. The two books of Samuel cite no authors, and therefore seem to be originals. They begin with his genealogy, birth and education, and might be written partly in his lifetime by himself or his disciples the Prophets at Naioth in Ramah, 1 Sam. xix. 18, 19, 20. and partly after his death by the same disciples.

Introduction concerning the Compilers of the books of the Old Testament.

When Manasses1 set up a carved image in the house of the Lord, built altars in the two courts of the house for all the host of Heaven, used enchantments and witchcraft, and called up familiar spirits, the army of Asserhadon King of Assyria invaded the land because of his great wickedness, and he was carried off captive to Babylon. The book of the Law was then lost until the eighteenth year of his grandson Josiah. Then2 Hilkiah the High Priest found it there while repairing the Temple. The King was grieved that their fathers had not followed what the book said. He ordered the book read to the people, and had the people renew the holy covenant with God. This is the book of the Law that still exists.

When3 Shishak came out of Egypt, plundered the Temple, and put Judah under the rule of Egypt (this was in the fifth year of Rehoboam), the Jews stayed in great trouble for about twenty years. They were without the true God, without a teaching Priest, and without Law. In those times no one who went out had peace, and no one who came in had peace either. Great troubles fell on all the people of the countries. One nation destroyed another, and one city another, because God troubled them with every kind of adversity. But4 once Shishak died and Egypt fell into troubles, Judah had ten years of quiet. In that time Asa built fortified cities in Judah and raised an army of 580000 men. In the 15th year of his reign he met and defeated Zerah the Ethiopian. Zerah had conquered Egypt and Lybia and Troglodytica, and he came out with an army of 1000000 Lybians and Ethiopians to take back the countries Sesac had conquered. After this victory5 Asa removed his mother from the throne because of her idolatry. He renewed the Altar, brought new vessels of gold and silver into the Temple, and he and the people entered into a new covenant to seek the Lord God of their fathers, on pain of death for those who worshiped other Gods. His son Jehosaphat removed the high places, and in the third year of his reign he sent some of his Princes, and some of the Priests and Levites, to teach in the cities of Judah. They had the book of the Law with them, went through all the cities of Judah, and taught the people. This is the book of the Law that was later lost in the reign of Manasses and found again in the reign of Josiah. So it was written before the third year of Jehosaphat.

The Samaritans kept this same book of the Law and passed it down, so the ten Tribes had received it before they were taken captive. For6 when the ten Tribes were captured, the King of Assyria ordered a Priest of the captivity to be sent back to Bethel. His job was to teach the new inhabitants of Samaria about the way of the God of the land. The Samaritans got the Pentateuch from this Priest, because it held the law or way of the God of the land that he was to teach them. For7 they stuck to the religion he taught them and added the worship of their own Gods to it. By holding to what they had been taught, they kept this book of their Law in the original Hebrew writing, while the two Tribes, after their return from Babylon, changed the writing to that of the Chaldees, which they had learned at Babylon.

Both the two Tribes and the ten Tribes took the Pentateuch as the book of the Law. So they must have received it before they split into two Kingdoms. After the split they took no laws from each other, and they stayed at odds. Judah could not pull Israel back from the sin of Jeroboam, and Israel could not bring Judah to it. So the Pentateuch was the book of the Law in the days of David and Solomon. David and Solomon ordered the affairs of the Tabernacle and Temple according to the Law of this book. In the 78th Psalm David tells the people to listen to the Law of God, and he means the Law of this book. When he describes how their forefathers did not keep it, he quotes many historical things from the books of Exodus and Numbers.

The list of the Kings of Edom, before any King reigned over Israel, is set down in the book of8 Genesis. So that book was not written all in its present form before the reign of Saul. The writer recorded the line of those Kings down to his own time, so he wrote before David conquered Edom. The Pentateuch puts the Law together with the history of God's people. The history was gathered from several books, such as the history of the Creation composed by Moses, Gen. ii. 4; the book of the generations of Adam, Gen. v. i.; and the book of the wars of the Lord, Num. xxi. 14. The book of wars covered what happened at the Red Sea and during Israel's journey through the Wilderness, so Moses began it. Joshua may have carried it on to the conquest of Canaan. Joshua wrote some things in the book of the Law of God, Josh. xxiv. 26, so he may have written his own wars in the book of wars, since those were the main wars of God. These were public books, so they were not written without the authority of Moses and Joshua. In the reign of Saul, Samuel had the time to put them into the form of the books of Moses and Joshua we now have. He inserted into the book of Genesis the list of the Kings of Edom, down to the time when a King reigned in Israel.

The book of the Judges is a continuous history of the Judges down to the death of Sampson, so it was compiled after his death out of the Acts of the Judges. Several things in this book are said to have happened when there was no King in Israel, Judg. xvii. 6. xviii. 1. xix. 1. xxi. 25. So this book was written after the reign of Saul began. When it was written, the Jebusites lived in Jerusalem, Jud. i. 21, so it was written before the eighth year of David, 2 Sam. v. 8. and 1 Chron. xi. 6. The books of Moses, Joshua, and Judges make up one continuous history, from the Creation down to the death of Sampson. The book of Joshua starts where the Pentateuch ends, and the book of Judges starts where the book of Joshua ends. So all these books were put together from the writings of Moses, Joshua, and other records, by one and the same hand, after the reign of Saul began and before the eighth year of David. Samuel was a sacred writer, 1 Sam. x. 25; he knew the history of Moses and the Judges, 1 Sam. xii. 8, 9, 10, 11, 12; and in the reign of Saul he had both the time and the authority to compose these books. He was a Prophet, and he judged Israel all the days of his life, and he was held in the highest esteem by the people. The Law by which he judged the people could not be published by an authority lower than his own, since the Law-maker is not below the judge. The book of Jasher, quoted in the book of Joshua, Josh. x. 13, was in existence at the death of Saul, 2 Sam. i. 18.

At the dedication of Solomon's Temple, when the Ark was brought into the most holy place, it held nothing but the two tables, 1 Kings viii. 9. So when the Philistines took the Ark, they had taken out of it the book of the Law, the golden pot of Manna, and Aaron's Rod. This loss, and other losses in the ruin of Israel at the hands of the conquering Philistines, may have led Samuel, once he had some relief from those enemies, to gather the scattered writings of Moses and Joshua, and the records of the Patriarchs and Judges, and to put them together in the form we now have.

The book of Ruth tells of things that happened in the days of the Judges. It can be read as an addition to the book of the Judges, written by the same author at the same time. It was written after the birth of David, Ruth iv. 17, 22, and not long after, because the history of Boaz and Ruth, the great grandfather and great grandmother of David, and the history of their contemporaries, could not be remembered much past two or three generations. This book traces David's genealogy from Boaz and Ruth, and it leaves out David's elder brothers and his sons. So it was written in honor of David, after he was anointed King by Samuel and before he had children in Hebron, and therefore during the reign of Saul. It does not go on to the history of David, so it seems to have been written right after he was anointed. So those who give the books of Joshua, Judges, and Ruth to Samuel judge correctly.

Samuel is also thought to have written the first book of Samuel, up to the time of his death. The two books of Samuel name no authors, so they seem to be originals. They begin with his genealogy, birth, and education. They may have been written partly in his lifetime, by himself or by his disciples the Prophets at Naioth in Ramah, 1 Sam. xix. 18, 19, 20, and partly after his death by those same disciples.

Part I, Chapter 1, 2

The books of the Kings cite other authors, as the book of the Acts of Solomon, the book of the Chronicles of the Kings of Israel, and the book of the Chronicles of the Kings of Judah. The books of the Chronicles cite the book of Samuel the Seer, the book of Nathan the Prophet, and the book of Gad the Seer, for the Acts of David; the book of Nathan the Prophet, the Prophecy of Ahijah the Shilonite, and the visions of Iddo the Seer, for the Acts of Solomon; the book of Shemajah the Prophet, and the book of Iddo the Seer concerning genealogies, for the Acts of Rehoboam and Abijah; the book of the Kings of Judah and Israel for the Acts of Asa, Joash, Amaziah, Jotham, Ahaz, Hezekiah, Manasseh, and Josiah; the book of Hanani the Seer, for the Acts of Jehosaphat; and the visions of Isaiah for the Acts of Uzziah and Hezekiah. These books were therefore collected out of the historical writings of the antient Seers and Prophets. And because the books of the Kings and Chronicles quote one another, they were written at one and the same time. And this time was after the return from the Babylonian captivity, because they bring down the history of Judah, and the genealogies of the Kings of Judah, and of the High Priests, to that captivity. The book of Ezra was originally a part of the book of the Chronicles, and has been divided from it. For it begins with the two last verses of the books of Chronicles, and the first book of Esdras begins with the two last chapters thereof. Ezra was therefore the compiler of the books of Kings and Chronicles, and brought down the history to his own time. He was a ready Scribe in the Law of God; and for assisting him in this work Nehemias founded a library, and gathered together the Acts of the Kings and the Prophets, and of David, and the Epistles of the Kings, concerning the holy gifts, 2 Maccab. ii. 13. By the Acts of David I understand here the two books of Samuel, or at least the second book. Out of the Acts of the Kings, written from time to time by the Prophets, he compos'd the books of the Kings of Judah and Israel, the Chronicles of the Kings of Judah, and the Chronicles of the Kings of Israel. And in doing this he joined those Acts together, in due order of time, copying the very words of the authors, as is manifest from hence, that the books of the Kings and Chronicles frequently agree with one another in words for many sentences together. Where they agree in sense, there they agree in words also.

So the Prophecies of Isaiah, written at several times, he has collected into one body. And the like he did for those of Jeremiah, and the rest of the Prophets, down to the days of the second Temple. The book of Jonah is the history of Jonah written by another hand. The book of Daniel is a collection of papers written at several times. The six last chapters contain Prophecies written at several times by Daniel himself: the six first are a collection of historical papers written by others. The fourth chapter is a decree of Nebuchadnezzar. The first chapter was written after Daniel's death: for the author saith, that Daniel continued to the first year of Cyrus; that is, to his first year over the Persians and Medes, and third year over Babylon. And, for the same reason, the fifth and sixth chapters were also written after his death. For they end with these words: So this Daniel prospered in the reign of Darius and in the reign of Cyrus the Persian. Yet these words might be added by the collector of the papers, whom I take to be Ezra.

The Psalms composed by Moses, David, and others, seem to have been also collected by Ezra into one volume. I reckon him the collector, because in this collection I meet with Psalms as late as the Babylonian captivity, but with none later.

After these things Antiochus Epiphanes spoiled the Temple, commanded the Jews to forsake the Law upon pain of death, and caused the sacred books to be burnt wherever they could be found: and in these troubles the book of the Chronicles of the Kings of Israel was entirely lost. But upon recovering from this oppression, Judas Maccabæus gathered together all those writings that were to be met with, 2 Maccab. ii. 14. and in reducing them into order, part of the Prophecies of Isaiah, or some other Prophet, have been added to the end of the Prophecies of Zechariah; and the book of Ezra has been separated from the book of Chronicles, and set together in two different orders; in one order in the book of Ezra, received into the Canon, and in another order in the first book of Esdras.

After the Roman captivity, the Jews for preserving their traditions, put them in writing in their Talmud, and for preserving their scriptures, agreed upon an Edition, and pointed it, and counted the letters of every sort in every book: and by preserving only this Edition, the antienter various lections, except what can be discovered by means of the Septuagint Version, are now lost; and such marginal notes, or other corruptions, as by the errors of the transcribers, before this Edition was made, had crept into the text, are now scarce to be corrected.

The Jews before the Roman captivity, distinguished the sacred books into the Law, the Prophets, and the Hagiographa, or holy writings; and read only the Law and the Prophets in their Synagogues. And Christ and his Apostles laid the stress of religion upon the Law and the Prophets, Matt. vii. 12. xxii. 4. Luke xvi. 16, 29, 31. xxiv. 44. Acts xxiv. 14. xxvi. 22. Rom. iii. 21. By the Hagiographa they meant the historical books called Joshua, Judges, Ruth, Samuel, Kings, Chronicles, Ezra, Nehemiah, and Esther, the book of Job, the Psalms, the books of Solomon, and the Lamentations. The Samaritans read only the Pentateuch: and when Jehosaphat sent men to teach in the cities, they had with them only the book of the Law; for the Prophecies now extant were not then written. And upon the return from the Babylonian captivity, Ezra read only the book of the Law to the people, from morning to noon on the first day of the seventh month; and from day to day in the feast of Tabernacles: for he had not yet collected the writings of the Prophets into the volume now extant; but instituted the reading of them after the collection was made. By reading the Law and the Prophets in the Synagogues, those books have been kept freer from corruption than the Hagiographa.

In the infancy of the nation of Israel, when God had given them a Law, and made a covenant with them to be their God if they would keep his commandments, he sent Prophets to reclaim them, as often as they revolted to the worship of other Gods: and upon their returning to him, they sometimes renewed the covenant which they had broken. These Prophets he continued to send, till the days of Ezra: but after their Prophecies were read in the Synagogues, those Prophecies were thought sufficient. For if the people would not hear Moses and the old Prophets, they would hear no new ones, no not tho they should rise from the dead. At length when a new truth was to be preached to the Gentiles, namely, that Jesus was the Christ, God sent new Prophets and Teachers: but after their writings were also received and read in the Synagogues of the Christians, Prophecy ceased a second time. We have Moses, the Prophets, and Apostles, and the words of Christ himself; and if we will not hear them, we shall be more inexcusable than the Jews. For the Prophets and Apostles have foretold, that as Israel often revolted and brake the covenant, and upon repentance renewed it; so there should be a falling away among the Christians, soon after the days of the Apostles; and that in the latter days God would destroy the impenitent revolters, and make a new covenant with his people. And the giving ear to the Prophets is a fundamental character of the true Church. For God has so ordered the Prophecies, that in the latter days the wise may understand, but the wicked shall do wickedly, and none of the wicked shall understand, Dan. xii. 9, 10. The authority of Emperors, Kings, and Princes, is human. The authority of Councils, Synods, Bishops, and Presbyters, is human. The authority of the Prophets is divine, and comprehends the sum of religion, reckoning Moses and the Apostles among the Prophets; and if an Angel from Heaven preach any other gospel, than what they have delivered, let him be accursed. Their writings contain the covenant between God and his people, with instructions for keeping this covenant; instances of God's judgments upon them that break it: and predictions of things to come. While the people of God keep the covenant, they continue to be his people: when they break it they cease to be his people or church, and become the Synagogue of Satan, who say they are Jews and are not. And no power on earth is authorized to alter this covenant.

The predictions of things to come relate to the state of the Church in all ages: and amongst the old Prophets, Daniel is most distinct in order of time, and easiest to be understood: and therefore in those things which relate to the last times, he must be made the key to the rest.

Notes to Chap. I.

1 2 Chron. xxxiii. 5, 6, 7.

2 2 Chron. xxxiv.

3 2 Chron. xii. 2, 3, 4, 8, 9. & xv. 3, 5, 6.

4 2 Chron. xiv. 1, 6, 7, 8, 9, 12.

5 2 Chron. xv. 3, 12, 13, 16, 18.

6 2 Kings xvii. 27, 28, 32, 33.

7 2 Kings xvii. 34, 41.

8 Gen. xxxvi. 31.

The books of the Kings name other authors: the book of the Acts of Solomon, the book of the Chronicles of the Kings of Israel, and the book of the Chronicles of the Kings of Judah. The books of the Chronicles name the book of Samuel the Seer, the book of Nathan the Prophet, and the book of Gad the Seer for the Acts of David; the book of Nathan the Prophet, the Prophecy of Ahijah the Shilonite, and the visions of Iddo the Seer for the Acts of Solomon; the book of Shemajah the Prophet, and the book of Iddo the Seer on genealogies, for the Acts of Rehoboam and Abijah; the book of the Kings of Judah and Israel for the Acts of Asa, Joash, Amaziah, Jotham, Ahaz, Hezekiah, Manasseh, and Josiah; the book of Hanani the Seer for the Acts of Jehosaphat; and the visions of Isaiah for the Acts of Uzziah and Hezekiah. These books were therefore gathered from the historical writings of the ancient Seers and Prophets. Because the books of the Kings and Chronicles quote each other, they were written at the same time. And that time was after the return from the Babylonian captivity, since they carry the history of Judah, and the genealogies of the Kings of Judah and of the High Priests, down to that captivity. The book of Ezra was originally part of the book of the Chronicles, and was later split off from it. It begins with the last two verses of the books of Chronicles, and the first book of Esdras begins with the last two chapters of it. So Ezra was the compiler of the books of Kings and Chronicles, and he carried the history down to his own time. He was a ready Scribe in the Law of God. To help him with this work, Nehemias founded a library and gathered together the Acts of the Kings and the Prophets, and of David, and the Epistles of the Kings, about the holy gifts, 2 Maccab. ii. 13. By the Acts of David I mean here the two books of Samuel, or at least the second book. Out of the Acts of the Kings, written from time to time by the Prophets, he put together the books of the Kings of Judah and Israel, the Chronicles of the Kings of Judah, and the Chronicles of the Kings of Israel. In doing this he joined those Acts together in the proper order of time, copying the very words of the authors. We can see this because the books of the Kings and Chronicles often agree word for word for many sentences at a time. Where they agree in sense, they agree in words too.

In the same way, he gathered the Prophecies of Isaiah, written at different times, into one body. He did the same for those of Jeremiah and the rest of the Prophets, down to the days of the second Temple. The book of Jonah is the history of Jonah written by another hand. The book of Daniel is a collection of papers written at different times. The last six chapters hold Prophecies written at several times by Daniel himself; the first six are a collection of historical papers written by others. The fourth chapter is a decree of Nebuchadnezzar. The first chapter was written after Daniel's death, because the author says that Daniel continued to the first year of Cyrus; that is, to his first year over the Persians and Medes, and his third year over Babylon. For the same reason, the fifth and sixth chapters were also written after his death, since they end with these words: "So this Daniel prospered in the reign of Darius and in the reign of Cyrus the Persian." Still, the collector of the papers may have added these words, and I take that collector to be Ezra.

The Psalms written by Moses, David, and others also seem to have been gathered into one volume by Ezra. I count him the collector, because in this collection I find Psalms as late as the Babylonian captivity, but none later.

After these things Antiochus Epiphanes looted the Temple, ordered the Jews to abandon the Law on pain of death, and had the sacred books burned wherever they could be found. In these troubles the book of the Chronicles of the Kings of Israel was lost entirely. But after coming through this oppression, Judas Maccabæus gathered together all the writings that could be found, 2 Maccab. ii. 14, and in putting them in order, part of the Prophecies of Isaiah, or of some other Prophet, was added to the end of the Prophecies of Zechariah. The book of Ezra was split off from the book of Chronicles and set in two different orders: one order in the book of Ezra, which was received into the Canon, and another order in the first book of Esdras.

After the Roman captivity, the Jews wrote their traditions down in their Talmud in order to preserve them. To preserve their scriptures, they agreed on one Edition, added the vowel points to it, and counted the letters of every kind in every book. Because only this Edition was kept, the older variant readings are now lost, except for what can be found by means of the Septuagint Version. And the marginal notes, and other corruptions, that had crept into the text through the errors of the transcribers before this Edition was made, are now hardly to be corrected.

Before the Roman captivity, the Jews divided the sacred books into the Law, the Prophets, and the Hagiographa, or holy writings, and in their Synagogues they read only the Law and the Prophets. Christ and his Apostles made the religion rest on the Law and the Prophets, Matt. vii. 12. xxii. 4. Luke xvi. 16, 29, 31. xxiv. 44. Acts xxiv. 14. xxvi. 22. Rom. iii. 21. By the Hagiographa they meant the historical books called Joshua, Judges, Ruth, Samuel, Kings, Chronicles, Ezra, Nehemiah, and Esther, the book of Job, the Psalms, the books of Solomon, and the Lamentations. The Samaritans read only the Pentateuch. When Jehosaphat sent men to teach in the cities, they carried with them only the book of the Law, because the Prophecies we now have were not yet written. And after the return from the Babylonian captivity, Ezra read only the book of the Law to the people, from morning to noon on the first day of the seventh month, and then from day to day through the feast of Tabernacles. He had not yet gathered the writings of the Prophets into the volume we now have; he set up their reading only after the collection was made. Because the Law and the Prophets were read in the Synagogues, those books have been kept freer from corruption than the Hagiographa.

When the nation of Israel was young, God gave them a Law and made a covenant with them: he would be their God if they kept his commandments. Whenever they turned to other Gods, he sent Prophets to bring them back, and when they returned to him they sometimes renewed the covenant they had broken. He kept sending these Prophets until the days of Ezra. But once the Prophecies were read in the Synagogues, those Prophecies were thought to be enough. If the people would not listen to Moses and the old Prophets, they would listen to no new ones, not even if they should rise from the dead. At length, when a new truth was to be preached to the Gentiles, namely that Jesus was the Christ, God sent new Prophets and Teachers. But once their writings were also received and read in the Synagogues of the Christians, Prophecy ceased a second time. We have Moses, the Prophets, and Apostles, and the words of Christ himself, and if we will not listen to them, we will be more without excuse than the Jews. For the Prophets and Apostles foretold that, just as Israel often revolted and broke the covenant and renewed it after repenting, so there would be a falling away among the Christians soon after the days of the Apostles, and that in the latter days God would destroy the unrepentant rebels and make a new covenant with his people. And listening to the Prophets is a basic mark of the true Church. For God has ordered the Prophecies so that in the latter days the wise may understand, but the wicked will do wickedly, and none of the wicked will understand, Dan. xii. 9, 10. The authority of Emperors, Kings, and Princes is human. The authority of Councils, Synods, Bishops, and Presbyters is human. The authority of the Prophets is divine, and it takes in the whole of religion, counting Moses and the Apostles among the Prophets; and if an Angel from Heaven preaches any other gospel than what they have delivered, let him be accursed. Their writings hold the covenant between God and his people, with instructions for keeping this covenant, examples of God's judgments on those who break it, and predictions of things to come. While the people of God keep the covenant, they go on being his people. When they break it, they stop being his people or church and become the Synagogue of Satan, who say they are Jews and are not. And no power on earth has the right to change this covenant.

The predictions of things to come concern the state of the Church in every age. Among the old Prophets, Daniel is the clearest in order of time and the easiest to understand. So for the things that relate to the last times, he must be made the key to the rest.

Notes to Chap. I.

1 2 Chron. xxxiii. 5, 6, 7.

2 2 Chron. xxxiv.

3 2 Chron. xii. 2, 3, 4, 8, 9. & xv. 3, 5, 6.

4 2 Chron. xiv. 1, 6, 7, 8, 9, 12.

5 2 Chron. xv. 3, 12, 13, 16, 18.

6 2 Kings xvii. 27, 28, 32, 33.

7 2 Kings xvii. 34, 41.

8 Gen. xxxvi. 31.

Part I, Chapter 2

Of the Prophetic Language.

For understanding the Prophecies, we are, in the first place, to acquaint our-selves with the figurative language of the Prophets. This language is taken from the analogy between the world natural, and an empire or kingdom considered as a world politic.

Accordingly, the whole world natural consisting of heaven and earth, signifies the whole world politic, consisting of thrones and people, or so much of it as is considered in the Prophecy: and the things in that world signify the analogous things in this. For the heavens, and the things therein, signify thrones and dignities, and those who enjoy them; and the earth, with the things thereon, the inferior people; and the lowest parts of the earth, called Hades or Hell, the lowest or most miserable part of them. Whence ascending towards heaven, and descending to the earth, are put for rising and falling in power and honour: rising out of the earth, or waters, and falling into them, for the rising up to any dignity or dominion, out of the inferior state of the people, or falling down from the same into that inferior state; descending into the lower parts of the earth, for descending to a very low and unhappy estate; speaking with a faint voice out of the dust, for being in a weak and low condition; moving from one place to another, for translation from one office, dignity, or dominion, to another; great earthquakes, and the shaking of heaven and earth, for the shaking of kingdoms, so as to distract or overthrow them; the creating a new heaven and earth, and the passing away of an old one, or the beginning and end of the world, for the rise and ruin of the body politic signified thereby.

In the heavens, the Sun and Moon are, by interpreters of dreams, put for the persons of Kings and Queens; but in sacred Prophecy, which regards not single persons, the Sun is put for the whole species and race of Kings, in the kingdom or kingdoms of the world politic, shining with regal power and glory; the Moon for the body of the common people, considered as the King's wife; the Stars for subordinate Princes and great men, or for Bishops and Rulers of the people of God, when the Sun is Christ; light for the glory, truth, and knowledge, wherewith great and good men shine and illuminate others; darkness for obscurity of condition, and for error, blindness and ignorance; darkning, smiting, or setting of the Sun, Moon, and Stars, for the ceasing of a kingdom, or for the desolation thereof, proportional to the darkness; darkning the Sun, turning the Moon into blood, and falling of the Stars, for the same; new Moons, for the return of a dispersed people into a body politic or ecclesiastic.

Fire and meteors refer to both heaven and earth, and signify as follows; burning any thing with fire, is put for the consuming thereof by war; a conflagration of the earth, or turning a country into a lake of fire, for the consumption of a kingdom by war; the being in a furnace, for the being in slavery under another nation; the ascending up of the smoke of any burning thing for ever and ever, for the continuation of a conquered people under the misery of perpetual subjection and slavery; the scorching heat of the sun, for vexatious wars, persecutions and troubles inflicted by the King; riding on the clouds, for reigning over much people; covering the sun with a cloud, or with smoke, for oppression of the King by the armies of an enemy; tempestuous winds, or the motion of clouds, for wars; thunder, or the voice of a cloud, for the voice of a multitude; a storm of thunder, lightning, hail, and overflowing rain, for a tempest of war descending from the heavens and clouds politic, on the heads of their enemies; rain, if not immoderate, and dew, and living water, for the graces and doctrines of the Spirit; and the defect of rain, for spiritual barrenness.

In the earth, the dry land and congregated waters, as a sea, a river, a flood, are put for the people of several regions, nations, and dominions; embittering of waters, for great affliction of the people by war and persecution; turning things into blood, for the mystical death of bodies politic, that is, for their dissolution; the overflowing of a sea or river, for the invasion of the earth politic, by the people of the waters; drying up of waters, for the conquest of their regions by the earth; fountains of waters for cities, the permanent heads of rivers politic; mountains and islands, for the cities of the earth and sea politic, with the territories and dominions belonging to those cities; dens and rocks of mountains, for the temples of cities; the hiding of men in those dens and rocks, for the shutting up of Idols in their temples; houses and ships, for families, assemblies, and towns, in the earth and sea politic; and a navy of ships of war, for an army of that kingdom that is signified by the sea.

Animals also and vegetables are put for the people of several regions and conditions; and particularly, trees, herbs, and land animals, for the people of the earth politic: flags, reeds, and fishes, for those of the waters politic; birds and insects, for those of the politic heaven and earth; a forest for a kingdom; and a wilderness for a desolate and thin people.

If the world politic, considered in prophecy, consists of many kingdoms, they are represented by as many parts of the world natural; as the noblest by the celestial frame, and then the Moon and Clouds are put for the common people; the less noble, by the earth, sea, and rivers, and by the animals or vegetables, or buildings therein; and then the greater and more powerful animals and taller trees, are put for Kings, Princes, and Nobles. And because the whole kingdom is the body politic of the King, therefore the Sun, or a Tree, or a Beast, or Bird, or a Man, whereby the King is represented, is put in a large signification for the whole kingdom; and several animals, as a Lion, a Bear, a Leopard, a Goat, according to their qualities, are put for several kingdoms and bodies politic; and sacrificing of beasts, for slaughtering and conquering of kingdoms; and friendship between beasts, for peace between kingdoms. Yet sometimes vegetables and animals are, by certain epithets or circumstances, extended to other significations; as a Tree, when called the tree of life or of knowledge; and a Beast, when called the old serpent, or worshipped.

When a Beast or Man is put for a kingdom, his parts and qualities are put for the analogous parts and qualities of the kingdom; as the head of a Beast, for the great men who precede and govern; the tail for the inferior people, who follow and are governed; the heads, if more than one, for the number of capital parts, or dynasties, or dominions in the kingdom, whether collateral or successive, with respect to the civil government; the horns on any head, for the number of kingdoms in that head, with respect to military power; seeing for understanding, and the eyes for men of understanding and policy, and in matters of religion for [Greek: Episkopoi], Bishops; speaking, for making laws; the mouth, for a law-giver, whether civil or sacred; the loudness of the voice, for might and power; the faintness thereof, for weakness; eating and drinking, for acquiring what is signified by the things eaten and drank; the hairs of a beast, or man, and the feathers of a bird, for people; the wings, for the number of kingdoms represented by the beast; the arm of a man, for his power, or for any people wherein his strength and power consists; his feet, for the lowest of the people, or for the latter end of the kingdom; the feet, nails, and teeth of beasts of prey, for armies and squadrons of armies; the bones, for strength, and for fortified places; the flesh, for riches and possessions; and the days of their acting, for years; and when a tree is put for a kingdom, its branches, leaves and fruit, signify as do the wings, feathers, and food of a bird or beast.

When a man is taken in a mystical sense, his qualities are often signified by his actions, and by the circumstances of things about him. So a Ruler is signified by his riding on a beast; a Warrior and Conqueror, by his having a sword and bow; a potent man, by his gigantic stature; a Judge, by weights and measures; a sentence of absolution, or condemnation, by a white or a black stone; a new dignity, by a new name; moral or civil qualifications, by garments; honour and glory, by splendid apparel; royal dignity, by purple or scarlet, or by a crown; righteousness, by white and clean robes; wickedness, by spotted and filthy garments; affliction, mourning, and humiliation, by clothing in sackcloth; dishonour, shame, and want of good works, by nakedness; error and misery, by drinking a cup of his or her wine that causeth it; propagating any religion for gain, by exercising traffick and merchandize with that people whose religion it is; worshipping or serving the false Gods of any nation, by committing adultery with their princes, or by worshipping them; a Council of a kingdom, by its image; idolatry, by blasphemy; overthrow in war, by a wound of man or beast; a durable plague of war, by a sore and pain; the affliction or persecution which a people suffers in labouring to bring forth a new kingdom, by the pain of a woman in labour to bring forth a man-child; the dissolution of a body politic or ecclesiastic, by the death of a man or beast; and the revival of a dissolved dominion, by the resurrection of the dead.

Of the Prophetic Language.

To understand the Prophecies, we first have to learn the figurative language of the Prophets. This language comes from the way the natural world matches an empire or kingdom taken as a political world.

So the whole natural world of heaven and earth stands for the whole political world of thrones and people, or as much of it as the Prophecy covers, and the things in that world stand for the matching things in this one. For the heavens, and the things in them, stand for thrones and honors, and the people who hold them. The earth, and the things on it, stand for the lower people. The lowest parts of the earth, called Hades or Hell, stand for the lowest or most miserable of those people. So moving up toward heaven and down to the earth stands for rising and falling in power and honor. Rising out of the earth or the waters, and falling into them, stands for rising from the lower state of the people to any dignity or dominion, or falling from it back down into that lower state. Going down into the lower parts of the earth stands for coming to a very low and unhappy condition. Speaking with a weak voice out of the dust stands for being in a weak and low condition. Moving from one place to another stands for moving from one office, dignity, or dominion to another. Great earthquakes, and the shaking of heaven and earth, stand for the shaking of kingdoms until they fall into confusion or are overthrown. Making a new heaven and earth, and the passing away of an old one, or the beginning and end of the world, stands for the rise and ruin of the political body meant by it.

In the heavens, the Sun and Moon stand, for interpreters of dreams, for the persons of Kings and Queens. But in sacred Prophecy, which does not deal with single persons, the Sun stands for the whole class and line of Kings in the kingdom or kingdoms of the political world, shining with royal power and glory. The Moon stands for the body of the common people, seen as the King's wife. The Stars stand for subordinate Princes and great men, or for Bishops and Rulers of the people of God, when the Sun is Christ. Light stands for the glory, truth, and knowledge with which great and good men shine and light up others. Darkness stands for a low condition, and for error, blindness, and ignorance. The darkening, striking, or setting of the Sun, Moon, and Stars stands for the end of a kingdom, or for its destruction, in proportion to the darkness. Darkening the Sun, turning the Moon into blood, and the falling of the Stars stand for the same thing. New Moons stand for the return of a scattered people into a political or church body.

Fire and meteors apply to both heaven and earth, and they mean the following. Burning anything with fire stands for consuming it by war. A burning of the earth, or turning a country into a lake of fire, stands for the ruin of a kingdom by war. Being in a furnace stands for living in slavery under another nation. The smoke of any burning thing rising forever and ever stands for a conquered people continuing under the misery of endless subjection and slavery. The scorching heat of the sun stands for annoying wars, persecutions, and troubles imposed by the King. Riding on the clouds stands for ruling over many people. Covering the sun with a cloud, or with smoke, stands for the King being pressed down by the armies of an enemy. Stormy winds, or the movement of clouds, stand for wars. Thunder, or the voice of a cloud, stands for the voice of a multitude. A storm of thunder, lightning, hail, and flooding rain stands for a storm of war coming down from the political heavens and clouds on the heads of their enemies. Rain, when it is not excessive, and dew, and living water, stand for the graces and doctrines of the Spirit. The lack of rain stands for spiritual barrenness.

In the earth, the dry land and the gathered waters, such as a sea, a river, or a flood, stand for the people of different regions, nations, and dominions. Making the waters bitter stands for great suffering of the people through war and persecution. Turning things into blood stands for the mystical death of political bodies, that is, for their breakup. The overflowing of a sea or river stands for the political earth being invaded by the people of the waters. The drying up of waters stands for their regions being conquered by the earth. Fountains of waters stand for cities, the lasting heads of political rivers. Mountains and islands stand for the cities of the political earth and sea, along with the territories and dominions that belong to those cities. Dens and rocks of mountains stand for the temples of cities. The hiding of men in those dens and rocks stands for Idols being shut up in their temples. Houses and ships stand for families, assemblies, and towns in the political earth and sea. A navy of warships stands for the army of the kingdom meant by the sea.

Animals and plants also stand for the people of different regions and conditions. In particular, trees, herbs, and land animals stand for the people of the political earth; flags, reeds, and fishes for those of the political waters; birds and insects for those of the political heaven and earth; a forest for a kingdom; and a wilderness for a people who are desolate and few.

If the political world, seen in prophecy, has many kingdoms, they are shown by as many parts of the natural world: the nobfor fear that by the frame of the heavens, and then the Moon and Clouds stand for the common people; the less noble by the earth, sea, and rivers, and by the animals or plants or buildings in them, and then the larger and stronger animals and the taller trees stand for Kings, Princes, and Nobles. Because the whole kingdom is the political body of the King, the Sun, or a Tree, or a Beast, or a Bird, or a Man by which the King is represented is used in a wide sense for the whole kingdom. And several animals, such as a Lion, a Bear, a Leopard, and a Goat, stand, according to their qualities, for different kingdoms and political bodies. Sacrificing beasts stands for slaughtering and conquering kingdoms, and friendship between beasts stands for peace between kingdoms. Still, plants and animals are sometimes stretched to other meanings by certain epithets or circumstances, as a Tree when it is called the tree of life or of knowledge, and a Beast when it is called the old serpent, or is worshiped.

When a Beast or Man stands for a kingdom, its parts and qualities stand for the matching parts and qualities of the kingdom. The head of a Beast stands for the great men who lead and govern. The tail stands for the lower people, who follow and are governed. The heads, if there is more than one, stand for the number of leading parts, or dynasties, or dominions in the kingdom, whether side by side or in succession, in relation to the civil government. The horns on any head stand for the number of kingdoms in that head, in relation to military power. Seeing stands for understanding, and the eyes stand for men of understanding and statecraft, and in matters of religion for [Greek: Episkopoi], Bishops. Speaking stands for making laws. The mouth stands for a lawgiver, whether civil or sacred. The loudness of the voice stands for might and power, and the faintness of the voice for weakness. Eating and drinking stands for acquiring what the things eaten and drunk stand for. The hairs of a beast or man, and the feathers of a bird, stand for people. The wings stand for the number of kingdoms represented by the beast. The arm of a man stands for his power, or for any people in whom his strength and power lies. His feet stand for the lowest of the people, or for the end of the kingdom. The feet, nails, and teeth of beasts of prey stand for armies and squadrons of armies. The bones stand for strength and for fortified places. The flesh stands for riches and possessions. And their days of acting stand for years. When a tree stands for a kingdom, its branches, leaves, and fruit mean the same as the wings, feathers, and food of a bird or beast.

When a man is taken in a mystical sense, his qualities are often shown by his actions, and by the circumstances of the things around him. So a Ruler is shown by his riding on a beast. A Warrior and Conqueror by his having a sword and bow. A powerful man by his giant size. A Judge by weights and measures. A sentence of release or condemnation by a white or a black stone. A new dignity by a new name. Moral or civil qualities by garments. Honor and glory by splendid clothing. Royal dignity by purple or scarlet, or by a crown. Righteousness by white and clean robes. Wickedness by spotted and filthy garments. Affliction, mourning, and humiliation by clothing in sackcloth. Dishonor, shame, and the lack of good works by nakedness. Error and misery by drinking a cup of his or her wine that causes it. Spreading any religion for gain by doing trade and business with the people whose religion it is. Worshiping or serving the false Gods of any nation by committing adultery with their princes, or by worshiping them. A Council of a kingdom by its image. Idolatry by blasphemy. An overthrow in war by a wound of man or beast. A long-lasting plague of war by a sore and pain. The suffering or persecution that a people endures while working to bring forth a new kingdom by the pain of a woman in labor to bring forth a man-child. The breakup of a political or church body by the death of a man or beast. And the revival of a broken-down dominion by the resurrection of the dead.

Part I, Chapter 3

Of the vision of the Image composed of four Metals.

The Prophecies of Daniel are all of them related to one another, as if they were but several parts of one general Prophecy, given at several times. The first is the easiest to be understood, and every following Prophecy adds something new to the former. The first was given in a dream to Nebuchadnezzar, King of Babylon, in the second year of his reign; but the King forgetting his dream, it was given again to Daniel in a dream, and by him revealed to the King. And thereby, Daniel presently became famous for wisdom, and revealing of secrets: insomuch that Ezekiel his contemporary, in the nineteenth year of Nebuchadnezzar, spake thus of him to the King of Tyre: Behold, saith he, thou art wiser than Daniel, there is no secret that they can hide from thee, Ezek. xxviii. 3. And the same Ezekiel, in another place, joins Daniel with Noah and Job, as most high in the favour of God, Ezek. xiv. 14, 16, 18, 20. And in the last year of Belshazzar, the Queen-mother said of him to the King: Behold there is a man in thy kingdom, in whom is the spirit of the holy gods; and in the days of thy father, light and understanding and wisdom, like the wisdom of the gods, was found in him; whom the king Nebuchadnezzar thy father, the king, I say, thy father made master of the magicians, astrologers, Chaldeans and soothsayers: forasmuch as an excellent spirit, and knowledge, and understanding, interpreting of dreams, and shewing of hard sentences, and dissolving of doubts, were found in the same Daniel, whom the king named Belteshazzar, Dan. v. 11, 12. Daniel was in the greatest credit amongst the Jews, till the reign of the Roman Emperor Hadrian: and to reject his Prophecies, is to reject the Christian religion. For this religion is founded upon his Prophecy concerning the Messiah.

Now in this vision of the Image composed of four Metals, the foundation of all Daniel's Prophecies is laid. It represents a body of four great nations, which should reign over the earth successively, viz. the people of Babylonia, the Persians, the Greeks, and the Romans. And by a stone cut out without hands, which fell upon the feet of the Image, and brake all the four Metals to pieces, and became a great mountain, and filled the whole earth; it further represents that a new kingdom should arise, after the four, and conquer all those nations, and grow very great, and last to the end of all ages.

The head of the Image was of gold, and signifies the nations of Babylonia, who reigned first, as Daniel himself interprets. Thou art this head of gold, saith he to Nebuchadnezzar. These nations reigned till Cyrus conquered Babylon, and within a few months after that conquest revolted to the Persians, and set them up above the Medes. The breast and arms of the Image were of silver, and represent the Persians who reigned next. The belly and thighs of the Image were of brass, and represent the Greeks, who, under the dominion of Alexander the great, conquered the Persians, and reigned next after them. The legs were of iron, and represent the Romans who reigned next after the Greeks, and began to conquer them in the eighth year of Antiochus Epiphanes. For in that year they conquered Perseus King of Macedon, the fundamental kingdom of the Greeks; and from thence forward grew into a mighty empire, and reigned with great power till the days of Theodosius the great. Then by the incursion of many northern nations, they brake into many smaller kingdoms, which are represented by the feet and toes of the Image, composed part of iron, and part of clay. For then, saith Daniel,1 the kingdom shall be divided, and there shall be in it of the strength of iron, but they shall not cleave one to another.

And in the days of these Kings, saith Daniel, shall the God of heaven set up a kingdom which shall never be destroyed: and the kingdom shall not be left to other people; but it shall break in pieces, and consume all these kingdoms, and it shall stand for ever. Forasmuch as thou sawest that the stone was cut out of the mountains without hands, and that it brake in pieces the iron, the brass, the clay, the silver and the gold.

Notes to Chap. III.

1 Chap. ii. 41, &c.

Of the vision of the Image composed of four Metals.

All the prophecies of Daniel relate to one another, as if they were only several parts of one general prophecy, given at different times. The first is the easiest to understand, and every prophecy after it adds something new to the one before. The first was given in a dream to Nebuchadnezzar, King of Babylon, in the second year of his reign; but the King forgot his dream, so it was given to Daniel in a dream as well, and Daniel revealed it to the King. Because of this Daniel became famous at once for his wisdom and for revealing secrets; so much so that Ezekiel, who lived at the same time, spoke of him in the nineteenth year of Nebuchadnezzar to the King of Tyre in these words: "Look," he says, "you are wiser than Daniel; there is no secret that they can hide from you," Ezek. xxviii. 3. And the same Ezekiel, in another place, puts Daniel together with Noah and Job as the ones highest in the favor of God, Ezek. xiv. 14, 16, 18, 20. In the last year of Belshazzar, the Queen-mother said this of him to the King: "Look, there is a man in your kingdom in whom is the spirit of the holy gods. In the days of your father, light and understanding and wisdom, like the wisdom of the gods, were found in him. King Nebuchadnezzar your father—the king, I say, your father—made him master of the magicians, astrologers, Chaldeans and soothsayers, because an excellent spirit, knowledge, understanding, the interpreting of dreams, the showing of hard questions, and the solving of doubts were found in the same Daniel, whom the king named Belteshazzar," Dan. v. 11, 12. Daniel was held in the highest credit among the Jews until the reign of the Roman Emperor Hadrian, and to reject his prophecies is to reject the Christian religion; for this religion is founded on his prophecy concerning the Messiah.

Now this vision of the Image composed of four Metals lays the foundation of all Daniel's prophecies. It represents a body of four great nations that would rule the earth one after another, namely the people of Babylonia, the Persians, the Greeks, and the Romans. The stone cut out without hands, which fell on the feet of the Image, broke all four Metals to pieces, became a great mountain, and filled the whole earth; by this the vision further represents that a new kingdom would arise after the four, conquer all those nations, grow very great, and last to the end of all ages.

The head of the Image was of gold, and it stands for the nations of Babylonia, who ruled first, as Daniel himself interprets. "You are this head of gold," he says to Nebuchadnezzar. These nations ruled until Cyrus conquered Babylon, and within a few months after that conquest they turned to the Persians and set them above the Medes. The breast and arms of the Image were of silver, and they stand for the Persians, who ruled next. The belly and thighs of the Image were of brass, and they stand for the Greeks, who under the dominion of Alexander the great conquered the Persians and ruled after them. The legs were of iron, and they stand for the Romans, who ruled next after the Greeks and began to conquer them in the eighth year of Antiochus Epiphanes. In that year they conquered Perseus King of Macedon, the fundamental kingdom of the Greeks; from then on they grew into a mighty empire and ruled with great power until the days of Theodosius the great. Then, by the invasion of many northern nations, they broke into many smaller kingdoms, which are represented by the feet and toes of the Image, made part of iron and part of clay. For then, Daniel says,1 "the kingdom will be divided, and there will be in it the strength of iron, but they will not stick to one another."

"And in the days of these Kings," Daniel says, "the God of heaven will set up a kingdom which will never be destroyed, and the kingdom will not be left to another people; but it will break in pieces and consume all these kingdoms, and it will stand forever. For as you saw that the stone was cut out of the mountains without hands, and that it broke in pieces the iron, the brass, the clay, the silver and the gold."

Notes to Chap. III.

1 Chap. ii. 41, &c.

Part I, Chapter 4

Of the vision of the four Beasts.

In the next vision, which is of the four Beasts, the Prophecy of the four Empires is repeated, with several new additions; such as are the two wings of the Lion, the three ribs in the mouth of the Bear, the four wings and four heads of the Leopard, the eleven horns of the fourth Beast, and the son of man coming in the clouds of Heaven, to the Antient of Days sitting in judgment.

The first Beast was like a lion, and had eagle's wings, to denote the kingdoms of Babylonia and Media, which overthrew the Assyrian Empire, and divided it between them, and thereby became considerable, and grew into great Empires. In the former Prophecy, the Empire of Babylonia was represented by the head of gold; in this both Empires are represented together by the two wings of the lion. And I beheld, saith1 Daniel, till the wings thereof were pluckt, and it was lifted up from the earth, and made to stand upon the feet as a man, and a man's heart was given to it; that is, till it was humbled and subdued, and made to know its human state.

The second Beast was like a bear, and represents the Empire which reigned next after the Babylonians, that is, the Empire of the Persians. Thy kingdom is divided, or broken, saith Daniel to the last King of Babylon, and given to the Medes and Persians, Dan. v. 28. This Beast raised itself up on one side; the Persians being under the Medes at the fall of Babylon, but presently rising up above them.2 And it had three ribs in the mouth of it, between the teeth of it, to signify the kingdoms of Sardes, Babylon, and Egypt, which were conquered by it, but did not belong to its proper body. And it devoured much flesh, the riches of those three kingdoms.

The third Beast was the kingdom which succeeded the Persian; and this was the empire of the Greeks, Dan. viii. 6, 7, 20, 21. It was like a Leopard, to signify its fierceness; and had four heads and four wings, to signify that it should become divided into four kingdoms, Dan. viii 22. for it continued in a monarchical form during the reign of Alexander the great, and his brother Aridæus, and young sons Alexander and Hercules; and then brake into four kingdoms, by the governors of provinces putting crowns on their own heads, and by mutual consent reigning over their provinces. Cassander reigned over Macedon, Greece, and Epirus; Lysimachus over Thrace and Bithynia; Ptolemy over Egypt, Lybia, Arabia, Coelosyria, and Palestine; and Seleucus over Syria.

The fourth Beast was the empire which succeeded that of the Greeks, and this was the Roman. This beast was exceeding dreadful and terrible, and had great iron teeth, and devoured and brake in pieces, and stamped the residue with its feet; and such was the Roman empire. It was larger, stronger, and more formidable and lasting than any of the former. It conquered the kingdom of Macedon, with Illyricum and Epirus, in the eighth year of Antiochus Epiphanes, Anno Nabonass.. 580; and inherited that of Pergamus, Anno Nabonass. 615; and conquered that of Syria, Anno Nabonass. 679, and that of Egypt, Anno Nabonass. 718. And by these and other conquests it became greater and more terrible than any of the three former Beasts. This Empire continued in its greatness till the reign of Theodosius the great; and then brake into ten kingdoms, represented by the ten horns of this Beast; and continued in a broken form, till the Antient of days sat in a throne like fiery flame, and the judgment was set, and the books were opened, and the Beast was slain and his body destroyed, and given to the burning flames; and one like the son of man came with the clouds of heaven, and came to the Antient of days3, and received dominion over all nations, and judgment was given to the saints of the most high, and the time came that they possessed the kingdom.

I beheld, saith4 Daniel, till the Beast was slain, and his body destroyed, and given to the burning flames. As concerning the rest of the Beasts, they had their dominion taken away: yet their lives were prolonged for a season and a time. And therefore all the four Beasts are still alive, tho the dominion of the three first be taken away. The nations of Chaldea and Assyria are still the first Beast. Those of Media and Persia are still the second Beast. Those of Macedon, Greece and Thrace, Asia minor, Syria and Egypt, are still the third. And those of Europe, on this side Greece, are still the fourth. Seeing therefore the body of the third Beast is confined to the nations on this side the river Euphrates, and the body of the fourth Beast is confined to the nations on this side Greece; we are to look for all the four heads of the third Beast, among the nations on this side of the river Euphrates; and for all the eleven horns of the fourth Beast, among the nations on this side of Greece. And therefore, at the breaking of the Greek empire into four kingdoms of the Greeks, we include no part of the Chaldeans, Medes and Persians in those kingdoms, because they belonged to the bodies of the two first Beasts. Nor do we reckon the Greek empire seated at Constantinople, among the horns of the fourth Beast, because it belonged to the body of the third.

Notes to Chap. IV.

1 Chap. vii. 4.

2 Chap. vii. 5.

3 Chap. vii. 13.

4 Chap. vii. 11, 12.

Of the vision of the four Beasts.

In the next vision, that of the four Beasts, the prophecy of the four Empires is repeated with several new additions: the two wings of the Lion, the three ribs in the mouth of the Bear, the four wings and four heads of the Leopard, the eleven horns of the fourth Beast, and the son of man coming in the clouds of Heaven to the Ancient of Days sitting in judgment.

The first Beast was like a lion and had eagle's wings, to point to the kingdoms of Babylonia and Media, which overthrew the Assyrian Empire, divided it between them, and by that became powerful and grew into great Empires. In the earlier prophecy the Empire of Babylonia was represented by the head of gold; here both Empires are represented together by the two wings of the lion. "And I looked," says1 Daniel, "until its wings were plucked, and it was lifted up from the earth and made to stand on its feet like a man, and a man's heart was given to it;" that is, until it was humbled and subdued, and made to know its human state.

The second Beast was like a bear, and it represents the Empire that ruled next after the Babylonians, that is, the Empire of the Persians. "Your kingdom is divided, or broken," Daniel says to the last King of Babylon, "and given to the Medes and Persians," Dan. v. 28. This Beast raised itself up on one side: the Persians were under the Medes at the fall of Babylon, but soon rose above them.2 It had three ribs in its mouth, between its teeth, to signify the kingdoms of Sardes, Babylon, and Egypt, which it conquered but which did not belong to its proper body. And it devoured much flesh, the riches of those three kingdoms.

The third Beast was the kingdom that succeeded the Persian; this was the empire of the Greeks, Dan. viii. 6, 7, 20, 21. It was like a Leopard, to signify its fierceness, and it had four heads and four wings, to signify that it would become divided into four kingdoms, Dan. viii 22. It stayed under one monarchy during the reign of Alexander the great, his brother Aridæus, and the young sons Alexander and Hercules; then it broke into four kingdoms, when the governors of provinces put crowns on their own heads and, by mutual consent, ruled over their provinces. Cassander ruled over Macedon, Greece, and Epirus; Lysimachus over Thrace and Bithynia; Ptolemy over Egypt, Lybia, Arabia, Coelosyria, and Pafor fear thatine; and Seleucus over Syria.

The fourth Beast was the empire that succeeded that of the Greeks, and this was the Roman. This Beast was extremely dreadful and terrible; it had great iron teeth, and devoured and broke in pieces, and stamped what was left with its feet; and such was the Roman empire. It was larger, stronger, more formidable, and longer lasting than any of the former. It conquered the kingdom of Macedon, with Illyricum and Epirus, in the eighth year of Antiochus Epiphanes, Anno Nabonass. 580; and it inherited that of Pergamus, Anno Nabonass. 615; and it conquered that of Syria, Anno Nabonass. 679, and that of Egypt, Anno Nabonass. 718. By these and other conquests it became greater and more terrible than any of the three former Beasts. This Empire continued in its greatness until the reign of Theodosius the great, and then broke into ten kingdoms, represented by the ten horns of this Beast; and it continued in a broken form, until the Ancient of days sat on a throne like fiery flame, and the judgment was set, and the books were opened, and the Beast was killed and his body destroyed and given to the burning flames; and one like the son of man came with the clouds of heaven, and came to the Ancient of days3, and received dominion over all nations, and judgment was given to the saints of the most high, and the time came that they possessed the kingdom.

"And I looked," says4 Daniel, "until the Beast was killed, and its body destroyed, and given to the burning flames. As for the rest of the Beasts, they had their dominion taken away; yet their lives were prolonged for a season and a time." And so all four Beasts are still alive, even though the dominion of the first three has been taken away. The nations of Chaldea and Assyria are still the first Beast. Those of Media and Persia are still the second Beast. Those of Macedon, Greece and Thrace, Asia Minor, Syria and Egypt are still the third. And those of Europe, on this side of Greece, are still the fourth. Since the body of the third Beast is confined to the nations on this side of the river Euphrates, and the body of the fourth Beast is confined to the nations on this side of Greece, we are to look for all four heads of the third Beast among the nations on this side of the river Euphrates, and for all eleven horns of the fourth Beast among the nations on this side of Greece. And so, when the Greek empire broke into four kingdoms of the Greeks, we include no part of the Chaldeans, Medes and Persians in those kingdoms, because they belonged to the bodies of the first two Beasts. Nor do we count the Greek empire seated at Constantinople among the horns of the fourth Beast, because it belonged to the body of the third.

Notes to Chap. IV.

1 Chap. vii. 4.

2 Chap. vii. 5.

3 Chap. vii. 13.

4 Chap. vii. 11, 12.

Part I, Chapter 5

Of the Kingdoms represented by the feet of the Image composed of iron and clay.

Dacia was a large country bounded on the south by the Danube, on the east by the Euxine sea, on the north by the river Neister and the mountain Crapac, and on the west by the river Tibesis, or Teys, which runs southward into the Danube a little above Belgrade. It comprehended the countries now called Transylvania, Moldavia, and Wallachia, and the eastern part of the upper Hungary. Its antient inhabitants were called Getæ by the Greeks, Daci by the Latins, and Goths by themselves. Alexander the great attacked them, and Trajan conquered them, and reduced their country into a Province of the Roman Empire: and thereby the propagation of the Gospel among them was much promoted. They were composed of several Gothic nations, called Ostrogoths, Visigoths, Vandals, Gepides, Lombards, Burgundians, Alans, &c. who all agreed in their manners, and spake the same language, as Procopius represents. While they lived under the Romans, the Goths or Ostrogoths were seated in the eastern parts of Dacia, the Vandals in the western part upon the river Teys, where the rivers Maresh and Keresh run into it. The Visigoths were between them. The Gepides, according to Jornandes, were upon the Vistula. The Burgundians, a Vandalic nation, were between the Vistula and the southern fountain of the Boristhenes, at some distance from the mountain Crapac northwards, where Ptolemy places them, by the names of Phrugundiones and Burgiones.1 The Alans, another Gothic nation, were between the northern fountain of the Boristhenes and the mouth of the river Tanais, where Ptolemy placeth the mountain Alanus, and western side of the Palus Mæotis.

These nations continued under the dominion of the Romans till the second year of the Emperor Philip, and then for want of their military pay began to revolt; the Ostrogoths setting up a kingdom, which, under their Kings Ostrogotha, Cniva, Araric, Geperic, and Hermanaric, increased till the year of Christ 376; and then by an incursion of the Huns from beyond the Tanais, and the death of Hermanaric, brake into several smaller kingdoms. Hunnimund, the son of Hermanaric, became King over the Ostrogoths; Fridigern over the Visigoths; Winithar, or Vinithar, over a part of the Goths called Gruthungi by Ammian, Gothunni by Claudian, and Sarmatæ and Scythians by others: Athanaric reign'd over another part of the Goths in Dacia, called Thervingi; Box over the Antes in Sarmatia; and the Gepides had also their King. The Vandals fled over the Danube from Geberic in the latter end of the reign of Constantine the great, and had seats granted them in Pannonia by that Emperor, where they lived quietly forty years, viz. till the year 377, when several Gothic nations flying from the Hunns came over the Danube, and had seats granted them in Mæsia and Thrace by the Greek Emperor Valens. But the next year they revolted, called in some Goths, Alans and Hunns, from beyond the Danube, and routed the Roman army, slew the Emperor Valens, and spread themselves into Greece and Pannonia as far as the Alps. In the years 379 and 380 they were checkt by the arms of the Emperors Gratian and Theodosius, and made a submissive peace; the Visigoths and Thervingi returned to their seats in Mæsia and Thrace, the Hunns retired over the Danube, and the Alans and Gruthingi obtained seats in Pannonia.

About the year 373, or 374, the Burgundians rose from their seats upon the Vistula, with an army of eighty thousand men to invade Gallia; and being opposed, seated themselves upon the northern side of the Rhine over against Mentz. In the year 358, a body of the Salian Franks, with their King, coming from the river Sala, were received into the Empire by the Emperor Julian, and seated in Gallia between Brabant and the Rhine: and their King Mellobaudes was made Comes domesticorum, by the Emperor Gratian. Richomer, another noble Salian Frank, was made Comes domesticorum, and Magister utriusque Militiæ, by Theodosius; and A.C. 384, was Consul with Clearchus. He was a great favourite of Theodosius, and accompanied him in his wars against Eugenius, but died in the expedition, and left a son called Theudomir, who afterwards became King of the Salian Franks in Brabant. In the time of this war some Franks from beyond the Rhine invaded Gallia under the conduct of Genobald, Marcomir and Suno, but were repulsed by Stilico; and Marcomir being slain, was succeeded in Germany by his son Pharamond.

While these nations remained quiet within the Empire, subject to the Romans, many others continued so beyond the Danube till the death of the Emperor Theodosius, and then rose up in arms. For Paulus Diaconus in his Historia Miscell. lib. xiv. speaking of the times next after the death of this Emperor, tells us: Eodem tempore erant Gothi & aliæ gentes maximæ trans Danubium habitantes: ex quibus rationabiliores quatuor sunt, Gothi scilicet, Huisogothi, Gepides & Vandali; & nomen tantum & nihil aliud mutantes. Isti sub Arcadia & Honorio Danubium transeuntes, locati sunt in terra Romanorum: & Gepides quidem, ex quibus postea divisi sunt Longobardi & Avares, villas, quæ sunt circa Singidonum & Sirmium, habitavere: and Procopius in the beginning of his Historia Vandalica writes to the same purpose. Hitherto the Western Empire continued entire, but now brake into many kingdoms.

Theodosius died A.C. 395; and then the Visigoths, under the conduct of Alaric the successor of Fridigern, rose from their seats in Thrace and wasted Macedon, Thessaly, Achaia, Peloponnesus, and Epirus, with fire and sword for five years together; when turning westward, they invaded Dalmatia, Illyricum and Pannonia; and from thence went into Italy A.C. 402; and the next year were so beaten at Pollentia and Verona, by Stilico the commander of the forces of the Western Empire, that Claudian calls the remainder of the forces of Alaric, tanta ex gente reliquias breves, and Prudentius, Gentem deletam. Thereupon Alaric made peace with the Emperor, being so far humbled, that Orosius saith, he did, pro pace optima & quibuscunque sedibus suppliciter & simpliciter orare. This peace was ratified by mutual hostages; Ætius was sent hostage to Alaric; and Alaric continued a free Prince in the seats now granted to him.

When Alaric took up arms, the nations beyond the Danube began to be in motion; and the next winter, between A.C. 395 and 396, a great body of Hunns, Alans, Ostrogoths, Gepides, and other northern nations, came over the frozen Danube, being invited by Rufinus: when their brethren, who had obtained seats within the Empire, took up arms also. Jerome calls this great multitude, Hunns, Alans, Vandals, Goths, Sarmatians, Quades, and Marcomans; and saith, that they invaded all places between Constantinople and the Julian Alps, wasting Scythia, Thrace, Macedon, Dardania, Dacia, Thessaly, Achaia, Epirus, Dalmatia, and all Pannonia. The Suevians also invaded Rhætia: for when Alaric ravaged Pannonia, the Romans were defending Rhætia; which gave Alaric an opportunity of invading Italy, as Claudian thus mentions.

Non nisi perfidiâ nacti penetrabile tempus, Irrupere Getæ, nostras dum Rhætia vires Occupat, atque alio desudant Marte cohortes.

And when Alaric went from those parts into Italy, some other barbarous nations invaded Noricum and Vindelicia, as the same Poet Claudian thus writes:

----Jam foedera gentes Exuerant, Latiique auditâ clade feroces Vendelicos saltus & Norica rura tenebant.

This was in the years 402 and 403. And among these nations I reckon the Suevians, Quades, and Marcomans; for they were all in arms at this time. The Quades and Marcomans were Suevian nations; and they and the Suevians came originally from Bohemia, and the river Suevus or Sprake in Lusatia; and were now united under one common King called Ermeric, who soon after led them into Gallia. The Vandals and Alans might also about this time extend themselves into Noricum. Uldin also with a great body of Hunns passed the Danube about the time of Chrysostom's banishment, that is, A.C. 404, and wasted Thrace and Mæsia. Radagaisus, King of the Gruthunni and succesor of Winithar, inviting over more barbarians from beyond the Danube, invaded Italy with an army of above two hundred thousand Goths; and within a year or two, A.C. 405 or 406., was overcome by Stilico, and perished with his army. In this war Stilico was assisted with a great body of Hunns and Ostrogoths, under the conduct of Uldin and Sarus, who were hired by the Emperor Honorius. In all this confusion it was necessary for the Lombards in Pannonia to arm themselves in their own defence, and assert their liberty, the Romans being no longer able to protect them.

And now Stilico purposing to make himself Emperor, procured a military prefecture for Alaric, and sent him into the East in the service of Honorius the Western Emperor, committing some Roman troops to his conduct to strengthen his army of Goths, and promising to follow soon after with his own army. His pretence was to recover some regions of Illyricum, which the Eastern Emperor was accused to detain injuriously from the Western; but his secret design was to make himself Emperor, by the assistance of the Vandals and their allies: for he himself was a Vandal. For facilitating this design, he invited a great body of the barbarous nations to invade the Western Empire, while he and Alaric invaded the Eastern. And these nations under their several Kings, the Vandals under Godegisilus, the Alans in two bodies, the one under Goar, the other under Resplendial, and the Suevians, Quades, and Marcomans, under Ermeric, marched thro' Rhætia to the side of the Rhine, leaving their seats in Pannonia to the Hunns and Ostrogoths, and joined the Burgundians under Gundicar, and ruffled the Franks in their further march. On the last of December A.C. 406, they passed the Rhine at Ments, and spread themselves into Germania prima and the adjacent regions; and amongst other actions the Vandals took Triers. Then they advanced into Belgium, and began to waste that country. Whereupon the Salian Franks in Brabant took up arms, and under the conduct of Theudomir, the son of Ricimer, or Richomer, abovementioned, made so stout a resistance, that they slew almost twenty thousand of the Vandals, with their King Godegesilus, in battel; the rest escaping only by a party of Resplendial's Alans which came timely to their assistance.

Then the British soldiers, alarm'd by the rumour of these things, revolted, and set up Tyrants there; first Marcus, whom they slew presently; then Gratian, whom they slew within four months; and lastly Constantine, under whom they invaded Gallia A.C. 408, being favoured by Goar and Gundicar. And Constantine having possessed a good part of Gallia, created his son Constans Cæsar, and sent him into Spain to order his affairs there, A.C. 409.

In the mean time Resplendial, seeing the aforesaid disaster of the Vandals, and that Goar was gone over to the Romans, led his army from the Rhine; and, together with the Suevians and residue of the Vandals, went towards Spain; the Franks in the mean time prosecuting their victory so far as to retake Triers, which after they had plundered they left to the Romans. The Barbarians were at first stopt by the Pyrenean mountains, which made them spread themselves into Aquitain: but the next year they had the passage betrayed by some soldiers of Constans; and entring Spain 4 Kal. Octob. A.C. 409, they conquered every one what he could; and at length, A.C. 411, divided their conquests by lot; the Vandals obtained Boetica, and part of Gallæcia; the Suevians the rest of Gallæcia; and the Alans Lusitania and the Carthaginian Province: the Emperor for the sake of peace confirming them in those seats by grant A.C. 413.

The Roman Franks abovementioned, having made Theudomir their King, began strait after their conquest of the Vandals to invade their neighbours also. The first they set upon were the Gauls of Brabant2: but meeting with notable resistance, they desired their alliance: and so those Gauls fell off from the Romans, and made an intimate league with the Franks to be as one people, marrying with one another, and conforming to one another's manners, till they became one without distinction. Thus by the access of these Gauls, and of the foreign Franks also, who afterwards came over the Rhine, the Salian kingdom soon grew very great and powerful.

Stilico's expedition against the Greek Emperor was stopt by the order of Honorius; and then Alaric came out of Epirus into Noricum, and requested a sum of money for his service. The Senate were inclined to deny him, but by Stilico's mediation granted it. But after some time Stilico being accused of a traiterous conspiracy with Alaric, and slain 10 Kal. Sept. A.C. 408; Alaric was thereby disappointed of his money, and reputed an enemy to the Empire; he then broke strait into Italy with the army he brought out of Epirus, and sent to his brother Adolphus to follow him with what forces he had in Pannonia, which were not great, but yet not to be despised. Thereupon Honorius fearing to be shut up in Rome, retired to Ravenna in October A.C. 408. And from that time Ravenna continued to be the seat of the Western Emperors. In those days the Hunns also invaded Pannonia; and seizing the deserted seats of the Vandals, Alans, and Goths, founded a new kingdom there. Alaric advancing to Rome besieged it, and 9 Kal. Sept. A.C. 410 took it: and afterwards attempting to pass into Africa, was shipwrackt. After which Honorius made peace with him, and got up an army to send against the Tyrant Constantine.

At the same time Gerontius, one of Constantine's captains, revolted from him, and set up Maximus Emperor in Spain. Whereupon Constantine sent Edobec, another of his captains, to draw to his assistance, the Barbarians under Goar and Gundicar in Gallia, and supplies of Franks and Alemans from beyond the Rhine; and committed the custody of Vienne in Gallia Narbonensis to his son Constans. Gerontius advancing, first slew Constans at Vienne, and then began to besiege Constantine at Arles. But Honorius at the same time sending Constantius with an army on the same errand, Gerontius fled, and Constantius continued the siege, strengthned by the access of the greatest part of the soldiers of Gerontius. After four months siege, Edobec having procured succours, the Barbarian Kings at Ments, Goar and Gundicar, constitute Jovinus Emperor, and together with him set forward to relieve Arles. At their approach Constantius retired. They pursued, and he beat them by surprize; but not prosecuting his victory, the Barbarians soon recovered themselves; yet not so as to hinder the fall of the tyrants Constantine, Jovinus and Maximus. Britain could not be recovered to the Empire, but remained ever after a distinct kingdom.

The next year, A.C. 412, the Visigoths being beaten in Italy, had Aquitain granted them to retire into: and they invaded it with much violence, causing the Alans and Burgundians to retreat, who were then depopulating of it. At the same time the Burgundians were brought to peace; and the Emperor granted them for inheritance a region upon the Rhine which they had invaded: and the same, I presume, he did with the Alans. But the Franks not long after retaking and burning Triers, Castinus, A.C. 415, was sent against them with an army, who routed them and slew Theudomir their King This was the second taking of Triers by the Franks. It was therefore taken four times, once by the Vandals and thrice by the Franks. Theudomir was succeeded by Pharamond, the Prince or King of the Salian Franks in Germany. From thence he brought new forces, reigned over the whole, and had seats granted to his people within the Empire near the Rhine.

And now the Barbarians were all quieted, and settled in several kingdoms within the Empire, not only by conquest, but also by the grants of the Emperor Honorius. For Rutilius in his Itinerary, written in Autumn, Anno Urbis 1169, that is, according to Varro's computation then in use, A.C. 416, thus laments the wasted fields:

Illa quidem longis nimium deformia bellis;

And then adds,

Jam tempus laceris post longa incendia fundis Vel pastorales ædificare casas.

And a little after,

Æternum tibi Rhenus aret.

And Orosius in the end of his history, which was finished A.C. 417, represents now a general pacification of the barbarous nations by the words comprimere, coangustare, addicere gentes immanissimas; terming them imperio addictas, because they had obtained seats in the Empire by league and compact; and coangustatas, because they did no longer invade all regions at pleasure, but by the same compact remained quiet in the seats then granted them. And these are the kingdoms, of which the feet of the Image were henceforward composed, and which are represented by iron and clay intermixed, which did not stick one to another, and were of different strength.

Notes to Chap. V.

1 Procop. l. 1. de Bello Vandalico.

2 Galli Arborici: whence the region was named Arboricbant, and by contraction Brabant.

Of the Kingdoms represented by the feet of the Image composed of iron and clay.

Dacia was a large country, bounded on the south by the Danube, on the east by the Euxine sea, on the north by the river Neister and the mountain Crapac, and on the west by the river Tibesis, or Teys, which runs south into the Danube a little above Belgrade. It included the countries now called Transylvania, Moldavia, and Wallachia, and the eastern part of the upper Hungary. Its ancient inhabitants were called Getæ by the Greeks, Daci by the Latins, and Goths by themselves. Alexander the great attacked them, and Trajan conquered them and turned their country into a Province of the Roman Empire; this greatly advanced the spread of the Gospel among them. They were made up of several Gothic nations, called Ostrogoths, Visigoths, Vandals, Gepides, Lombards, Burgundians, Alans, and others, who all had the same customs and spoke the same language, as Procopius describes. While they lived under the Romans, the Goths or Ostrogoths were seated in the eastern parts of Dacia, the Vandals in the western part on the river Teys, where the rivers Maresh and Keresh run into it. The Visigoths were between them. The Gepides, according to Jornandes, were on the Vistula. The Burgundians, a Vandalic nation, were between the Vistula and the southern source of the Boristhenes, some distance north of the mountain Crapac, where Ptolemy places them by the names of Phrugundiones and Burgiones.1 The Alans, another Gothic nation, were between the northern source of the Boristhenes and the mouth of the river Tanais, where Ptolemy puts the mountain Alanus and the western side of the Palus Mæotis.

These nations stayed under the dominion of the Romans until the second year of the Emperor Philip, and then, for lack of their military pay, they began to revolt; the Ostrogoths set up a kingdom, which under their Kings Ostrogotha, Cniva, Araric, Geperic, and Hermanaric grew until the year of Christ 376; then, with an invasion of the Hunns from beyond the Tanais and the death of Hermanaric, it broke into several smaller kingdoms. Hunnimund, the son of Hermanaric, became King over the Ostrogoths; Fridigern over the Visigoths; Winithar, or Vinithar, over a part of the Goths called Gruthungi by Ammian, Gothunni by Claudian, and Sarmatæ and Scythians by others; Athanaric reigned over another part of the Goths in Dacia, called Thervingi; Box over the Antes in Sarmatia; and the Gepides also had their King. The Vandals fled over the Danube from Geberic at the end of the reign of Constantine the great, and were given seats in Pannonia by that Emperor, where they lived quietly forty years, that is, until the year 377, when several Gothic nations fleeing from the Hunns came over the Danube and were given seats in Mæsia and Thrace by the Greek Emperor Valens. But the next year they revolted, called in some Goths, Alans and Hunns from beyond the Danube, routed the Roman army, killed the Emperor Valens, and spread themselves into Greece and Pannonia as far as the Alps. In the years 379 and 380 they were checked by the arms of the Emperors Gratian and Theodosius and made a submissive peace; the Visigoths and Thervingi returned to their seats in Mæsia and Thrace, the Hunns withdrew over the Danube, and the Alans and Gruthingi were given seats in Pannonia.

About the year 373, or 374, the Burgundians left their seats on the Vistula with an army of eighty thousand men to invade Gallia; meeting resistance, they settled on the north side of the Rhine opposite Mentz. In the year 358, a body of the Salian Franks, with their King, came from the river Sala, were received into the Empire by the Emperor Julian, and settled in Gallia between Brabant and the Rhine; and their King Mellobaudes was made Comes domesticorum by the Emperor Gratian. Richomer, another noble Salian Frank, was made Comes domesticorum and Magister utriusque Militiæ by Theodosius, and, A.C. 384, was Consul with Clearchus. He was a great favorite of Theodosius and went with him in his wars against Eugenius, but died on that campaign, and left a son called Theudomir, who later became King of the Salian Franks in Brabant. During this war some Franks from beyond the Rhine invaded Gallia under the leadership of Genobald, Marcomir and Suno, but were driven back by Stilico; and after Marcomir was killed, his son Pharamond succeeded him in Germany.

While these nations stayed quiet inside the Empire, subject to the Romans, many others did the same beyond the Danube until the death of the Emperor Theodosius, and then rose up in arms. For Paulus Diaconus in his Historia Miscell. lib. xiv., speaking of the times just after the death of this Emperor, tells us: Eodem tempore erant Gothi & aliæ gentes maximæ trans Danubium habitantes: ex quibus rationabiliores quatuor sunt, Gothi scilicet, Huisogothi, Gepides & Vandali; & nomen tantum & nihil aliud mutantes. Isti sub Arcadia & Honorio Danubium transeuntes, locati sunt in terra Romanorum: & Gepides quidem, ex quibus postea divisi sunt Longobardi & Avares, villas, quæ sunt circa Singidonum & Sirmium, habitavere: and Procopius at the beginning of his Historia Vandalica writes to the same purpose. Until then the Western Empire stayed whole, but now it broke into many kingdoms.

Theodosius died A.C. 395; and then the Visigoths, led by Alaric the successor of Fridigern, rose from their seats in Thrace and wasted Macedon, Thessaly, Achaia, Peloponnesus, and Epirus with fire and sword for five years together; then turning west, they invaded Dalmatia, Illyricum and Pannonia; and from there they went into Italy A.C. 402; and the next year they were so beaten at Pollentia and Verona by Stilico, the commander of the forces of the Western Empire, that Claudian calls what was left of Alaric's forces tanta ex gente reliquias breves, and Prudentius, Gentem deletam. Alaric then made peace with the Emperor, so humbled that Orosius says he did pro pace optima & quibuscunque sedibus suppliciter & simpliciter orare. This peace was confirmed by mutual hostages; Ætius was sent as a hostage to Alaric; and Alaric stayed a free Prince in the seats now granted to him.

When Alaric took up arms, the nations beyond the Danube began to move; and the next winter, between A.C. 395 and 396, a great body of Hunns, Alans, Ostrogoths, Gepides, and other northern nations crossed the frozen Danube, having been invited by Rufinus; at the same time their brethren, who had gotten seats inside the Empire, took up arms as well. Jerome calls this great crowd the Hunns, Alans, Vandals, Goths, Sarmatians, Quades, and Marcomans, and says that they invaded all the places between Constantinople and the Julian Alps, wasting Scythia, Thrace, Macedon, Dardania, Dacia, Thessaly, Achaia, Epirus, Dalmatia, and all Pannonia. The Suevians also invaded Rhætia; for while Alaric ravaged Pannonia, the Romans were defending Rhætia, which gave Alaric a chance to invade Italy, as Claudian mentions:

Non nisi perfidiâ nacti penetrabile tempus, Irrupere Getæ, nostras dum Rhætia vires Occupat, atque alio desudant Marte cohortes.

And when Alaric went from those parts into Italy, some other barbarous nations invaded Noricum and Vindelicia, as the same Poet Claudian thus writes:

----Jam foedera gentes Exuerant, Latiique auditâ clade feroces Vendelicos saltus & Norica rura tenebant.

This was in the years 402 and 403. And among these nations I count the Suevians, Quades, and Marcomans; for they were all in arms at this time. The Quades and Marcomans were Suevian nations; and they and the Suevians came originally from Bohemia, and the river Suevus or Sprake in Lusatia; and they were now united under one common King called Ermeric, who soon after led them into Gallia. The Vandals and Alans might also about this time extend themselves into Noricum. Uldin also with a great body of Hunns passed the Danube about the time of Chrysostom's banishment, that is, A.C. 404, and wasted Thrace and Mæsia. Radagaisus, King of the Gruthunni and successor of Winithar, bringing over more barbarians from beyond the Danube, invaded Italy with an army of more than two hundred thousand Goths; and within a year or two, A.C. 405 or 406, was defeated by Stilico, and perished with his army. In this war Stilico was helped by a great body of Hunns and Ostrogoths, under the command of Uldin and Sarus, who were hired by the Emperor Honorius. In all this confusion it was necessary for the Lombards in Pannonia to arm themselves in their own defense and assert their liberty, the Romans being no longer able to protect them.

And now Stilico, planning to make himself Emperor, secured a military prefecture for Alaric and sent him into the East in the service of Honorius the Western Emperor, putting some Roman troops under his command to strengthen his army of Goths, and promising to follow soon after with his own army. His pretense was to recover some regions of Illyricum, which the Eastern Emperor was accused of wrongly keeping from the Western; but his secret design was to make himself Emperor with the help of the Vandals and their allies, because he himself was a Vandal. To make this design easier, he invited a great body of the barbarous nations to invade the Western Empire while he and Alaric invaded the Eastern. These nations marched under their own Kings: the Vandals under Godegisilus, the Alans in two bodies, one under Goar and the other under Resplendial, and the Suevians, Quades, and Marcomans under Ermeric. They marched through Rhætia to the Rhine, left their seats in Pannonia to the Hunns and Ostrogoths, joined the Burgundians under Gundicar, and harassed the Franks as they went on. On the last of December A.C. 406, they crossed the Rhine at Ments and spread themselves into Germania prima and the neighboring regions; among their other actions, the Vandals took Triers. Then they advanced into Belgium and began to waste that country. At that the Salian Franks in Brabant took up arms and, under the command of Theudomir, the son of Ricimer, or Richomer, mentioned above, made such a strong resistance that they killed almost twenty thousand of the Vandals, with their King Godegesilus, in battle; the rest escaped only because a body of Resplendial's Alans came to their help in time.

Then the British soldiers, alarmed by the rumor of these things, revolted and set up Tyrants there; first Marcus, whom they killed at once; then Gratian, whom they killed within four months; and lastly Constantine, under whom they invaded Gallia A.C. 408, with the favor of Goar and Gundicar. And Constantine, having taken a good part of Gallia, made his son Constans Cæsar and sent him into Spain to handle his affairs there, A.C. 409.

Meanwhile Resplendial, seeing the disaster of the Vandals described above and that Goar had gone over to the Romans, led his army from the Rhine; and together with the Suevians and the rest of the Vandals he went toward Spain, while the Franks in the meantime followed their victory far enough to retake Triers, which, after they had plundered it, they left to the Romans. The Barbarians were first stopped by the Pyrenean mountains, which made them spread into Aquitain; but the next year the passage was betrayed to them by some soldiers of Constans; and entering Spain 4 Kal. Octob. A.C. 409, each conquered what he could; and at last, A.C. 411, they divided their conquests by lot: the Vandals obtained Boetica and part of Gallæcia, the Suevians the rest of Gallæcia, and the Alans Lusitania and the Carthaginian Province; the Emperor, for the sake of peace, confirmed them in those seats by grant A.C. 413.

The Roman Franks mentioned above, having made Theudomir their King, began right after their conquest of the Vandals to invade their neighbors as well. The first they attacked were the Gauls of Brabant2; but meeting strong resistance, they asked for their alliance; and so those Gauls broke away from the Romans and made a close league with the Franks to be one people, marrying one another and adopting each other's manners, until they became one without distinction. In this way, with these Gauls added, and also the foreign Franks who came across the Rhine afterward, the Salian kingdom soon grew very great and powerful.

Stilico's expedition against the Greek Emperor was stopped by the order of Honorius; and then Alaric came out of Epirus into Noricum and asked for a sum of money for his service. The Senate leaned toward refusing him, but granted it through Stilico's mediation. But after some time Stilico was accused of a traitorous conspiracy with Alaric and killed 10 Kal. Sept. A.C. 408; Alaric by that failed to get his money and was treated as an enemy of the Empire; he then went straight into Italy with the army he had brought out of Epirus, and sent word to his brother Adolphus to follow him with whatever forces he had in Pannonia, which were not great, but not to be despised either. At this Honorius, afraid of being shut up in Rome, withdrew to Ravenna in October A.C. 408. From then on Ravenna remained the seat of the Western Emperors. In those days the Hunns also invaded Pannonia; and seizing the empty seats of the Vandals, Alans, and Goths, founded a new kingdom there. Alaric advanced on Rome, besieged it, and took it 9 Kal. Sept. A.C. 410; and afterward, while trying to cross to Africa, he was shipwrecked. After that Honorius made peace with him and raised an army to send against the Tyrant Constantine.

At the same time Gerontius, one of Constantine's captains, revolted from him and set up Maximus Emperor in Spain. At this Constantine sent Edobec, another of his captains, to bring to his help the Barbarians under Goar and Gundicar in Gallia and reinforcements of Franks and Alemans from beyond the Rhine; and he put his son Constans in charge of Vienne in Gallia Narbonensis. Gerontius advanced, first killing Constans at Vienne, and then began to besiege Constantine at Arles. But Honorius at the same time sent Constantius with an army on the same errand; Gerontius fled, and Constantius continued the siege, strengthened by the arrival of most of Gerontius's soldiers. After a siege of four months, Edobec having gotten reinforcements, the Barbarian Kings at Ments, Goar and Gundicar, made Jovinus Emperor and set out with him to relieve Arles. At their approach Constantius withdrew. They pursued him, and he beat them by surprise; but he did not follow up his victory, and the Barbarians soon recovered, though not enough to stop the fall of the tyrants Constantine, Jovinus and Maximus. Britain could not be won back to the Empire and remained ever after a separate kingdom.

The next year, A.C. 412, the Visigoths, beaten in Italy, were granted Aquitain to withdraw into; and they invaded it with much force, driving back the Alans and Burgundians, who were then laying it waste. At the same time the Burgundians were brought to peace, and the Emperor granted them, as their inheritance, a region on the Rhine which they had invaded; and I suppose he did the same for the Alans. But not long after the Franks took and burned Triers again, Castinus, A.C. 415, was sent against them with an army, which routed them and killed Theudomir their King. This was the second taking of Triers by the Franks. It was therefore taken four times, once by the Vandals and three times by the Franks. Theudomir was succeeded by Pharamond, the Prince or King of the Salian Franks in Germany. From there he brought new forces, ruled over them all, and was granted seats for his people inside the Empire near the Rhine.

By now all the Barbarians were quiet and settled in several kingdoms inside the Empire, not only by conquest but also by the grants of the Emperor Honorius. For Rutilius, in his Itinerary, written in Autumn, Anno Urbis 1169—that is, according to Varro's computation then in use, A.C. 416—laments the wasted fields in these words:

Illa quidem longis nimium deformia bellis;

And then adds,

Jam tempus laceris post longa incendia fundis Vel pastorales ædificare casas.

And a little after,

Æternum tibi Rhenus aret.

And Orosius, at the end of his history, which was finished A.C. 417, describes a general pacification of the barbarous nations with the words comprimere, coangustare, addicere gentes immanissimas; he calls them imperio addictas, because they had obtained seats in the Empire by league and compact, and coangustatas, because they no longer invaded all regions at will, but by the same compact stayed quiet in the seats then granted them. And these are the kingdoms of which the feet of the Image were henceforward composed, and which are represented by iron and clay mixed together, which did not stick to one another and were of different strength.

Notes to Chap. V.

1 Procop. l. 1. de Bello Vandalico.

2 Galli Arborici: from which the region was named Arboricbant, and by contraction Brabant.

Part I, Chapter 6, 1

Of the ten Kingdoms represented by the ten horns of the fourth Beast.

Now by the wars above described the Western Empire of the Romans, about the time that Rome was besieged and taken by the Goths, became broken into the following ten kingdoms.

1 The kingdom of the Vandals and Alans in Spain and Africa. 2. The kingdom of the Suevians in Spain. 3. The kingdom of the Visigoths. 4. The kingdom of the Alans in Gallia. 5. The kingdom of the Burgundians. 6. The kingdom of the Franks. 7. The kingdom of the Britains. 8. The kingdom of the Hunns. 9. The kingdom of the Lombards. 10. The kingdom of Ravenna.

Seven of these kingdoms are thus mentioned by Sigonius. 1Honorio regnante, in Pannoniam 2Hunni, in Hispaniam 3Vandali, 4Alani, 5Suevi & 6Gothi, in Galliam 4Alani 7Burgundiones & 6Gothi, certis sedibus permissis, accepti. Add the Franks, Britains, and Lombards, and you have the ten: for these arose about the same time with the seven. But let us view them severally.

1 The Kings of the Vandals were, A.C. 407 Godegesilus, 407 Gunderic, 426 Geiseric, 477 Hunneric, 484 Gundemund, 496 Thrasamund, 513 Geiseric, 530 Gelimer. Godegesilus led them into Gallia A.C. 406, Gunderic into Spain A.C. 409, Geiseric into Africa A.C. 427; and Gelimer was conquered by Belisarius A.C. 533. Their kingdom lasted in Gallia, Spain and Africa together 126 years; and in Africa they were very potent. The Alans had only two Kings of their own in Spain, Resplendial, and Ataces, Utacus or Othacar. Under Resplendial they went into France A.C. 407, and into Spain A.C. 409. Ataces was slain with almost all his army by Vallia King of the Visigoths A.C. 419. And then the remainder of these Alans subjected themselves to Gunderic King of the Vandals in Boetica, and went afterwards with them into Africa, as I learn out of Procopius. Whence the Kings of the Vandals styled themselves Kings of the Vandals and Alans; as may be seen in the Edict of Hunneric recited by Victor in his Vandalic persecution. In conjunction with the Chatti, these Alans gave the name of Cathalaunia, or Catth-Alania, to the Province which is still so called. These Alans had also Gepides among them; and therefore the Gepides came into Pannonia before the Alans left it. There they became subject to the Hunns till the death of Attila A.C. 454, and at length were conquered by the Ostrogoths.

2 The Kings of the Suevians were, A.C. 407 Ermeric, 458 Rechila, 448 Rechiarius, 458 Maldra, 460 Frumarius, 463 Regismund. And after some other Kings who are unknown, reigned A.C. 558 Theudomir, 568 Miro, 582 Euboricus, and 583 Andeca. This kingdom, after it had been once seated in Spain, remained always in Gallæcia and Lusitania. Ermeric after the fall of the Alan kingdom, enlarged it into all Gallæcia, forcing the Vandals to retire into Boetica and the Carthaginian Province. This kingdom lasted 177 years according to Isidorus, and then was subdued by Leovigildus King of the Visigoths, and made a Province of his kingdom A.C. 585.

3 The Kings of the Visigoths were, A.C. 400 Alaric, 410 Athaulphus, 415 Sergeric and Vallia, 419 Theoderic, 451 Thorismund, 452 Theoderic, 465 Euric, 482 Alaric, 505 Gensalaric, 526 Amalaric, 531 Theudius, 548 Theudisclus, &c. I date this kingdom from the time that Alaric left Thrace and Greece to invade the Western Empire. In the end of the reign of Athaulphus the Goths were humbled by the Romans, and attempted to pass out of France into Spain. Sergeric reigned but a few days. In the beginning of Vallia's reign they assaulted the Romans afresh, but were again repulsed, and then made peace on this condition, that they should on the behalf of the Empire invade the Barbarian kingdoms in Spain: and this they did, together with the Romans, in the years 417 and 418, overthrowing the Alans and part of the Vandals. Then they received Aquitain of the Emperor by a full donation, leaving their conquests in Spain to the Emperor: and thereby the seats of the conquered Alans came into the hands of the Romans. In the year 455, Theoderic, assisted by the Burgundians, invaded Spain, which was then almost all subject to the Suevians, and took a part of it from them. A.C. 506, the Goths were driven out of Gallia by the Franks. A.C. 585, they conquered the Suevian kingdom, and became Lords of all Spain. A.C. 713, the Saracens invaded them, but in time they recovered their dominions, and have reigned in Spain ever since.

4 The Kings of the Alans in Gallia were Goar, Sambida, Eocharic, Sangibanus, Beurgus, &c. Under Goar they invaded Gallia A.C. 407, and had seats given them near the Rhine, A.C. 412. Under Sambida, whom Bucher makes the successor, if not the son of Goar, they had the territories of Valence given them by Ætius the Emperor's General, A.C. 440. Under Eocharic they conquered a region of the rebelling Galli Arborici, given them also by Ætius. This region was from them named Alenconium, quasi Alanorum conventus. Under Sangibanus they were invaded, and their regal city Orleans was besieged by Attila King of the Hunns, with a vast army of 500000 men. Ætius and the Barbarian Kings of Gallia came to raise the siege, and beat the Hunns in a very memorable battle, A.C. 451, in campis Catalaunicis, so called from these Alans mixt with the Chatti. The region is now called Campania or Champagne. In that battle were slain on both sides 162000 men. A year or two after, Attila returned with an immense army to conquer this kingdom, but was again beaten by them and the Visigoths together in a battle of three days continuance, with a slaughter almost as great as the former. Under Beurgus, or Biorgor, they infested Gallia round about, till the reign of Maximus the Emperor; and then they passed the Alps in winter, and came into Liguria, but were there beaten, and Beurgus slain, by Ricimer commander of the Emperor's forces, A.C. 464. Afterwards they were again beaten, by the joint force of Odoacer King of Italy and Childeric King of the Franks, about the year 480, and again by Theudobert King of the Austrian Franks about the year 511.

5 The Kings of the Burgundians were, A.C. 407 Gundicar, 436 Gundioc, 467 Bilimer, 473 Gundobaldus with his brothers, 510 Sigismund, 517 Godomarus. Under Gundicar they invaded Gallia A.C. 407, and had seats given them by the Emperor near the Rhine in Gallia Belgica, A.C. 412. They had Saxons among them, and were now so potent, that Orosius A.C. 417 wrote of them: 'Burgundionum esse prævalidam manum, Galliæ hodieque testes sunt, in quibus præsumpta possessione consistunt. About the year 435 they received great overthrows by Ætius, and soon after by the Hunns: but five years after had Savoy granted them to be shared with the inhabitants; and from that time became again a potent kingdom, being bounded by the river Rhodanus, but afterwards extending much further into the heart of Gallia. Gundobald conquered the regions about the rivers Araris and Rhodanus, with the territories of Marseilles; and invading Italy in the time of the Emperor Glycerius, conquered all his brethren. Godomarus made Orleans his royal seat: whence the kingdom was called Regnum Aurelianorum. He was conquered by Clotharius and Childebert, Kings of the Franks, A.C. 526. From thenceforward this kingdom was sometimes united to the kingdom of the Franks, and sometimes divided from it, till the reign of Charles the great, who made his son Carolottus King of Burgundy. From that time, for about 300 years together, it enjoyed its proper Kings; and was then broken into the Dukedom of Burgundy, County of Burgundy, and County of Savoy; and afterwards those were broken into other lesser Counties.

6 The Kings of the Franks were, A.C. 407 Theudomir, 417 Pharamond, 428 Clodio, 448 Merovæus, 456 Childeric, 482 Clodovæus, &c. Windeline and Bucher, two of the most diligent searchers into the originals of this kingdom, make it begin the same year with the Barbarian invasions of Gallia, that is, A.C. 407. Of the first Kings there is in Labbe's Bibliotheca M.S. this record.

Historica quædam excerpta ex veteri stemmate genealogico Regum Franciæ.

Genobaldus, Marcomerus, Suno, Theodemeris. Isti duces vel reguli extiterunt à principio gentis Francorum diversis temporibus. Sed incertum relinquunt historici quali sibi procreations lineâ successerunt.

Pharamundus: sub hoc rege suo primo Franci legibus se subdunt, quas primores eorum tulerunt Wisogastus, Atrogastus, Salegastus.

Chlochilo. Iste, transito Rheno, Romanos in Carbonaria sylva devicit, Camaracum cepit & obtinuit, annis 20 regnavit. Sub hoc rege Franci usque Summam progressi sunt.

Merovechus. Sub hoc rege Franci Trevirim destruunt, Metim succendunt, usque Aurelianum perveniunt.

Now for Genobaldus, Marcomer and Suno, they were captains of the Transrhenane Franks in the reign of Theodosius, and concern us not. We are to begin with Theudomir the first King of the rebelling Salii, called Didio by Ivo Carnotensis, and Thiedo and Theudemerus by Rhenanus. His face is extant in a coin of gold found with this inscription, THEUDEMIR REX, published by Petavius, and still or lately extant, as Windeline testifies: which shews that he was a King, and that in Gallia; seeing that rude Germany understood not then the coining of money, nor used either Latin words or letters. He was the son of Ricimer, or Richomer, the favourite of the Emperor Theodosius; and so being a Roman Frank, and of the Salian royal blood, they therefore upon the rebellion made him King. The whole time of his reign you have stated in Excerptis Gregorii Turonensis è Fredigario, cap. 5, 6, 7, 8. where the making him King, the tyranny of Jovinus, the slaughter of the associates of Jovinus, the second taking of Triers by the Franks, and their war with Castinus, in which this King was slain, are as a series of successive things thus set down in order. Extinctis Ducibus in Francis, denuo Reges creantur ex eadem stirpe qua prius fuerant. Eodem tempore Jovinus ornatus regios assumpsit. Constantinus fugam versus Italiam dirigit; missis a Jovino Principe percussoribus super Mentio flumine, capite truncatur. Multi nobilium jussu Jovini apud Avernis capti, & a ducibus Honorii crudeliter interempti sunt. Trevirorum civitas, factione unius ex senatoribus nomine Lucii, à Francis captà & incensa est.--Castinus Domesticorum Comes expeditionem accipit contra Francos, &c. Then returning to speak of Theudomir, he adds: Franci electum à se regem, sicut prius fuerat, crinitum inquirentes diligenter ex genere Priami, Frigi & Francionis, super se crearunt nomine Theudemerum filium Richemeris, qui in hoc prælio quod supra memini, à Romanis interfectus est; that is, in the battle with Castinus's army. Of his death Gregory Turonensis makes this further mention: In consularibus legimus Theodemerem regem Francorum filium Ricimeris quondam, & Ascilam matrem ejus, gladio interfectos.

Upon this victory of the Romans, the Franks and rebelling Gauls, who in the time of Theudomir were at war with one another, united to strengthen themselves, as Ordericus Vitalis1 thus mentions. Cum Galli prius contra Romanos rebellâssent, Franci iis sociati sunt, & pariter juncti, Ferramundum Sunonis ducis filium, sibi regem præfecerunt. Prosper sets down the time; Anno 25 Honorii, Pharamundus regnat in Francia. This, Bucher well observes, refers to the end of the year 416, or the beginning of the next year, dating the years of Honorius from the death of Valentinian; and argues well, that at this time Pharamond was not only King by the constitution of the Franks, but crowned also by the consent of Honorius, and had a part of Gallia assigned him by covenant. And this might be the cause that Roman writers reckoned him the first King: which some not understanding, have reputed him the founder of this kingdom by an army of the Transrhenane Franks. He might come with such an army, but he succeeded Theudomir by right of blood and consent of the people. For the above cited passage of Fredigarius, Extinctis Ducibus, in Francis denuo Reges creantur ex eadem stirpe quâ prius fuerant, implies that the kingdom continued to this new elected family during the reign of more Kings than one. If you date the years of Honorius from the death of his father, the reign of Pharamond might begin two years later than is assigned by Bucher. The Salique laws made in his reign, which are yet extant, shew by their name that it was the kingdom of the Salii over which he reigned; and, by the pecuniary mulcts in them, that the place where he reigned abounded much with money, and consequently was within the Empire; rude Germany knowing not the use of money, till they mixed with the Romans. In the Preface also to the Salique laws, written and prefixed to them soon after the conversion of the Franks to the Christian religion, that is, in the end of the reign of Merovæus, or soon after, the original of this kingdom is thus described: Hæc enim gens, quæ fortis dum esset & robore valida, Romanorum jugum durissimum de suis cervicibus excussit pugnando, &c. This kingdom therefore was erected, not by invasion but by rebellion, as was described above. Prosper in registering their Kings in order, tells us: Pharamundus regnat in Francia; Clodio regnat in Francia; Merovæus regnat in Francia: and who can imagine but that in all these places he meant one and the same Francia? And yet 'tis certain that the Francia of Merovæus was in Gallia.

Yet the father of Pharamond, being king of a body of Franks in Germany in the reign of the Emperor Theodosius, as above, Pharamond might reign over the same Franks in Germany before he succeeded Theudomir in the kingdom of the Salians within the Empire, and even before Theudomir began his reign; suppose in the first year of Honorius, or when those Franks being repulsed by Stilico, lost their Kings Marcomir and Suno, one of which was the father of Pharamond: and the Roman Franks, after the death of Theudomir, might invite Pharamond with his people from beyond the Rhine. But we are not to regard the reign of Pharamond in Germany: we are to date this kingdom from its rise within the Empire, and to look upon it as strengthened by the access of other Franks coming from beyond the Rhine, whether in the reign of this King or in that of his successor Clodio. For in the last year of Pharamond's reign, Ætius took from him a part of his possession in Gallia: but his successor Clodio, whom Fredigarius represents as the son of Theudomir, and some call Clogio, Cloio, and Claudius, inviting from beyond the Rhine a great body of Franks, recovered all, and carried on their conquests as far as the river Soame. Then those Franks dividing conquests with him, erected certain new kingdoms at Cologn and Cambray, and some other cities: all which were afterwards conquered by Clodovæus, who also drove the Goths out of Gallia, and fix'd his seat at Paris, where it has continued ever since. And this was the original of the present kingdom of France.

7 The Kings of Britain were, A.C. 407 or 408, Marcus, Gratian, and Constantine successively; A.C. 425 Vortigern, 466 Aurelius Ambrosius, 498 Uther Pendraco, 508 Arthur, 542 Constantinus, 545 Aurelius Cunanus, 578 Vortiporeus, 581 Malgo, 586 Careticus, 613 Cadwan, 635 Cadwalin, 676 Cadwallader. The three first were Roman Tyrants, who revolted from the Empire. Orosius, Prosper and Zosimus connect their revolt with the irruptions of the Barbarians into Gallia, as consequent thereunto. Prosper, with whom Zosimus agrees, puts it in the year which began the day after that irruption. The just time I thus collect: Marcus reigned not many days, Gratian four months, and Constantine three years. He was slain the year after the taking of Rome, that is A.C. 411, 14 Kal. Octob. Whence the revolt was in Spring A.C. 408. Sozomen joins Constantine's expedition into Gallia with Arcadius's death, or the times a little after; and Arcadius died A.C. 408 May the 1st. Now tho the reign of these Tyrants was but short, yet they gave a beginning to the kingdom of Britain, and so may be reckoned the three first Kings, especially since the posterity of Constantine, viz. his sons Aurelius Ambrosius, and Uther Pendraco, and his grandson Arthur, reigned afterwards. For from the time of the revolt of these Tyrants Britain continued a distict kingdom absolved from subjection to the Empire, the Emperor not being able to spare soldiers to be sent thither to receive and keep the Island, and therefore neglecting it; as we learn by unquestionable records. For Prosper tells us; A.C. 410, Variane Cos. Hac tempestate præ valetudine Romanorum, vires funditùs attenuatæ Britanniæ. And Sigebert, conjoining this with the siege of Rome, saith: Britannorum vires attenuatæ, & substrahunt se à Romanorum dominatione. And Zosimus lib. 6. The Transrhenane Barbarians invading all places, reduced the inhabitants of the island of Britain, and also certain Celtic nations to that pass, that they fell off from the Roman Empire; and being no longer obedient to the Roman laws, [Greek: kat' heauton biateuein], they lived in separate bodies after their own pleasure. The Britons therefore taking up arms, and hazarding themselves for their own safety, freed their cities from the imminent Barbarians. In like manner all Brabant and some other Provinces of the Gauls imitating the Britons, freed themselves also, ejecting the Roman Presidents, and forming themselves into a sort of commonwealth according to their own pleasure. This rebellion of Britain and the Celtic nations happened when Constantine usurped the kingdom. So also Procopius, lib. 1. Vandal. speaking of the same Constantine, saith: Constantine being overcome in battle, was slain with his children: [Greek: Bretannian men toi Rômaioi anasôsasthai ouketi echon; all' ousa hypo tyrannous ap' autou emene.] Yet the Romans could not recover Britain any more, but from that time it remained under Tyrants. And Beda, l. 1. c. 11. Fracta est Roma à Gothis anno 1164 suæ conditionis; ex quo tempore Romani in Britannia regnare cessaverunt. And Ethelwaldus: A tempore Romæ à Gothis expugnatæ, cessavit imperium Romanorum à Britannia insula, & ab aliis; quas sub jugo servitutis tenebant, multis terris. And Theodoret, serm. 9. de curand. Græc. affect. about the year 424, reckons the Britons among the nations which were not then in subjection to the Roman Empire. Thus Sigonius: ad annum 411, Imperium Romanorum post excessum Constantini in Britannia nullum fuit.

Of the ten kingdoms represented by the ten horns of the fourth Beast.

The wars described above broke the Western Roman Empire into ten kingdoms, about the time the Goths besieged and took Rome.

1 The kingdom of the Vandals and Alans in Spain and Africa. 2. The kingdom of the Suevians in Spain. 3. The kingdom of the Visigoths. 4. The kingdom of the Alans in Gallia. 5. The kingdom of the Burgundians. 6. The kingdom of the Franks. 7. The kingdom of the Britons. 8. The kingdom of the Hunns. 9. The kingdom of the Lombards. 10. The kingdom of Ravenna.

Sigonius mentions seven of these kingdoms: "Honorio regnante, in Pannoniam Hunni, in Hispaniam Vandali, Alani, Suevi & Gothi, in Galliam Alani, Burgundiones & Gothi, certis sedibus permissis, accepti." Add the Franks, the Britons, and the Lombards, and you have ten, because these three arose at about the same time as the seven. Now let us look at each one in turn.

1 The kings of the Vandals were: A.C. 407 Godegesilus, 407 Gunderic, 426 Geiseric, 477 Hunneric, 484 Gundemund, 496 Thrasamund, 513 Geiseric, and 530 Gelimer. Godegesilus led them into Gallia A.C. 406. Gunderic led them into Spain A.C. 409, and Geiseric into Africa A.C. 427. Belisarius conquered Gelimer A.C. 533. In Gallia, Spain and Africa together their kingdom lasted 126 years, and in Africa they were very powerful. The Alans had only two kings of their own in Spain: Resplendial, and Ataces, who was also called Utacus or Othacar. Under Resplendial they went into France A.C. 407, and into Spain A.C. 409. A.C. 419 Vallia, king of the Visigoths, killed Ataces together with almost all his army. The rest of these Alans then submitted to Gunderic, king of the Vandals in Boetica, and afterward went with them into Africa, as I learn from Procopius. That is why the kings of the Vandals called themselves kings of the Vandals and Alans, as can be seen in the Edict of Hunneric, which Victor recites in his Vandalic persecution. Together with the Chatti, these Alans gave the name Cathalaunia, or Catth-Alania, to the province that is still called by that name. These Alans also had Gepides among them, so the Gepides came into Pannonia before the Alans left it. There the Gepides were subject to the Hunns until the death of Attila A.C. 454, and in the end the Ostrogoths conquered them.

2 The kings of the Suevians were: A.C. 407 Ermeric, 458 Rechila, 448 Rechiarius, 458 Maldra, 460 Frumarius, and 463 Regismund. Then, after some other kings who are unknown, there reigned A.C. 558 Theudomir, 568 Miro, 582 Euboricus, and 583 Andeca. Once this kingdom was settled in Spain it always stayed in Gallæcia and Lusitania. After the Alan kingdom fell, Ermeric enlarged it to cover all Gallæcia, forcing the Vandals to withdraw into Boetica and the Carthaginian Province. According to Isidorus this kingdom lasted 177 years. Then Leovigildus, king of the Visigoths, subdued it and made it a province of his kingdom A.C. 585.

3 The kings of the Visigoths were: A.C. 400 Alaric, 410 Athaulphus, 415 Sergeric and Vallia, 419 Theoderic, 451 Thorismund, 452 Theoderic, 465 Euric, 482 Alaric, 505 Gensalaric, 526 Amalaric, 531 Theudius, 548 Theudisclus, and so on. I date this kingdom from the time Alaric left Thrace and Greece to invade the Western Empire. Near the end of Athaulphus's reign the Romans humbled the Goths, and the Goths tried to cross from France into Spain. Sergeric reigned only a few days. Early in Vallia's reign they attacked the Romans again, but were driven back once more. Then they made peace on this condition: on behalf of the Empire, they would invade the barbarian kingdoms in Spain. Together with the Romans they did this in the years 417 and 418, overthrowing the Alans and part of the Vandals. After that the Emperor granted them Aquitain in full, and they handed their conquests in Spain over to the Emperor. The seats of the conquered Alans therefore came into Roman hands. In the year 455 Theoderic, helped by the Burgundians, invaded Spain, which was then almost entirely subject to the Suevians, and took a part of it from them. A.C. 506 the Franks drove the Goths out of Gallia. A.C. 585 the Goths conquered the Suevian kingdom and became masters of all Spain. A.C. 713 the Saracens invaded them, but in time they recovered their lands and have reigned in Spain ever since.

4 The kings of the Alans in Gallia were Goar, Sambida, Eocharic, Sangibanus, Beurgus, and so on. Under Goar they invaded Gallia A.C. 407, and A.C. 412 they were given seats near the Rhine. Under Sambida, whom Bucher makes the successor of Goar if not his son, they were given the territories of Valence by Ætius, the Emperor's general, A.C. 440. Under Eocharic they conquered a region of the rebelling Galli Arborici, which Ætius also gave them. This region took its name from them: Alenconium, quasi Alanorum conventus. Under Sangibanus they were invaded, and Attila, king of the Hunns, besieged their capital city of Orleans with a vast army of 500000 men. Ætius and the barbarian kings of Gallia came to lift the siege, and beat the Hunns in a very memorable battle A.C. 451, in campis Catalaunicis, so called from these Alans mixed with the Chatti. The region is now called Campania or Champagne. In that battle 162000 men were killed on both sides. A year or two later Attila returned with a huge army to conquer this kingdom, but the Alans and the Visigoths together beat him again in a battle that lasted three days, with a slaughter almost as great as the first. Under Beurgus, or Biorgor, they ravaged all the country around Gallia until the reign of the Emperor Maximus. Then they crossed the Alps in winter and came into Liguria, but there Ricimer, commander of the Emperor's forces, beat them and killed Beurgus A.C. 464. Later the joint forces of Odoacer, king of Italy, and Childeric, king of the Franks, beat them again about the year 480, and Theudobert, king of the Austrian Franks, beat them again about the year 511.

5 The kings of the Burgundians were: A.C. 407 Gundicar, 436 Gundioc, 467 Bilimer, 473 Gundobaldus with his brothers, 510 Sigismund, and 517 Godomarus. Under Gundicar they invaded Gallia A.C. 407, and A.C. 412 the Emperor gave them seats near the Rhine in Gallia Belgica. They had Saxons among them, and by then they were so powerful that Orosius wrote of them A.C. 417: "Burgundionum esse prævalidam manum, Galliæ hodieque testes sunt, in quibus præsumpta possessione consistunt." About the year 435 Ætius dealt them great defeats, and soon after the Hunns did too. Five years later Savoy was granted to them, to share with the inhabitants. From that time they again became a powerful kingdom, bounded by the river Rhodanus and afterward reaching much further into the heart of Gallia. Gundobald conquered the regions around the rivers Araris and Rhodanus, together with the territories of Marseilles. He also invaded Italy in the time of the Emperor Glycerius and conquered all his brothers. Godomarus made Orleans his royal seat, which is why the kingdom was called Regnum Aurelianorum. Clotharius and Childebert, kings of the Franks, conquered him A.C. 526. From then on this kingdom was sometimes joined to the kingdom of the Franks and sometimes separated from it, until the reign of Charles the great, who made his son Carolottus king of Burgundy. From that time it kept its own kings for about 300 years together. Then it broke up into the Dukedom of Burgundy, the County of Burgundy, and the County of Savoy, and later those broke up into other lesser counties.

6 The kings of the Franks were: A.C. 407 Theudomir, 417 Pharamond, 428 Clodio, 448 Merovæus, 456 Childeric, 482 Clodovæus, and so on. Windeline and Bucher, two of the most diligent searchers into the origins of this kingdom, place its beginning in the same year as the barbarian invasions of Gallia, that is, A.C. 407. Of the first kings there is this record in Labbe's Bibliotheca M.S.

Historica quædam excerpta ex veteri stemmate genealogico Regum Franciæ.

Genobaldus, Marcomerus, Suno, Theodemeris. Isti duces vel reguli extiterunt à principio gentis Francorum diversis temporibus. Sed incertum relinquunt historici quali sibi procreations lineâ successerunt.

Pharamundus: sub hoc rege suo primo Franci legibus se subdunt, quas primores eorum tulerunt Wisogastus, Atrogastus, Salegastus.

Chlochilo. Iste, transito Rheno, Romanos in Carbonaria sylva devicit, Camaracum cepit & obtinuit, annis 20 regnavit. Sub hoc rege Franci usque Summam progressi sunt.

Merovechus. Sub hoc rege Franci Trevirim destruunt, Metim succendunt, usque Aurelianum perveniunt.

As for Genobaldus, Marcomer and Suno: they were captains of the Transrhenane Franks in the reign of Theodosius, and they do not concern us here. We must begin with Theudomir, the first king of the rebelling Salii. Ivo Carnotensis calls him Didio, and Rhenanus calls him Thiedo and Theudemerus. His face survives on a gold coin that was found bearing this inscription, THEUDEMIR REX, published by Petavius and still, or until recently, extant, as Windeline records. This shows that he was a king, and a king in Gallia, because at that time rough Germany did not understand the coining of money and used neither Latin words nor letters. He was the son of Ricimer, or Richomer, the favorite of the Emperor Theodosius. Being a Roman Frank of the Salian royal blood, they made him king when the rebellion broke out. You can find the whole span of his reign in Excerptis Gregorii Turonensis è Fredigario, cap. 5, 6, 7, 8. There, set down in order as a linked series, are his making king, the tyranny of Jovinus, the slaughter of the associates of Jovinus, the second taking of Triers by the Franks, and their war with Castinus, in which this king was killed: "Extinctis Ducibus in Francis, denuo Reges creantur ex eadem stirpe qua prius fuerant. Eodem tempore Jovinus ornatus regios assumpsit. Constantinus fugam versus Italiam dirigit; missis a Jovino Principe percussoribus super Mentio flumine, capite truncatur. Multi nobilium jussu Jovini apud Avernis capti, & a ducibus Honorii crudeliter interempti sunt. Trevirorum civitas, factione unius ex senatoribus nomine Lucii, à Francis captà & incensa est.—Castinus Domesticorum Comes expeditionem accipit contra Francos, &c." Then, returning to Theudomir, he adds: "Franci electum à se regem, sicut prius fuerat, crinitum inquirentes diligenter ex genere Priami, Frigi & Francionis, super se crearunt nomine Theudemerum filium Richemeris, qui in hoc prælio quod supra memini, à Romanis interfectus est;" that is, in the battle with Castinus's army. Of his death Gregory Turonensis adds this further note: "In consularibus legimus Theodemerem regem Francorum filium Ricimeris quondam, & Ascilam matrem ejus, gladio interfectos."

After this Roman victory, the Franks and the rebelling Gauls, who had been at war with one another in the time of Theudomir, joined together to make themselves stronger, as Ordericus Vitalis1 relates: "Cum Galli prius contra Romanos rebellâssent, Franci iis sociati sunt, & pariter juncti, Ferramundum Sunonis ducis filium, sibi regem præfecerunt." Prosper fixes the time: "Anno 25 Honorii, Pharamundus regnat in Francia." Bucher makes a good observation: this refers to the end of the year 416 or the beginning of the next year, counting the years of Honorius from the death of Valentinian. He argues well that at this time Pharamond was king not only by the constitution of the Franks, but was also crowned with the consent of Honorius, and had a part of Gallia assigned to him by covenant. This may be why Roman writers counted him the first king. Some who did not understand this have thought he founded the kingdom with an army of the Transrhenane Franks. He may have come with such an army, but he succeeded Theudomir by right of blood and with the consent of the people. The passage of Fredigarius cited above, "Extinctis Ducibus, in Francis denuo Reges creantur ex eadem stirpe quâ prius fuerant," implies that the kingdom passed on to this newly elected family and continued through the reigns of more than one king. If you count the years of Honorius from the death of his father, Pharamond's reign may have begun two years later than Bucher assigns. The Salique laws made in his reign, which still survive, show by their name that he reigned over the kingdom of the Salii. Their money fines also show that the place where he reigned had a great deal of money, and therefore lay within the Empire, since rough Germany did not know the use of money before they mixed with the Romans. The Preface to the Salique laws, written and prefixed to them soon after the Franks converted to the Christian religion, that is, at the end of the reign of Merovæus or soon after, describes the origin of this kingdom: "Hæc enim gens, quæ fortis dum esset & robore valida, Romanorum jugum durissimum de suis cervicibus excussit pugnando, &c." This kingdom was therefore set up not by invasion but by rebellion, as described above. Prosper, listing their kings in order, tells us: "Pharamundus regnat in Francia; Clodio regnat in Francia; Merovæus regnat in Francia." Who can suppose that in all these places he meant one and the same Francia? And yet it is certain that the Francia of Merovæus was in Gallia.

Yet Pharamond's father was king of a body of Franks in Germany in the reign of the Emperor Theodosius, as noted above. So Pharamond may have ruled over those same Franks in Germany before he succeeded Theudomir in the kingdom of the Salians within the Empire, and even before Theudomir began to reign. Suppose this began in the first year of Honorius, or when those Franks, repulsed by Stilico, lost their kings Marcomir and Suno, one of whom was Pharamond's father. After the death of Theudomir, the Roman Franks may have invited Pharamond and his people over from beyond the Rhine. But we are not to count Pharamond's reign in Germany. We must date this kingdom from its rise within the Empire, and treat it as strengthened by the arrival of other Franks coming from beyond the Rhine, whether that happened in the reign of this king or in the reign of his successor Clodio. In the last year of Pharamond's reign Ætius took from him a part of his possessions in Gallia. But his successor Clodio, whom Fredigarius makes the son of Theudomir and whom some call Clogio, Cloio, and Claudius, called a great body of Franks over from beyond the Rhine, recovered everything, and pushed their conquests as far as the river Soame. Those Franks then shared the conquests with him and set up certain new kingdoms at Cologn and Cambray, and some other cities. Clodovæus afterward conquered them all. He also drove the Goths out of Gallia and fixed his seat at Paris, where it has remained ever since. This was the origin of the present kingdom of France.

7 The kings of Britain were: A.C. 407 or 408 Marcus, Gratian, and Constantine in succession; then A.C. 425 Vortigern, 466 Aurelius Ambrosius, 498 Uther Pendraco, 508 Arthur, 542 Constantinus, 545 Aurelius Cunanus, 578 Vortiporeus, 581 Malgo, 586 Careticus, 613 Cadwan, 635 Cadwalin, and 676 Cadwallader. The first three were Roman tyrants who revolted from the Empire. Orosius, Prosper and Zosimus link their revolt to the barbarian invasions of Gallia, as a consequence of them. Prosper places the revolt in the year that began the day after that invasion, and Zosimus agrees with him. I gather the exact time this way: Marcus reigned only a few days, Gratian four months, and Constantine three years. He was killed the year after the taking of Rome, that is A.C. 411, 14 Kal. Octob. So the revolt was in the spring of A.C. 408. Sozomen links Constantine's expedition into Gallia with the death of Arcadius, or with a time a little after, and Arcadius died A.C. 408 May the 1st. Though the reign of these tyrants was short, they began the kingdom of Britain, and so may be counted as its first three kings. This is especially so because the family of Constantine reigned afterward: his sons Aurelius Ambrosius and Uther Pendraco, and his grandson Arthur. From the time of the revolt of these tyrants, Britain continued a distinct kingdom, free from submission to the Empire. The Emperor could not spare soldiers to send there to take and hold the island, and so he neglected it, as we learn from unquestionable records. Prosper tells us: "A.C. 410, Variane Cos. Hac tempestate præ valetudine Romanorum, vires funditùs attenuatæ Britanniæ." Sigebert joins this to the siege of Rome and says: "Britannorum vires attenuatæ, & substrahunt se à Romanorum dominatione." And Zosimus lib. 6: the Transrhenane Barbarians, invading everywhere, reduced the people of the island of Britain, and also certain Celtic nations, to such a pass that they broke away from the Roman Empire. No longer obeying the Roman laws, "kat' heauton biateuein," they lived in separate groups as they themselves pleased. So the Britons took up arms, risked themselves for their own safety, and freed their cities from the threatening barbarians. In the same way all Brabant and some other provinces of the Gauls copied the Britons and freed themselves too. They threw out the Roman governors and formed themselves into a sort of commonwealth as they themselves pleased. This rebellion of Britain and the Celtic nations happened when Constantine usurped the kingdom. Procopius, lib. 1. Vandal., says the same of that Constantine: he was beaten in battle and killed with his children, "Bretannian men toi Rômaioi anasôsasthai ouketi echon; all' ousa hypo tyrannous ap' autou emene." Yet the Romans never recovered Britain again. From that time it remained under tyrants. Beda, l. 1. c. 11: "Fracta est Roma à Gothis anno 1164 suæ conditionis; ex quo tempore Romani in Britannia regnare cessaverunt." And Ethelwaldus: "A tempore Romæ à Gothis expugnatæ, cessavit imperium Romanorum à Britannia insula, & ab aliis; quas sub jugo servitutis tenebant, multis terris." And Theodoret, serm. 9. de curand. Græc. affect., about the year 424, counts the Britons among the nations that were not then in subjection to the Roman Empire. So Sigonius: "ad annum 411, Imperium Romanorum post excessum Constantini in Britannia nullum fuit."

Part I, Chapter 6, 2

Between the death of Constantine and the reign of Vortigern was an interregnum of about 14 years, in which the Britons had wars with the Picts and Scots, and twice obtained the assistance of a Roman Legion, who drove out the enemy, but told them positively at their departure that they would come no more. Of Vortigern's beginning to reign there is this record in an old Chronicle in Nennius, quoted by Camden and others: Guortigernus tenuit imperium in Britannia, Theodosio & Valentiniano Coss. [viz. A.C. 425.] & in quarto anno regni sui Saxones ad Britanniam venerunt, Felice & Tauro Coss. [viz. A.C. 428.] This coming of the Saxons, Sigebert refers to the 4th year of Valentinian, which falls in with the year 428 assigned by this Chronicle: and two years after, the Saxons together with the Picts were beaten by the Britons. Afterwards in the reign of Martian the Emperor, that is, between the years 450 and 456, the Saxons under Hengist were called in by the Britons, but six years after revolted from them, made war upon them with various success, and by degrees succeeded them. Yet the Britons continued a flourishing kingdom till the reign of Careticus; and the war between the two nations continued till the pontificate of Sergius A.C. 688.2

8 The Kings of the Hunns were, A.C. 406 Octar and Rugila, 433 Bleda and Attila. Octar and Rugila were the brothers of Munzuc King of the Hunns in Gothia beyond the Danube; and Bleda and Attila were his sons, and Munzuc was the son of Balamir. The two first, as Jornandes tells us, were Kings of the Hunns, but not of them all; and had the two last for their successors. I date the reign of the Hunns in Pannonia from the time that the Vandals and Alans relinquished Pannonia to them, A.C. 407. Sigonius from the time that the Visigoths relinquished Pannonia A. C. 408. Constat, saith he, quod Gothis ex Illyrico profectis, Hunni successerunt, atque imprimis Pannoniam tenuerunt. Neque enim Honorius viribus ad resistendum in tantis difficultatibus destitutus, prorsus eos prohibere potuit, sed meliore consilio, animo ad pacem converso, foedus cum eis, datis acceptisque obsidibus fecit; ex quibus qui dati sunt, Ætius, qui etiam Alarico tributus fuerat, præcipue memoratur. How Ætius was hostage to the Goths and Hunns is related by Frigeridus, who when he had mentioned that Theodosius Emperor of the East had sent grievous commands to John, who after the death of Honorius had usurped the crown of the Western Empire, he subjoins: Iis permotus Johannes, Ætium id tempus curam palatii gerentem cum ingenti auri pondere ad Chunnos transmisit, notos sibi obsidiatûs sui tempore & familiari amicitiâ devinctos--And a little after: Ætius tribus annis Alarici obses, dehinc Chunnorum, postea Carpilionis gener ex Comite domesticorum & Joannis curopalatæ. Now Bucher shews that Ætius was hostage to Alaric till the year 410, when Alaric died, and to the Hunns between the years 411 and 415, and son-in-law to Carpilio about the year 417 or 418, and Curopalates to John about the end of the year 423. Whence 'tis probable that he became hostage to the Hunns about the year 412 or 413, when Honorius made leagues with almost all the barbarous nations, and granted them seats: but I had rather say with Sigonius, that Ætius became hostage to Alaric A.C. 403. It is further manifest out of Prosper, that the Hunns were in quiet possession of Pannonia in the year 432. For in the first book of Eusebius's Chronicle Prosper writes: Anno decimo post obitum Honorii, cum ad Chunnorum gentem cui tunc Rugila præerat, post prælium cum Bonifacio se Ætius contulisset, impetrato auxilio ad Romanorum solum regreditur. And in the second book: Ætio & Valerio Coss. Ætius depositâ potestate profugus ad Hunnos in Pannonia pervenit, quorum amicitiâ auxilioque usus, pacem principum interpellatæ potestatis obtinuit. Hereby it appears that at this time Rugila, or as Maximus calls him, Rechilla, reigned over the Hunns in Pannonia; and that Pannonia was not now so much as accounted within the soil of the Empire, being formerly granted away to the Hunns; and that these were the very same body of Hunns with which Ætius had, in the time of his being an hostage, contracted friendship: by virtue of which, as he sollicited them before to the aid of John the Tyrant A.C. 424, so now he procured their intercession for himself with the Emperor. Octar died A.C. 430; for Socrates tells us, that about that time the Burgundians having been newly vext by the Hunns, upon intelligence of Octar's death, seeing them without a leader, set upon them suddenly with so much vigour, that 3000 Burgundians slew 10000 Hunns. Of Rugila's being now King in Pannonia you have heard already. He died A.C. 433, and was succeeded by Bleda, as Prosper and Maximus inform us. This Bleda with his brother Attila were before this time Kings of the Hunns beyond the Danube, their father Munzuc's kingdom being divided between them; and now they united the kingdom Pannonia to their own. Whence Paulus Diaconus saith, they did regnum intra Pannoniam Daciamque gerere. In the year 441, they began to invade the Empire afresh, adding to the Pannonian forces new and great armies from Scythia. But this war was presently composed, and then Attila, seeing Bleda inclined to peace, slew him, A.C. 444, inherited his dominions, and invaded the Empire again. At length, after various great wars with the Romans, Attila perished A.C. 454; and his sons quarrelling about his dominions, gave occasion to the Gepides, Ostrogoths and other nations who were their subjects, to rebel and make war upon them. The same year the Ostrogoths had seats granted them in Pannonia by the Emperors Marcian and Valentinian; and with the Romans ejected the Hunns out of Pannonia, soon after the death of Attila, as all historians agree. This ejection was in the reign of Avitus, as is mentioned in the Chronicum Boiorum, and in Sidonius, Carm. 7 in Avitum, which speaks thus of that Emperor.

----Cujus solum amissas post sæcula multa Pannonias revocavit iter, jam credere promptum est. Quid faciet bellis.

The Poet means, that by the coming of Avitus the Hunns yielded more easily to the Goths. This was written by Sidonius in the beginning of the reign of Avitus: and his reign began in the end of the year 455, and lasted not one full year.

Jornandes tells us: Duodecimo anno regni Valiæ, quando & Hunni post pene quinquaginta annos invasa Pannonia, à Romanis & Gothis expulsi sunt. And Marcellinus: Hierio & Ardaburio Coss. Pannoniæ, quæ per quinquaginta annos ab Hunnis retinebantur, à Romanis receptæ sunt: whence it should seem that the Hunns invaded and held Pannonia from the year 378 or 379 to the year 427, and then were driven out of it. But this is a plain mistake: for it is certain that the Emperor Theodosius left the Empire entire; and we have shewed out of Prosper, that the Hunns were in quiet possession of Pannonia in the year 432. The Visigoths in those days had nothing to do with Pannonia, and the Ostrogoths continued subject to the Hunns till the death of Attila, A.C. 454; and Valia King of the Visigoths did not reign twelve years. He began his reign in the end of the year 415, reigned three years, and was slain A.C. 419, as Idacius, Isidorus, and the Spanish manuscript Chronicles seen by Grotius testify. And Olympiodorus, who carries his history only to the year 425, sets down therein the death of Valia King of the Visigoths, and conjoins it with that of Constantius which happened A.C. 420. Wherefore the Valia of Jornandes, who reigned at the least twelve years, is some other King. And I suspect that this name hath been put by mistake for Valamir King of the Ostrogoths: for the action recorded was of the Romans and Ostrogoths driving the Hunns out of Pannonia after the death of Attila; and it is not likely that the historian would refer the history of the Ostrogoths to the years of the Visigothic Kings. This action happened in the end of the year 455, which I take to be the twelfth year of Valamir in Pannonia, and which was almost fifty years after the year 406, in which the Hunns succeeded the Vandals and Alans in Pannonia. Upon the ceasing of the line of Hunnimund the son of Hermaneric, the Ostrogoths lived without Kings of their own nation about forty years together, being subject to the Hunns. And when Alaric began to make war upon the Romans, which was in the year 444, he made Valamir, with his brothers Theodomir and Videmir the grandsons of Vinethar, captains or kings of these Ostrogoths under him. In the twelfth year of Valamir's reign dated from thence, the Hunns were driven out of Pannonia.

Yet the Hunns were not so ejected, but that they had further contests with the Romans, till the head of Denfix the son of Attila, was carried to Constantinople, A.C. 469, in the Consulship of Zeno and Marcian, as Marcellinus relates. Nor were they yet totally ejected the Empire: for besides their reliques in Pannonia, Sigonius tells us, that when the Emperors Marcian and Valentinian granted Pannonia to the Goths, which was in the year 454, they granted part of Illyricum to some of the Hunns and Sarmatians. And in the year 526, when the Lombards removing into Pannonia made war there with the Gepides, the Avares, a part of the Hunns, who had taken the name of Avares from one of their Kings, assisted the Lombards in that war; and the Lombards afterwards, when they went into Italy, left their seats in Pannonia to the Avares in recompence of their friendship. From that time the Hunns grew again very powerful; their Kings, whom they called Chagan, troubling the Empire much in the reigns of the Emperors Mauritius, Phocas, and Heraclius: and this is the original of the present kingdom of Hungary, which from these Avares and other Hunns mixed together, took the name of Hun-Avaria, and by contraction Hungary.

9 The Lombards, before they came over the Danube, were commanded by two captains, Ibor and Ayon: after whose death they had Kings, Agilmund, Lamisso, Lechu, Hildehoc, Gudehoc, Classo, Tato, Wacho, Walter, Audoin, Alboin, Cleophis, &c. Agilmund was the son of Ayon, who became their King, according to Prosper, in the Consulship of Honorius and Theodosius A.C. 389, reigned thirty three years, according to Paulus Warnefridus, and was slain in battle by the Bulgarians. Prosper places his death in the Consulship of Marinianus and Asclepiodorus, A.C. 413. Lamisso routed the Bulgarians, and reigned three years, and Lechu almost forty. Gudehoc was contemporary to Odoacer King of the Heruli in Italy, and led his people from Pannonia into Rugia, a country on the north side of Noricum next beyond the Danube; from whence Odoacer then carried his people into Italy. Tato overthrew the kingdom of the Heruli beyond the Danube. Wacho conquered the Suevians, a kingdom then bounded on the east by Bavaria, on the west by France, and on the south by the Burgundians. Audoin returned into Pannonia A.C. 526, and there overcame the Gepides. Alboin A.C. 551 overthrew the kingdom of the Gepides, and slew their King Chunnimund: A.C. 563 he assisted the Greek Emperor against Totila King of the Ostrogoths in Italy; and A.C. 568 led his people out of Pannonia into Lombardy, where they reigned till the year 774.

According to Paulus Diaconus, the Lombards with many other Gothic nations came into the Empire from beyond the Danube in the reign of Arcadius and Honorius, that is, between the years 395 and 408. But they might come in a little earlier: for we are told that the Lombards, under their captains Ibor and Ayon, beat the Vandals in battle; and Prosper placeth this victory in the Consulship of Ausonius and Olybrius, that is, A.C. 379. Before this war the Vandals had remained quiet forty years in the seats granted them in Pannonia by Constantine the great. And therefore if these were the same Vandals, this war must have been in Pannonia; and might be occasioned by the coming of the Lombards over the Danube into Pannonia, a year or two before the battle; and so have put an end to that quiet which had lasted forty years. After Gratian and Theodosius had quieted the Barbarians, they might either retire over the Danube, or continue quiet under the Romans till the death of Theodosius; and then either invade the Empire anew, or throw off all subjection to it. By their wars, first with the Vandals, and then with the Bulgarians, a Scythian nation so called from the river Volga whence they came; it appears that even in those days they were a kingdom not contemptible.

10 These nine kingdoms being rent away, we are next to consider the residue of the Western Empire. While this Empire continued entire, it was the Beast itself: but the residue thereof is only a part of it. Now if this part be considered as a horn, the reign of this horn may be dated from the translation of the imperial seat from Rome to Ravenna, which was in October A.C. 408. For then the Emperor Honorius, fearing that Alaric would besiege him in Rome, if he staid there, retired to Millain, and thence to Ravenna: and the ensuing siege and sacking of Rome confirmed his residence there, so that he and his successors ever after made it their home. Accordingly Macchiavel in his Florentine history writes, that Valentinian having left Rome, translated the seat of the Empire to Ravenna.

Rhætia belonged to the Western Emperors, so long as that Empire stood; and then it descended, with Italy and the Roman Senate, to Odoacer King of the Heruli in Italy, and after him to Theoderic King of the Ostrogoths and his successors, by the grant of the Greek Emperors. Upon the death of Valentinian the second, the Alemans and Suevians invaded Rhætia A.C. 455. But I do not find they erected any settled kingdom there: for in the year 457, while they were yet depopulating Rhætia, they were attacked and beaten by Burto Master of the horse to the Emperor Majoranus; and I hear nothing more of their invading Rhætia. Clodovæus King of France, in or about the year 496, conquered a kingdom of the Alemans, and slew their last King Ermeric. But this kingdom was seated in Germany, and only bordered upon Rhætia: for its people fled from Clodovæus into the neighbouring kingdom of the Ostrogoths under Theoderic, who received them as friends, and wrote a friendly letter to Clodovæus in their behalf: and by this means they became inhabitants of Rhætia, as subjects under the dominion of the Ostrogoths.

When the Greek Emperor conquered the Ostrogoths, he succeeded them in the kingdom of Ravenna, not only by right of conquest but also by right of inheritance, the Roman Senate still going along with this kingdom. Therefore we may reckon that this kingdom continued in the Exarchate of Ravenna and Senate of Rome: for the remainder of the Western Empire went along with the Senate of Rome, by reason of the right which this Senate still retained, and at length exerted, of chusing a new Western Emperor.

I have now enumerated the ten kingdoms, into which the Western Empire became divided at its first breaking, that is, at the time of Rome's being besieged and taken by the Goths. Some of these kingdoms at length fell, and new ones arose: but whatever was their number afterwards, they are still called the Ten Kings from their first number.

Notes to Chap. VI.

1 Apud Bucherum, l. 14. c. 9. n. 8.

2 Rolevinc's Antiqua Saxon. l. 1. c. 6.

Between the death of Constantine and the reign of Vortigern there was an interregnum of about 14 years. In it the Britons fought the Picts and Scots, and twice got help from a Roman Legion. The Legion drove the enemy out, but said plainly when it left that it would not come again. Of the start of Vortigern's reign there is this record in an old Chronicle in Nennius, quoted by Camden and others: "Guortigernus held the rule in Britain, Theodosius and Valentinian being Consuls [that is, A.C. 425.]; and in the fourth year of his reign the Saxons came to Britain, Felix and Taurus being Consuls [that is, A.C. 428.]" This coming of the Saxons, Sigebert refers to the 4th year of Valentinian, which matches the year 428 given by this Chronicle; and two years later the Saxons together with the Picts were beaten by the Britons. Later, in the reign of the Emperor Martian, that is, between the years 450 and 456, the Britons called in the Saxons under Hengist. Six years later the Saxons broke away from them, made war on them with varying success, and in time took their place. Even so, the Britons remained a flourishing kingdom until the reign of Careticus; and the war between the two nations went on until the pontificate of Sergius, A.C. 688.2

8 The Kings of the Hunns were, in A.C. 406, Octar and Rugila, and in 433, Bleda and Attila. Octar and Rugila were brothers of Munzuc King of the Hunns in Gothia beyond the Danube; Bleda and Attila were his sons, and Munzuc was the son of Balamir. As Jornandes tells us, the first two were Kings of the Hunns, but not of all of them, and the last two succeeded them. I date the reign of the Hunns in Pannonia from the time the Vandals and Alans gave up Pannonia to them, A.C. 407. Sigonius dates it from the time the Visigoths gave up Pannonia, A.C. 408. "It is clear," he says, "that when the Goths set out from Illyricum the Hunns came after them, and first of all took hold of Pannonia. Honorius, it is true, lacked the strength to resist in such difficulties and could not hold them back outright; but with better judgment he turned his mind to peace, and made a treaty with them, giving and receiving hostages. Of those who were given, Ætius is named above the rest, since he had also been handed over to Alaric." How Ætius came to be a hostage to the Goths and the Hunns is told by Frigeridus. He says that Theodosius Emperor of the East had sent harsh commands to John, who after the death of Honorius had seized the crown of the Western Empire, and then adds: "Moved by these things, John sent Ætius, who at that time held the office of chamberlain, to the Hunns with a great weight of gold; they were people known to him and bound to him by familiar friendship, going back to the time of his own hostage-taking." And a little later: "Ætius was a hostage to Alaric for three years, then to the Hunns, and later the son-in-law of Carpilio, moving from Count of the household troops to become John's curopalate." Now Bucher shows that Ætius was a hostage to Alaric until the year 410, when Alaric died; to the Hunns between the years 411 and 415; son-in-law to Carpilio about the year 417 or 418; and curopalate to John about the end of the year 423. So it is likely that he became a hostage to the Hunns about the year 412 or 413, when Honorius made treaties with almost all the barbarous nations and granted them seats. But I would rather say with Sigonius that Ætius became a hostage to Alaric in A.C. 403. It is further clear from Prosper that the Hunns were in quiet possession of Pannonia in the year 432. For in the first book of Eusebius's Chronicle Prosper writes: "In the tenth year after the death of Honorius, when Ætius, after his battle with Boniface, had made his way to the nation of the Hunns, then led by Rugila, he got help from them and returned to Roman soil." And in the second book: "In the consulship of Ætius and Valerius, Ætius, his power laid aside, fled as a refugee to the Hunns in Pannonia. Using their friendship and help, he won peace from the rulers, his own authority having been cut short." Here it appears that at this time Rugila, or as Maximus calls him, Rechilla, ruled the Hunns in Pannonia; that Pannonia was not even counted part of the soil of the Empire by then, since it had long before been granted away to the Hunns; and that these were the very same Hunns with whom Ætius, in the time he was a hostage, had made friends. By that friendship, as he had earlier brought them in to help John the Tyrant in A.C. 424, so now he got them to speak up for him with the Emperor. Octar died A.C. 430; for Socrates tells us that about that time the Burgundians, newly troubled by the Hunns, heard of Octar's death, saw the Hunns without a leader, and fell on them so suddenly and hard that 3000 Burgundians killed 10000 Hunns. You have already heard of Rugila being now King in Pannonia. He died A.C. 433 and was succeeded by Bleda, as Prosper and Maximus inform us. Before this time Bleda and his brother Attila had been Kings of the Hunns beyond the Danube, their father Munzuc's kingdom divided between them; now they added the kingdom of Pannonia to their own. So Paulus Diaconus says they "did rule the kingdom within Pannonia and Dacia." In the year 441 they began to invade the Empire again, adding new and great armies from Scythia to the forces in Pannonia. But this war was soon settled, and then Attila, seeing Bleda leaned toward peace, killed him, A.C. 444, took over his lands, and invaded the Empire again. At last, after many great wars with the Romans, Attila died A.C. 454. His sons then quarreled over his lands, which gave the Gepids, Ostrogoths and other nations that had been their subjects the chance to rebel and make war on them. That same year the Ostrogoths were granted seats in Pannonia by the Emperors Marcian and Valentinian; and together with the Romans they drove the Hunns out of Pannonia soon after the death of Attila, as all historians agree. This expulsion took place in the reign of Avitus, as the Chronicum Boiorum mentions, and as Sidonius says in his Poem 7 on Avitus, which speaks like this of that Emperor:

— By whose coming, after many long ages, the long-lost Pannonias turned back to their path; now it is easy to believe. What will he do in war.

The poet means that with the coming of Avitus the Hunns gave way to the Goths more easily. Sidonius wrote this at the start of the reign of Avitus; his reign began at the end of the year 455 and did not last one full year.

Jornandes tells us: "In the twelfth year of the reign of Valia, when the Hunns too, after almost fifty years of holding Pannonia, were driven out of it by the Romans and Goths." And Marcellinus: "In the consulship of Hierius and Ardabur, Pannonia, which the Hunns had held for fifty years, was taken back by the Romans." From this it should seem that the Hunns invaded and held Pannonia from the year 378 or 379 to the year 427, and were then driven out of it. But this is a plain mistake. It is certain that the Emperor Theodosius left the Empire whole; and we have shown from Prosper that the Hunns were in quiet possession of Pannonia in the year 432. In those days the Visigoths had nothing to do with Pannonia, and the Ostrogoths stayed subject to the Hunns until the death of Attila, A.C. 454; and Valia King of the Visigoths did not reign twelve years. He began his reign at the end of the year 415, reigned three years, and was killed A.C. 419, as Idacius, Isidorus, and the Spanish manuscript Chronicles seen by Grotius testify. Olympiodorus, who carries his history only to the year 425, records in it the death of Valia King of the Visigoths, and joins it with that of Constantius, which happened A.C. 420. So the Valia of Jornandes, who reigned at least twelve years, is some other King. I suspect that this name was put by mistake for Valamir King of the Ostrogoths: the deed recorded was of the Romans and Ostrogoths driving the Hunns out of Pannonia after the death of Attila; and it is unlikely that the historian would date the history of the Ostrogoths by the years of the Visigothic Kings. This deed happened at the end of the year 455, which I take to be the twelfth year of Valamir in Pannonia, and which was almost fifty years after the year 406, in which the Hunns took Pannonia over from the Vandals and Alans. When the line of Hunnimund the son of Hermaneric died out, the Ostrogoths lived without Kings of their own nation for about forty years together, being subject to the Hunns. When Alaric began to make war on the Romans, which was in the year 444, he made Valamir, with his brothers Theodomir and Videmir, the grandsons of Vinethar, the captains or kings of these Ostrogoths under him. Counting from that point, in the twelfth year of Valamir's reign the Hunns were driven out of Pannonia.

Even so, the Hunns were not driven out for good; they still had contests with the Romans, until the head of Denfix the son of Attila was carried to Constantinople, A.C. 469, in the consulship of Zeno and Marcian, as Marcellinus relates. Nor were they yet completely out of the Empire. Besides their remains in Pannonia, Sigonius tells us that when the Emperors Marcian and Valentinian granted Pannonia to the Goths, which was in the year 454, they granted part of Illyricum to some of the Hunns and Sarmatians. And in the year 526, when the Lombards moved into Pannonia and made war there with the Gepids, the Avares, a part of the Hunns who had taken the name Avares from one of their Kings, helped the Lombards in that war. Later, when the Lombards went into Italy, they left their seats in Pannonia to the Avares in return for their friendship. From that time the Hunns grew powerful again. Their Kings, whom they called Chagan, troubled the Empire much in the reigns of the Emperors Mauritius, Phocas, and Heraclius. This is the origin of the present kingdom of Hungary, which took its name from these Avares and other Hunns mixed together: Hun-Avaria, shortened to Hungary.

9 Before they came over the Danube, the Lombards were led by two captains, Ibor and Ayon. After their death they had Kings: Agilmund, Lamisso, Lechu, Hildehoc, Gudehoc, Classo, Tato, Wacho, Walter, Audoin, Alboin, Cleophis, etc. Agilmund was the son of Ayon. He became their King, according to Prosper, in the consulship of Honorius and Theodosius, A.C. 389; he reigned thirty three years, according to Paulus Warnefridus, and was killed in battle by the Bulgarians. Prosper places his death in the consulship of Marinianus and Asclepiodorus, A.C. 413. Lamisso defeated the Bulgarians and reigned three years, and Lechu almost forty. Gudehoc was a contemporary of Odoacer King of the Heruli in Italy, and led his people from Pannonia into Rugia, a country on the north side of Noricum, next beyond the Danube; from there Odoacer then carried his people into Italy. Tato overthrew the kingdom of the Heruli beyond the Danube. Wacho conquered the Suevians, a kingdom then bounded on the east by Bavaria, on the west by France, and on the south by the Burgundians. Audoin returned to Pannonia A.C. 526 and there defeated the Gepids. Alboin in A.C. 551 overthrew the kingdom of the Gepids and killed their King Chunnimund. In A.C. 563 he helped the Greek Emperor against Totila King of the Ostrogoths in Italy; and in A.C. 568 he led his people out of Pannonia into Lombardy, where they reigned until the year 774.

According to Paulus Diaconus, the Lombards with many other Gothic nations came into the Empire from beyond the Danube in the reign of Arcadius and Honorius, that is, between the years 395 and 408. But they might have come a little earlier. We are told that the Lombards, under their captains Ibor and Ayon, beat the Vandals in battle; and Prosper places this victory in the consulship of Ausonius and Olybrius, that is, A.C. 379. Before this war the Vandals had kept quiet for forty years in the seats granted them in Pannonia by Constantine the Great. So if these were the same Vandals, this war must have been in Pannonia. It might have been caused by the Lombards coming over the Danube into Pannonia a year or two before the battle, and so putting an end to the quiet that had lasted forty years. After Gratian and Theodosius had settled the Barbarians, they might either have retired across the Danube or stayed quiet under the Romans until the death of Theodosius, and then either invade the Empire again or throw off all obedience to it. From their wars, first with the Vandals and then with the Bulgarians, a Scythian nation named after the river Volga from which they came, it is clear that even in those days the Lombards were a kingdom not to be taken lightly.

10 With these nine kingdoms torn away, we next consider the rest of the Western Empire. While that Empire stayed whole, it was the Beast itself; but the rest of it is only a part. If this part is taken as a horn, then the reign of this horn may be dated from the move of the imperial seat from Rome to Ravenna, which was in October A.C. 408. For then the Emperor Honorius, fearing that Alaric would besiege him in Rome if he stayed there, withdrew to Millain, and from there to Ravenna; and the siege and sacking of Rome that followed kept him there, so he and his successors made it their home ever after. Accordingly Macchiavel writes in his Florentine history that Valentinian, having left Rome, moved the seat of the Empire to Ravenna.

Rhætia belonged to the Western Emperors as long as that Empire stood; and then it passed, with Italy and the Roman Senate, to Odoacer King of the Heruli in Italy, and after him to Theoderic King of the Ostrogoths and his successors, by the grant of the Greek Emperors. After the death of Valentinian the second, the Alemans and Suevians invaded Rhætia A.C. 455. But I do not find that they set up any settled kingdom there: in the year 457, while they were still wasting Rhætia, they were attacked and beaten by Burto, master of the horse to the Emperor Majoranus; and I hear nothing more of them invading Rhætia. Clodovæus King of France, in or about the year 496, conquered a kingdom of the Alemans and killed their last King Ermeric. But that kingdom lay in Germany and only bordered on Rhætia. Its people fled from Clodovæus into the neighboring kingdom of the Ostrogoths under Theoderic, who received them as friends and wrote a friendly letter to Clodovæus on their behalf. By this means they became inhabitants of Rhætia, as subjects under the dominion of the Ostrogoths.

When the Greek Emperor conquered the Ostrogoths, he succeeded them in the kingdom of Ravenna, not only by right of conquest but also by right of inheritance, the Roman Senate still going along with this kingdom. So we may count this kingdom as continuing in the Exarchate of Ravenna and the Senate of Rome: for the rest of the Western Empire went with the Senate of Rome, because of the right this Senate always kept, and at last used, of choosing a new Western Emperor.

I have now listed the ten kingdoms into which the Western Empire was divided at its first breaking, that is, at the time Rome was besieged and taken by the Goths. Some of these kingdoms in time fell, and new ones arose; but whatever their number was later, they are still called the Ten Kings from their first number.

Notes to Chap. VI.

1 In Bucher, book 14, chapter 9, no. 8.

2 Rolevinc's Antiqua Saxon. book 1, chapter 6.

Part I, Chapter 7, 1

Of the eleventh horn of Daniel's fourth Beast.

1 Now Daniel, considered the horns, and behold there came up among them another horn, before whom there were three of the first horns pluckt up by the roots; and behold in this horn were eyes like the eyes of a man, and a mouth speaking great things,--and2 his look was more stout than his fellows,--and the same horn made war with the saints, and prevailed against them: and one who stood by, and made Daniel know the interpretation of these things, told him, that3 the ten horns were ten kings that should arise, and another should arise after them, and be diverse from the first, and he should subdue three kings,4 and speak great words against the most High, and wear out the saints, and think to change times and laws: and that they should be given into his hands until a time and times and half a time. Kings are put for kingdoms, as above; and therefore the little horn is a little kingdom. It was a horn of the fourth Beast, and rooted up three of his first horns; and therefore we are to look for it among the nations of the Latin Empire, after the rise of the ten horns. But it was a kingdom of a different kind from the other ten kingdoms, having a life or soul peculiar to itself, with eyes and a mouth. By its eyes it was a Seer; and by its mouth speaking great things and changing times and laws, it was a Prophet as well as a King. And such a Seer, a Prophet and a King, is the Church of Rome.

A Seer, [Greek: Episkopos], is a Bishop in the literal sense of the word; and this Church claims the universal Bishoprick.

With his mouth he gives laws to kings and nations as an Oracle; and pretends to Infallibility, and that his dictates are binding to the whole world; which is to be a Prophet in the highest degree.

In the eighth century, by rooting up and subduing the Exarchate of Ravenna, the kingdom of the Lombards, and the Senate and Dukedom of Rome, he acquired Peter's Patrimony out of their dominions; and thereby rose up as a temporal Prince or King, or horn of the fourth Beast.

In a small book printed at Paris A.C. 1689, entitled, An historical dissertation upon some coins of Charles the great, Ludovicus Pius, Lotharius, and their successors stamped at Rome, it is recorded, that in the days of Pope Leo X, there was remaining in the Vatican, and till those days exposed to public view, an inscription in honour of Pipin the father of Charles the great, in these words: Pipinum pium, primum fuisse qui amplificandæ Ecclesiæ Romanæ viam aperuerit, Exarchatu Ravennate, & plurimis aliis oblatis; "That Pipin the pious was the first who opened a way to the grandeur of the Church of Rome, conferring upon her the Exarchate of Ravenna and many other oblations." In and before the reign of the Emperors Gratian and Theodosius, the Bishop of Rome lived splendidly; but this was by the oblations of the Roman Ladies, as Ammianus describes. After those reigns Italy was invaded by foreign nations, and did not get rid of her troubles before the fall of the kingdom of Lombardy. It was certainly by the victory of the see of Rome over the Greek Emperor, the King of Lombardy, and the Senate of Rome, that she acquired Peter's Patrimony, and rose up to her greatness. The donation of Constantine the Great is a fiction, and so is the donation of the Alpes Cottiæ to the Pope by Aripert King of the Lombards: for the Alpes Cottiæ were a part of the Exarchate, and in the days of Aripert belonged to the Greek Emperor.

The invocation of the dead, and veneration of their images, being gradually introduced in the 4th, 5th, 6th and 7th centuries, the Greek Emperor Philippicus declared against the latter, A.C. 711 or 712. And5 the Emperor Leo Isaurus, to put a stop to it, called a meeting of Counsellors and Bishops in his Palace, A.C. 726; and by their advice put out an Edict against that worship, and wrote to Pope Gregory II. that a general Council might be called. But the Pope thereupon called a Council at Rome, confirmed the worship of Images, excommunicated the Greek Emperor, absolved the people from their allegiance, and forbad them to pay tribute, or otherwise be obedient to him. Then the people of Rome, Campania, Ravenna and Pentapolis, with the cities under them, revolted and laid violent hands upon their magistrates, killing the Exarch Paul at Ravenna, and laying aside Peter Duke of Rome who was become blind: and when Exhileratus Duke of Campania incited the people against the Pope, the Romans invaded Campania, and slew him with his son Hadrian. Then a new Exarch, Eutychius, coming to Naples, sent some secretly to take away the lives of the Pope and the Nobles of Rome: but the plot being discovered, the Romans revolted absolutely from the Greek Emperor, and took an oath to preserve the life of the Pope, to defend his state, and be obedient to his authority in all things. Thus Rome with its Duchy, including part of Tuscany and part of Campania, revolted in the year 726, and became a free state under the government of the Senate of this city. The authority of the Senate in civil affairs was henceforward absolute, the authority of the Pope extending hitherto no farther than to the affairs of the Church only.

At that time6 the Lombards also being zealous for the worship of images, and pretending to favour the cause of the Pope, invaded the cities of the Exarchate: and at length, viz. A.C. 752, took Ravenna, and put an end to the Exarchate. And this was the first of the three kingdoms which fell before the little horn.

In the year 7517 Pope Zechary deposed Childeric, a slothful and useless King of France, and the last of the race of Merovæus; and absolving his subjects from their oath of allegiance, gave the kingdom to Pipin the major of the Palace; and thereby made a new and potent friend. His successor8 Pope Stephen III, knowing better how to deal with the Greek Emperor than with the Lombards, went the next year to the King of the Lombards, to persuade him to return the Exarchate to the Emperor. But this not succeeding, he went into France, and persuaded Pipin to take the Exarchate and Pentapolis from the Lombards, and give it to St. Peter. Accordingly Pipin A.C. 754 came with an army into Italy, and made Aistulphus King of the Lombards promise the surrender: but the next year Aistulphus, on the contrary, to revenge himself on the Pope, besieged the city of Rome. Whereupon the Pope sent letters to Pipin, wherein he told him that if he came not speedily against the Lombards, pro data sibi potentia, alienandum fore à regno Dei & vita æterna, he should be excommunicated. Pipin therefore, fearing a revolt of his subjects, and being indebted to the Church of Rome, came speedily with an army into Italy, raised the siege, besieged the Lombards in Pavia, and forced them to surrender the Exarchate and region of Pentapolis to the Pope for a perpetual possession. Thus the Pope became Lord of Ravenna, and the Exarchate, some few cities excepted; and the keys were sent to Rome, and laid upon the confession of St. Peter, that is, upon his tomb at the high Altar, in signum veri perpetuique dominii, sed pietate Regis gratuita, as the inscription of a coin of Pipin hath it. This was in the year of Christ 755. And henceforward the Popes being temporal Princes, left off in their Epistles and Bulls to note the years of the Greek Emperors, as they had hitherto done.

After this9 the Lombards invading the Pope's countries, Pope Adrian sent to Charles the great, the son and successor of Pipin, to come to his assistance. Accordingly Charles entered Italy with an army, invaded the Lombards, overthrew their kingdom, became master of their countries, and restored to the Pope, not only what they had taken from him, but also the rest of the Exarchate which they had promised Pipin to surrender to him, but had hitherto detained; and also gave him some cities of the Lombards, and was in return himself made Patricius by the Romans, and had the authority of confirming the elections of the Popes conferred upon him. These things were done in the years 773 and 774. This kingdom of the Lombards was the second kingdom which fell before the little horn. But Rome, which was to be the seat of his kingdom, was not yet his own.

In the year 796,10 Leo III being made Pope, notified his election to Charles the great by his Legates, sending to him for a present, the golden keys of the Confession of Peter, and the Banner of the city of Rome: the first as an acknowledgment of the Pope's holding the cities of the Exarchate and Lombardy by the grant of Charles; the other as a signification that Charles should come and subdue the Senate and people of Rome, as he had done the Exarchate and the kingdom of the Lombards. For the Pope at the same time desired Charles to send some of his Princes to Rome, who might subject the Roman people to him, and bind them by oath in fide & subjectione, in fealty and subjection, as his words are recited by Sigonius. An anonymous Poet, publish'd by Boeclerus at Strasburg, expresseth it thus:

Admonuitque piis precibus, qui mittere vellet Ex propriis aliquos primoribus, ac sibi plebem Subdere Romanam, servandaque foedera cogens Hanc fidei sacramentis promittere magnis.

Of the eleventh horn of Daniel's fourth Beast.

1 Now Daniel considered the horns, and there among them came up another horn, before whom three of the first horns were pulled up by the roots; and in this horn were eyes like the eyes of a man, and a mouth speaking great things;2 its look was more proud than its fellows; and the same horn made war with the saints, and overpowered them. One who stood by, and made Daniel know the interpretation of these things, told him that3 the ten horns were ten kings that should arise, and another should arise after them, and be different from the first, and he should subdue three kings,4 and speak great words against the most High, and wear out the saints, and think to change times and laws: and that they should be given into his hands until a time and times and half a time. Kings stand for kingdoms, as above; and so the little horn is a little kingdom. It was a horn of the fourth Beast, and rooted up three of his first horns; so we are to look for it among the nations of the Latin Empire, after the rise of the ten horns. But it was a kingdom of a different kind from the other ten kingdoms, having a life or soul of its own, with eyes and a mouth. By its eyes it was a Seer; and by its mouth, speaking great things and changing times and laws, it was a Prophet as well as a King. And such a Seer, a Prophet and a King, is the Church of Rome.

A Seer, the Greek word "Episkopos," is a Bishop in the literal sense of the word; and this Church claims the universal bishopric.

With his mouth he gives laws to kings and nations like an Oracle; and he claims Infallibility, and that his dictates are binding on the whole world; which is being a Prophet in the highest degree.

In the eighth century, by rooting up and subduing the Exarchate of Ravenna, the kingdom of the Lombards, and the Senate and Dukedom of Rome, he acquired Peter's Patrimony out of their lands; and so he rose up as a temporal Prince or King, a horn of the fourth Beast.

In a small book printed at Paris in A.C. 1689, entitled, An historical dissertation upon some coins of Charles the great, Ludovicus Pius, Lotharius, and their successors stamped at Rome, it is recorded that in the days of Pope Leo X there was still remaining in the Vatican, and exposed to public view until those days, an inscription in honor of Pipin the father of Charles the great, in these words: Pipinum pium, primum fuisse qui amplificandæ Ecclesiæ Romanæ viam aperuerit, Exarchatu Ravennate, & plurimis aliis oblatis; "That Pipin the pious was the first who opened a way to the grandeur of the Church of Rome, conferring upon her the Exarchate of Ravenna and many other oblations." In and before the reign of the Emperors Gratian and Theodosius, the Bishop of Rome lived splendidly; but this was by the gifts of the Roman Ladies, as Ammianus describes. After those reigns Italy was invaded by foreign nations, and did not get clear of her troubles before the fall of the kingdom of Lombardy. It was certainly by the victory of the see of Rome over the Greek Emperor, the King of Lombardy, and the Senate of Rome, that she acquired Peter's Patrimony, and rose up to her greatness. The donation of Constantine the Great is a fiction, and so is the donation of the Alpes Cottiæ to the Pope by Aripert King of the Lombards: for the Alpes Cottiæ were part of the Exarchate, and in the days of Aripert belonged to the Greek Emperor.

The calling on the dead, and the honoring of their images, were gradually introduced in the 4th, 5th, 6th and 7th centuries. The Greek Emperor Philippicus declared against the latter, A.C. 711 or 712. And5 the Emperor Leo Isaurus, to put a stop to it, called a meeting of Counselors and Bishops in his Palace, A.C. 726; and on their advice issued an Edict against that worship, and wrote to Pope Gregory II. that a general Council might be called. But the Pope at once called a Council at Rome, confirmed the worship of Images, excommunicated the Greek Emperor, released the people from their allegiance, and forbade them to pay tribute or otherwise be obedient to him. Then the people of Rome, Campania, Ravenna and Pentapolis, with the cities under them, revolted and laid violent hands upon their magistrates, killing the Exarch Paul at Ravenna, and removing Peter Duke of Rome, who had become blind. When Exhileratus Duke of Campania stirred up the people against the Pope, the Romans invaded Campania, and killed him with his son Hadrian. Then a new Exarch, Eutychius, coming to Naples, sent some men secretly to take away the lives of the Pope and the Nobles of Rome; but the plot was discovered, and the Romans broke completely with the Greek Emperor, and swore an oath to preserve the life of the Pope, to defend his state, and to obey his authority in all things. In this way Rome with its Duchy, including part of Tuscany and part of Campania, revolted in the year 726, and became a free state under the government of the Senate of this city. From then on the authority of the Senate in civil affairs was absolute, while the authority of the Pope went no further than the affairs of the Church alone.

At that time6 the Lombards too were zealous for the worship of images, and claimed to support the cause of the Pope; they invaded the cities of the Exarchate, and at last, in A.C. 752, took Ravenna and put an end to the Exarchate. This was the first of the three kingdoms that fell before the little horn.

In the year 7517 Pope Zechary deposed Childeric, a lazy and useless King of France, and the last of the race of Merovæus; and releasing his subjects from their oath of allegiance, he gave the kingdom to Pipin the major of the Palace, and so made a new and powerful friend. His successor8 Pope Stephen III, knowing better how to deal with the Greek Emperor than the Lombards, went the next year to the King of the Lombards to persuade him to return the Exarchate to the Emperor. When this did not succeed, he went into France, and persuaded Pipin to take the Exarchate and Pentapolis from the Lombards, and give it to St. Peter. So Pipin in A.C. 754 came with an army into Italy, and made Aistulphus King of the Lombards promise the surrender; but the next year Aistulphus did the opposite, and to revenge himself on the Pope besieged the city of Rome. So the Pope sent letters to Pipin, telling him that if he did not come quickly against the Lombards, pro data sibi potentia, alienandum fore à regno Dei & vita æterna, he should be excommunicated. Pipin, fearing a revolt of his subjects and being indebted to the Church of Rome, came quickly with an army into Italy, raised the siege, besieged the Lombards in Pavia, and forced them to surrender the Exarchate and the region of Pentapolis to the Pope for a perpetual possession. So the Pope became Lord of Ravenna and the Exarchate, except for a few cities; and the keys were sent to Rome, and laid upon the confession of St. Peter, that is, upon his tomb at the high Altar, in token of true and lasting lordship yet held by the King's free generosity, as the inscription on a coin of Pipin has it. This was in the year of Christ 755. And from then on the Popes, being temporal Princes, stopped noting the years of the Greek Emperors in their Epistles and Bulls, as they had done until then.

After this9 the Lombards invaded the countries of the Pope, and Pope Adrian sent to Charles the great, the son and successor of Pipin, to come to his help. So Charles entered Italy with an army, invaded the Lombards, overthrew their kingdom, became master of their countries, and restored to the Pope not only what they had taken from him, but also the rest of the Exarchate which they had promised Pipin to surrender to him and had held back until then; and he also gave him some cities of the Lombards. In return the Romans made him Patricius themselves, and gave him the authority of confirming the elections of the Popes. These things were done in the years 773 and 774. This kingdom of the Lombards was the second kingdom that fell before the little horn. But Rome, which was to be the seat of his kingdom, was not yet his own.

In the year 796,10 Leo III being made Pope, notified his election to Charles the great by his Legates, sending him as a present the golden keys of the Confession of Peter, and the Banner of the city of Rome: the first as an acknowledgment that the Pope held the cities of the Exarchate and Lombardy by the grant of Charles; the other to show that Charles should come and subdue the Senate and people of Rome, as he had done the Exarchate and the kingdom of the Lombards. For at the same time the Pope asked Charles to send some of his Princes to Rome, who might bring the Roman people under him, and bind them by oath in fide & subjectione, in fealty and subjection, as Sigonius recites his words. An anonymous Poet, published by Boeclerus at Strasburg, expresses it this way:

"And he urged him with earnest prayers, that if he wanted to send some of his own leading men, he would subject the Roman people to himself, and, forcing them to keep the treaties, make them promise this by great oaths of fealty."

Part I, Chapter 7, 2

Hence arose a misunderstanding between the Pope and the city: and the Romans about two or three years after, by assistance of some of the Clergy, raised such tumults against him, as gave occasion to a new state of things in all the West. For two of the Clergy accused him of crimes, and the Romans with an armed force, seized him, stript him of his sacerdotal habit, and imprisoned him in a monastery. But by assistance of his friends he made his escape, and fled into Germany to Charles the great, to whom he complained of the Romans for acting against him out of a design to throw off all authority of the Church, and to recover their antient freedom. In his absence his accusers with their forces ravaged the possessions of the Church, and sent the accusations to Charles; who before the end of the year sent the Pope back to Rome with a large retinue. The Nobles and Bishops of France who accompanied him, examined the chief of his accusers at Rome, and sent them into France in custody. This was in the year 799. The next year Charles himself went to Rome, and upon a day appointed presided in a Council of Italian and French Bishops to hear both parties. But when the Pope's adversaries expected to be heard, the Council declared11 that he who was the supreme judge of all men, was above being judged by any other than himself: whereupon he made a solemn declaration of his innocence before all the people, and by doing so was looked upon as acquitted.

Soon after, upon Christmas-day, the people of Rome, who had hitherto elected their Bishop, and reckoned that they and their Senate inherited the rights of the antient Senate and people of Rome, voted Charles their Emperor, and subjected themselves to him in such manner as the old Roman Empire and their Senate were subjected to the old Roman Emperors. The Pope crowned him, and anointed him with holy oil, and worshipped him on his knees after the manner of adoring the old Roman Emperors; as the aforesaid Poet thus relates:

Post laudes igitur dictas & summus eundem Præsul adoravit, sicut mos debitus olim Principibus fuit antiquis.

The Emperor, on the other hand, took the following oath to the Pope: In nomine Christi spondeo atque polliceor, Ego Carolus Imperator coram Deo & beato Petro Apostolo, me protectorem ac defensorem fore hujus sanctæ Romanæ Ecclesiæ in omnibus utilitatibus, quatenùs divino fultus fuero adjutorio, prout sciero poteroque. The Emperor was also made Consul of Rome, and his son Pipin crowned King of Italy: and henceforward the Emperor stiled himself: Carolus serenissimus, Augustus, à Deo coronatus, magnus, pacificus, Romæ gubernans imperium, or Imperator Romanorum; and was prayed for in the Churches of Rome. His image was henceforward put upon the coins of Rome: while the enemies of the Pope, to the number of three hundred Romans and two or three of the Clergy, were sentenced to death. The three hundred Romans were beheaded in one day in the Lateran fields: but the Clergymen at the intercession of the Pope were pardoned, and banished into France. And thus the title of Roman Emperor, which had hitherto been in the Greek Emperors, was by this act transferred in the West to the Kings of France.

After these things12 Charles gave the City and Duchy of Rome to the Pope, subordinately to himself as Emperor of the Romans; spent the winter in ordering the affairs of Rome, and those of the Apostolic see, and of all Italy, both civil and ecclesiastical, and in making new laws for them; and returned the next summer into France: leaving the city under its Senate, and both under the Pope and himself. But hearing that his new laws were not observed by the judges in dictating the law, nor by the people in hearing it; and that the great men took servants from free men, and from the Churches and Monasteries, to labour in their vineyards, fields, pastures and houses, and continued to exact cattle and wine of them, and to oppress those that served the Churches: he wrote to his son Pipin to remedy these abuses, to take care of the Church, and see his laws executed.

Now the Senate and people and principality of Rome I take to be the third King the little horn overcame, and even the chief of the three. For this people elected the Pope and the Emperor; and now, by electing the Emperor and making him Consul, was acknowledged to retain the authority of the old Roman Senate and people. This city was the Metropolis of the old Roman Empire, represented in Daniel by the fourth Beast; and by subduing the Senate and people and Duchy, it became the Metropolis of the little horn of that Beast, and completed Peter's Patrimony, which was the kingdom of that horn. Besides, this victory was attended with greater consequences than those over the other two Kings. For it set up the Western Empire, which continues to this day. It set up the Pope above the judicature of the Roman Senate, and above that of a Council of Italian and French Bishops, and even above all human judicature; and gave him the supremacy over the Western Churches and their Councils in a high degree. It gave him a look more stout than his fellows; so that when this new religion began to be established in the minds of men, he grappled not only with Kings, but even with the Western Emperor himself. It is observable also, that the custom of kissing the Pope's feet, an honour superior to that of Kings and Emperors, began about this time. There are some instances of it in the ninth century: Platina tells us, that the feet of Pope Leo IV were kissed, according to antient custom, by all who came to him: and some say that Leo III began this custom, pretending that his hand was infected by the kiss of a woman. The Popes began also about this time to canonize saints, and to grant indulgences and pardons: and some represent that Leo III was the first author of all these things. It is further observable, that Charles the great, between the years 775 and 796, conquered all Germany from the Rhine and Danube northward to the Baltic sea, and eastward to the river Teis; extending his conquests also into Spain as far as the river Ebro: and by these conquests he laid the foundation of the new Empire; and at the same time propagated the Roman Catholic religion into all his conquests, obliging the Saxons and Hunns who were heathens, to receive the Roman faith, and distributing his northern conquests into Bishopricks, granting tithes to the Clergy and Peter-pence to the Pope: by all which the Church of Rome was highly enlarged, enriched, exalted, and established.

In the forementioned dissertation upon some coins of Charles the great, Ludovicus Pius, Lotharius, and their successors, stamped at Rome, there is a draught of a piece of Mosaic work which Pope Leo III. caused to be made in his Palace near the Church of John Lateran, in memory of his sending the standard or banner of the city of Rome curiously wrought, to Charles the great; and which still remained there at the publishing of the said book. In the Mosaic work there appeared Peter with three keys in his lap, reaching the Pallium to the Pope with his right hand, and the banner of the city to Charles the great with his left. By the Pope was this inscription, SCISSIMUS D.N. LEO PP; by the King this, D.N. CARVLO REGI; and under the feet of Peter this, BEATE PETRE, DONA VITAM LEONI PP, ET BICTORIAM CARVLO REGI DONA. This Monument gives the title of King to Charles, and therefore was erected before he was Emperor. It was erected when Peter was reaching the Pallium to the Pope, and the Pope was sending the banner of the city to Charles, that is, A.C. 796. The words above, Sanctissimus Dominus noster Leo Papa Domino nostro Carolo Regi, relate to the message; and the words below, Beate Petre, dona vitam Leoni Papæ & victoriam Carolo regi dona, are a prayer that in this undertaking God would preserve the life of the Pope, and give victory to the King over the Romans. The three keys in the lap of Peter signify the keys of the three parts of his Patrimony, that of Rome with its Duchy, which the Pope claimed and was conquering, those of Ravenna with the Exarchate, and of the territories taken from the Lombards; both which he had newly conquered. These were the three dominions, whose keys were in the lap of St. Peter, and whose Crowns are now worn by the Pope, and by the conquest of which he became the little horn of the fourth Beast. By Peter's giving the Pallium to the Pope with his right hand, and the banner of the city to the King with his left, and by naming the Pope before the King in the inscription, may be understood that the Pope was then reckoned superior in dignity to the Kings of the earth.

After the death of Charles the great, his son and successor Ludovicus Pius, at the request of the Pope,13 confirmed the donations of his grandfather and father to the see of Rome. And in the confirmation he names first Rome with its Duchy extending into Tuscany and Campania; then the Exarchate of Ravenna, with Pentapolis; and in the third place, the territories taken from the Lombards. These are his three conquests, and he was to hold them of the Emperor for the use of the Church sub integritate, entirely, without the Emperor's medling therewith, or with the jurisdiction or power of the Pope therein, unless called thereto in certain cases. This ratification the Emperor Ludovicus made under an oath: and as the King of the Ostrogoths, for acknowledging that he held his kingdom of Italy of the Greek Emperor, stamped the effigies of the Emperor on one side of his coins and his own on the reverse; so the Pope made the like acknowledgment to the Western Emperor. For the Pope began now to coin money, and the coins of Rome are henceforward found with the heads of the Emperors, Charles, Ludovicus Pius, Lotharius, and their successors, on the one side, and the Pope's inscription on the reverse, for many years.

Notes to Chap. VII.

1 Chap. vii. 8.

2 Ver. 20, 21.

3 Ver. 24.

4 Ver. 25.

5 Sigonius de Regno Italiæ, ad Ann. 726.

6 Sigonius ib. ad Ann. 726, 752.

7 Sigon. ib. Ann. 750.

8 Sigon. ib. Ann. 753, 754, 755.

9 Sigon. ib. Ann. 773.

10 Sigon. de Regno Ital. ad Ann. 796.

11 Vide Anastasium.

12 Sigon. de Regno Ital.

13 Confirmationem recitat Sigonius, lib. 4. de Regno Italiæ, ad An. 817.

Hence arose a misunderstanding between the Pope and the city. About two or three years later, the Romans, with help from some of the clergy, raised such tumults against him that a new state of things arose throughout the West. For two of the clergy accused him of crimes, and the Romans seized him with an armed force, stripped him of his priestly robes, and imprisoned him in a monastery. With the help of his friends he escaped and fled into Germany, to Charles the great. He complained to Charles that the Romans had acted against him out of a design to throw off all authority of the Church and recover their old freedom. While he was away, his accusers and their forces ravaged the lands of the Church, and they sent their charges to Charles. Before the end of the year, Charles sent the Pope back to Rome with a large retinue. The nobles and bishops of France who came with him examined the chief of his accusers in Rome and sent them to France under guard. This was in the year 799. The next year Charles himself went to Rome, and on a day he had appointed presided at a Council of Italian and French bishops to hear both sides. But when the Pope's adversaries expected to be heard, the Council declared11 that he who was the supreme judge of all men could not be judged by anyone but himself. The Pope then made a solemn declaration of his innocence before all the people, and by doing so was considered acquitted.

Soon after, on Christmas Day, the people of Rome—who had until then elected their Bishop, and believed that they and their Senate inherited the rights of the old Senate and people of Rome—voted Charles their Emperor, and put themselves under him in the same way the old Roman Empire and its Senate were put under the old Roman Emperors. The Pope crowned him, anointed him with holy oil, and worshiped him on his knees, following the manner of honoring the old Roman Emperors; as the Poet mentioned above relates:

Post laudes igitur dictas & summus eundem Præsul adoravit, sicut mos debitus olim Principibus fuit antiquis.

The Emperor, in turn, took this oath to the Pope: In nomine Christi spondeo atque polliceor, Ego Carolus Imperator coram Deo & beato Petro Apostolo, me protectorem ac defensorem fore hujus sanctæ Romanæ Ecclesiæ in omnibus utilitatibus, quatenùs divino fultus fuero adjutorio, prout sciero poteroque. The Emperor was also made Consul of Rome, and his son Pipin was crowned King of Italy. From then on the Emperor styled himself: Carolus serenissimus, Augustus, à Deo coronatus, magnus, pacificus, Romæ gubernans imperium, or Imperator Romanorum; and prayers were offered for him in the Churches of Rome. His image was put on the coins of Rome from then on, while the Pope's enemies—three hundred Romans and two or three of the clergy—were sentenced to death. The three hundred Romans were beheaded in one day in the Lateran fields; but the clergymen were pardoned at the Pope's intercession and banished to France. In this way the title of Roman Emperor, which had until then belonged to the Greek Emperors, was transferred in the West to the Kings of France.

After this12 Charles gave the City and Duchy of Rome to the Pope, subject to himself as Emperor of the Romans. He spent the winter setting in order the affairs of Rome, those of the Apostolic see, and those of all Italy, both civil and ecclesiastical, and making new laws for them; then he returned to France the next summer, leaving the city under its Senate, and both the city and the Senate under the Pope and himself. But he heard that his new laws were not followed: the judges did not follow them when they stated the law, and the people did not follow them when they heard it. He also heard that powerful men took servants from free people, and from the Churches and Monasteries, to labor in their vineyards, fields, pastures, and houses; and that they kept demanding cattle and wine from them, and oppressed those who served the Churches. So he wrote to his son Pipin to remedy these abuses, to take care of the Church, and to see that his laws were carried out.

Now I take the Senate, people, and principality of Rome to be the third King that the little horn overcame, and even the chief of the three. For this people elected the Pope and the Emperor; and now, by electing the Emperor and making him Consul, it was acknowledged to still hold the authority of the old Roman Senate and people. This city was the chief city of the old Roman Empire, represented in Daniel by the fourth Beast; and by subduing the Senate and people and the Duchy, it became the chief city of the little horn of that Beast, and it completed Peter's Patrimony, which was the kingdom of that horn. Besides, this victory had greater consequences than those over the other two Kings. It set up the Western Empire, which continues to this day. It set up the Pope above the judgment of the Roman Senate, above that of a Council of Italian and French Bishops, and even above all human judgment; and it gave him the supremacy over the Western Churches and their Councils in a high degree. It gave him a look bolder than his fellows, so that when this new religion began to be established in people's minds, he grappled not only with Kings but even with the Western Emperor himself. It is also worth noting that the custom of kissing the Pope's feet, an honor above that of Kings and Emperors, began around this time. There are examples of it in the ninth century: Platina tells us that all who came to Pope Leo IV kissed his feet, according to old custom; and some say that Leo III began this custom, claiming that his hand was infected by the kiss of a woman. Around this time the Popes also began to canonize saints, and to grant indulgences and pardons; and some say that Leo III was the first author of all these things. It is further worth noting that Charles the great, between the years 775 and 796, conquered all Germany from the Rhine and Danube northward to the Baltic sea, and eastward to the river Teis; and he extended his conquests into Spain as far as the river Ebro. By these conquests he laid the foundation of the new Empire; and at the same time he spread the Roman Catholic religion into all his conquests, forcing the Saxons and Hunns, who were heathens, to receive the Roman faith. He divided his northern conquests into Bishoprics, granting tithes to the clergy and Peter-pence to the Pope. By all this the Church of Rome was greatly enlarged, enriched, exalted, and established.

In the dissertation mentioned above, upon some coins of Charles the great, Ludovicus Pius, Lotharius, and their successors, stamped at Rome, there is a drawing of a piece of Mosaic work that Pope Leo III had made in his Palace near the Church of John Lateran. It was made in memory of his sending the standard or banner of the city of Rome, richly worked, to Charles the great; and it was still there when the book mentioned above was published. In the Mosaic work there appeared Peter with three keys in his lap, handing the Pallium to the Pope with his right hand, and the banner of the city to Charles the great with his left. By the Pope was this inscription, SCISSIMUS D.N. LEO PP; by the King this, D.N. CARVLO REGI; and under Peter's feet this, BEATE PETRE, DONA VITAM LEONI PP, ET BICTORIAM CARVLO REGI DONA. This monument gives Charles the title of King, and so it was set up before he was Emperor. It was set up when Peter was handing the Pallium to the Pope and the Pope was sending the banner of the city to Charles; that is, in A.C. 796. The words above, Sanctissimus Dominus noster Leo Papa Domino nostro Carolo Regi, refer to the message; and the words below, Beate Petre, dona vitam Leoni Papæ & victoriam Carolo regi dona, are a prayer that in this undertaking God would preserve the life of the Pope and give the King victory over the Romans. The three keys in Peter's lap stand for the keys of the three parts of his Patrimony: Rome with its Duchy, which the Pope claimed and was conquering; Ravenna with the Exarchate; and the territories taken from the Lombards, both of which he had newly conquered. These were the three dominions whose keys were in the lap of St. Peter, and whose Crowns are now worn by the Pope, and by conquering which he became the little horn of the fourth Beast. From Peter's handing the Pallium to the Pope with his right hand and the banner of the city to the King with his left, and from the inscription naming the Pope before the King, it may be understood that the Pope was then considered superior in dignity to the Kings of the earth.

After the death of Charles the great, his son and successor Ludovicus Pius, at the Pope's request,13 confirmed the donations of his grandfather and father to the see of Rome. In the confirmation he first names Rome with its Duchy extending into Tuscany and Campania; then the Exarchate of Ravenna, with Pentapolis; and in the third place, the territories taken from the Lombards. These are his three conquests, and he was to hold them of the Emperor for the use of the Church sub integritate, entirely, without the Emperor meddling in them, or with the jurisdiction or power of the Pope there, unless he was called to act in certain cases. The Emperor Ludovicus made this ratification under an oath; and as the King of the Ostrogoths, to acknowledge that he held his kingdom of Italy from the Greek Emperor, stamped the image of the Emperor on one side of his coins and his own on the reverse, so the Pope made the same acknowledgment to the Western Emperor. For the Pope now began to coin money, and for many years the coins of Rome are found with the heads of the Emperors—Charles, Ludovicus Pius, Lotharius, and their successors—on one side, and the Pope's inscription on the reverse.

Notes to Chap. VII.

1 Chap. vii. 8.

2 Ver. 20, 21.

3 Ver. 24.

4 Ver. 25.

5 Sigonius de Regno Italiæ, ad Ann. 726.

6 Sigonius ib. ad Ann. 726, 752.

7 Sigon. ib. Ann. 750.

8 Sigon. ib. Ann. 753, 754, 755.

9 Sigon. ib. Ann. 773.

10 Sigon. de Regno Ital. ad Ann. 796.

11 Vide Anastasium.

12 Sigon. de Regno Ital.

13 Confirmationem recitat Sigonius, lib. 4. de Regno Italiæ, ad An. 817.

Part I, Chapter 8, 1

Of the power of the eleventh horn of Daniel's fourth Beast, to change times and laws.

In the reign of the Greek Emperor Justinian, and again in the reign of Phocas, the Bishop of Rome obtained some dominion over the Greek Churches, but of no long continuance. His standing dominion was only over the nations of the Western Empire, represented by Daniel's fourth Beast. And this jurisdiction was set up by the following Edict of the Emperors Gratian and Valentinian.--1 Volumus ut quicunque judicio Damasi, quod ille cum Concilio quinque vel septem habuerit Episcoporum, vel eorum qui Catholici sunt judicio vel Concilio condemnatus fuerit, si juste voluerit Ecclesiam retentare, ut qui ad sacerdotale judicium per contumeliam non ivisset: ut ab illustribus viris Præfectis Prætorio Galliæ atque Italiæ, authoritate adhibitâ, ad Episcopale judicium remittatur, sive à Consularibus vel Vicariis, ut ad Urbem Romam sub prosecutione perveniat. Aut si in longinquioribus partibus alicujus ferocitas talis emerserit, omnis ejus causæ edictio ad Metropolitæ in eadem Provincia Episcopi deduceretur examen. Vel si ipse Metropolitanus est, Romam necessariò, vel ad eos quos Romanus Episcopus judices dederit, sine delatione contendat.----Quod si vel Metropolitani Episcopi vel cujuscunque sacerdotis iniquitas est suspecta, aut gratia; ad Romanum Episcopum, vel ad Concilium quindecim finitimorum Episcoporum accersitum liceat provocare; modo ne post examen habitum, quod definitum fuerit, integretur. This Edict wanting the name of both Valens and Theodosius in the Title, was made in the time between their reigns, that is, in the end of the year 378, or the beginning of 379. It was directed to the Præfecti Prætorio Italiæ & Galliæ, and therefore was general. For the Præfectus Prætorio Italiæ governed Italy, Illyricum occidentale and Africa; and the Præfectus Prætorio Galliæ governed Gallia, Spain, and Britain.

The granting of this jurisdiction to the Pope gave several Bishops occasion to write to him for his resolutions upon doubtful cases, whereupon he answered by decretal Epistles; and henceforward he gave laws to the Western Churches by such Epistles. Himerius Bishop of Tarraco, the head city of a province in Spain, writing to Pope Damasus for his direction about certain Ecclesiastical matters, and the Letter not arriving at Rome till after the death of Damasus, A.C. 384; his successor Siricius answered the same with a legislative authority, telling him of one thing: Cum hoc fieri--missa ad Provincias à venerandæ memoriæ prædecessore meo Liberio generalia decreta, prohibeant. Of another: Noverint se ab omni ecclesiastico honore, quo indignè usi sunt, Apostolicæ Sedis auctoritate, dejectos. Of another: Scituri posthac omnium Provinciarum summi Antistites, quod si ultrò ad sacros ordines quenquam de talibus esse assumendum, & de suo & de aliorum statu, quos contra Canones & interdicta nostra provexerint, congruam ab Apostolica Sede promendam esse sententiam. And the Epistle he concludes thus: Explicuimus, ut arbitror, frater charissime, universa quæ digesta sunt in querelam; & ad singulas causas, de quibus ad Romanam Ecclesiam, utpote ad caput tui corporis, retulisti; sufficientia, quantum opinor, responsa reddidimus. Nunc fraternitatis tuæ animum ad servandos canones, & tenenda decretalia constituta, magis ac magis incitamus: ad hæc quæ ad tua consulta rescripsimus in omnium Coepiscoporum perferri facias notionem; & non solum corum, qui in tua sunt dioecesi constituti, sed etiam ad universos Carthaginenses ac Boeticos, Lusitanos atque2 Gallicos, vel eos qui vicinis tibi collimitant hinc inde Provinciis, hæc quæ a nobis sunt salubri ordinatione disposita, sub literarum tuarum prosecutione mittantur. Et quanquam statuta sedis Apostolicæ vel Canonum venerabilia definita, nulli Sacerdotum Domini ignorare sit liberum: utilius tamen, atque pro antiquitate sacerdotii tui, dilectioni tuæ esse admodùm poterit gloriosum, si ea quæ ad te speciali nomine generaliter scripta sunt, per unanimitatis tuæ sollicitudinem in universorum fratrum nostrorum notitiam perferantur; quatenus & quæ à nobis non inconsultè sed providè sub nimia cautela & deliberatione sunt salubriter constituta, intemerata permaneant, & omnibus in posterum excusationibus aditus, qui jam nulli apud nos patere poterit, obstruatur. Dat. 3 Id. Febr. Arcadio & Bautone viris clarissimis Consulibus, A.C. 385. Pope Liberius in the reign of Jovian or Valentinian I. sent general Decrees to the Provinces, ordering that the Arians should not be rebaptized: and this he did in favour of the Council of Alexandria, that nothing more should be required of them than to renounce their opinions. Pope Damasus is said to have decreed in a Roman Council, that Tithes and Tenths should be paid upon pain of an Anathema; and that Glory be to the Father, &c. should be said or sung at the end of the Psalms. But the first decretal Epistle now extant is this of Siricius to Himerius; by which the Pope made Himerius his Vicar over all Spain for promulging his Decrees, and seeing them observed. The Bishop of Sevill was also the Pope's Vicar sometimes; for Simplicius wrote thus to Zeno Bishop of that place: Talibus idcirco gloriantes indiciis, congruum duximus vicariâ Sedis nostræ te auctoritate fulciri: cujus vigore munitus, Apostolicæ institutionis Decreta, vel sanctorum terminos Patrum, nullatenus transcendi permittas. And Pope Hormisda3 made the Bishop of Sevill his Vicar over Boetica and Lusitania, and the Bishop of Tarraco his Vicar over all the rest of Spain, as appears by his Epistles to them.

Pope Innocent the first, in his decretal Epistle to Victricius Bishop of Rouen in France, A.C. 404, in pursuance of the Edict of Gratian, made this Decree: Si quæ autem causæ vel contentiones inter Clericos tam superioris ordinis quam etiam inferioris fuerint exortæ; ut secundum Synodum Nicenam congregatis ejusdem Provinciæ Episcopis jurgium terminetur: nec alicui liceat,4 Romanæ Ecclesiæ, cujus in omnibus causis debet reverentia custodiri, relictis his sacerdotibus, qui in eadem Provincia Dei Ecclesiam nutu Divino gubernant, ad alias convolare Provincias. Quod siquis fortè præsumpserit; & ab officio Clericatûs summotus, & injuriarum reus judicetur. Si autem majores causæ in medium fuerint devolutæ, ad Sedem Apostolicam sicut Synodus statuit, & beata consuetudo exigit, post judicium Episcopale referantur. By these Letters it seems to me that Gallia was now subject to the Pope, and had been so for some time, and that the Bishop of Rouen was then his Vicar or one of them: for the Pope directs him to refer the greater causes to the See of Rome, according to custom. But the Bishop of Arles soon after became the Pope's Vicar over all Gallia: for Pope Zosimus, A.C. 417, ordaining that none should have access to him without the credentials of his Vicars, conferred upon Patroclus the Bishop of Arles this authority over all Gallia, by the following Decree.

Zosimus universis Episcopis per Gallias & septem Provincias constitutis.

Placuit Apostolicæ Sedi, ut siquis ex qualibet Galliarum parte sub quolibet ecclesiastico gradu ad nos Romæ venire contendit, vel aliò terrarum ire disponit, non aliter proficiscatur nisi Metropolitani Episcopi Formatas acceperit, quibus sacerdotium suum vel locum ecclesiasticum quem habet, scriptorum ejus adstipulatione perdoceat: quod ex gratia statuimus quia plures episcopi sive presbyteri sive ecclesiastici simulantes, quia nullum documentum Formatarum extat per quod valeant confutari, in nomen venerationis irrepunt, & indebitam reverentiam promerentur. Quisquis igitur, fratres charissimi, prætermissà supradicti Formatâ sive episcopus, sive presbyter, sive diaconus, aut deinceps inferiori gradu sit, ad nos venerit: sciat se omnino suscipi non posse. Quam auctoritatem ubique nos misisse manifestum est, ut cunctis regionibus innotescat id quod statuimus omnimodis esse servandum. Siquis autem hæc salubriter constituta temerare tentaverit sponte suâ, se a nostra noverit communione discretum. Hoc autem privilegium Formatarum sancto Patroclo fratri & coepiscopo nostro, meritorum ejus speciali contemplatione, concessimus. And that the Bishop of Arles was sometimes the Pope's Vicar over all France, is affirmed also by all the Bishops of the Diocess of Arles in their Letter to Pope Leo I. Cui id etiam honoris dignitatisque collatum est, say they, ut non tantum has Provincias potestate propriâ gubernaret; verum etiam omnes Gallias sibi Apostolicæ Sedis vice mandatas, sub omni ecclesiastica regula contineret. And Pope Pelagius I. A.C. 556, in his Epistle to Sapaudus Bishop of Arles: Majorum nostrorum, operante Dei misericordiâ, cupientes inhærere vestigiis & eorum actus divino examine in omnibus imitari: Charitati tuæ per universam Galliam, sanctæ Sedis Apostolicæ, cui divinâ gratiâ præsidemus, vices injungimus.

By the influence of the same imperial Edict, not only Spain and Gallia, but also Illyricum became subject to the Pope. Damasus made Ascholius, or Acholius, Bishop of Thessalonica the Metropolis of Oriental Illyricum, his Vicar for hearing of causes; and in the year 382, Acholius being summoned by Pope Damasus, came to a Council at Rome. Pope Siricius the successor of Damasus, decreed that no Bishop should be ordained in Illyricum without the consent of Anysius the successor of Acholius. And the following Popes gave Rufus the successor of Anysius, a power of calling Provincial Councils: for in the Collections of Holstenius there is an account of a Council of Rome convened under Pope Boniface II. in which were produced Letters of Damasus, Syricius, Innocent I. Boniface I. and Cælestine Bishops of Rome, to Ascholius, Anysius and Rufus, Bishops of Thessalonica: in which Letters they commend to them the hearing of causes in Illyricum, granted by the Lord and the holy Canons to the Apostolic See thro'out that Province. And Pope Siricius saith in his Epistle to Anysius: Etiam dudum, frater charissime, per Candidianum Episcopum, qui nos præcessit ad Dominum, hujusmodi literas dederamus, ut nulla licentia esset, sine consensu tuo in Illyrico Episcopos ordinare præsumere, quæ utrum ad te pervenerint scire non potui. Multa enim gesta sunt per contentionem ab Episcopis in ordinationibus faciendis, quod tua melius caritas novit. And a little after: Ad omnem enim hujusmodi audaciam comprimendam vigilare debet instantia tua, Spiritu in te Sancto fervente: ut vel ipse, si potes, vel quos judicaveris Episcopos idoneos, cum literis dirigas, dato consensu qui possit, in ejus locum qui defunctus vel depositus fuerit, Catholicum Episcopum vitâ & moribus probatum, secundum Nicænæ Synodi statuta vel Ecclesiæ Romanæ, Clericum de Clero meritum ordinare. And Pope Innocent I. saith in his Epistle to Anysius: Cui [Anysio] etiam anteriores tanti ac tales viri prædecessores mei Episcopi, id est, sanctæ memoriæ Damasus, Siricius, atque supra memoratus vir ita detulerunt; ut omnia quæ in omnibus illis partibus gererentur, Sanctitati tuæ, quæ plena justitiæ est, traderent cognoscenda. And in his Epistle to Rufus the successor of Anysius: Ita longis intervallis disterminatis à me ecclesiis discat consulendum; ut prudentiæ gravitatique tuæ committendam curam causasque, siquæ exoriantur, per Achaiæ, Thessaliæ, Epiri veteris, Epiri novæ, & Cretæ, Daciæ mediterraneæ, Daciæ ripensis, Moesiæ, Dardaniæ, & Prævali ecclesias, Christo Domino annuente, censeam. Verè enim ejus sacratissimis monitis lectissimæ sinceritatis tuæ providentiæ & virtuti hanc injungimus sollicitudinem: non primitùs hæc statuentes, sed Præcessores nostros Apostolicos imitati, qui beatissimis Acholio & Anysio injungi pro meritis ista voluerunt. And Boniface I. in his decretal Epistle to Rufus and the rest of the Bishops in Illyricum: Nullus, ut frequenter dixi, alicujus ordinationem citra ejus [Episcopi Thessalonicensis] conscientiam celebrare præsumat: cui, ut supra dictum est, vice nostrâ cuncta committimus. And Pope Cælestine, in his decretal Epistle to the Bishops thro'out Illyricum, saith: Vicem nostram per vestram Provinciam noveritis [Rufo] esse commissam, ita ut ad eum, fratres carissimi, quicquid de causis agitur, referatur. Sine ejus consilio nullus ordinetur. Nullus usurpet, eodem inconscio, commissam illi Provinciam; colligere nisi cum ejus voluntate Episcopus non præsumat. And in the cause of Perigenes, in the title of his Epistle, he thus enumerates the Provinces under this Bishop: Rufo & cæteris Episcopis per Macedoniam, Achaiam, Thessaliam, Epirum veterem, Epirum novam, Prævalin, & Daciam constitutis. And Pope Xistus in a decretal Epistle to the same Bishops: Illyricanæ omnes Ecclesiæ, ut à decessoribus nostris recepimus, & nos quoque fecimus, ad curam nunc pertinent Thessalonicensis Antistitis, ut suâ sollicitudine, siquæ inter fratres nascantur, ut assolent, actiones distinguat atque definiat; & ad eum, quicquid à singulis sacerdotibus agitur, referatur. Sit Concilium, quotiens causæ fuerint, quotiens ille pro necessitatum emergentium ratione decreverit. And Pope Leo I. in his decretal Epistle to Anastasius Bishop of Thessalonica: Singulis autem Metropolitanis sicut potestas ista committitur, ut in suis Provinciis jus habeant ordinandi; ita eos Metropolitanos à te volumus ordinari; maturo tamen & decocto judicio.

Occidental Illyricum comprehended Pannonia prima and secunda, Savia, Dalmatia, Noricum mediterraneum, and Noricum ripense; and its Metropolis was Sirmium, till Attila destroyed this city. Afterwards Laureacum became the Metropolis of Noricum and both Pannonias, and Salona the Metropolis of Dalmatia. Now5 the Bishops of Laureacum and Salona received the Pallium from the Pope: and Zosimus, in his decretal Epistle to Hesychius Bishop of Salona, directed him to denounce the Apostolic decrees as well to the Bishops of his own, as to those of the neighbouring Provinces. The subjection of these Provinces to the See of Rome seems to have begun in Anemius, who was ordained Bishop of Sirmium by Ambrose Bishop of Millain, and who in the Council of Aquileia under Pope Damasus, A.C. 381, declared his sentence in these words: Caput Illyrici non nisi civitas Sirmiensis: Ego igitur illius civitatis Episcopus sum. Eum qui non confitetur filium Dei æternum, & coeternum patri, qui est sempiternus, anathema dico. The next year Anemius and Ambrose, with Valerian Bishop of Aquileia, Acholias Bishop of Thessalonica, and many others, went to the Council of Rome, which met for overruling the Greek Church by majority of votes, and exalting the authority of the Apostolic See, as was attempted before in the Council of Sardica.

Aquileia was the second city of the Western Empire, and by some called the second Rome. It was the Metropolis of Istria, Forum Julium, and Venetia; and its subjection to the See of Rome is manifest by the decretal Epistle of Leo I. directed to Nicetas Bishop of this city; for the Pope begins his Epistle thus: Regressus ad nos filius meus Adeodatus Diaconus Sedis nostræ, dilectionem tuam poposcisse memorat, ut de his à nobis authoritatem Apostolicæ Sedis acciperes, quæ quidem magnam difficultatem dijudicationis videntur afferre. Then he sets down an answer to the questions proposed by Nicetas, and concludes thus: Hanc autem Epistolam nostram, quam ad consultationem tuæ fraternitatis emisimus, ad omnes fratres & comprovinciales tuos Episcopos facies pervenire, ut in omnium observantia, data profit authoritas. Data 1-2 Kal. Apr. Majorano Aug. Cos. A.C. 458. Gregory the great A.C. 591,6 cited Severus Bishop of Aquileia to appear before him in judgment in a Council at Rome.

Of the power of the eleventh horn of Daniel's fourth Beast, to change times and laws.

In the reign of the Greek Emperor Justinian, and again in the reign of Phocas, the Bishop of Rome gained some power over the Greek Churches, but it did not last long. His lasting dominion was only over the nations of the Western Empire, represented by Daniel's fourth Beast. This jurisdiction was set up by the following Edict of the Emperors Gratian and Valentinian.—1 Volumus ut quicunque judicio Damasi, quod ille cum Concilio quinque vel septem habuerit Episcoporum, vel eorum qui Catholici sunt judicio vel Concilio condemnatus fuerit, si juste voluerit Ecclesiam retentare, ut qui ad sacerdotale judicium per contumeliam non ivisset: ut ab illustribus viris Præfectis Prætorio Galliæ atque Italiæ, authoritate adhibitâ, ad Episcopale judicium remittatur, sive à Consularibus vel Vicariis, ut ad Urbem Romam sub prosecutione perveniat. Aut si in longinquioribus partibus alicujus ferocitas talis emerserit, omnis ejus causæ edictio ad Metropolitæ in eadem Provincia Episcopi deduceretur examen. Vel si ipse Metropolitanus est, Romam necessariò, vel ad eos quos Romanus Episcopus judices dederit, sine delatione contendat.----Quod si vel Metropolitani Episcopi vel cujuscunque sacerdotis iniquitas est suspecta, aut gratia; ad Romanum Episcopum, vel ad Concilium quindecim finitimorum Episcoporum accersitum liceat provocare; modo ne post examen habitum, quod definitum fuerit, integretur. This Edict, which lacks the names of both Valens and Theodosius in its title, was made in the time between their reigns; that is, at the end of the year 378 or the beginning of 379. It was addressed to the Præfecti Prætorio Italiæ & Galliæ, and therefore was general. For the Præfectus Prætorio Italiæ governed Italy, Illyricum occidentale and Africa; and the Præfectus Prætorio Galliæ governed Gallia, Spain, and Britain.

Giving this jurisdiction to the Pope led several Bishops to write to him for his decisions on doubtful cases, and he answered them by decretal Epistles; from then on he gave laws to the Western Churches by such Epistles. Himerius, Bishop of Tarraco, the chief city of a province in Spain, wrote to Pope Damasus for direction about certain Church matters, and the Letter did not reach Rome until after the death of Damasus, A.C. 384; his successor Siricius answered the same questions with legislative authority, telling him on one point: Cum hoc fieri--missa ad Provincias à venerandæ memoriæ prædecessore meo Liberio generalia decreta, prohibeant. On another: Noverint se ab omni ecclesiastico honore, quo indignè usi sunt, Apostolicæ Sedis auctoritate, dejectos. On another: Scituri posthac omnium Provinciarum summi Antistites, quod si ultrò ad sacros ordines quenquam de talibus esse assumendum, & de suo & de aliorum statu, quos contra Canones & interdicta nostra provexerint, congruam ab Apostolica Sede promendam esse sententiam. And he closes the Epistle thus: Explicuimus, ut arbitror, frater charissime, universa quæ digesta sunt in querelam; & ad singulas causas, de quibus ad Romanam Ecclesiam, utpote ad caput tui corporis, retulisti; sufficientia, quantum opinor, responsa reddidimus. Nunc fraternitatis tuæ animum ad servandos canones, & tenenda decretalia constituta, magis ac magis incitamus: ad hæc quæ ad tua consulta rescripsimus in omnium Coepiscoporum perferri facias notionem; & non solum corum, qui in tua sunt dioecesi constituti, sed etiam ad universos Carthaginenses ac Boeticos, Lusitanos atque2 Gallicos, vel eos qui vicinis tibi collimitant hinc inde Provinciis, hæc quæ a nobis sunt salubri ordinatione disposita, sub literarum tuarum prosecutione mittantur. Et quanquam statuta sedis Apostolicæ vel Canonum venerabilia definita, nulli Sacerdotum Domini ignorare sit liberum: utilius tamen, atque pro antiquitate sacerdotii tui, dilectioni tuæ esse admodùm poterit gloriosum, si ea quæ ad te speciali nomine generaliter scripta sunt, per unanimitatis tuæ sollicitudinem in universorum fratrum nostrorum notitiam perferantur; quatenus & quæ à nobis non inconsultè sed providè sub nimia cautela & deliberatione sunt salubriter constituta, intemerata permaneant, & omnibus in posterum excusationibus aditus, qui jam nulli apud nos patere poterit, obstruatur. Dat. 3 Id. Febr. Arcadio & Bautone viris clarissimis Consulibus, A.C. 385. Pope Liberius, in the reign of Jovian or Valentinian I., sent general Decrees to the Provinces, ordering that the Arians should not be rebaptized; and he did this in favor of the Council of Alexandria, so that nothing more should be required of them than to renounce their opinions. Pope Damasus is said to have decreed in a Roman Council that Tithes and Tenths should be paid under pain of an Anathema; and that Glory be to the Father, etc. should be said or sung at the end of the Psalms. But the first decretal Epistle still in existence is this one of Siricius to Himerius; by which the Pope made Himerius his Vicar over all Spain, to publish his Decrees and see them observed. The Bishop of Sevill was also at times the Pope's Vicar; for Simplicius wrote as follows to Zeno, Bishop of that place: Talibus idcirco gloriantes indiciis, congruum duximus vicariâ Sedis nostræ te auctoritate fulciri: cujus vigore munitus, Apostolicæ institutionis Decreta, vel sanctorum terminos Patrum, nullatenus transcendi permittas. And Pope Hormisda3 made the Bishop of Sevill his Vicar over Boetica and Lusitania, and the Bishop of Tarraco his Vicar over all the rest of Spain, as his Epistles to them show.

Pope Innocent the first, in his decretal Epistle to Victricius, Bishop of Rouen in France, A.C. 404, in keeping with the Edict of Gratian, made this Decree: Si quæ autem causæ vel contentiones inter Clericos tam superioris ordinis quam etiam inferioris fuerint exortæ; ut secundum Synodum Nicenam congregatis ejusdem Provinciæ Episcopis jurgium terminetur: nec alicui liceat,4 Romanæ Ecclesiæ, cujus in omnibus causis debet reverentia custodiri, relictis his sacerdotibus, qui in eadem Provincia Dei Ecclesiam nutu Divino gubernant, ad alias convolare Provincias. Quod siquis fortè præsumpserit; & ab officio Clericatûs summotus, & injuriarum reus judicetur. Si autem majores causæ in medium fuerint devolutæ, ad Sedem Apostolicam sicut Synodus statuit, & beata consuetudo exigit, post judicium Episcopale referantur. From these Letters it seems to me that Gallia was now subject to the Pope, and had been for some time, and that the Bishop of Rouen was then his Vicar or one of them; for the Pope directs him to refer the greater cases to the See of Rome, according to custom. But soon after, the Bishop of Arles became the Pope's Vicar over all Gallia; for Pope Zosimus, A.C. 417, ruling that no one should have access to him without the credentials of his Vicars, gave Patroclus, the Bishop of Arles, this authority over all Gallia, by the following Decree:

Zosimus universis Episcopis per Gallias & septem Provincias constitutis.

Placuit Apostolicæ Sedi, ut siquis ex qualibet Galliarum parte sub quolibet ecclesiastico gradu ad nos Romæ venire contendit, vel aliò terrarum ire disponit, non aliter proficiscatur nisi Metropolitani Episcopi Formatas acceperit, quibus sacerdotium suum vel locum ecclesiasticum quem habet, scriptorum ejus adstipulatione perdoceat: quod ex gratia statuimus quia plures episcopi sive presbyteri sive ecclesiastici simulantes, quia nullum documentum Formatarum extat per quod valeant confutari, in nomen venerationis irrepunt, & indebitam reverentiam promerentur. Quisquis igitur, fratres charissimi, prætermissà supradicti Formatâ sive episcopus, sive presbyter, sive diaconus, aut deinceps inferiori gradu sit, ad nos venerit: sciat se omnino suscipi non posse. Quam auctoritatem ubique nos misisse manifestum est, ut cunctis regionibus innotescat id quod statuimus omnimodis esse servandum. Siquis autem hæc salubriter constituta temerare tentaverit sponte suâ, se a nostra noverit communione discretum. Hoc autem privilegium Formatarum sancto Patroclo fratri & coepiscopo nostro, meritorum ejus speciali contemplatione, concessimus. That the Bishop of Arles was at times the Pope's Vicar over all France is also stated by all the Bishops of the Diocese of Arles in their Letter to Pope Leo I.: Cui id etiam honoris dignitatisque collatum est, say they, ut non tantum has Provincias potestate propriâ gubernaret; verum etiam omnes Gallias sibi Apostolicæ Sedis vice mandatas, sub omni ecclesiastica regula contineret. And Pope Pelagius I., A.C. 556, in his Epistle to Sapaudus, Bishop of Arles: Majorum nostrorum, operante Dei misericordiâ, cupientes inhærere vestigiis & eorum actus divino examine in omnibus imitari: Charitati tuæ per universam Galliam, sanctæ Sedis Apostolicæ, cui divinâ gratiâ præsidemus, vices injungimus.

Through the influence of the same imperial Edict, not only Spain and Gallia but also Illyricum became subject to the Pope. Damasus made Ascholius, or Acholius, Bishop of Thessalonica, the chief city of Oriental Illyricum, his Vicar for hearing cases; and in the year 382, Acholius, having been summoned by Pope Damasus, came to a Council at Rome. Pope Siricius, the successor of Damasus, decreed that no Bishop should be ordained in Illyricum without the consent of Anysius, the successor of Acholius. And the Popes that followed gave Rufus, the successor of Anysius, the power to call Provincial Councils; for in the Collections of Holstenius there is an account of a Council of Rome convened under Pope Boniface II., at which were produced Letters of Damasus, Syricius, Innocent I., Boniface I., and Cæfor fear thatine, Bishops of Rome, to Ascholius, Anysius, and Rufus, Bishops of Thessalonica; in which Letters they commend to them the hearing of cases in Illyricum, which the Lord and the holy Canons granted to the Apostolic See throughout that Province. And Pope Siricius says in his Epistle to Anysius: Etiam dudum, frater charissime, per Candidianum Episcopum, qui nos præcessit ad Dominum, hujusmodi literas dederamus, ut nulla licentia esset, sine consensu tuo in Illyrico Episcopos ordinare præsumere, quæ utrum ad te pervenerint scire non potui. Multa enim gesta sunt per contentionem ab Episcopis in ordinationibus faciendis, quod tua melius caritas novit. And a little after: Ad omnem enim hujusmodi audaciam comprimendam vigilare debet instantia tua, Spiritu in te Sancto fervente: ut vel ipse, si potes, vel quos judicaveris Episcopos idoneos, cum literis dirigas, dato consensu qui possit, in ejus locum qui defunctus vel depositus fuerit, Catholicum Episcopum vitâ & moribus probatum, secundum Nicænæ Synodi statuta vel Ecclesiæ Romanæ, Clericum de Clero meritum ordinare. And Pope Innocent I. says in his Epistle to Anysius: Cui [Anysio] etiam anteriores tanti ac tales viri prædecessores mei Episcopi, id est, sanctæ memoriæ Damasus, Siricius, atque supra memoratus vir ita detulerunt; ut omnia quæ in omnibus illis partibus gererentur, Sanctitati tuæ, quæ plena justitiæ est, traderent cognoscenda. And in his Epistle to Rufus, the successor of Anysius: Ita longis intervallis disterminatis à me ecclesiis discat consulendum; ut prudentiæ gravitatique tuæ committendam curam causasque, siquæ exoriantur, per Achaiæ, Thessaliæ, Epiri veteris, Epiri novæ, & Cretæ, Daciæ mediterraneæ, Daciæ ripensis, Moesiæ, Dardaniæ, & Prævali ecclesias, Christo Domino annuente, censeam. Verè enim ejus sacratissimis monitis lectissimæ sinceritatis tuæ providentiæ & virtuti hanc injungimus sollicitudinem: non primitùs hæc statuentes, sed Præcessores nostros Apostolicos imitati, qui beatissimis Acholio & Anysio injungi pro meritis ista voluerunt. And Boniface I., in his decretal Epistle to Rufus and the rest of the Bishops in Illyricum: Nullus, ut frequenter dixi, alicujus ordinationem citra ejus [Episcopi Thessalonicensis] conscientiam celebrare præsumat: cui, ut supra dictum est, vice nostrâ cuncta committimus. And Pope Cæfor fear thatine, in his decretal Epistle to the Bishops throughout Illyricum, says: Vicem nostram per vestram Provinciam noveritis [Rufo] esse commissam, ita ut ad eum, fratres carissimi, quicquid de causis agitur, referatur. Sine ejus consilio nullus ordinetur. Nullus usurpet, eodem inconscio, commissam illi Provinciam; colligere nisi cum ejus voluntate Episcopus non præsumat. And in the case of Perigenes, in the title of his Epistle, he lists the Provinces under this Bishop as follows: Rufo & cæteris Episcopis per Macedoniam, Achaiam, Thessaliam, Epirum veterem, Epirum novam, Prævalin, & Daciam constitutis. And Pope Xistus, in a decretal Epistle to the same Bishops: Illyricanæ omnes Ecclesiæ, ut à decessoribus nostris recepimus, & nos quoque fecimus, ad curam nunc pertinent Thessalonicensis Antistitis, ut suâ sollicitudine, siquæ inter fratres nascantur, ut assolent, actiones distinguat atque definiat; & ad eum, quicquid à singulis sacerdotibus agitur, referatur. Sit Concilium, quotiens causæ fuerint, quotiens ille pro necessitatum emergentium ratione decreverit. And Pope Leo I., in his decretal Epistle to Anastasius, Bishop of Thessalonica: Singulis autem Metropolitanis sicut potestas ista committitur, ut in suis Provinciis jus habeant ordinandi; ita eos Metropolitanos à te volumus ordinari; maturo tamen & decocto judicio.

Western Illyricum included Pannonia prima and secunda, Savia, Dalmatia, Noricum mediterraneum, and Noricum ripense; and its chief city was Sirmium, until Attila destroyed this city. Afterwards Laureacum became the chief city of Noricum and both Pannonias, and Salona the chief city of Dalmatia. Now5 the Bishops of Laureacum and Salona received the Pallium from the Pope; and Zosimus, in his decretal Epistle to Hesychius, Bishop of Salona, directed him to proclaim the Apostolic decrees both to the Bishops of his own Province and to those of the neighboring Provinces. These Provinces seem to have come under the See of Rome first with Anemius, who was ordained Bishop of Sirmium by Ambrose, Bishop of Millain, and who in the Council of Aquileia under Pope Damasus, A.C. 381, stated his ruling in these words: Caput Illyrici non nisi civitas Sirmiensis: Ego igitur illius civitatis Episcopus sum. Eum qui non confitetur filium Dei æternum, & coeternum patri, qui est sempiternus, anathema dico. The next year Anemius and Ambrose, with Valerian, Bishop of Aquileia, Acholias, Bishop of Thessalonica, and many others, went to the Council of Rome, which met to overrule the Greek Church by majority of votes, and to exalt the authority of the Apostolic See, as had been attempted before in the Council of Sardica.

Aquileia was the second city of the Western Empire, and some called it the second Rome. It was the chief city of Istria, Forum Julium, and Venetia; and its subjection to the See of Rome is clear from the decretal Epistle of Leo I. directed to Nicetas, Bishop of this city; for the Pope begins his Epistle thus: Regressus ad nos filius meus Adeodatus Diaconus Sedis nostræ, dilectionem tuam poposcisse memorat, ut de his à nobis authoritatem Apostolicæ Sedis acciperes, quæ quidem magnam difficultatem dijudicationis videntur afferre. Then he gives an answer to the questions Nicetas proposed, and concludes thus: Hanc autem Epistolam nostram, quam ad consultationem tuæ fraternitatis emisimus, ad omnes fratres & comprovinciales tuos Episcopos facies pervenire, ut in omnium observantia, data profit authoritas. Data 1–2 Kal. Apr. Majorano Aug. Cos. A.C. 458. Gregory the great, A.C. 591,6 cited Severus, Bishop of Aquileia, to appear before him for judgment in a Council at Rome.

Part I, Chapter 8, 2

The Bishops of Aquileia and Millain created one another, and therefore were of equal authority, and alike subject to the See of Rome. Pope Pelagius about the year 557, testified this in the following words:7 Mos antiquus fuit, saith he, ut quia pro longinquitate vel difficultate itineris, ab Apostolico illis onerosum fuerit ordinari, ipsi se invicem Mediolanensis & Aquileiensis ordinare Episcopos debuissent. These words imply that the ordination of these two Bishops belonged to the See of Rome. When Laurentius Bishop of Millain had excommunicated Magnus, one of his Presbyters, and was dead,8 Gregory the great absolved Magnus, and sent the Pallium to the new elected Bishop Constantius; whom the next year9 he reprehended of partiality in judging Fortunatus, and commanded him to send Fortunatus to Rome to be judged there: four years after10 he appointed the Bishops of Millain and Ravenna to hear the cause of one Maximus; and two years after, viz. A.C. 601, when Constantius was dead, and the people of Millain had elected Deusdedit his successor, and the Lombards had elected another,11 Gregory wrote to the Notary, Clergy, and People of Millain, that by the authority of his Letters Deusdedit should be ordained, and that he whom the Lombards had ordained was an unworthy successor of Ambrose: whence I gather, that the Church of Millain had continued in this state of subordination to the See of Rome ever since the days of Ambrose; for Ambrose himself acknowledged the authority of that See. Ecclesia Romana,12 saith he, hanc consuetudinem non habet, cujus typum in omnibus sequimur, & formam. And a little after: In omnibus cupio sequi Ecclesiam Romanam. And in his Commentary upon 1 Tim. iii. Cum totus mundus Dei sit, tamen domus ejus Ecclesia dicitur, cujus hodie rector est Damasus. In his Oration on the death of his brother Satyrus, he relates how his brother coming to a certain city of Sardinia, advocavit Episcopum loci, percontatusque est ex eo utrum cum Episcopis Catholicis hoc est cum Romana Ecclesia conveniret? And in conjunction with the Synod of Aquileia A.C. 381, in a synodical Epistle to the Emperor Gratian, he saith: Totius orbis Romani caput Romanam Ecclesiam, atque illam sacrosanctam Apostolorum fidem, ne turbari sineret, obsecranda fuit clementia vestra; inde enim in omnes venerandæ communionis jura dimanant. The Churches therefore of Aquileia and Millain were subject to the See of Rome from the days of the Emperor Gratian. Auxentius the predecessor of Ambrose was not subject to the see of Rome, and consequently the subjection of the Church of Millain began in Ambrose. This Diocese of Millain contained Liguria with Insubria, the Alpes Cottiæ and Rhætia; and was divided from the Diocese of Aquileia by the river Addua. In the year 844, the Bishop of Millain broke off from the See of Rome, and continued in this separation about 200 years, as is thus related by13 Sigonius: Eodem anno Angilbertus Mediolanensis Archiepiscopus ab Ecclesia Romana parum comperta de causa descivit, tantumque exemplo in posterum valuit, ut non nisi post ducentos annos Ecclesia Mediolanensis ad Romanæ obedientiam auctoritatemque redierit.

The Bishop of Ravenna, the Metropolis of Flaminia and Æmilia, was also subject to the Pope: for Zosimus, A.C. 417, excommunicated some of the Presbyters of that Church, and wrote a commonitory Epistle about them to the Clergy of that Church as a branch of the Roman Church: In sua, saith he, hoc est, in Ecclesia nostra Romana. When those of Ravenna, having elected a new Bishop, gave notice thereof to Pope Sixtus, the Pope set him aside, and14 ordained Peter Chrysologus in his room. Chrysologus in his Epistle to Eutyches, extant in the Acts of the Council of Chalcedon, wrote thus: Nos pro studio pacis & fidei, extra consensum Romanæ civitatis Episcopi, causas fidei audire non possumus. Pope Leo I. being consulted by Leo Bishop of Ravenna about some questions, answered him by a decretal Epistle A.C. 451. And Pope Gregory the great,15 reprehending John Bishop of Ravenna about the use of the Pallium, tells him of a Precept of one of his Predecessors, Pope John, commanding that all the Privileges formerly granted to the Bishop and Church of Ravenna should be kept: to this John returned a submissive answer; and after his death Pope Gregory ordered a visitation of the Church of Ravenna, confirmed the privileges heretofore granted them, and sent his Pallium, as of antient custom, to their new Bishop Marinian. Yet this Church revolted sometimes from the Church of Rome, but returned again to its obedience.

The rest of Italy, with the Islands adjacent, containing the suburbicarian regions, or ten Provinces under the temporal Vicar of Rome, viz. 1Campania, 2Tuscia and Umbria, 3Picenum suburbicarium, 4Sicily, 5Apulia and Calabria, 6Brutii and Lucania, 7Samnium, 8Sardinia, 9Corsica, and 10Valeria, constituted the proper Province of the Bishop of Rome. For the Council of Nice in their fifth Canon ordained that Councils should be held every spring and autumn in every Province; and according to this Canon, the Bishops of this Province met at Rome every half year. In this sense Pope Leo I. applied this Canon to Rome, in a decretal Epistle to the Bishops of Sicily, written Alippio & Ardabure Coss. A.C. 447. Quia saluberrime, saith he, à sanctis patribus constitutum est, binos in annis singulis Episcoporum debere esse conventus, terni semper ex vobis ad diem tertium Kalendarum Octobrium Romam æterno concilio sociandi occurrant. Et indissimulanter à vobis hæc consuetudo servetur, quoniam adjuvante Dei gratiâ, faciliùs poterit provideri, ut in Ecclesiis Christi nulla scandala, nulli nascantur errores; cum coram Apostolo Petro semper in communione tractatum fuerit, ut omnia Canonum Decreta apud omnes Domini sacerdotes inviolata permaneant. The Province of Rome therefore comprehended Sicily, with so much of Italy and the neighbouring Islands as sent Bishops to the annual Councils of Rome; but extended not into the Provinces of Ravenna, Aquileia, Millain, Arles, &c. those Provinces having Councils of their own. The Bishops in every Province of the Roman Empire were convened in Council by the Metropolitan or Bishop of the head city of the Province, and this Bishop presided in that Council: but the Bishop of Rome did not only preside in his own Council of the Bishops of the suburbicarian regions, but also gave Orders to the Metropolitans of all the other Provinces in the Western Empire, as their universal governor; as may be further perceived by the following instances.

Pope Zosimus A.C. 417, cited Proculus Bishop of Marseilles to appear before a Council at Rome for illegitimate Ordinations; and condemned him, as he mentions in several of his Epistles. Pope Boniface I. A.C. 419, upon a complaint of the Clergy of Valentia against Maximus a Bishop, summoned the Bishops of all Gallia and the seven Provinces to convene in a Council against him; and saith in his Epistle, that his Predecessors had done the like. Pope Leo I. called a general Council of all the Provinces of Spain to meet in Gallæcia against the Manichees and Priscillianists, as he says in his decretal Epistle to Turribius a Spanish Bishop. And in one of his decretal Epistles to Nicetas Bishop of Aquileia, he commands him to call a Council of the Bishops of that Province against the Pelagians, which might ratify all the Synodal Decrees which had been already ratified by the See of Rome against this heresy. And in his decretal Epistle to Anastasius Bishop of Thessalonica, he ordained that Bishop should hold two Provincial Councils every year, and refer the harder causes to the See of Rome: and if upon any extraordinary occasion it should be necessary to call a Council, he should not be troublesom to the Bishops under him, but content himself with two Bishops out of every Province, and not detain them above fifteen days. In the same Epistle he describes the form of Church-Government then set up, to consist in a subordination of all the Churches to the See of Rome: De qua forma, saith he, Episcoporum quoque est orta distinctio, & magna dispositione provisum est ne omnes sibi omnia vindicarent, sed essent in singulis Provinciis singuli quorum inter fratres haberetur prima sententia, & rursus quidam in majoribus urbibus constituti sollicitudinem sumerent ampliorem, per quos ad unam Petri Sedem universalis Ecclesiæ cura conflueret, & nihil usque à suo capite dissideret. Qui ergo scit se quibusdam esse præpositum, non moleste ferat aliquem sibi esse præpositum; sed obedientiam quam exigit etiam ipse dependat; et sicut non vult gravis oneris sarcinam ferre, ita non audeat aliis importabile pondus imponere. These words sufficiently shew the monarchical form of government then set up in the Churches of the Western Empire under the Bishop of Rome, by means of the imperial Decree of Gratian, and the appeals and decretal Epistles grounded thereupon.

The same Pope Leo, having in a Council at Rome passed sentence upon Hilary Bishop of Arles, for what he had done by a Provincial Council in Gallia, took occasion from thence to procure the following Edict from the Western Emperor Valentinian III. for the more absolute establishing the authority of his See over all the Churches of the Western Empire.

Impp. Theodosius & Valentinianus AA. Aetio Viro illustri, Comiti & Magistro utriusque militiæ & Patricio.

Certum est & nobis & imperio nostro unicum esse præsidium in supernæ Divinitatis favore, ad quem promerendum præcipue Christiana fides & veneranda nobis religio suffragatur. Cum igitur Sedis Apostolicæ Primatum sancti Petri meritum, qui princeps est Episcopalis coronæ & Romanæ dignitas civitatis, sacræ etiam Synodi firmavit auctoritas: ne quid præter auctoritatem Sedis istius illicitum præsumptio attemperare nitatur: tunc enim demum Ecclesiarum pax ubique servabitur, si Rectorem suum agnoscat Universitas. Hæc cum hactenus inviolabiliter suerint custodita, Hilarius Arelatensis, sicut venerabilis viri Leonis Romani Papæ fideli relatione comperimus, contumaci ausu illicita quædam præsumenda tentavit, & ideo Transalpinas Ecclesias abominabilis tumultus invasit, quod recens maximè testatur exemplum. Hilarius enim qui Episcopus Arelatensis vocatur, Ecclesiæ Romanæ urbis inconsulto Pontifice indebitas sibi ordinationes Episcoporum solâ temeritate usurpans invasit. Nam alios incompetenter removit; indecenter alios, invitis & repugnantibus civibus, ordinavit. Qui quidem, quoniam non facile ab his qui non elegerant, recipiebantur, manum sibi contrahebat armatam, & claustra murorum in hostilem morem vel obsidione cingebat, vel aggressione reserabat, & ad sedem quietis pacem prædicaturus per bella ducebat: His talibus contra Imperii majestatem, & contra reverentiam Apostolicæ Sedis admissis, per ordinem religiosi viri Urbis Papæ cognitione discussis, certa in eum, ex his quos malè ordinaverat, lata sententia est. Erat quidem ipsa sententia per Gallias etiam sine Imperiali Sanctione valitura: quid enim Pontificis auctoritate non liceret? Sed nostram quoque præceptionem hæc ratio provocavit. Nec ulterius vel Hilario, quem adhuc Episcopum nuncupare sola mansueta Præsulis permittit humanitas, nec cuiquam alteri ecclesiasticis rebus arma miscere, aut præceptis Romani Antistitis liceat obviare: ausibus enim talibus fides & reverentia nostri violatur Imperii. Nec hoc solum, quod est maximi criminis, submovemus: verum ne levis saltem inter Ecclesias turba nascatur, vel in aliquo minui religionis disciplina videatur, hoc perenni sanctione discernimus; nequid tam Episcopis Gallicanis quam aliarum Provinciarum contra consuetudinem veterem liceat, sine viri venerabilis Papæ Urbis æternæ auctoritate, tentare. Sed illis omnibusque pro lege sit, quicquid sanxit vel sanxerit Apostolicæ Sedis auctoritas: ita ut quisquis Episcoporum ad judicium Romani Antistitis evocatus venire neglexerit, per Moderatorem ejusdem Provinciæ adesse cogatur, per omnia servatis quæ Divi parentes nostri Romanæ Ecclesiæ detulerunt, Aetî pater carissime Augusti. Unde illustris & præclara magnificentia tua præsentis Edictalis Legis auctoritate faciet quæ sunt superius statuta servari, decem librarum auri multa protinus exigenda ab unoquoque Judice qui passus fuerit præcepta nostra violari. Divinitas te servet per multos annos, parens carissime. Dat. viii. Id. Jun. Romæ, Valentiniano A. vi. Consule, A.C. 445. By this Edict the Emperor Valentinian enjoined an absolute obedience to the will of the Bishop of Rome thro'out all the Churches of his Empire; and declares, that for the Bishops to attempt any thing without the Pope's authority is contrary to antient custom, and that the Bishops summoned to appear before his judicature must be carried thither by the Governor of the Province; and he ascribes these privileges of the See of Rome to the concessions of his dead Ancestors, that is, to the Edict of Gratian and Valentinian II. as above: by which reckoning this dominion of the Church of Rome was now of 66 years standing: and if in all this time it had not been sufficiently established, this new Edict was enough to settle it beyond all question thro'out the Western Empire.

Hence all the Bishops of the Province of Arles in their Letter to Pope Leo, A.C. 450, petitioning for a restitution of the privileges of their Metropolitan, say: Per beatum Petrum Apostolorum principem, sacrosancta Ecclesia Romana tenebat supra omnes totius mundi Ecclesias principatum. And Ceratius, Salonius and Veranus, three Bishops of Gallia, say, in their Epistle to the same Pope: Magna præterea & ineffabili quadam nos peculiares tui gratulatione succrescimus, quod illa specialis doctrinæ vestræ pagina ita per omnium Ecclesiarum conventicula celebratur, ut vere consona omnium sententia declaretur; merito illic principatum Sedis Apostolicæ constitutum, unde adhuc Apostolici spiritus oracula reserentur. And Leo himself, in16 his Epistle to the metropolitan Bishops thro'out Illyricum: Quia per omnes Ecclesias cura nostra distenditur, exigente hoc à nobis Domino, qui Apostolicæ dignitatis beatissimo Apostolo Petro primatum, fidei sui remuneratione commisit, universalem Ecclesiam in fundamenti ipsius soliditate constituens.

While this Ecclesiastical Dominion was rising up, the northern barbarous nations invaded the Western Empire, and founded several kingdoms therein, of different religions from the Church of Rome. But these kingdoms by degrees embraced the Roman faith, and at the same time submitted to the Pope's authority. The Franks in Gaul submitted in the end of the fifth Century, the Goths in Spain in the end of the sixth; and the Lombards in Italy were conquered by Charles the great A.C. 774. Between the years 775 and 794, the same Charles extended the Pope's authority over all Germany and Hungary as far as the river Theysse and the Baltic sea; he then set him above all human judicature, and at the same time assisted him in subduing the City and Duchy of Rome. By the conversion of the ten kingdoms to the Roman religion, the Pope only enlarged his spiritual dominion, but did not yet rise up as a horn of the Beast. It was his temporal dominion which made him one of the horns: and this dominion he acquired in the latter half of the eighth century, by subduing three of the former horns as above. And now being arrived at a temporal dominion, and a power above all human judicature, he reigned17 with a look more stout than his fellows, and18 times and laws were henceforward given into his hands, for a time times and half a time, or three times and an half; that is, for 1260 solar years, reckoning a time for a Calendar year of 360 days, and a day for a solar year. After which19 the judgment is to sit, and they shall take away his dominion, not at once, but by degrees, to consume, and to destroy it unto the end.20 And the kingdom and dominion, and greatness of the kingdom under the whole heaven shall, by degrees, be given unto the people of the saints of the most High, whose kingdom is an everlasting kingdom, and all dominions shall serve and obey him.

Notes to Chap. VIII.

1 See the Annals of Baronius, Anno 381. Sect. 6.

2 Populos Galliciæ.

3 Hormisd. Epist. 24. 26.

4 The words, sine auctoritate, seem wanting.

5 Vide Caroli a S. Paulo Geographiam sacram, p. 72, 73.

6 Greg. M. lib. 1. Indic. 9. Epist. 16.

7 Apud Gratianum de Mediolanensi & Aquileiensi Episcopis.

8 Greg. M. lib. 3. Epist. 26. & lib. 4. Epist. 1.

9 Greg. lib. 5. Epist. 4.

10 Greg. lib. 9. Epist. 10 & 67.

11 Greg. lib. 11. Epist. 3, 4.

12 Ambros l. 3. de sacramentis, c. 1.

13 Sigonius de Regno Italiæ, lib. 5.

14 See Baronius, Anno 433. Sect. 24.

15 Greg. M. lib. 3. Epist. 56, 57. & lib. 5. Epist. 25, 26, 56.

16 Epist. 25. apud Holstenium.

17 Dan. vii. 20.

18 Ver. 25.

19 Ver. 26.

20 Ver. 27.

The Bishops of Aquileia and Millain ordained one another, so they had equal authority and were both subject to the See of Rome. Pope Pelagius stated this around the year 557 in these words:7 "It was an old custom," he said, "that because of the length and difficulty of the journey it had been a burden for them to be ordained by the Apostolic See, so that the bishops of Millain and Aquileia ought to ordain one another." These words show that the ordination of these two Bishops belonged to the See of Rome. When Laurentius, Bishop of Millain, had excommunicated Magnus, one of his Presbyters, and had then died,8 Gregory the Great absolved Magnus and sent the pallium to the newly elected Bishop Constantius. The next year9 Gregory rebuked Constantius for favoritism in judging Fortunatus, and ordered him to send Fortunatus to Rome to be judged there. Four years later10 he appointed the Bishops of Millain and Ravenna to hear the case of a man named Maximus. Two years after that, in A.C. 601, Constantius was dead, the people of Millain had elected Deusdedit as his successor, and the Lombards had elected another man.11 Gregory wrote to the Notary, the Clergy, and the People of Millain that Deusdedit should be ordained by the authority of his letters, and that the man the Lombards had ordained was an unworthy successor of Ambrose. From this I conclude that the Church of Millain had stayed in this state of subordination to the See of Rome ever since the days of Ambrose, because Ambrose himself acknowledged the authority of that See. "The Roman Church,"12 he said, "does not have this custom, whose model and pattern we follow in all things." And a little later: "In all things I want to follow the Roman Church." In his Commentary upon 1 Tim. iii he wrote: "Although the whole world is God's, his household is still called the Church, whose ruler today is Damasus." In his Oration on the death of his brother Satyrus, he tells how his brother came to a certain city in Sardinia, called for the bishop of the place, and asked him whether he was in communion with the Catholic bishops, that is, with the Roman Church. And acting together with the Synod of Aquileia in A.C. 381, in a synodical letter to the Emperor Gratian, he said: "Your mercy had to be begged not to allow the Roman Church, the head of the whole Roman world, and that sacred faith of the Apostles, to be disturbed; for from it flow the rights of venerable communion for all." The Churches of Aquileia and Millain were therefore subject to the See of Rome from the days of the Emperor Gratian. Auxentius, the predecessor of Ambrose, was not subject to the See of Rome, so the subjection of the Church of Millain began with Ambrose.

This Diocese of Millain held Liguria together with Insubria, the Alpes Cottiæ and Rhætia, and the river Addua separated it from the Diocese of Aquileia. In the year 844 the Bishop of Millain broke away from the See of Rome and stayed separate for about 200 years, as13 Sigonius relates: "In that same year," he writes, "Angilbert, Archbishop of Millain, broke away from the Roman Church for reasons that were little understood, and his example had such effect afterward that the Church of Millain did not return to the obedience and authority of Rome until two hundred years later."

The Bishop of Ravenna, in the metropolis of Flaminia and Æmilia, was also subject to the Pope. For Zosimus, in A.C. 417, excommunicated some of the Presbyters of that Church and wrote a warning letter about them to the Clergy of that Church as a branch of the Roman Church: "In their own," he said, "that is, in our Roman Church." When the people of Ravenna had elected a new Bishop and gave notice of it to Pope Sixtus, the Pope set his election aside and14 ordained Peter Chrysologus in his place. Chrysologus wrote thus to Eutyches, in a letter still kept in the Acts of the Council of Chalcedon: "For the sake of peace and faith, we cannot hear cases of faith without the consent of the bishop of the city of Rome." Pope Leo I. was consulted by Leo, Bishop of Ravenna, about some questions, and answered him in a decretal letter in A.C. 451. And Pope Gregory the Great,15 rebuking John, Bishop of Ravenna, about the use of the pallium, told him of a precept from one of his predecessors, Pope John, which commanded that all the privileges formerly granted to the Bishop and Church of Ravenna should be kept. To this John gave a humble answer. After his death Pope Gregory ordered a visitation of the Church of Ravenna, confirmed the privileges granted to them before, and sent his pallium, following the ancient custom, to their new Bishop Marinian. Still, this Church sometimes broke away from the Church of Rome, and then returned to its obedience.

The rest of Italy, with the nearby islands, contained the suburbicarian regions, or ten provinces under the temporal Vicar of Rome: 1 Campania, 2 Tuscia and Umbria, 3 Picenum suburbicarium, 4 Sicily, 5 Apulia and Calabria, 6 Brutii and Lucania, 7 Samnium, 8 Sardinia, 9 Corsica, and 10 Valeria. Together they made up the proper Province of the Bishop of Rome. For the fifth Canon of the Council of Nice ordained that councils should be held every spring and autumn in every province; and following this canon, the Bishops of this Province met at Rome every half year. Pope Leo I. applied this canon to Rome in this sense, in a decretal letter to the Bishops of Sicily, written when Alippius and Ardabur were consuls, A.C. 447. "It has been laid down in the healthiest way," he said, "by the holy fathers, that there should be two meetings of bishops each year. Let three of you always come to Rome, on the third day before the Kalends of October, to join the lasting council. And let this practice be kept by you without any excuse, because with God's help it will be easier to make sure that no scandals and no errors arise in the churches of Christ; since everything has always been handled in communion before the Apostle Peter, so that all the decrees of the canons remain unbroken among all the Lord's priests." The Province of Rome therefore included Sicily, along with so much of Italy and the neighboring islands as sent Bishops to the annual councils at Rome. It did not extend into the provinces of Ravenna, Aquileia, Millain, Arles, and the rest, because those provinces had councils of their own. In every province of the Roman Empire the Bishops were gathered in council by the metropolitan, or the Bishop of the chief city of the province, and that Bishop presided over the council. But the Bishop of Rome not only presided over his own council of the Bishops of the suburbicarian regions; he also gave orders to the metropolitans of all the other provinces in the Western Empire, as their universal governor. The following cases show this further.

Pope Zosimus, in A.C. 417, summoned Proculus, Bishop of Marseilles, to appear before a council at Rome for illegitimate ordinations, and condemned him, as he mentions in several of his letters. Pope Boniface I. in A.C. 419, on a complaint of the Clergy of Valentia against Maximus a Bishop, summoned the Bishops of all Gallia and the seven provinces to gather in a council against him, and said in his letter that his predecessors had done the same. Pope Leo I. called a general council of all the provinces of Spain to meet in Gallæcia against the Manichees and Priscillianists, as he says in his decretal letter to Turribius, a Spanish Bishop. And in one of his decretal letters to Nicetas, Bishop of Aquileia, he ordered him to call a council of the Bishops of that province against the Pelagians, which could ratify all the synodal decrees already ratified by the See of Rome against this heresy. And in his decretal letter to Anastasius, Bishop of Thessalonica, he ordered that Bishop to hold two provincial councils every year, and to refer the harder cases to the See of Rome. If a council had to be called on any extraordinary occasion, he should not trouble the Bishops under him, but should make do with two Bishops from every province, and should not keep them more than fifteen days. In the same letter he described the form of church government then set up, which consisted in a subordination of all the churches to the See of Rome: "From this form," he said, "a distinction among bishops also arose, and great arrangement made provision so that not everyone would claim everything for himself. In each province there would be one whose opinion counted first among the brothers, and again certain men placed in the larger cities would take on a greater care, through whom the care of the whole Church would flow to the one See of Peter, and nothing would stand apart from its head. So whoever knows that he is set over some others should not resent that someone is set over him; he should pay the same obedience he demands, and just as he does not want to carry the heavy load of a great burden, he should not dare to lay an unbearable weight on others." These words show plainly the monarchical form of government then set up in the churches of the Western Empire under the Bishop of Rome, by way of the imperial Decree of Gratian and the appeals and decretal letters grounded upon it.

The same Pope Leo, having passed sentence in a council at Rome on Hilary Bishop of Arles, for what he had done through a provincial council in Gallia, took the chance from this to get the following Edict from the Western Emperor Valentinian III. which established the authority of his See over all the churches of the Western Empire more completely.

The emperors Theodosius and Valentinian, Augusti, to Aetius, a distinguished man, Count and Master of both services, and Patrician.

"It is certain both to us and to our empire that the one protection lies in the favor of the heavenly Divinity, and to win that favor our Christian faith and the religion we revere help above all. So the merit of Saint Peter, who is the prince of the episcopal crown, and the dignity of the city of Rome, have confirmed the primacy of the Apostolic See, and the authority of the sacred Synod has strengthened it, so that no unlawful presumption may try to do anything against the authority of that See. For the peace of the churches will be kept everywhere only when the whole body recognizes its own ruler. While these things had so far been kept without violation, Hilary of Arles, as we have learned from the faithful report of the venerable man Leo, Pope of Rome, tried with a stubborn boldness to undertake unlawful things, and because of that an abominable turmoil struck the churches beyond the Alps, as a very recent example shows. For Hilary, who is called Bishop of Arles, invaded the Roman Church by taking on himself, out of sheer rashness and without the bishop of that city being consulted, episcopal ordinations that were not his to give. He removed some men without proper grounds, and ordained others in an unseemly way, against the will and resistance of the citizens. And because those men were not easily accepted by the people who had not chosen them, he gathered an armed force for himself, and either blockaded the gates and barriers of the walls by siege in the manner of an enemy, or broke them open by attack, and led wars to preach peace at the seat of rest. After such acts against the majesty of the Empire and against the reverence owed to the Apostolic See had been examined one by one in the court of the religious man, the Pope of the City, a settled sentence was passed against him by some of those he had ordained badly. That sentence itself would in fact have held force throughout Gaul even without an imperial sanction: for what would not be allowed by the authority of the Pontiff? But this same reasoning also called for our own command. From now on it shall not be lawful for Hilary, whom the mild kindness of the Bishop still allows to be called bishop, nor for anyone else, to mix arms into church matters, or to resist the commands of the Roman prelate; for such bold acts violate the faith and reverence owed to our Empire. We remove not only this, which is a crime of the highest kind; but so that no slight disturbance may arise among the churches, or the discipline of religion appear in any way reduced, we decide by this lasting decree that neither the bishops of Gaul nor those of other provinces may try anything against the old custom without the authority of the venerable man, the Pope of the eternal City. But whatever the authority of the Apostolic See has laid down or shall lay down shall be law for them and for all. So whichever bishop, summoned to the judgment of the Roman prelate, fails to come, shall be forced to appear by the Governor of that province, while all is kept that our divine ancestors granted to the Roman Church, Aetius, most beloved father of the Augustus. Therefore your illustrious and splendid magnificence shall, by the authority of this present edictal law, make sure that the provisions above are kept, and shall at once demand a fine of ten pounds of gold from every judge who allows our commands to be violated. May the Divinity keep you for many years, most beloved father. Given on the eighth day before the Ides of June, at Rome, in the sixth consulship of Valentinian Augustus, A.C. 445." By this Edict the Emperor Valentinian ordered absolute obedience to the will of the Bishop of Rome throughout all the churches of his Empire, and declared that for the Bishops to attempt anything without the Pope's authority is contrary to ancient custom, and that Bishops summoned to appear before his judgment must be carried there by the Governor of the Province. He ascribed these privileges of the See of Rome to the grants of his dead ancestors, that is, to the Edict of Gratian and Valentinian II. as above. By this count the dominion of the Church of Rome was now 66 years old. And if in all that time it had not been firmly enough established, this new Edict was enough to settle it beyond all question throughout the Western Empire.

For this reason all the Bishops of the Province of Arles, in their letter to Pope Leo, A.C. 450, asking that the privileges of their metropolitan be restored, said: "By blessed Peter, the prince of the Apostles, the sacred Roman Church held the chief place above all the churches of the whole world." And Ceratius, Salonius and Veranus, three Bishops of Gallia, said in their letter to the same Pope: "Moreover we grow in a great and indescribable joy of our own, because that special page of your teaching is celebrated in the gatherings of all the churches, so that the truly agreeing judgment of all is declared: the chief place of the Apostolic See was rightly established there, where even now the oracles of the apostolic spirit are opened." And Leo himself, in16 his letter to the metropolitan Bishops throughout Illyricum: "Because our care is stretched through all the churches, at the demand of the Lord, who for the reward of his faith committed the primacy of apostolic dignity to the most blessed Apostle Peter, establishing the universal Church on the solidity of its foundation."

While this ecclesiastical dominion was rising up, the northern barbarous nations invaded the Western Empire and founded several kingdoms there, with religions different from the Church of Rome. But these kingdoms in time embraced the Roman faith, and at the same time submitted to the Pope's authority. The Franks in Gaul submitted at the end of the fifth Century, the Goths in Spain at the end of the sixth; and the Lombards in Italy were conquered by Charles the Great in A.C. 774. Between the years 775 and 794 the same Charles extended the Pope's authority over all Germany and Hungary, as far as the river Theysse and the Baltic Sea; he then set him above all human judgment, and at the same time helped him subdue the City and Duchy of Rome. By the conversion of the ten kingdoms to the Roman religion, the Pope only enlarged his spiritual dominion, and did not yet rise up as a horn of the Beast. It was his temporal dominion that made him one of the horns, and he acquired this dominion in the latter half of the eighth century, by subduing three of the former horns as above. Now that he had come to a temporal dominion and to power above all human judgment, he reigned17 with a look bolder than his fellows, and18 times and laws were from then on given into his hands, for a time, times and half a time, or three times and a half; that is, for 1260 solar years, counting a time as a Calendar year of 360 days, and a day as a solar year. After that19 the judgment is to sit, and they shall take away his dominion, not at once but little by little, to consume and to destroy it to the end.20 And the kingdom and dominion, and the greatness of the kingdom under the whole heaven, shall little by little be given to the people of the saints of the Most High, whose kingdom is an everlasting kingdom, and all dominions shall serve and obey him.

Notes to Chap. VIII.

1 See the Annals of Baronius, Anno 381. Sect. 6.

2 Populos Galliciæ.

3 Hormisd. Epist. 24. 26.

4 The words, sine auctoritate, seem wanting.

5 See Caroli a S. Paulo, Geographiam sacram, p. 72, 73.

6 Greg. M. lib. 1. Indic. 9. Epist. 16.

7 Apud Gratianum de Mediolanensi & Aquileiensi Episcopis.

8 Greg. M. lib. 3. Epist. 26. & lib. 4. Epist. 1.

9 Greg. lib. 5. Epist. 4.

10 Greg. lib. 9. Epist. 10 & 67.

11 Greg. lib. 11. Epist. 3, 4.

12 Ambros l. 3. de sacramentis, c. 1.

13 Sigonius de Regno Italiæ, lib. 5.

14 See Baronius, Anno 433. Sect. 24.

15 Greg. M. lib. 3. Epist. 56, 57. & lib. 5. Epist. 25, 26, 56.

16 Epist. 25. apud Holstenium.

17 Dan. vii. 20.

18 Ver. 25.

19 Ver. 26.

20 Ver. 27.

Part I, Chapter 9

Of the kingdoms represented in Daniel by the Ram and He-Goat.

The second and third Empires, represented by the Bear and Leopard, are again represented by the Ram and He-Goat; but with this difference, that the Ram represents the kingdoms of the Medes and Persians from the beginning of the four Empires, and the Goat represents the kingdom of the Greeks to the end of them. By this means, under the type of the Ram and He-Goat, the times of all the four Empires are again described: I lifted up mine eyes, saith1 Daniel, and saw, and behold there stood before the river [Ulai] a Ram which had two horns, and the two horns were high, but one was higher than the other, and the higher came up last.--And the Ram having two horns, are the kings of Media and Persia: not two persons but two kingdoms, the kingdoms of Media and Persia; and the kingdom of Persia was the higher horn and came up last. The kingdom of Persia rose up, when Cyrus having newly conquered Babylon, revolted from Darius King of the Medes, and beat him at Pasargadæ, and set up the Persians above the Medes. This was the horn which came up last. And the horn which came up first was the kingdom of the Medes, from the time that Cyaxares and Nebuchadnezzar overthrew Nineveh, and shared the Empire of the Assyrians between them. The Empires of Media and Babylon were contemporary, and rose up together by the fall of the Assyrian Empire; and the Prophecy of the four Beasts begins with one of them, and that of the Ram and He-Goat with the other. As the Ram represents the kingdom of Media and Persia from the beginning of the four Empires; so the He-Goat represents the Empire of the Greeks to the end of those Monarchies. In the reign of his great horn, and of the four horns which succeeded it, he represents this Empire during the reign of the Leopard: and in the reign of his little horn, which stood up in the latter time of the kingdom of the four, and after their fall became mighty but not by his own power, he represents it during the reign of the fourth Beast.

The rough Goat, saith Daniel, is the King of Grecia, that is, the kingdom; and the great horn between his eyes is the first King: not the first Monarch, but the first kingdom, that which lasted during the reign of Alexander the great, and his brother Aridæus and two young sons, Alexander and Hercules.2 Now that [horn] being broken off, whereas four [horns] stood up for it, four kingdoms shall stand up out of the nation [of the Greeks], but not in his [the first horn's] power. The four horns are therefore four kingdoms; and by consequence, the first great horn which they succeeded is the first great kingdom of the Greeks, that which was founded by Alexander the great, An. Nabonass. 414, and lasted till the death of his son Hercules, An. Nabonass. 441. And the four are those of Cassander, Lysimachus, Antigonus, and Ptolemy, as above.

3 And in the latter time of their kingdom, when the transgressors are come to the full, a King [or new kingdom] of fierce countenance, and understanding dark sentences, shall stand up: and his power shall be mighty, but not by his own power. This King was the last horn of the Goat, the little horn which came up out of one of the four horns, and waxed exceeding great. The latter time of their kingdom was when the Romans began to conquer them, that is, when they conquered Perseus King of Macedonia, the fundamental kingdom of the Greeks. And at that time the transgressors came to the full: for then the High-priesthood was exposed to sale, the Vessels of the Temple were sold to pay for the purchase; and the High-priest, with some of the Jews, procured a licence from Antiochus Epiphanes to do after the ordinances of the heathen, and set up a school at Jerusalem for teaching those ordinances. Then Antiochus took Jerusalem with an armed force, slew 4000 Jews, took as many prisoners and sold them, spoiled the Temple, interdicted the worship, commanded the Law of Moses to be burnt, and set up the worship of the heathen Gods in all Judea. In the very same year, An. Nabonass. 580, the Romans conquered Macedonia, the chief of the four horns. Hitherto the Goat was mighty by its own power, but henceforward began to be under the Romans. Daniel distinguishes the times, by describing very particularly the actions of the Kings of the north and south, those two of the four horns which bordered upon Judea, until the Romans conquered Macedonia; and thenceforward only touching upon the main revolutions which happened within the compass of the nations represented by the Goat. In this latter period of time the little horn was to stand up and grow mighty, but not by his own power.

The three first of Daniel's Beasts had their dominions taken away, each of them at the rise of the next Beast; but their lives were prolonged, and they are all of them still alive. The third Beast, or Leopard, reigned in his four heads, till the rise of the fourth Beast, or Empire of the Latins; and his life was prolonged under their power. This Leopard reigning in his four heads, signifies the same thing with the He-Goat reigning in his four horns: and therefore the He-Goat reigned in his four horns till the rise of Daniel's fourth Beast, or Empire of the Latins: then its dominion was taken away by the Latins, but its life was prolonged under their power. The Latins are not comprehended among the nations represented by the He-Goat in this Prophecy: their power over the Greeks is only named in it, to distinguish the times in which the He-Goat was mighty by his own power, from the times in which he was mighty but not by his own power. He was mighty by his own power till his dominion was taken away by the Latins; after that, his life was prolonged under their dominion, and this prolonging of his life was in the days of his last horn: for in the days of this horn the Goat became mighty, but not by his own power.

Now because this horn was a horn of the Goat, we are to look for it among the nations which composed the body of the Goat. Among those nations he was to rise up and grow mighty: he grew mighty4 towards the south, and towards the east, and towards the pleasant land; and therefore he was to rise up in the north-west parts of those nations, and extend his dominion towards Egypt, Syria and Judea. In the latter time of the kingdom of the four horns, it was to rise up out of one of them and subdue the rest, but not by its own power. It was to be assisted by a foreign power, a power superior to itself, the power which took away the dominion of the third Beast, the power of the fourth Beast. And such a little horn was the kingdom of Macedonia, from the time that it became subject to the Romans. This kingdom, by the victory of the Romans over Persius King of Macedonia, Anno Nabonass. 580, ceased to be one of the four horns of the Goat, and became a dominion of a new sort: not a horn of the fourth Beast, for Macedonia belonged to the body of the third; but a horn of the third Beast of a new sort, a horn of the Goat which grew mighty but not by his own power, a horn which rose up and grew potent under a foreign power, the power of the Romans.

The Romans, by the legacy of Attalus the last King of Pergamus, An. Nabonass. 615, inherited that kingdom, including all Asia Minor on this side mount Taurus. An. Nabonass. 684 and 685 they conquered Armenia, Syria and Judea; An. Nabonass. 718, they subdued Egypt. And by these conquests the little horn5 waxed exceeding great towards the south, and towards the east, and towards the pleasant land. And it waxed great even to the host of heaven; and cast down some of the host and of the stars to the ground, and stamped upon them, that is, upon the people and great men of the Jews.6 Yea, he magnified himself even to the Prince of the Host, the Messiah, the Prince of the Jews, whom he put to death, An. Nabonass. 780. And by him the daily sacrifice was taken away, and the place of his sanctuary was cast down, viz. in the wars which the armies of the Eastern nations under the conduct of the Romans made against Judea, when Nero and Vespasian were Emperors, An. Nabonass. 816, 817, 818.7 And an host was given him against the daily sacrifice by reason of transgression, and it cast down the truth to the ground, and it practised and prospered. This transgression is in the next words called the transgression of desolation; and in Dan. xi. 31. the abomination which maketh desolate; and in Matth. xxiv. 15. the abomination of desolation, spoken of by Daniel the prophet, standing in the holy place. It may relate chiefly to the worship of Jupiter Olympius in his Temple built by the Emperor Hadrian, in the place of the Temple of the Jews, and to the revolt of the Jews under Barchochab occasioned thereby, and to the desolation of Judea which followed thereupon; all the Jews, being thenceforward banished Judea upon pain of death. Then I heard, saith8 Daniel, one saint speaking, and another saint said unto that certain saint which spake, How long shall be the vision concerning the daily sacrifice, and the transgression of desolation, to give both the sanctuary and the host to be trodden under foot? And he said unto me, Unto two thousand and three hundred days; then shall the sanctuary be cleansed. Daniel's days are years; and these years may perhaps be reckoned either from the destruction of the Temple by the Romans in the reign of Vespasian, or from the pollution of the Sanctuary by the worship of Jupiter Olympius, or from the desolation of Judea made in the end of the Jewish war by the banishment of all the Jews out of their own country, or from some other period which time will discover. Henceforward the last horn of the Goat continued mighty under the Romans, till the reign of Constantine the great and his sons: and then by the division of the Roman Empire between the Greek and Latin Emperors, it separated from the Latins, and became the Greek Empire alone, but yet under the dominion of a Roman family; and at present it is mighty under the dominion of the Turks.

This last horn is by some taken for Antiochus Epiphanes, but not very judiciously. A horn of a Beast is never taken for a single person: it always signifies a new kingdom, and the kingdom of Antiochus was an old one. Antiochus reigned over one of the four horns, and the little horn was a fifth under its proper kings. This horn was at first a little one, and waxed exceeding great, but so did not Antiochus. It is described great above all the former horns, and so was not Antiochus. His kingdom on the contrary was weak, and tributary to the Romans, and he did not enlarge it. The horn was a King of fierce countenance, and destroyed wonderfully, and prospered and practised; that is, he prospered in his practises against the holy people: but Antiochus was frighted out of Egypt by a mere message of the Romans, and afterwards routed and baffled by the Jews. The horn was mighty by another's power, Antiochus acted by his own. The horn stood up against the Prince of the Host of heaven, the Prince of Princes; and this is the character not of Antiochus but of Antichrist. The horn cast down the Sanctuary to the ground, and so did not Antiochus; he left it standing. The Sanctuary and Host were trampled under foot 2300 days; and in Daniel's Prophecies days are put for years: but the profanation of the Temple in the reign of Antiochus did not last so many natural days. These were to last till the time of the end, till the last end of the indignation against the Jews; and this indignation is not yet at an end. They were to last till the Sanctuary which had been cast down should be cleansed, and the Sanctuary is not yet cleansed.

This Prophecy of the Ram and He-Goat is repeated in the last Prophecy of Daniel. There the Angel tells Daniel, that9 he stood up to strengthen Darius the Mede, and that there should stand up yet three kings in Persia, [Cyrus, Cambyses, and Darius Hystaspis] and the fourth [Xerxes] should be far richer than they all; and by his wealth thro' his riches he should stir up all against the realm of Grecia. This relates to the Ram, whose two horns were the kingdoms of Media and Persia. Then he goes on to describe the horns of the Goat by the10 standing up of a mighty king, which should rule with great dominion, and do according to his will; and by the breaking of his kingdom into four smaller kingdoms, and not descending to his own posterity. Then he describes the actions of two of those kingdoms which bordered on Judea, viz. Egypt and Syria, calling them the Kings of the South and North, that is, in respect of Judea; and he carries on the description till the latter end of the kingdoms of the four, and till the reign of Antiochus Epiphanes, when transgressors were come to the full. In the eighth year of Antiochus, the year in which he profaned the Temple and set up the heathen Gods in all Judea, and the Romans conquered the kingdom of Macedon; the prophetic Angel leaves off describing the affairs of the kings of the South and North, and begins to describe those of the Greeks under the dominion of the Romans, in these words:11 And after him Arms [the Romans] shall stand up, and they shall pollute the sanctuary of strength. As [Hebrew: MMLK] signifies after the king, Dan. xi. 8; so here [Hebrew: MMNW] may signify after him: and so [Hebrew: MN-H'CHT] may signify after one of them, Dan. viii. 9. Arms are every where in these Prophecies of Daniel put for the military power of a kingdom, and they stand up when they conquer and grow powerful. The Romans conquered Illyricum, Epirus and Macedonia, in the year of Nabonassar 580; and thirty five years after, by the last will and testament of Attalus the last King of Pergamus, they inherited that rich and flourishing kingdom, that is, all Asia on this side mount Taurus: and sixty nine years after, they conquered the kingdom of Syria, and reduced it into a Province: and thirty four years after they did the like to Egypt. By all these steps the Roman arms stood up over the Greeks. And after 95 years more, by making war upon the Jews, they polluted the sanctuary of strength, and took away the daily sacrifice, and, in its room soon after, placed the abomination which made the Land desolate: for this abomination was placed after the days of Christ, Matth. xxiv. 15. In the 16th year of the Emperor Hadrian, A. C. 132, they placed this abomination by building a Temple to Jupiter Capitolinus, where the Temple of God in Jerusalem had stood. Thereupon the Jews under the conduct of Barchochab rose up in arms against the Romans, and in that war had 50 cities demolished, 985 of their best towns destroyed, and 580000 men slain by the sword: and in the end of the war, A.C. 136, they were all banished Judea upon pain or death; and that time the land hath remained desolate of its old inhabitants.

Now that the prophetic Angel passes in this manner from the four kingdoms of the Greeks to the Romans reigning over the Greeks, is confirmed from hence, that in the next place he describes the affairs of the Christians unto the time of the end, in these words:12 And they that understand among the people shall instruct many, yet they shall fall by the sword and by flame, by captivity and by spoil many days. Now when they shall fall they shall be holpen with a little help, viz. in the reign of Constantine the great; but many shall cleave to them with dissimulation. And some of them of understanding there shall fall to try them, and to purge them from the dissemblers; and to make them white even to the time of the end. And a little after, the time of the end is said to be a time, times, and half a time: which is the duration of the reign of the last horn of Daniel's fourth Beast, and of the Woman and her Beast in the Apocalyps.

Notes to Chap. IX.

1 Chap. viii. 3.

2 Ver. 22.

3 Ver. 23.

4 Chap. viii. 9.

5 Chap. viii. 9, 10.

6 Ver. 11.

7 Ver. 12.

8 Ver. 13, 14.

9 Dan. xi. 1, 2.

10 Ver. 3.

11 Dan xi. 31.

12 Chap. xi. 33, &c.

Of the kingdoms represented in Daniel by the Ram and He-Goat.

The Bear and the Leopard stand for the second and third Empires. The Ram and the He-Goat stand for them again, but with a difference: the Ram stands for the kingdoms of the Medes and Persians from the beginning of the four Empires, and the Goat stands for the kingdom of the Greeks to their end. In this way, under the image of the Ram and the He-Goat, the times of all four Empires are described a second time. "I lifted up my eyes," says1 Daniel, "and looked. There, in front of the river [Ulai], stood a Ram with two horns. Both horns were tall, but one was taller than the other, and the taller one came up last." The Ram with two horns means the kings of Media and Persia: not two persons but two kingdoms, the kingdoms of Media and Persia. The kingdom of Persia was the taller horn, and it came up last. Persia rose when Cyrus, just after conquering Babylon, rebelled against Darius, king of the Medes, beat him at Pasargadæ, and set the Persians above the Medes. That was the horn that came up last. The horn that came up first was the kingdom of the Medes, from the time that Cyaxares and Nebuchadnezzar overthrew Nineveh and shared the Empire of the Assyrians between them. The Empires of Media and Babylon existed at the same time, and both rose with the fall of the Assyrian Empire. The Prophecy of the four Beasts begins with one of them, and the Prophecy of the Ram and He-Goat with the other. As the Ram stands for the kingdom of Media and Persia from the beginning of the four Empires, so the He-Goat stands for the Empire of the Greeks to the end of those monarchies. While his great horn ruled, and then the four horns that followed it, he stands for this Empire during the reign of the Leopard. While his little horn ruled, one that rose in the latter time of the kingdom of the four and became mighty after their fall but not by its own power, he stands for it during the reign of the fourth Beast.

Daniel says the shaggy Goat is the King of Grecia; that is, the kingdom. The large horn between his eyes is the first King: not the first monarch, but the first kingdom, the one that lasted through the reign of Alexander the Great, his brother Aridæus, and Alexander's two young sons, Alexander and Hercules.2 Once that [horn] was broken, four [horns] rose in its place, and four kingdoms would stand up out of the nation [of the Greeks], but not with his [the first horn's] power. So the four horns are four kingdoms, and the first large horn they replaced is the first great kingdom of the Greeks: the one founded by Alexander the Great in the year of Nabonassar 414, which lasted until his son Hercules died in the year of Nabonassar 441. Those four are the kingdoms of Cassander, Lysimachus, Antigonus, and Ptolemy, as noted above.

3 In the latter time of their kingdom, when the transgressors have reached the full, a King [or new kingdom] with a fierce face, who understands riddles, will stand up. His power will be mighty, but not by his own power. This King was the last horn of the Goat: the little horn that came up out of one of the four horns and grew very great. The latter time of their kingdom was when the Romans began to conquer them, that is, when they conquered Perseus, King of Macedonia, the fundamental kingdom of the Greeks. The transgressors reached the full at that time, because the High-priesthood was then put up for sale and the Vessels of the Temple were sold to pay for the purchase. The High-priest, with some of the Jews, got permission from Antiochus Epiphanes to follow the practices of the heathen and set up a school at Jerusalem to teach them. Then Antiochus took Jerusalem by force, killed 4000 Jews, took as many prisoners and sold them, plundered the Temple, banned its worship, ordered the Law of Moses to be burned, and set up the worship of the heathen Gods in all Judea. In that very same year, in the year of Nabonassar 580, the Romans conquered Macedonia, the chief of the four horns. Until then the Goat was mighty by its own power; after that it began to be under the Romans. Daniel tells the times apart by describing in detail the deeds of the Kings of the north and south, those two of the four horns that bordered Judea, until the Romans conquered Macedonia. After that he touches only on the main changes that took place among the nations represented by the Goat. In this later period the little horn was to stand up and grow mighty, but not by its own power.

The first three of Daniel's Beasts lost their dominions, each when the next Beast rose, but their lives were extended, and all of them are still alive. The third Beast, or Leopard, ruled in its four heads until the fourth Beast, or Empire of the Latins, rose, and its life was extended under their power. The Leopard ruling in its four heads means the same thing as the He-Goat ruling in its four horns. So the He-Goat ruled in its four horns until Daniel's fourth Beast, or Empire of the Latins, rose. Then the Latins took away its dominion, but its life was extended under their power. The Latins are not counted among the nations represented by the He-Goat in this Prophecy. Their power over the Greeks is named only to tell apart the times when the He-Goat was mighty by its own power from the times when it was mighty, but not by its own power. It was mighty by its own power until the Latins took away its dominion. After that its life was extended under their rule, and this extension of its life came in the days of its last horn. In the days of that horn the Goat became mighty, but not by its own power.

Because this horn was a horn of the Goat, we should look for it among the nations that made up the body of the Goat. Among those nations it was to rise up and grow mighty. It grew mighty4 toward the south, toward the east, and toward the pleasant land, so it was to rise up in the northwestern parts of those nations and spread its dominion toward Egypt, Syria, and Judea. In the latter time of the kingdom of the four horns it was to rise up out of one of them and subdue the rest, but not by its own power. A foreign power was to help it, a power greater than itself: the power that took away the dominion of the third Beast, the power of the fourth Beast. The kingdom of Macedonia was just such a little horn, from the time it became subject to the Romans. By their victory over Persius, King of Macedonia, in the year of Nabonassar 580, this kingdom stopped being one of the four horns of the Goat and became a dominion of a new kind: not a horn of the fourth Beast, because Macedonia belonged to the body of the third Beast; but a new kind of horn of the third Beast, a horn of the Goat that grew mighty but not by its own power, a horn that rose up and grew strong under a foreign power, the power of the Romans.

Through the will of Attalus, the last King of Pergamus, the Romans inherited that kingdom in the year of Nabonassar 615, including all Asia Minor on this side of mount Taurus. In the years of Nabonassar 684 and 685 they conquered Armenia, Syria, and Judea; in the year of Nabonassar 718 they subdued Egypt. With these conquests the little horn5 grew very great toward the south, toward the east, and toward the pleasant land. It grew great even to the host of heaven, and threw some of the host and of the stars to the ground and stamped on them, that is, on the people and great men of the Jews.6 It exalted itself even to the Prince of the Host: the Messiah, the Prince of the Jews, whom it put to death in the year of Nabonassar 780. Through it the daily sacrifice was taken away and the place of its sanctuary thrown down: that is, in the wars that the armies of the Eastern nations, led by the Romans, waged against Judea while Nero and Vespasian were Emperors, in the years of Nabonassar 816, 817, and 818.7 A host was given to it to oppose the daily sacrifice because of transgression. It threw the truth to the ground and carried out its plans and prospered. This transgression is called in the next words the transgression of desolation; in Dan. xi. 31 it is the abomination which makes desolate; and in Matth. xxiv. 15 it is the abomination of desolation, spoken of by Daniel the prophet, standing in the holy place. It may relate most of all to the worship of Jupiter Olympius in the temple that the Emperor Hadrian built in place of the Temple of the Jews, to the revolt of the Jews under Barchochab that this brought about, and to the desolation of Judea that followed. All the Jews were then banished from Judea on pain of death.8 "Then I heard," says Daniel, "one saint speaking. Another saint said to the saint who was speaking, 'How long shall the vision about the daily sacrifice and the transgression of desolation last, so that both the sanctuary and the host are trampled underfoot?' And he said to me, 'For two thousand and three hundred days. Then the sanctuary will be cleansed.'" Daniel's days are years, and these years may be counted either from the destruction of the Temple by the Romans in the reign of Vespasian, or from the pollution of the Sanctuary by the worship of Jupiter Olympius, or from the desolation of Judea at the end of the Jewish war, when all the Jews were banished from their own country, or from some other starting point that time will reveal. From then on the last horn of the Goat stayed mighty under the Romans until the reign of Constantine the Great and his sons. Then the Roman Empire was divided between the Greek and Latin Emperors, and the horn separated from the Latins and became the Greek Empire alone, still under the rule of a Roman family. Today it is mighty under the rule of the Turks.

Some take this last horn for Antiochus Epiphanes, but that is not very sensible. A horn of a Beast never stands for a single person; it always means a new kingdom, and the kingdom of Antiochus was an old one. Antiochus ruled one of the four horns, and the little horn was a fifth kingdom with its own kings. This horn was small at first and then grew very great, but Antiochus did not. It is described as greater than all the former horns, and Antiochus was not. His kingdom, on the contrary, was weak and paid tribute to the Romans, and he did not make it larger. The horn was a King of fierce face who destroyed in astonishing ways, and succeeded and carried out his plans: in other words, he succeeded in his plots against the holy people. But Antiochus was scared out of Egypt by a mere message from the Romans, and later he was beaten and outwitted by the Jews. The horn was mighty by another's power; Antiochus acted by his own. The horn stood up against the Prince of the Host of heaven, the Prince of Princes, and this describes not Antiochus but Antichrist. The horn threw the Sanctuary to the ground; Antiochus did not, he left it standing. The Sanctuary and the Host were trampled underfoot for 2300 days, and in Daniel's Prophecies days stand for years. But the defilement of the Temple in the reign of Antiochus did not last that many actual days. They were to last until the time of the end, until the last end of the anger against the Jews, and that anger is not yet over. They were to last until the Sanctuary that had been thrown down was cleansed, and the Sanctuary is not yet cleansed.

This Prophecy of the Ram and He-Goat is repeated in the last Prophecy of Daniel. There the Angel tells Daniel that9 he stood up to strengthen Darius the Mede, and that three more kings would stand up in Persia, [Cyrus, Cambyses, and Darius Hystaspis], and that the fourth [Xerxes] would be far richer than all of them. Through his great riches he would stir up everyone against the realm of Grecia. This concerns the Ram, whose two horns were the kingdoms of Media and Persia. Then the Angel goes on to describe the horns of the Goat: first by the10 rising of a mighty king who would rule with great dominion and do as he pleased, and then by the breaking of his kingdom into four smaller kingdoms that did not pass to his own descendants. Next he describes what two of those kingdoms did, Egypt and Syria, which bordered on Judea. He calls them the Kings of the South and North, that is, south and north in relation to Judea. He carries the description on to the later end of the kingdoms of the four, and to the reign of Antiochus Epiphanes, when the transgressors had reached the full. In the eighth year of Antiochus, the year in which he defiled the Temple and set up the heathen Gods in all Judea, and the Romans conquered the kingdom of Macedon, the prophetic Angel stops describing the affairs of the kings of the South and North. He begins to describe those of the Greeks under the rule of the Romans, in these words:11 "And after him Arms [the Romans] shall stand up, and they shall pollute the sanctuary of strength." As [Hebrew: MMLK] signifies "after the king" in Dan. xi. 8, so here [Hebrew: MMNW] may signify "after him", and [Hebrew: MN-H'CHT] may signify "after one of them" in Dan. viii. 9. In these Prophecies of Daniel, Arms stand everywhere for the military power of a kingdom, and they stand up when they conquer and grow powerful. The Romans conquered Illyricum, Epirus, and Macedonia in the year of Nabonassar 580. Thirty five years later, by the last will and testament of Attalus, the last King of Pergamus, they inherited that rich and prosperous kingdom, that is, all Asia on this side of mount Taurus. Sixty nine years after that they conquered the kingdom of Syria and made it a Province. Thirty four years after that they did the same to Egypt. With all these steps the Roman arms rose up over the Greeks. And 95 years after that, by making war on the Jews, they polluted the sanctuary of strength and took away the daily sacrifice. Soon afterward, in its place, they set up the abomination that made the Land desolate; for this abomination was set up after the days of Christ, Matth. xxiv. 15. In the 16th year of the Emperor Hadrian, in the year of Christ 132, they set up this abomination by building a Temple to Jupiter Capitolinus where the Temple of God in Jerusalem had stood. Then the Jews, led by Barchochab, rose up in arms against the Romans. In that war 50 cities were demolished, 985 of their best towns destroyed, and 580000 men killed by the sword. At the end of the war, in the year of Christ 136, they were all banished from Judea on pain of death, and since that time the land has remained desolate of its old inhabitants.

That the prophetic Angel passes in this way from the four kingdoms of the Greeks to the Romans ruling over the Greeks is confirmed by what comes next: he describes the affairs of the Christians up to the time of the end, in these words:12 "And those who understand among the people will teach many. Yet they will fall by the sword and by flame, by captivity and by spoil, for many days. When they fall they will be helped with a little help"—that is, in the reign of Constantine the Great—"but many will hold on to them only in pretense. And some of them who understand will fall, to test them, to purge them of the pretenders, and to make them pure until the time of the end." A little later, the time of the end is called a time, times, and half a time. That is the length of the reign of the last horn of Daniel's fourth Beast, and of the Woman and her Beast in the Apocalyps.

Notes to Chap. IX.

1 Chap. viii. 3.

2 Ver. 22.

3 Ver. 23.

4 Chap. viii. 9.

5 Chap. viii. 9, 10.

6 Ver. 11.

7 Ver. 12.

8 Ver. 13, 14.

9 Dan. xi. 1, 2.

10 Ver. 3.

11 Dan xi. 31.

12 Chap. xi. 33, etc.

Part I, Chapter 10, 1

Of the Prophecy of the Seventy Weeks.

The Vision of the Image composed of four Metals was given first to Nebuchadnezzar, and then to Daniel in a dream: and Daniel began then to be celebrated for revealing of secrets, Ezek. xxviii. 3. The Vision of the four Beasts, and of the Son of man coming in the clouds of heaven, was also given to Daniel in a dream. That of the Ram and the He-Goat appeared to him in the day time, when he was by the bank of the river Ulay; and was explained to him by the prophetic Angel Gabriel. It concerns the Prince of the host, and the Prince of Princes: and now in the first year of Darius the Mede over Babylon, the same prophetic Angel appears to Daniel again, and explains to him what is meant by the Son of man, by the Prince of the host, and the Prince of Princes. The Prophecy of the Son of man coming in the clouds of heaven relates to the second coming of Christ; that of the Prince of the host relates to his first coming: and this Prophecy of the Messiah, in explaining them, relates to both comings, and assigns the times thereof.

This Prophecy, like all the rest of Daniel's, consists of two parts, an introductory Prophecy and an explanation thereof; the whole I thus translate and interpret.

1 'Seventy weeks are2 cut out upon thy people, and upon thy holy city, to finish transgression, and3 to make an end of sins, to expiate iniquity, and to bring in everlasting righteousness, to consummate the Vision and4 the Prophet, and to anoint the most Holy.

'Know also and understand, that from the going forth of the commandment to cause to return and to build Jerusalem, unto5 the Anointed the Prince, shall be seven weeks.

'Yet threescore and two weeks shall6 it return, and the street be built and the wall; but in troublesome times: and after the threescore and two weeks, the Anointed shall be cut off, and6 it shall not be his; but the people of a Prince to come shall destroy the city and the sanctuary: and the end thereof shall be with a flood, and unto the end of the war, desolations are determined.

'Yet shall he confirm the covenant with many for one week: and in half a week he shall cause the sacrifice and oblation to cease: and upon a wing of abominations he shall make it desolate, even until the consummation, and that which is determined be poured upon the desolate.'

Seventy weeks are cut out upon thy people, and upon thy holy city, to finish transgression, &c. Here, by putting a week for seven years, are reckoned 490 years from the time that the dispersed Jews should be re-incorporated into7 a people and a holy city, until the death and resurrection of Christ; whereby transgression should be finished, and sins ended, iniquity be expiated, and everlasting righteousness brought in, and this Vision be accomplished, and the Prophet consummated, that Prophet whom the Jews expected; and whereby the most Holy should be anointed, he who is therefore in the next words called the Anointed, that is, the Messiah, or the Christ. For by joining the accomplishment of the vision with the expiation of sins, the 490 years are ended with the death of Christ. Now the dispersed Jews became a people and city when they first returned into a polity or body politick; and this was in the seventh year of Artaxerxes Longimanus, when Ezra returned with a body of Jews from captivity, and revived the Jewish worship; and by the King's commission created Magistrates in all the land, to judge and govern the people according to the laws of God and the King, Ezra vii. 25. There were but two returns from captivity, Zerubbabel's and Ezra's; in Zerubbabel's they had only commission to build the Temple, in Ezra's they first became a polity or city by a government of their own. Now the years of this Artaxerxes began about two or three months after the summer solstice, and his seventh year fell in with the third year of the eightieth Olympiad; and the latter part thereof, wherein Ezra went up to Jerusalem, was in the year of the Julian Period 4257. Count the time from thence to the death of Christ, and you will find it just 490 years. If you count in Judaic years commencing in autumn, and date the reckoning from the first autumn after Ezra's coming to Jerusalem, when he put the King's decree in execution; the death of Christ will fall on the year of the Julian Period 4747, Anno Domini 34; and the weeks will be Judaic weeks, ending with sabbatical years; and this I take to be the truth: but if you had rather place the death of Christ in the year before, as is commonly done, you may take the year of Ezra's journey into the reckoning.

Know also and understand, that from the going forth of the commandment to cause to return and to build Jerusalem, unto the Anointed the Prince, shall be seven weeks. The former part of the Prophecy related to the first coming of Christ, being dated to his coming as a Prophet; this being dated to his coming to be Prince or King, seems to relate to his second coming. There, the Prophet was consummate, and the most holy anointed: here, he that was anointed comes to be Prince and to reign. For Daniel's Prophecies reach to the end of the world; and there is scarce a Prophecy in the Old Testament concerning Christ, which doth not in something or other relate to his second coming. If divers of the antients, as8 Irenæus,9 Julius Africanus, Hippolytus the martyr, and Apollinaris Bishop of Laodicea, applied the half week to the times of Antichrist; why may not we, by the same liberty of interpretation, apply the seven weeks to the time when Antichrist shall be destroyed by the brightness of Christ's coming?

The Israelites in the days of the antient Prophets, when the ten Tribes were led into captivity, expected a double return; and that at the first the Jews should build a new Temple inferior to Solomon's, until the time of that age should be fulfilled; and afterwards they should return from all places of their captivity, and build Jerusalem and the Temple gloriously, Tobit xiv. 4, 5, 6: and to express the glory and excellence of this city, it is figuratively said to be built of precious stones, Tobit xiii. 16, 17, 18. Isa. liv. 11, 12. Rev. xi. and called the New Jerusalem, the Heavenly Jerusalem, the Holy City, the Lamb's Wife, the City of the Great King, the City into which the Kings of the earth do bring their glory and honour. Now while such a return from captivity was the expectation of Israel, even before the times of Daniel, I know not why Daniel should omit it in his Prophecy. This part of the Prophecy being therefore not yet fulfilled, I shall not attempt a particular interpretation of it, but content myself with observing, that as the seventy and the sixty two weeks were Jewish weeks, ending with sabbatical years; so the seven weeks are the compass of a Jubilee, and begin and end with actions proper for a Jubilee, and of the highest nature for which a Jubilee can be kept: and that since the commandment to return and to build Jerusalem, precedes the Messiah the Prince 49 years; it may perhaps come forth not from the Jews themselves, but from some other kingdom friendly to them, and precede their return from captivity, and give occasion to it; and lastly, that this rebuilding of Jerusalem and the waste places of Judah is predicted in Micah vii. 11. Amos ix. 11, 14. Ezek. xxxvi. 33, 35, 36, 38. Isa. liv. 3, 11, 12. lv. 12. lxi. 4. lxv. 18, 21,22. and Tobit xiv. 5. and that the return from captivity and coming of the Messiah and his kingdom are described in Daniel vii. Rev. xix. Acts i. Mat. xxiv. Joel iii. Ezek. xxxvi. xxxvii. Isa. lx. lxii. lxiii. lxv. and lxvi. and many other places of scripture. The manner I know not. Let time be the Interpreter.

Yet threescore and two weeks shall it return, and the street be built and the wall, but in troublesome times: and after the threescore and two weeks the Messiah shall be cut off, and it shall not be his; but the people of a Prince to come shall destroy the city and the sanctuary, &c. Having foretold both comings of Christ, and dated the last from their returning and building Jerusalem; to prevent the applying that to the building Jerusalem by Nehemiah, he distinguishes this from that, by saying that from this period to the Anointed shall be, not seven weeks, but threescore and two weeks, and this not in prosperous but in troublesome times; and at the end of these Weeks the Messiah shall not be the Prince of the Jews, but be cut off; and Jerusalem not be his, but the city and sanctuary be destroyed. Now Nehemiah came to Jerusalem in the 20th year of this same Artaxerxes, while Ezra still continued there, Nehem. xii. 36, and found the city lying waste, and the houses and wall unbuilt, Nehem. ii. 17. vii. 4, and finished the wall the 25th day of the month Elul, Nehem. vi. 15, in the 28th year of the King, that is, in September in the year of the Julian Period 4278. Count now from this year threescore and two weeks of years, that is 434 years, and the reckoning will end in September in the year of the Julian Period 4712 which is the year in which Christ was born, according to Clemens Alexandrinus, Irenæus, Eusebius, Epiphanius, Jerome, Orosius, Cassiodorus, and other antients; and this was the general opinion, till Dionysius Exiguus invented the vulgar account, in which Christ's birth is placed two years later. If with some you reckon that Christ was born three or four years before the vulgar account, yet his birth will fall in the latter part of the last week, which is enough. How after these weeks Christ was cut off and the city and sanctuary destroyed by the Romans, is well known.

Yet shall he confirm the covenant with many for one week. He kept it, notwithstanding his death, till the rejection of the Jews, and calling of Cornelius and the Gentiles in the seventh year after his passion.

And in half a week he shall cause the sacrifice and oblation to cease; that is, by the war of the Romans upon the Jews: which war, after some commotions, began in the 13th year of Nero, A.D. 67, in the spring, when Vespasian with an army invaded them; and ended in the second year of Vespasian, A.D. 70, in autumn, Sept. 7, when Titus took the city, having burnt the Temple 27 days before: so that it lasted three years and an half.

Of the Prophecy of the Seventy Weeks.

The Vision of the Image made of four Metals was given first to Nebuchadnezzar, and then to Daniel in a dream. Daniel then became known for revealing secrets, Ezek. xxviii. 3. The Vision of the four Beasts, and of the Son of man coming in the clouds of heaven, was also given to Daniel in a dream. The Vision of the Ram and the He-Goat appeared to him in the daytime, while he was by the bank of the river Ulay, and the prophetic Angel Gabriel explained it to him. It concerns the Prince of the host and the Prince of Princes. Now, in the first year of Darius the Mede over Babylon, the same prophetic Angel appears to Daniel again and explains what is meant by the Son of man, by the Prince of the host, and by the Prince of Princes. The Prophecy of the Son of man coming in the clouds of heaven concerns the second coming of Christ, and the Prophecy of the Prince of the host concerns his first coming. This Prophecy of the Messiah, in explaining them, concerns both comings and gives their times.

Like all the rest of Daniel's, this Prophecy has two parts: an introductory Prophecy and an explanation of it. I translate and interpret the whole like this.

1 "Seventy weeks are2 cut for your people and for your holy city, to finish transgression, and3 to end sins, to expiate iniquity, and to bring in everlasting righteousness, to bring the Vision and4 the Prophet to completion, and to anoint the Most Holy."

"Know also and understand that from the going forth of the commandment to bring your people back and to build Jerusalem, until5 the Anointed the Prince, there will be seven weeks."

"Yet in sixty two weeks6 it will return, and the street and the wall will be built, but in troubled times. After the sixty two weeks the Anointed will be cut off, and6 it will not be his. The people of a Prince to come will destroy the city and the sanctuary. Its end will come in a flood, and until the end of the war desolations are decreed."

"Yet he will confirm the covenant with many for one week. In half a week he will make the sacrifice and the offering stop. On a wing of abominations he will make it desolate, until the end comes and what is determined is poured out on the desolate."

Seventy weeks are cut for your people and for your holy city, to finish transgression, etc. Here a week stands for seven years, so 490 years are counted from the time the scattered Jews would be brought back together into7 a people and a holy city, until the death and resurrection of Christ. By then transgression would be finished, sins ended, iniquity expiated, and everlasting righteousness brought in; the Vision would be accomplished and the Prophet brought to completion, the Prophet whom the Jews expected; and the Most Holy would be anointed, which is why the next words call him the Anointed, that is, the Messiah, or the Christ. The accomplishment of the vision is joined with the expiation of sins, so the 490 years end with the death of Christ. The scattered Jews became a people and a city when they first returned as a polity, or body politic. This was in the seventh year of Artaxerxes Longimanus, when Ezra returned with a body of Jews from captivity and revived the Jewish worship. By the King's commission he created magistrates in all the land, to judge and govern the people according to the laws of God and the King, Ezra vii. 25. There were only two returns from captivity: Zerubbabel's and Ezra's. Under Zerubbabel they had only permission to build the Temple; under Ezra they first became a polity or city, with a government of their own. The years of this Artaxerxes began about two or three months after the summer solstice, and his seventh year fell in the third year of the eightieth Olympiad. The later part of that year, when Ezra went up to Jerusalem, was in the year of the Julian Period 4257. Count the time from then to the death of Christ, and you will find exactly 490 years. If you count in Judaic years that begin in autumn, and date the count from the first autumn after Ezra came to Jerusalem, when he carried out the King's decree, the death of Christ falls in the year of the Julian Period 4747, A.D. 34. The weeks are then Judaic weeks, ending with sabbatical years, and I take this to be the truth. But if you would rather place the death of Christ in the year before, as is commonly done, you can count the year of Ezra's journey in the reckoning.

Know also and understand that from the going forth of the commandment to bring your people back and to build Jerusalem, until the Anointed the Prince, there will be seven weeks. The first part of the Prophecy concerned the first coming of Christ, since it was dated to his coming as a Prophet. This part is dated to his coming to be Prince or King, so it seems to concern his second coming. There the Prophet was brought to completion and the Most Holy anointed; here the one who was anointed comes to be Prince and to reign. Daniel's Prophecies reach to the end of the world, and there is hardly a Prophecy in the Old Testament about Christ that does not in some way concern his second coming. If some of the early writers, like8 Irenæus,9 Julius Africanus, Hippolytus the martyr, and Apollinaris Bishop of Laodicea, applied the half week to the times of Antichrist, why may we not, with the same freedom of interpretation, apply the seven weeks to the time when Antichrist will be destroyed by the brightness of Christ's coming?

In the days of the early Prophets, when the ten Tribes were led into captivity, the Israelites expected two returns. First, the Jews would build a new Temple, inferior to Solomon's, until the time of that age was fulfilled; after that they would return from all the places of their captivity and build Jerusalem and the Temple in glory, Tobit xiv. 4, 5, 6. To express the glory and excellence of this city, it is said in figure to be built of precious stones, Tobit xiii. 16, 17, 18. Isa. liv. 11, 12. Rev. xi. It is called the New Jerusalem, the Heavenly Jerusalem, the Holy City, the Lamb's Wife, the City of the Great King, and the City into which the Kings of the earth bring their glory and honor. While such a return from captivity was what Israel expected, even before the times of Daniel, I do not see why Daniel should leave it out of his Prophecy. Since this part of the Prophecy is not yet fulfilled, I will not try to interpret it in detail. I will only observe that the seventy weeks and the sixty two weeks were Jewish weeks, ending with sabbatical years, while the seven weeks are the span of a Jubilee. They begin and end with actions proper for a Jubilee, and with the highest purposes for which a Jubilee can be kept. Also, because the commandment to return and to build Jerusalem comes 49 years before the Messiah the Prince, it may perhaps come forth not from the Jews themselves, but from some other kingdom friendly to them. It may come before their return from captivity and give occasion for it. Lastly, the rebuilding of Jerusalem and the waste places of Judah is predicted in Micah vii. 11. Amos ix. 11, 14. Ezek. xxxvi. 33, 35, 36, 38. Isa. liv. 3, 11, 12. lv. 12. lxi. 4. lxv. 18, 21,22. and Tobit xiv. 5. The return from captivity, the coming of the Messiah, and his kingdom are described in Daniel vii. Rev. xix. Acts i. Mat. xxiv. Joel iii. Ezek. xxxvi. xxxvii. Isa. lx. lxii. lxiii. lxv. and lxvi. and many other places of scripture. I do not know the manner. Let time be the Interpreter.

"Yet in sixty two weeks it will return, and the street and the wall will be built, but in troubled times; and after the sixty two weeks the Messiah will be cut off, and it will not be his; but the people of a Prince to come will destroy the city and the sanctuary," etc. Having foretold both comings of Christ and dated the second from their return and the building of Jerusalem, he keeps this from being applied to the building of Jerusalem by Nehemiah. He tells it apart from that by saying that from this period to the Anointed there will be not seven weeks, but sixty two weeks, and these not in prosperous times but in troubled times. At the end of these Weeks the Messiah will not be the Prince of the Jews, but will be cut off; and Jerusalem will not be his, but the city and sanctuary will be destroyed. Nehemiah came to Jerusalem in the 20th year of this same Artaxerxes, while Ezra was still there, Nehem. xii. 36, and found the city lying waste, with the houses and the wall unbuilt, Nehem. ii. 17. vii. 4. He finished the wall on the 25th day of the month Elul, Nehem. vi. 15, in the 28th year of the King, that is, in September in the year of the Julian Period 4278. Now count from this year sixty two weeks of years, that is 434 years, and the reckoning will end in September in the year of the Julian Period 4712. That is the year in which Christ was born, according to Clemens Alexandrinus, Irenæus, Eusebius, Epiphanius, Jerome, Orosius, Cassiodorus, and other early writers. This was the general opinion, until Dionysius Exiguus invented the common reckoning, in which Christ's birth is placed two years later. If, like some, you reckon that Christ was born three or four years before the common reckoning, his birth still falls in the latter part of the last week, which is enough. How, after these weeks, Christ was cut off, and the city and sanctuary were destroyed by the Romans, is well known.

"Yet he will confirm the covenant with many for one week." He kept it, even after his death, until the Jews were rejected and Cornelius and the Gentiles were called, in the seventh year after his death.

"And in half a week he will make the sacrifice and the offering stop"—that is, through the war of the Romans against the Jews. After some commotions, that war began in the 13th year of Nero, A.D. 67, in the spring, when Vespasian invaded them with an army; and it ended in the second year of Vespasian, A.D. 70, in the autumn, on September 7, when Titus took the city, having burned the Temple 27 days before. It lasted three years and a half.

Part I, Chapter 10, 2

And upon a wing of abominations he shall cause desolation, even until the consummation, and that which is determined be poured upon the desolate. The Prophets, in representing kingdoms by Beasts and Birds, put their wings stretcht out over any country for their armies sent out to invade and rule over that country. Hence a wing of abominations is an army of false Gods: for an abomination is often put in scripture for a false God; as where Chemosh is called10 the abomination of Moab, and Molech the abomination of Ammon. The meaning therefore is, that the people of a Prince to come shall destroy the sanctuary, and abolish the daily worship of the true God, and overspread the land with an army of false gods; and by setting up their dominion and worship, cause desolation to the Jews, until the times of the Gentiles be fulfilled. For Christ tells us, that the abomination of desolation spoken of by Daniel was to be set up in the times of the Roman Empire, Matth. xxiv. 15.

Thus have we in this short Prophecy, a prediction of all the main periods relating to the coming of the Messiah; the time of his birth, that of his death, that of the rejection of the Jews, the duration of the Jewish war whereby he caused the city and sanctuary to be destroyed, and the time of his second coming: and so the interpretation here given is more full and complete and adequate to the design, than if we should restrain it to his first coming only, as Interpreters usually do. We avoid also the doing violence to the language of Daniel, by taking the seven weeks and sixty two weeks for one number. Had that been Daniel's meaning, he would have said sixty and nine weeks, and not seven weeks and sixty two weeks, a way of numbring used by no nation. In our way the years are Jewish Luni-solar years,11 as they ought to be; and the seventy weeks of years are Jewish weeks ending with sabbatical years, which is very remarkable. For they end either with the year of the birth of Christ, two years before the vulgar account, or with the year of his death, or with the seventh year after it: all which are sabbatical years. Others either count by Lunar years, or by weeks not Judaic: and, which is worst, they ground their interpretations on erroneous Chronology, excepting the opinion of Funccius about the seventy weeks, which is the same with ours. For they place Ezra and Nehemiah in the reign of Artaxerxes Mnemon, and the building of the Temple in the reign of Darius Nothus, and date the weeks of Daniel from those two reigns.

The grounds of the Chronology here followed, I will now set down as briefly as I can.

The Peloponnesian war began in spring An. 1 Olymp. 87, as Diodorus, Eusebius, and all other authors agree. It began two months before Pythodorus ceased to be Archon, Thucyd. l. 2. that is, in April, two months before the end of the Olympic year. Now the years of this war are most certainly determined by the 50 years distance of its first year from the transit of Xerxes inclusively, Thucyd. l. 2. or 48 years exclusively, Eratosth. apud Clem. Alex. by the 69 years distance of its end, or 27th year, from the beginning of Alexander's reign in Greece; by the acting of the Olympic games in its 4th and 12th years, Thucyd. l. 5; and by three eclipses of the sun, and one of the moon, mentioned by Thucydides and Xenophon. Now Thucydides, an unquestionable witness, tells us, that the news of the death of Artaxerxes Longimanus was brought to Ephesus, and from thence by some Athenians to Athens, in the 7th year of this Peloponnesian war, when the winter half year was running; and therefore he died An. 4 Olymp. 88, in the end of An. J.P. 4289, suppose a month or two before midwinter; for so long the news would be in coming. Now Artaxerxes Longimanus reigned 40 years, by the consent of Diodorus, Eusebius, Jerome, Sulpitius; or 41, according to Ptol. in can. Clem. Alexand. l. 1. Strom. Chron. Alexandr. Abulpharagius, Nicephorus, including therein the reign of his successors Xerxes and Sogdian, as Abulpharagius informs us. After Artaxerxes reigned his son Xerxes two months, and Sogdian seven months; but their reign is not reckoned apart in summing up the years of the Kings, but is included in the 40 or 41 years reign of Artaxerxes: omit these nine months, and the precise reign of Artaxerxes will be thirty nine years and three months. And therefore since his reign ended in the beginning of winter An. J.P. 4289, it began between midsummer and autumn, An. J.P. 4250.

The same thing I gather also thus. Cambyses began his reign in spring An. J.P. 4185, and reigned eight years, including the five months of Smerdes; and then Darius Hystaspis began in spring An. J.P. 4193, and reigned thirty six years, by the unanimous consent of all Chronologers. The reigns of these two Kings are determined by three eclipses of the moon observed at Babylon, and recorded by Ptolemy; so that it cannot be disputed. One was in the seventh year of Cambyses, An. J.P. 4191, Jul. 16, at 11 at night; another in the 20th year of Darius, An. J.P. 4212, Nov. 19, at 11h. 45' at night; a third in the 31st year of Darius, An. J.P. 4223, Apr. 25, at 11h. 30 at night. By these eclipses, and the Prophecies of Haggai and Zechary compared together, it is manifest that his years began after the 24th day of the 11th Jewish month, and before the 25th day of April, and by consequence about March. Xerxes therefore began in spring An. J.P. 4229: for Darius died in the fifth year after the battle at Marathon, as Herodotus, lib. 7, and Plutarch mention; and that battle was in October An. J.P. 4224, ten years before the battle at Salamis. Xerxes therefore began within less than a year after October An. J.P. 4228, suppose in the spring following: for he spent his first five years, and something more, in preparations for his expedition against the Greeks; and this expedition was in the time of the Olympic games, An. 1 Olymp. 75, Calliade Athenis Archonte, 28 years after the Regifuge, and Consulship of the first Consul Junius Brutus, Anno Urbis conditæ 273, Fabio & Furio Coss. The passage of Xerxes's army over the Hellespont began in the end of the fourth year of the 74th Olympiad, that is, in June An. J.P. 4234, and took up one month: and in autumn, three months after, on the full moon, the 16th day of the month Munychion, was the battle at Salamis, and a little after that an eclipse of the sun, which by the calculation fell on Octob. 2. His sixth year therefore began a little before June, suppose in spring An. J.P. 4234, and his first year consequently in spring An. J.P. 4229, as above. Now he reigned almost twenty one years, by the consent of all writers. Add the 7 months of Artabanus, and the sum will be 21 years and about four or five months, which end between midsummer and autumn An. J.P. 4250. At this time therefore began the reign of his successor Artaxerxes, as was to be proved.

The same thing is also confirmed by Julius Africanus, who informs us out of former writers, that the 20th year of this Artaxerxes was the 115th year from the beginning of the reign of Cyrus in Persia, and fell in with An. 4 Olymp. 83. It began therefore with the Olympic year, soon after the summer Solstice, An. J.P. 4269. Subduct nineteen years, and his first year will begin at the same time of the year An. J.P. 4250, as above.

His 7th year therefore began after midsummer An. J.P. 4256; and the Journey of Ezra to Jerusalem in the spring following fell on the beginning of An. J.P. 4257, as above.

Notes to Chap. X.

1 Chap. ix. 24, 25, 26, 27.

2 Cut upon. A phrase in Hebrew, taken from the practise of numbring by cutting notches.

3 Heb. to seal, i.e. to finish or consummate: a metaphor taken from sealing what is finished. So the Jews compute, ad obsignatum Misna, ad obsignatum Talmud, that is, ad absolutum.

4 Heb. the Prophet, not the Prophecy.

5 Heb. the Messiah, that is, in Greek, the Christ; in English, the Anointed. I use the English word, that the relation of this clause to the former may appear.

6 Jerusalem.

7 See Isa. xxiii. 13.

8 Iren. l. 5. Hær. c. 25.

9 Apud Hieron. in h. l.

10 1 Kings xi. 7.

11 The antient solar years of the eastern nations consisted of 12 months, and every month of 30 days: and hence came the division of a circle into 360 degrees. This year seems to be used by Moses in his history of the Flood, and by John in the Apocalypse, where a time, times and half a time, 42 months and 1260 days, are put equipollent. But in reckoning by many of these years together, an account is to be kept of the odd days which were added to the end of these years. For the Egyptians added five days to the end of this year; and so did the Chaldeans long before the times of Daniel, as appears by the Æra, of Nabonassar: and the Persian Magi used the same year of 365 days, till the Empire of the Arabians. The antient Greeks also used the same solar year of 12 equal months, or 360 days; but every other year added an intercalary month, consisting of 10 and 11 days alternately.

The year of the Jews, even from their coming out of Egypt, was Luni-solar. It was solar, for the harvest always followed the Passover, and the fruits of the land were always gathered before the feast of Tabernacles, Levit. xxiii. But the months were lunar, for the people were commanded by Moses in the beginning of every month to blow with trumpets, and offer burnt offerings with their drink offerings, Num. x. 10. xxviii. 11, 14. and this solemnity was kept on the new moons, Psal. lxxxi. 3,4,5. 1 Chron. xxiii. 31. These months were called by Moses the first, second, third, fourth month, &c. and the first month was also called Abib, the second Zif, the seventh Ethanim, the eighth Bull, Exod. xiii. 4. 1 Kings vi. 37, 38. viii. 2. But in the Babylonian captivity the Jews used the names of the Chaldean months, and by those names understood the months of their own year; so that the Jewish months then lost their old names, and are now called by those of the Chaldeans.

The Jews began their civil year from the autumnal Equinox, and their sacred year from the vernal: and the first day of the first month was on the visible new moon, which was nearest the Equinox.

Whether Daniel used the Chaldaick or Jewish year, is not very material; the difference being but six hours in a year, and 4 months in 480 years. But I take his months to be Jewish: first, because Daniel was a Jew, and the Jews even by the names of the Chaldean months understood the months of their own year: secondly, because this Prophecy is grounded on Jeremiah's concerning the 70 years captivity, and therefore must be understood of the same sort of years with the seventy; and those are Jewish, since that Prophecy was given in Judea before the captivity: and lastly, because Daniel reckons by weeks of years, which is a way of reckoning peculiar to the Jewish years. For as their days ran by sevens, and the last day of every seven was a sabbath; so their years ran by sevens, and the last year of every seven was a sabbatical year, and seven such weeks of years made a Jubilee.

And upon a wing of abominations he will cause desolation, until the end comes and what has been decided is poured out on the ruined. The prophets, when they picture kingdoms as beasts and birds, put the wings stretched out over a country to stand for the army sent out to invade and rule that country. So a wing of abominations is an army of false gods, for an abomination in scripture often stands for a false god, as when Chemosh is called10 the abomination of Moab and Molech the abomination of Ammon. The meaning is this: the people of a prince yet to come will destroy the sanctuary, end the daily worship of the true God, and cover the land with an army of false gods, and by setting up their rule and their worship they will bring desolation on the Jews, until the times of the Gentiles are fulfilled. Christ tells us that the abomination of desolation spoken of by Daniel was to be set up in the time of the Roman Empire, Matth. xxiv. 15.

So in this short prophecy we have a prediction of all the main periods connected with the coming of the Messiah: the time of his birth, the time of his death, the time of the rejection of the Jews, the length of the Jewish war by which he caused the city and the sanctuary to be destroyed, and the time of his second coming. The interpretation given here is therefore fuller, more complete, and better fitted to the purpose than if we limited it to his first coming alone, as interpreters usually do. We also avoid doing violence to the language of Daniel, by taking the seven weeks and the sixty two weeks for one number. If that had been Daniel's meaning, he would have said sixty and nine weeks, not seven weeks and sixty two weeks, a way of numbering used by no nation. In our reading the years are Jewish luni-solar years,11 as they ought to be, and the seventy weeks of years are Jewish weeks that end with sabbatical years, which is very notable. They end either with the year of Christ's birth, two years before the usual account, or with the year of his death, or with the seventh year after it, and all of those are sabbatical years. Others count either by lunar years or by weeks that are not Jewish; and worst of all they base their readings on wrong chronology, except for the view of Funccius on the seventy weeks, which matches ours. For they place Ezra and Nehemiah in the reign of Artaxerxes Mnemon, and the building of the Temple in the reign of Darius Nothus, and they date the weeks of Daniel from those two reigns.

I will now set out, as briefly as I can, the grounds of the chronology I follow here.

The Peloponnesian war began in the spring of An. 1 Olymp. 87, as Diodorus, Eusebius, and all other authors agree. It began two months before Pythodorus stopped being archon, Thucyd. l. 2, that is, in April, two months before the end of the Olympic year. The years of this war are fixed beyond doubt by several facts. Its first year stands 50 years from the transit of Xerxes, counting inclusively, Thucyd. l. 2, or 48 years counting exclusively, Eratosth. apud Clem. Alex. Its end, or its 27th year, stands 69 years from the beginning of Alexander's reign in Greece. The Olympic games were held in its 4th and 12th years, Thucyd. l. 5. And three eclipses of the sun and one of the moon are mentioned by Thucydides and Xenophon. Thucydides, a witness no one can question, tells us that news of the death of Artaxerxes Longimanus was brought to Ephesus, and from there by some Athenians to Athens, in the 7th year of this Peloponnesian war, while the winter half of the year was running. So he died An. 4 Olymp. 88, at the end of An. J.P. 4289, a month or two before midwinter at most, since the news would have taken that long to arrive. Artaxerxes Longimanus reigned 40 years, by the agreement of Diodorus, Eusebius, Jerome, Sulpitius; or 41, according to Ptol. in can. Clem. Alexand. l. 1. Strom. Chron. Alexandr. Abulpharagius, Nicephorus, counting in that number the reign of his successors Xerxes and Sogdian, as Abulpharagius tells us. After Artaxerxes, his son Xerxes reigned two months and Sogdian seven months, but when the years of the Kings are added up those reigns are not counted apart; they fall inside the 40 or 41 year reign of Artaxerxes. Take out these nine months, and the exact reign of Artaxerxes comes to thirty nine years and three months. So since his reign ended at the start of winter An. J.P. 4289, it began between midsummer and autumn An. J.P. 4250.

I gather the same thing another way. Cambyses began his reign in the spring of An. J.P. 4185 and reigned eight years, including the five months of Smerdes. Then Darius Hystaspis began in the spring of An. J.P. 4193 and reigned thirty six years, by the agreement of all chronologers. Three eclipses of the moon, seen at Babylon and recorded by Ptolemy, fix the reigns of these two kings, and that cannot be disputed. One was in the seventh year of Cambyses, An. J.P. 4191, Jul. 16, at 11 at night. Another was in the 20th year of Darius, An. J.P. 4212, Nov. 19, at 11h. 45' at night. A third was in the 31st year of Darius, An. J.P. 4223, Apr. 25, at 11h. 30 at night. From these eclipses, and by comparing the prophecies of Haggai and Zechary, it is clear that his years began after the 24th day of the 11th Jewish month and before the 25th day of April, and so about March. Xerxes therefore began in the spring of An. J.P. 4229, for Darius died in the fifth year after the battle at Marathon, as Herodotus, lib. 7, and Plutarch mention, and that battle was in October An. J.P. 4224, ten years before the battle at Salamis. Xerxes then began less than a year after October An. J.P. 4228, say in the following spring, for he spent his first five years and more preparing for his expedition against the Greeks. That expedition took place during the Olympic games, An. 1 Olymp. 75, Calliade Athenis Archonte, 28 years after the Regifuge and the consulship of the first consul Junius Brutus, Anno Urbis conditæ 273, Fabio & Furio Coss. Xerxes's army began to cross the Hellespont at the end of the fourth year of the 74th Olympiad, that is, in June An. J.P. 4234, and the crossing took one month. In autumn, three months later, on the full moon, the 16th day of the month Munychion, came the battle at Salamis, and a little after that an eclipse of the sun, which by the calculation fell on Octob. 2. His sixth year therefore began a little before June, say in the spring of An. J.P. 4234, and his first year consequently in the spring of An. J.P. 4229, as above. He reigned almost twenty one years, by the agreement of all writers. Add the 7 months of Artabanus and the sum is 21 years and about four or five months, which end between midsummer and autumn An. J.P. 4250. At this time, then, began the reign of his successor Artaxerxes, which is what had to be proved.

Julius Africanus also confirms this. He reports, from earlier writers, that the 20th year of this Artaxerxes was the 115th year from the start of the reign of Cyrus in Persia, and fell in with An. 4 Olymp. 83. It began, therefore, with the Olympic year, soon after the summer solstice, An. J.P. 4269. Take away nineteen years, and his first year begins at the same time of year, An. J.P. 4250, as above.

His 7th year therefore began after midsummer An. J.P. 4256, and Ezra's journey to Jerusalem in the following spring fell at the beginning of An. J.P. 4257, as above.

Notes to Chap. X.

1 Chap. ix. 24, 25, 26, 27.

2 Cut upon. A Hebrew phrase, taken from the practice of numbering by cutting notches.

3 Heb. to seal, that is, to finish or complete: a metaphor taken from sealing what is finished. So the Jews count it as ad obsignatum Misna, ad obsignatum Talmud, that is, ad absolutum.

4 Heb. the Prophet, not the Prophecy.

5 Heb. the Messiah, that is, in Greek, the Christ; in English, the Anointed. I use the English word so that the relation of this clause to the former one may appear.

6 Jerusalem.

7 See Isa. xxiii. 13.

8 Iren. l. 5. Hær. c. 25.

9 Apud Hieron. in h. l.

10 1 Kings xi. 7.

11 The ancient solar years of the eastern nations consisted of 12 months, and every month of 30 days, and from this came the division of a circle into 360 degrees. This year seems to be the one used by Moses in his history of the Flood, and by John in the Apocalypse, where a time, times and half a time, 42 months and 1260 days, are treated as equal. But when many of these years are counted together, an account must be kept of the odd days added at the end of these years. For the Egyptians added five days to the end of this year, and so did the Chaldeans long before the times of Daniel, as appears by the Æra of Nabonassar; and the Persian Magi used the same year of 365 days, until the Empire of the Arabians. The ancient Greeks also used the same solar year of 12 equal months, or 360 days, but every other year added an intercalary month, consisting of 10 and 11 days alternately.

The year of the Jews, even from their departure from Egypt, was luni-solar. It was solar, because the harvest always followed the Passover, and the fruits of the land were always gathered before the feast of Tabernacles, Levit. xxiii. But the months were lunar, because the people were commanded by Moses at the beginning of every month to blow trumpets and offer burnt offerings with their drink offerings, Num. x. 10. xxviii. 11, 14, and this ceremony was kept on the new moons, Psal. lxxxi. 3,4,5. 1 Chron. xxiii. 31. Moses called these months the first, second, third, fourth month, etc. The first month was also called Abib, the second Zif, the seventh Ethanim, the eighth Bull, Exod. xiii. 4. 1 Kings vi. 37, 38. viii. 2. But in the Babylonian captivity the Jews used the names of the Chaldean months, and by those names they understood the months of their own year, so that the Jewish months then lost their old names and are now called by those of the Chaldeans.

The Jews began their civil year at the autumnal equinox and their sacred year at the vernal equinox, and the first day of the first month fell on the visible new moon nearest the equinox.

Whether Daniel used the Chaldean or the Jewish year does not matter much, the difference being only six hours in a year, and 4 months in 480 years. But I take his months to be Jewish, for three reasons. First, Daniel was a Jew, and the Jews, even by the names of the Chaldean months, understood the months of their own year. Second, this prophecy rests on Jeremiah's prophecy of the 70 years captivity, so it must be understood in the same sort of years as the seventy, and those are Jewish, since that prophecy was given in Judea before the captivity. Last, Daniel counts by weeks of years, which is a way of counting special to Jewish years. Their days ran by sevens, and the last day of every seven was a sabbath. So their years ran by sevens, and the last year of every seven was a sabbatical year, and seven such weeks of years made a Jubilee.

Part I, Chapter 11, 1

Of the Times of the Birth and Passion of Christ.

The times of the Birth and Passion of Christ, with such like niceties, being not material to religion, were little regarded by the Christians of the first age. They who began first to celebrate them, placed them in the cardinal periods of the year; as the annunciation of the Virgin Mary, on the 25th of March, which when Julius Cæsar corrected the Calendar was the vernal Equinox; the feast of John Baptist on the 24th of June, which was the summer Solstice; the feast of St. Michael on Sept. 29, which was the autumnal Equinox; and the birth of Christ on the winter Solstice, Decemb. 25, with the feasts of St. Stephen, St. John and the Innocents, as near it as they could place them. And because the Solstice in time removed from the 25th of December to the 24th, the 23d, the 22d, and so on backwards, hence some in the following centuries placed the birth of Christ on Decemb. 23, and at length on Decemb. 20: and for the same reason they seem to have set the feast of St. Thomas on Decemb. 21, and that of St. Matthew on Sept. 21. So also at the entrance of the Sun into all the signs in the Julian Calendar, they placed the days of other Saints; as the conversion of Paul on Jan. 25, when the Sun entred [Aquarius]; St. Matthias on Feb. 25, when he entred [Pisces]; St. Mark on Apr. 25, when he entred [Taurus]; Corpus Christi on May 26, when he entred [Gemini]; St. James on July 25, when he entred [Cancer]; St. Bartholomew on Aug. 24, when he entred [Virgo]; Simon and Jude on Octob. 28, when he entred [Scorpio]: and if there were any other remarkable days in the Julian Calendar, they placed the Saints upon them, as St. Barnabas on June 11, where Ovid seems to place the feast of Vesta and Fortuna, and the goddess Matuta; and St. Philip and James on the first of May, a day dedicated both to the Bona Dea, or Magna Mater, and to the goddess Flora, and still celebrated with her rites. All which shews that these days were fixed in the first Christian Calendars by Mathematicians at pleasure, without any ground in tradition; and that the Christians afterwards took up with what they found in the Calendars.

Neither was there any certain tradition about the years of Christ. For the Christians who first began to enquire into these things, as Clemens Alexandrinus, Origen, Tertullian, Julius Africanus, Lactantius, Jerome, St. Austin, Sulpicius Severus, Prosper, and as many as place the death of Christ in the 15th or 16th year of Tiberius, make Christ to have preached but one year, or at most but two. At length Eusebius discovered four successive Passovers in the Gospel of John, and thereupon set on foot an opinion that he preacht three years and an half; and so died in the 19th year of Tiberius. Others afterwards, finding the opinion that he died in the Equinox Mar. 25, more consonant to the times of the Jewish Passover, in the 17th and 20th years, have placed his death in one of those two years. Neither is there any greater certainty in the opinions about the time of his birth. The first Christians placed his baptism near the beginning of the 15th year of Tiberius; and thence reckoning thirty years backwards, placed his birth in the 43d Julian year, the 42d of Augustus and 28th of the Actiac victory. This was the opinion which obtained in the first ages, till Dionysius Exiguus, placing the baptism of Christ in the 16th year of Tiberius, and misinterpreting the text of Luke, iii. 23. as if Jesus was only beginning to be 30 years old when he was baptized, invented the vulgar account, in which his birth is placed two years later than before. As therefore relating to these things there is no tradition worth considering; let us lay aside all and examine what prejudices can be gathered from records of good account.

The fifteenth year of Tiberius began Aug. 28, An. J.P. 4727. So soon as the winter was over, and the weather became warm enough, we may reckon that John began to baptize; and that before next winter his fame went abroad, and all the people came to his baptism, and Jesus among the rest. Whence the first Passover after his baptism mentioned John ii. 13. was in the 16th year of Tiberius. After this feast Jesus came into the land of Judea, and staid there baptizing, whilst John was baptizing in Ænon, John iii. 22, 23. But when he heard that John was cast into prison, he departed into Galilee, Mat. iii. 12. being afraid, because the Pharisees had heard that he baptized more disciples than John, John iv. 1. and in his journey he passed thro' Samaria four months before the harvest, John iv. 35. that is, about the time of the winter Solstice. For their harvest was between Easter and Whitsunday, and began about a month after the vernal Equinox. Say not ye, saith he, there are yet four months, and then cometh harvest? Behold I say unto you, lift up your eyes, and look on the fields, for they are white already to harvest; meaning, that the people in the fields were ready for the Gospel, as his next words shew1. John therefore was imprisoned about November, in the 17th year of Tiberius; and Christ thereupon went from Judea to Cana of Galilee in December, and was received there of the Galileans, who had seen all he did at Jerusalem at the Passover: and when a Nobleman of Capernaum heard he was returned into Galilee, and went to him and desired him to come and cure his son, he went not thither yet, but only said, Go thy way, thy son liveth; and the Nobleman returned and found it so, and believed, he and his house, John iv. This is the beginning of his miracles in Galilee; and thus far John is full and distinct in relating the actions of his first year, omitted by the other Evangelists. The rest of his history is from this time related more fully by the other Evangelists than by John; for what they relate he omits.

From this time therefore Jesus taught in the Synagogues of Galilee on the sabbath-days, being glorified of all: and coming to his own city Nazareth, and preaching in their Synagogue, they were offended, and thrust him out of the city, and led him to the brow of the hill on which the city was built to cast him headlong; but he passing thro' the midst of them, went his way, and came and dwelt at Capernaum, Luke iv. And by this time we may reckon the second Passover was either past or at hand.

All this time Matthew passeth over in few words, and here begins to relate the preaching and miracles of Christ. When Jesus, saith he, had heard that John was cast into prison, he departed into Galilee; and leaving Nazareth, he came and dwelt at Capernaum, and from that time began to preach and say, Repent, for the kingdom of heaven is at hand, Matth. iv. 12. Afterwards he called his disciples Peter, Andrew, James and John; and then went about all Galilee, teaching in the Synagogues,--and healing all manner of sickness:--and his fame went thro'out all Syria; and they brought unto him all sick people,--and there followed him great multitudes of people from Galilee, and from Decapolis, and from Jerusalem, and from Judea, and from beyond Jordan, Matth, iv. 18, 25. All this was done before the sermon in the mount: and therefore we may certainly reckon that the second Passover was past before the preaching of that sermon. The multitudes that followed him from Jerusalem and Judea, shew that he had lately been there at the feast. The sermon in the mount was made when great multitudes came to him from all places, and followed him in the open fields; which is an argument of the summer-season: and in this sermon he pointed at the lilies of the field then in the flower before the eyes of his auditors. Consider, saith he, the lilies of the field, how they grow; they toil not, neither do they spin; and yet Solomon in all his glory was not arayed like one of these. Wherefore if God so clothe the grass of the field, which to day is and to morrow is cast into the oven, &c. Matth. vi. 28. So therefore the grass of the field was now in the flower, and by consequence the month of March with the Passover was past.

Let us see therefore how the rest of the feasts follow in order in Matthew's Gospel: for he was an eye-witness of what he relates, and so tells all things in due order of time, which Mark and Luke do not.

Some time after the sermon in the mount, when the time came that he should be received, that is, when the time of a feast came that he should be received by the Jews, he set his face to go to Jerusalem: and as he went with his disciples in the way, when the Samaritans in his passage thro' Samaria had denied him lodgings, and a certain Scribe said unto him, Master, I will follow thee whithersoever thou goest, Jesus said unto him, The foxes have holes, and the birds of the air have nests, but the Son of man hath not where to lay his head, Matth. viii. 19. Luke ix. 51, 57. The Scribe told Christ he would bear him company in his journey, and Christ replied that he wanted a lodging. Now this feast I take to be the feast of Tabernacles, because soon after I find Christ and his Apostles on the sea of Tiberias in a storm so great, that the ship was covered with water and in danger of sinking, till Christ rebuked the winds and the sea, Matth. viii. 23. For this storm shews that winter was now come on.

After this Christ did many miracles, and went about all the cities and villages of Galilee, teaching in their Synagogues, and preaching the gospel of the kingdom, and healing every sickness, and every disease among the people, Matth. ix. he then sent forth the twelve to do the like, Matth. x. and at length when he had received a message from John, and answered it, he said to the multitudes, From the days of John the Baptist until now the kingdom of heaven suffereth violence; and upbraided the cities, Chorazin, Bethsaida, and Capernaum, wherein most of his mighty works were done, because they repented not, Matth. xi. Which several passages shew, that from the imprisonment of John till now there had been a considerable length of time: the winter was now past, and the next Passover was at hand; for immediately after this, Matthew, in chap. xii. subjoins, that Jesus went on the sabbath-day thro' the corn, and his disciples were an hungred, and began to pluck the ears of corn and to eat,--rubbing them, saith Luke, in their hands: the corn therefore was not only in the ear, but ripe; and consequently the Passover, in which the first-fruits were always offered before the harvest, was now come or past. Luke calls this sabbath [Greek: deuteroprôton], the second prime sabbath, that is, the second of the two great feasts of the Passover. As we call Easter day high Easter, and its octave low Easter or Lowsunday: so Luke calls the feast on the seventh day of the unlevened bread, the second of the two prime sabbaths.

Of the Times of the Birth and Passion of Christ.

The times of the birth and passion of Christ, and such fine points, do not bear on religion, so the Christians of the first age paid them little attention. Those who first celebrated them placed them at the cardinal points of the year: the annunciation of the Virgin Mary on the 25th of March, which was the vernal equinox when Julius Cæsar corrected the calendar; the feast of John Baptist on the 24th of June, the summer solstice; the feast of St. Michael on Sept. 29, the autumnal equinox; and the birth of Christ on the winter solstice, Decemb. 25, with the feasts of St. Stephen, St. John and the Innocents placed as near to it as they could. And because the solstice in time moved from the 25th of December to the 24th, then the 23d, then the 22d, and so further back, some in the following centuries placed the birth of Christ on Decemb. 23, and at last on Decemb. 20; and for the same reason they seem to have set the feast of St. Thomas on Decemb. 21 and that of St. Matthew on Sept. 21. In the same way they set the days of other saints at the entrance of the Sun into each sign in the Julian calendar: the conversion of Paul on Jan. 25, when the Sun entered [Aquarius]; St. Matthias on Feb. 25, when it entered [Pisces]; St. Mark on Apr. 25, when it entered [Taurus]; Corpus Christi on May 26, when it entered [Gemini]; St. James on July 25, when it entered [Cancer]; St. Bartholomew on Aug. 24, when it entered [Virgo]; Simon and Jude on Octob. 28, when it entered [Scorpio]. And if the Julian calendar held any other notable day, they placed a saint on it, as St. Barnabas on June 11, where Ovid seems to place the feast of Vesta and Fortuna and the goddess Matuta; and St. Philip and James on the first of May, a day dedicated both to the Bona Dea, or Magna Mater, and to the goddess Flora, and still celebrated with her rites. All of this shows that these days were fixed in the first Christian calendars by mathematicians at pleasure, with no ground in tradition, and that Christians later accepted what they found in the calendars.

Nor was there any certain tradition about the years of Christ. The Christians who first began to look into these questions, Clemens Alexandrinus, Origen, Tertullian, Julius Africanus, Lactantius, Jerome, St. Austin, Sulpicius Severus, Prosper, and all who place the death of Christ in the 15th or 16th year of Tiberius, hold that Christ preached only one year, or two at most. At last Eusebius found four Passovers in succession in the Gospel of John, and on that basis started the view that he preached three years and a half, and so died in the 19th year of Tiberius. Others later, finding that the view that he died at the equinox on Mar. 25 fit better with the times of the Jewish Passover in the 17th and 20th years, have placed his death in one of those two years. Nor is there any more certainty in the views about the time of his birth. The first Christians placed his baptism near the beginning of the 15th year of Tiberius, and counting thirty years back from that, placed his birth in the 43d Julian year, the 42d of Augustus and 28th of the Actiac victory. This was the view that held in the first ages, until Dionysius Exiguus, placing the baptism of Christ in the 16th year of Tiberius and misreading the text of Luke, iii. 23, as if Jesus was only beginning to be 30 years old when he was baptized, created the usual account, in which his birth falls two years later than before. Since, then, there is no tradition worth considering on these matters, let us lay all of it aside and examine what preliminary conclusions can be drawn from records of good standing.

The fifteenth year of Tiberius began on Aug. 28, An. J.P. 4727. As soon as the winter was over and the weather grew warm enough, we may suppose that John began to baptize, and that before the next winter his fame went abroad and all the people came to his baptism, Jesus among them. So the first Passover after his baptism, mentioned in John ii. 13, fell in the 16th year of Tiberius. After this feast Jesus came into the land of Judea and stayed there baptizing, while John was baptizing in Ænon, John iii. 22, 23. But when he heard that John was thrown into prison, he left for Galilee, Mat. iii. 12, afraid, because the Pharisees had heard that he baptized more disciples than John, John iv. 1. On his journey he passed through Samaria four months before the harvest, John iv. 35, that is, about the time of the winter solstice, for their harvest lay between Easter and Whitsunday and began about a month after the vernal equinox. Do you say, he told them, that there are still four months and then comes the harvest? I tell you, lift up your eyes and look at the fields, for they are already white and ready for harvest. He meant that the people in the fields were ready for the gospel, as his next words show1. John was therefore imprisoned about November, in the 17th year of Tiberius, and Christ then went from Judea to Cana of Galilee in December, and the Galileans received him there, because they had seen all he did at Jerusalem at the Passover. When a nobleman of Capernaum heard that he had come back to Galilee, he went to him and asked him to come and cure his son. Jesus did not go there, but only said, Go on your way, your son lives; and the nobleman went back and found it so, and he and his whole household believed, John iv. This is the start of his miracles in Galilee, and up to this point John gives a full and exact account of the actions of his first year, which the other Evangelists leave out. From here the other Evangelists tell the rest of his history more fully than John does, for he omits what they relate.

From this time Jesus taught in the synagogues of Galilee on the sabbath days, and was praised by all. He came to his own city Nazareth and preached in their synagogue, but they were offended and pushed him out of the city, and led him to the brow of the hill on which the city was built to throw him headlong; but he passed through the middle of them, went on his way, and came and lived at Capernaum, Luke iv. By this time we may suppose the second Passover had either passed or was close at hand.

Matthew passes over all this time in a few words, and here begins to tell of the preaching and miracles of Christ. When Jesus, he says, had heard that John was thrown into prison, he left for Galilee; and leaving Nazareth, he came and lived at Capernaum, and from that time began to preach and say, Repent, for the kingdom of heaven is at hand, Matth. iv. 12. Afterwards he called his disciples Peter, Andrew, James and John, and then went about all Galilee, teaching in the synagogues and healing every kind of sickness, and his fame went throughout all Syria; they brought to him all the sick people, and great crowds followed him from Galilee, and from Decapolis, and from Jerusalem, and from Judea, and from beyond Jordan, Matth. iv. 18, 25. All of this happened before the sermon on the mount, so we can be sure the second Passover had passed before that sermon was preached. The crowds that followed him from Jerusalem and Judea show that he had lately been there at the feast. The sermon on the mount was given when great crowds came to him from every place and followed him out in the open fields, which points to the summer season; and in that sermon he pointed at the lilies of the field then in flower before the eyes of his listeners. Look, he said, at the lilies of the field, how they grow; they do not work, and they do not spin; yet Solomon in all his glory was not dressed like one of these. And if God so clothes the grass of the field, which is here today and tomorrow is thrown into the oven, etc. Matth. vi. 28. So the grass of the field was in flower at that time, and therefore the month of March and the Passover had passed.

Let us then see how the rest of the feasts follow in order in Matthew's gospel, for he was an eyewitness of what he relates and so tells everything in its due order of time, which Mark and Luke do not.

Some time after the sermon on the mount, when the time came that he should be received, that is, when a feast came at which the Jews were to receive him, he set out for Jerusalem. As he went along with his disciples, the Samaritans had refused him lodging as he passed through Samaria, and a certain Scribe said to him, Master, I will follow you wherever you go. Jesus said to him, The foxes have holes and the birds of the air have nests, but the Son of man has no place to lay his head, Matth. viii. 19. Luke ix. 51, 57. The Scribe told Christ that he would keep him company on the journey, and Christ replied that he had no place to stay. I take this feast to be the feast of Tabernacles, because soon afterward I find Christ and his apostles on the sea of Tiberias in a storm so strong that the ship was covered with water and in danger of sinking, until Christ rebuked the winds and the sea, Matth. viii. 23. This storm shows that winter had now come on.

After this Christ did many miracles and went about all the cities and villages of Galilee, teaching in their synagogues, preaching the gospel of the kingdom, and healing every sickness and every disease among the people, Matth. ix. He then sent out the twelve to do the same, Matth. x. And at last, when he had received a message from John and answered it, he said to the crowds, From the days of John the Baptist until now the kingdom of heaven endures violence; and he reproached the cities, Chorazin, Bethsaida, and Capernaum, where most of his mighty works were done, because they did not repent, Matth. xi. These passages show that a considerable length of time had passed from the imprisonment of John until now: winter was now past, and the next Passover was at hand. For right after this, Matthew, in chap. xii., adds that Jesus went through the grain field on the sabbath day, and his disciples were hungry and began to pluck the ears of grain and eat them, rubbing them in their hands, says Luke; the grain therefore was not only in the ear but ripe, and so the Passover, in which the first-fruits were always offered before the harvest, had now come or passed. Luke calls this sabbath [Greek: deuteroprôton], the second prime sabbath, that is, the second of the two great feasts of the Passover. As we call Easter day high Easter and its octave low Easter or Lowsunday, so Luke calls the feast on the seventh day of the unleavened bread the second of the two prime sabbaths.

Part I, Chapter 11, 2

In one of the sabbaths following he went into a Synagogue, and healed a man with a withered hand, Matth. xii. 9. Luke vi. 6. And when the Pharisees took counsel to destroy him, he withdrew himself from thence, and great multitudes followed him; and he healed them all, and charged them that they should not make him known, Matth. xii. 14. Afterwards being in a ship, and the multitude standing on the shore, he spake to them three parables together, taken from the seeds-men sowing the fields, Matth. xiii. by which we may know that it was now seed-time, and by consequence that the feast of Tabernacles was past. After this he went into his own country, and taught them in their Synagogue, but did not many mighty works there because of their unbelief. Then the twelve having been abroad a year, returned, and told Jesus all that they had done: and at the same time Herod beheaded John in prison, and his disciples came and told Jesus; and when Jesus heard it, he took the twelve and departed thence privately by ship into a desert place belonging to Bethsaida: and the people when they knew it, followed him on foot out of the cities, the winter being now past; and he healed their sick, and in the desert fed them to the number of five thousand men, besides women and children, with only five loaves and two fishes, Matth. xiv. Luke ix. at the doing of which miracle the Passover of the Jews was nigh, John vi. 4. But Jesus went not up to this feast; but after these things walked in Galilee, because the Jews at the Passover before had taken counsel to destroy him, and still sought to kill him, John vii. i. Henceforward therefore he is found first in the coast of Tyre and Sidon, then by the sea of Galilee, afterwards in the coast of Cæsarea Philippi; and lastly at Capernaum, Matth. xv. 21, 29. xvi. 13. xvii. 34.

Afterwards when the feast of Tabernacles was at hand, his brethren upbraided him for walking secretly, and urged him to go up to the feast. But he went not till they were gone, and then went up privately, John vii. 2. and when the Jews sought to stone him, he escaped, John viii. 59. After this he was at the feast of the Dedication in winter, John x. 22. and when they sought again to take him, he fled beyond Jordan, John x. 39, 40. Matth. xix. 1. where he stayed till the death of Lazarus, and then came to Bethany near Jerusalem, and raised him, John xi. 7, 18. whereupon the Jews took counsel from that time to kill him: and therefore he walked no more openly among the Jews, but went thence into a country near to the wilderness, into a city called Ephraim; and there continued with his disciples till the last Passover, in which the Jews put him to death, John xi. 53, 54.

Thus have we, in the Gospels of Matthew and John compared together, the history of Christ's actions in continual order during five Passovers. John is more distinct in the beginning and end; Matthew in the middle: what either omits, the other supplies. The first Passover was between the baptism of Christ and the imprisonment of John, John ii. 13. the second within four months after the imprisonment of John, and Christ's beginning to preach in Galilee, John iv. 35. and therefore it was either that feast to which Jesus went up, when the Scribe desired to follow him, Matth. viii. 19. Luke ix. 51, 57. or the feast before it. The third was the next feast after it, when the corn was eared and ripe, Matth, xii. 1. Luke vi. 1. The fourth was that which was nigh at hand when Christ wrought the miracle of the five loaves, Matth. xiv. 15. John vi. 4, 5. and the fifth was that in which Christ suffered, Matth. xx. 17. John xii. 1.

Between the first and second Passover John and Christ baptized together, till the imprisonment of John, which was four months before the second. Then Christ began to preach, and call his disciples; and after he had instructed them a year, lent them to preach in the cities of the Jews: at the same time John hearing of the fame of Christ, sent to him to know who he was. At the third, the chief Priests began to consult about the death of Christ. A little before the fourth, the twelve after they had preached a year in all the cities, returned to Christ; and at the same time Herod beheaded John in prison, after he had been in prison two years and a quarter: and thereupon Christ fled into the desart for fear of Herod. The fourth Christ went not up to Jerusalem for fear of the Jews, who at the Passover before had consulted his death, and because his time was not yet come. Thenceforward therefore till the feast of Tabernacles he walked in Galilee, and that secretly for fear of Herod: and after the feast of Tabernacles he returned no more into Galilee, but sometimes was at Jerusalem, and sometimes retired beyond Jordan, or to the city Ephraim by the wilderness, till the Passover in which he was betrayed, apprehended, and crucified.

John therefore baptized two summers, and Christ preached three. The first summer John preached to make himself known, in order to give testimony to Christ. Then, after Christ came to his baptism and was made known to him, he baptized another summer, to make Christ known by his testimony; and Christ also baptized the same summer, to make himself the more known: and by reason of John's testimony there came more to Christ's baptism than to John's. The winter following John was imprisoned; and now his course being at an end, Christ entered upon his proper office of preaching in the cities. In the beginning of his preaching he completed the number of the twelve Apostles, and instructed them all the first year in order to send them abroad. Before the end of this year, his fame by his preaching and miracles was so far spread abroad, that the Jews at the Passover following consulted how to kill him. In the second year of his preaching, it being no longer safe for him to converse openly in Judea, he sent the twelve to preach in all their cities: and in the end of the year they returned to him, and told him all they had done. All the last year the twelve continued with him to be instructed more perfectly, in order to their preaching to all nations after his death. And upon the news of John's death, being afraid of Herod as well as of the Jews, he walked this year more secretly than before; frequenting desarts, and spending the last half of the year in Judea, without the dominions of Herod.

Thus have we in the Gospels of Matthew and John all things told in due order, from the beginning of John's preaching to the death of Christ, and the years distinguished from one another by such essential characters that they cannot be mistaken. The second Passover is distinguished from the first, by the interposition of John's imprisonment. The third is distinguished from the second, by a double character: first, by the interposition of the feast to which Christ went up, Mat. viii. 19. Luke ix. 57. and secondly, by the distance of time from the beginning of Christ's preaching: for the second was in the beginning of his preaching, and the third so long after, that before it came Christ said, from the days of John the Baptist until now, &c. and upbraided the cities of Galilee for their not repenting at his preaching, and mighty works done in all that time. The fourth is distinguished from the third, by the mission of the twelve from Christ to preach in the cities of Judea in all the interval. The fifth is distinguished from all the former by the twelve's being returned from preaching, and continuing with Christ during all the interval, between the fourth and fifth, and by the passion and other infallible characters.

Now since the first summer of John's baptizing fell in the fifteenth year of the Emperor Tiberius, and by consequence the first of these five Passovers in his sixteenth year; the last of them, in which Jesus suffered, will fall on the twentieth year of the same Emperor; and by consequence in the Consulship of Fabius and Vitellius, in the 79th Julian year, and year of Christ 34, which was the sabbatical year of the Jews. And that it did so, I further confirm by these arguments.

I take it for granted that the passion was on friday the 14th day of the month Nisan, the great feast of the Passover on saturday the 15th day of Nisan, and the resurrection on the day following. Now the 14th day of Nisan always fell on the full moon next after the vernal Equinox; and the month began at the new moon before, not at the true conjunction, but at the first appearance of the new moon: for the Jews referred all the time of the silent moon, as they phrased it, that is, of the moon's disappearing, to the old moon; and because the first appearance might usually be about 18 hours after the true conjunction, they therefore began their month from the sixth hour at evening, that is, at sun set, next after the eighteenth hour from the conjunction. And this rule they called [Hebrew: YH] Jah, designing by the letters [Hebrew: Y] and [Hebrew: H] the number 18.

I know that Epiphanius tells us, if some interpret his words rightly, that the Jews used a vicious cycle, and thereby anticipated the legal new moons by two days. But this surely he spake not as a witness, for he neither understood Astronomy nor Rabbinical learning, but as arguing from his erroneous hypothesis about the time of the passion. For the Jews did not anticipate, but postpone their months: they thought it lawful to begin their months a day later than the first appearance of the new moon, because the new moon continued for more days than one; but not a day sooner, lest they should celebrate the new moon before there was any. And the Jews still keep a tradition in their books, that the Sanhedrim used diligently to define the new moons by sight: sending witnesses into mountainous places, and examining them about the moon's appearing, and translating the new moon from the day they had agreed on to the day before, as often as witnesses came from distant regions, who had seen it a day sooner than it was seen at Jerusalem. Accordingly Josephus, one of the Jewish Priests who ministred in the temple, tells us2 that the Passover was kept on the 14th day of Nisan, [Greek: kata selênên] according to the moon, when the sun was in Aries. This is confirmed also by two instances, recorded by him, which totally overthrow the hypothesis of the Jews using a vicious cycle. For that year in which Jerusalem was taken and destroyed, he saith, the Passover was on the 14th day of the month Xanticus, which according to Josephus is our April; and that five years before, it fell on the 8th day of the same month. Which two instances agree with the course of the moon.

Computing therefore the new moons of the first month according to the course of the moon and the rule Jah, and thence counting 14 days, I find that the 14th day of this month in the year of Christ 31, fell on tuesday March 27; in the year 32, on sunday Apr. 13; in the year 33, on friday Apr. 3; in the year 34, on wednesday March 24, or rather, for avoiding the Equinox which fell on the same day, and for having a fitter time for harvest, on thursday Apr. 22. also in the year 35, on tuesday Apr. 12. and in the year 36, on saturday March 31.

On one of the following Sabbaths he went into a synagogue and healed a man with a withered hand, Matth. xii. 9. Luke vi. 6. When the Pharisees then took counsel to destroy him, he left that place, and great crowds followed him. He healed them all and told them not to make him known, Matth. xii. 14. Later, being in a ship with the crowd standing on the shore, he spoke to them three parables in a row, taken from men sowing seed in the fields, Matth. xiii. By this we may know that it was now seed-time, and so that the feast of Tabernacles had passed. After this he went into his own country and taught them in their synagogue, but did not do many mighty works there because they did not believe. Then the twelve, having been abroad a year, returned and told Jesus all that they had done. At the same time Herod beheaded John in prison, and John's disciples came and told Jesus. When Jesus heard it, he took the twelve and left that place privately by ship for a desert place belonging to Bethsaida. When the people learned of it, they followed him on foot from the cities, the winter now being past. He healed their sick, and in the desert fed them to the number of five thousand men, besides women and children, with only five loaves and two fishes, Matth. xiv. Luke ix. As he did this miracle, the Passover of the Jews was near, John vi. 4. But Jesus did not go up to this feast. After these things he walked in Galilee, because at the Passover before the Jews had taken counsel to destroy him, and still sought to kill him, John vii. 1. From then on he is found first on the coast of Tyre and Sidon, then by the sea of Galilee, later on the coast of Caesarea Philippi, and lastly at Capernaum, Matth. xv. 21, 29. xvi. 13. xvii. 34.

Later, when the feast of Tabernacles was near, his brothers criticized him for walking in secret and urged him to go up to the feast. But he did not go until they had gone, and then he went up in private, John vii. 2. When the Jews tried to stone him, he escaped, John viii. 59. After that he was at the feast of the Dedication in winter, John x. 22. When they tried again to take him, he fled beyond the Jordan, John x. 39, 40. Matth. xix. 1. There he stayed until the death of Lazarus, and then he came to Bethany near Jerusalem and raised him, John xi. 7, 18. From that time on the Jews took counsel to kill him. So he did not walk openly among the Jews any more, but went from there to a country near the wilderness, to a city called Ephraim, and there stayed with his disciples until the last Passover, in which the Jews put him to death, John xi. 53, 54.

So, comparing the Gospels of Matthew and John, we have the history of Christ's actions in unbroken order through five Passovers. John is more exact at the beginning and the end; Matthew in the middle. Whatever one leaves out, the other supplies. The first Passover fell between the baptism of Christ and the imprisonment of John, John ii. 13. The second came within four months after John was imprisoned and Christ began to preach in Galilee, John iv. 35. So it was either the feast Jesus went up to when the Scribe wanted to follow him, Matth. viii. 19. Luke ix. 51, 57. or the feast before that one. The third was the next feast after it, when the grain had formed ears and was ripe, Matth. xii. 1. Luke vi. 1. The fourth was the one near at hand when Christ worked the miracle of the five loaves, Matth. xiv. 15. John vi. 4, 5. The fifth was the one in which Christ suffered, Matth. xx. 17. John xii. 1.

Between the first and second Passover, John and Christ both baptized, until John was imprisoned, four months before the second. Then Christ began to preach and to call his disciples. After he had taught them for a year, he sent them out to preach in the cities of the Jews. At the same time John, hearing of Christ's fame, sent to ask who he was. At the third Passover, the chief priests began to plan Christ's death. A little before the fourth, the twelve, having preached for a year in all the cities, returned to Christ. At the same time Herod beheaded John in prison, after John had been in prison two years and a quarter. On hearing that, Christ fled into the desert for fear of Herod. Christ did not go up to Jerusalem for the fourth Passover, because he feared the Jews, who at the Passover before had planned his death, and because his time had not yet come. From then on, until the feast of Tabernacles, he moved about in Galilee, and in secret because he feared Herod. After the feast of Tabernacles he never returned to Galilee. Sometimes he was at Jerusalem, sometimes he withdrew beyond the Jordan, or to the city Ephraim by the wilderness, until the Passover in which he was betrayed, arrested, and crucified.

So John baptized for two summers, and Christ preached for three. The first summer John preached to make himself known, so that he could give testimony to Christ. Then, after Christ came to his baptism and was revealed to him, John baptized one more summer, to make Christ known through his testimony. Christ also baptized that same summer, to make himself better known. Because of John's testimony, more people came to Christ's baptism than to John's. The following winter John was imprisoned, and his work being at an end, Christ took up his own office of preaching in the cities. At the start of his preaching he brought the twelve Apostles to their full number, and taught them all through the first year so that he could send them out. Before that year ended, his fame from preaching and miracles had spread so far that at the following Passover the Jews took counsel about how to kill him. In the second year of his preaching it was no longer safe for him to meet people openly in Judea, so he sent the twelve to preach in all their cities, and at the end of the year they returned to him and told him all they had done. Through the whole last year the twelve stayed with him to be taught more fully, so that after his death they could preach to all nations. And on hearing of John's death, afraid of Herod as well as of the Jews, he moved about that year more secretly than before, frequenting deserts and spending the last half of the year in Judea, outside the dominions of Herod.

Thus, in the Gospels of Matthew and John, everything is told in due order from the start of John's preaching to the death of Christ, and the years are marked off from one another by such essential signs that they cannot be mistaken. The second Passover is set apart from the first by John's imprisonment coming between them. The third is set apart from the second by two signs: first, by the feast that Christ went up to coming between them, Mat. viii. 19. Luke ix. 57. and second, by the time elapsed since Christ began to preach. The second was at the start of his preaching, and the third came so long after that, before it arrived, Christ said, "from the days of John the Baptist until now," etc., and blamed the cities of Galilee for not repenting at his preaching and at the mighty works done in all that time. The fourth is set apart from the third by the twelve being sent by Christ to preach in the cities of Judea through all the interval. The fifth is set apart from all the former by the twelve having returned from preaching and staying with Christ through the whole interval between the fourth and the fifth, and by the passion and other sure signs.

Now the first summer of John's baptizing fell in the fifteenth year of the Emperor Tiberius, and so the first of these five Passovers fell in his sixteenth year. The last of them, in which Jesus suffered, falls in the twentieth year of the same Emperor, and so in the consulship of Fabius and Vitellius, in the 79th Julian year, and the year of Christ 34, which was the sabbatical year of the Jews. That it did so, I confirm further with these arguments.

I take it for granted that the passion was on Friday, the 14th day of the month Nisan; the great feast of the Passover on Saturday, the 15th day of Nisan; and the resurrection on the day after. Now the 14th day of Nisan always fell on the full moon just after the vernal equinox. The month began at the new moon before that, not at the true conjunction, but at the first appearance of the new moon. For the Jews referred all the time of the silent moon, as they called it—that is, the time of the moon's disappearing—to the old moon. And because the first appearance would usually come about 18 hours after the true conjunction, they began their month at the sixth hour of the evening, that is, at sunset, right after the eighteenth hour from the conjunction. They called this rule Jah, spelling it with the Hebrew letters Y and H, which stand for the number 18.

I know that Epiphanius tells us—provided some interpret his words correctly—that the Jews used a faulty cycle and so moved the legal new moons two days earlier. But he surely did not say this as a witness, for he understood neither astronomy nor rabbinic learning; he was arguing from his mistaken idea about the time of the passion. The Jews did not move their months earlier, but later. They thought it lawful to begin a month a day later than the first appearance of the new moon, because the new moon stayed visible for more than one day; but not a day sooner, for fear of celebrating the new moon before there was any. The Jews still keep a tradition in their books that the Sanhedrin used to fix the new moons by sight. They sent witnesses into mountainous places and questioned them about the moon's appearance, and moved the new moon from the day they had agreed on to the day before, whenever witnesses came from distant regions who had seen it a day sooner than it was seen at Jerusalem. Accordingly Josephus, one of the Jewish priests who served in the temple, tells us2 that the Passover was kept on the 14th day of Nisan, kata selene—that is, according to the moon—when the sun was in Aries. Two instances recorded by him confirm this, and they wholly overthrow the claim that the Jews used a faulty cycle. In the year Jerusalem was taken and destroyed, he says, the Passover was on the 14th day of the month Xanticus, which, according to Josephus, is our April; and five years before, it fell on the 8th day of the same month. These two instances agree with the course of the moon.

So, computing the new moons of the first month according to the course of the moon and the rule Jah, and then counting 14 days, I find that the 14th day of this month fell in the year of Christ 31 on Tuesday, March 27; in the year 32 on Sunday, April 13; in the year 33 on Friday, April 3; in the year 34 on Wednesday, March 24, or rather, to avoid the equinox that fell on the same day and to allow a fitter time for harvest, on Thursday, April 22; also in the year 35 on Tuesday, April 12; and in the year 36 on Saturday, March 31.

Part I, Chapter 11, 3

But because the 15th and 21st days of Nisan, and a day or two of Pentecost, and the 10th, 15th, and 22d of Tisri, were always sabbatical days or days of rest, and it was inconvenient on two sabbaths together to be prohibited burying their dead and making ready fresh meat, for in that hot region their meat would be apt in two days to corrupt: to avoid these and such like inconveniences, the Jews postponed their months a day, as often as the first day of the month Tisri, or, which is all one, the third of the month Nisan, was sunday, wednesday or friday: and this rule they called [Hebrew: 'DW] Adu, by the letters [Hebrew: W, D, '] signifying the numbers 1, 4, 6; that is, the 1st, 4th, and 6th days of the week; which days we call sunday, wednesday and friday. Postponing therefore by this rule the months found above; the 14th day of the month Nisan will fall in the year of Christ 31, on wednesday March 28; in the year 32, on monday Apr. 14; in the year 33, on friday Apr. 3; in the year 34, on friday Apr. 23; in the year 35, on wednesday Apr. 13, and in the year 36, on saturday March 31.

By this computation therefore the year 32 is absolutely excluded, because the Passion cannot fall on friday without making it five days after the full moon, or two days before it; whereas it ought to be upon the day of the full moon, or the next day. For the same reason the years 31 and 35 are excluded, because in them the Passion cannot fall on friday, without making it three days after the full moon, or four days before it: errors so enormous, that they would be very conspicuous in the heavens to every vulgar eye. The year 36 is contended for by few or none, and both this and the year 35 may be thus excluded.

Tiberius in the beginning of his reign made Valerius Gratus President of Judea; and after 11 years, substituted Pontius Pilate, who governed 10 years. Then Vitellius, newly made President of Syria, deprived him of his honour, substituting Marcellus, and at length sent him to Rome: but, by reason of delays, Tiberius died before Pilate got thither. In the mean time Vitellius, after he had deposed Pilate, came to Jerusalem in the time of the Passover, to visit that Province as well as others in the beginning of his office; and in the place of Caiaphas, then High Priest, created Jonathas the son of Ananus, or Annas as he is called in scripture. Afterwards, when Vitellius was returned to Antioch, he received letters from Tiberius, to make peace with Artabanus king of the Parthians. At the same time the Alans, by the sollicitation of Tiberius, invaded the kingdom of Artabanus; and his subjects also, by the procurement of Vitellius, soon after rebelled: for Tiberius thought that Artabanus, thus pressed with difficulties, would more readily accept the conditions of peace. Artabanus therefore straightway gathering a greater army, opprest the rebels; and then meeting Vitellius at Euphrates, made a league with the Romans. After this Tiberius commanded Vitellius to make war upon Aretas King of Arabia. He therefore leading his army against Aretas, went together with Herod to Jerusalem, to sacrifice at the publick feast which was then to be celebrated. Where being received honourably, he stayed three days, and in the mean while translated the high Priesthood from Jonathas to his brother Theophilus: and the fourth day, receiving letters of the death of Tiberius, made the people swear allegiance to Caius the new Emperor; and recalling his army, sent them into quarters. All this is related by Josephus Antiq. lib. 18. c. 6, 7. Now Tiberius reigned 22 years and 7 months, and died March 16, in the beginning of the year of Christ 37; and the feast of the Passover fell on April 20 following, that is, 35 days after the death of Tiberius: so that there were about 36 or 38 days, for the news of his death to come from Rome to Vitellius at Jerusalem; which being a convenient time for that message, confirms that the feast which Vitellius and Herod now went up to was the Passover. For had it been the Pentecost, as is usually supposed, Vitellius would have continued three months ignorant of the Emperor's death: which is not to be supposed. However, the things done between this feast and the Passover which Vitellius was at before, namely, the stirring up a sedition in Parthia, the quieting that sedition, the making a league after that with the Parthians, the sending news of that league to Rome, the receiving new orders from thence to go against the Arabians, and the putting those orders in execution; required much more time than the fifty days between the Passover and Pentecost of the same year: and therefore the Passover which Vitellius first went up to, was in the year before. Therefore Pilate was deposed before the Passover A.C. 36, and by consequence the passion of Christ was before that Passover: for he suffered not under Vitellius, nor under Vitellius and Pilate together, but under Pilate alone.

Now it is observable that the high Priesthood was at this time become an annual office, and the Passover was the time of making a new high Priest. For Gratus the predecessor of Pilate, saith Josephus, made Ismael high Priest after Ananus; and a while after, suppose a year, deposed him, and substituted Eleazar, and a year after Simon, and after another year Caiaphas; and then gave way to Pilate. So Vitellius at one Passover made Jonathas successor to Caiaphas, and at the next Theophilus to Jonathas. Hence Luke tells us, that in the 15th year of Tiberius, Annas and Caiaphas were high Priests, that is, Annas till the Passover, and Caiaphas afterwards. Accordingly John speaks of the high Priesthood as an annual office: for he tells us again and again, in the last year of Christ's preaching, that Caiaphas was high Priest for that year, John xi. 49, 51. xviii. 13. And the next year Luke tells you, that Annas was high Priest, Acts iv. 6. Theophilus was therefore made high Priest in the first year of Caius, Jonathas in the 22d year of Tiberius, and Caiaphas in the 21st year of the same Emperor: and therefore, allotting a year to each, the Passion, when Annas succeeded Caiaphas, could not be later than the 20th year of Tiberius, A.C. 34.

Thus there remain only the years 33 and 34 to be considered; and the year 33 I exclude by this argument. In the Passover two years before the Passion, when Christ went thro' the corn, and his disciples pluckt the ears, and rubbed them with their hands to eat; this ripeness of the corn shews that the Passover then fell late: and so did the Passover A.C. 32, April 14, but the Passover A.C. 31, March 28th, fell very early. It was not therefore two years after the year 31, but two years after 32 that Christ suffered.

Thus all the characters of the Passion agree to the year 34; and that is the only year to which they all agree.

Notes to Chap. XI.

1 I observe, that Christ and his forerunner John in their parabolical discourses were wont to allude to things present. The old Prophets, when they would describe things emphatically, did not only draw parables from things which offered themselves, as from the rent of a garment, 1 Sam. xv. from the sabbatic year, Isa. xxxvii. from the vessels of a Potter, Jer. xviii, &c. but also when such fit objects were wanting, they supplied them by their own actions, as by rending a garment, 1 Kings xi. by shooting, 2 Kings xiii. by making bare their body, Isa. xx. by imposing significant names to their sons, Isa. viii. Hos. i. by hiding a girdle in the bank of Euphrates, Jer. xiii. by breaking a potter's vessel, Jer. xix. by putting on fetters and yokes, Jer. xxvii. by binding a book to a stone, and casting them both into Euphrates, Jer. li. by besieging a painted city, Ezek. iv. by dividing hair into three parts, Ezek. v. by making a chain, Ezek. vii. by carrying out houshold stuff like a captive and trembling, Ezek. xii, &c. By such kind of types the Prophets loved to speak. And Christ being endued with a nobler prophetic spirit than the rest, excelled also in this kind of speaking, yet so as not to speak by his own actions, that was less grave and decent, but to turn into parables such things as offered themselves. On occasion of the harvest approaching, he admonishes his disciples once and again of the spiritual harvest, John iv. 35. Matth. ix. 37. Seeing the lilies of the field, he admonishes his disciples about gay clothing, Matth. vi. 28. In allusion to the present season of fruits, he admonishes his disciples about knowing men by their fruits, Matth. vii. 16. In the time of the Passover, when trees put forth leaves, he bids his disciples learn a parable from the fig tree: when its branch is yet tender and putteth forth leaves, ye know that summer is nigh, &c. Matth. xxiv. 32. Luke xxi. 29. The same day, alluding both to the season of the year and to his passion, which was to be two days after, he formed a parable of the time of fruits approaching, and the murdering of the heir, Matth. xxi. 33. Alluding at the same time, both to the money-changers whom he had newly driven out of the Temple, and to his passion at hand; he made a parable of a Noble-man going into a far country to receive a kingdom and return, and delivering his goods to his servants, and at his return condemning the slothful servant because he put not his money to the exchangers, Matth. xxv. 14. Luke xix. 12. Being near the Temple where sheep were kept in folds to be sold for the sacrifices, he spake many things parabolically of sheep, of the shepherd, and of the door of the sheepfold; and discovers that he alluded to the sheepfolds which were to be hired in the market-place, by speaking of such folds as a thief could not enter by the door, nor the shepherd himself open, but a porter opened to the shepherd, John x. 1, 3. Being in the mount of Olives, Matth. xxxvi. 30. John xiv. 31. a place so fertile that it could not want vines, he spake many things mystically of the Husbandman, and of the vine and its branches, John xv. Meeting a blind man, he admonished of spiritual blindness, John ix. 39. At the sight of little children, he described once and again the innocence of the elect, Matth. xviii. 2. xix. 13. Knowing that Lazarus was dead and should be raised again, he discoursed of the resurrection and life eternal, John xi. 25, 26. Hearing of the slaughter of some whom Pilate had slain, he admonished of eternal death, Luke xiii. 1. To his fishermen he spake of fishers of men, Matth. iv. 10. and composed another parable about fishes. Matth. xiii. 47. Being by the Temple, he spake of the Temple of his body, John ii. 19. At supper he spake a parable about the mystical supper to come in the kingdom of heaven, Luke xiv. On occasion of temporal food, he admonished his disciples of spiritual food, and of eating his flesh and drinking his blood mystically, John vi. 27, 53. When his disciples wanted bread, he bad them beware of the leven of the Pharisees, Matth. xvi. 6. Being desired to eat, he answered that he had other meat, John iv. 31. In the great day of the feast of Tabernacles, when the Jews, as their custom was, brought a great quantity of waters from the river Shiloah into the Temple, Christ stood and cried, saying, If any man thirst let him come unto me and drink. He that believeth in me, out of his belly shall flow rivers of living water, John vii. 37. The next day, in allusion to the servants who by reason of the sabbatical year were newly set free, he said, If ye continue in my word, the truth shall make you free. Which the Jews understanding literally with respect to the present manumission of servants, answered, We be Abraham's seed, and were never in bondage to any man: how sayeth thou, ye shall be made free? John viii. They assert their freedom by a double argument: first, because they were the seed of Abraham, and therefore newly made free, had they been ever in bondage; and then, because they never were in bondage. In the last Passover, when Herod led his army thro' Judea against Aretas King of Arabia, because Aretas was aggressor and the stronger in military forces, as appeared by the event; Christ alluding to that state of things, composed the parable of a weaker King leading his army against a stronger who made war upon him, Luke xiv. 31. And I doubt not but divers other parables were formed upon other occasions, the history of which we have not.

2 Joseph. Antiq. lib. 3. c. 10.

But the 15th and 21st days of Nisan, a day or two of Pentecost, and the 10th, 15th, and 22nd of Tisri were always sabbatical days, that is, days of rest. It was inconvenient to be barred on two sabbaths in a row from burying their dead and from getting fresh meat ready, because in that hot region their meat would go bad in two days. To avoid these and similar problems, the Jews put their months off by a day whenever the first day of the month Tisri—or the same thing, the third day of the month Nisan—fell on a Sunday, Wednesday, or Friday. They called this rule Adu, whose Hebrew letters stand for the numbers 1, 4, and 6: that is, the 1st, 4th, and 6th days of the week, which we call Sunday, Wednesday, and Friday. Postponing by this rule the months found above, the 14th day of the month Nisan falls in the year of Christ 31 on Wednesday, March 28; in the year 32 on Monday, April 14; in the year 33 on Friday, April 3; in the year 34 on Friday, April 23; in the year 35 on Wednesday, April 13; and in the year 36 on Saturday, March 31.

So by this computation the year 32 is ruled out completely, because the Passion cannot fall on a Friday without putting it five days after the full moon or two days before it, whereas it ought to fall on the day of the full moon or the very next day. For the same reason the years 31 and 35 are ruled out, because in those years the Passion cannot fall on a Friday without putting it three days after the full moon or four days before it—errors so large that they would be plain in the heavens to any ordinary eye. Few or none defend the year 36, so both it and the year 35 can be ruled out this way.

At the start of his reign Tiberius made Valerius Gratus governor of Judea; and after 11 years he replaced him with Pontius Pilate, who governed 10 years. Then Vitellius, newly made governor of Syria, removed Pilate from his post, put Marcellus in his place, and at last sent Pilate to Rome; but because of delays, Tiberius died before Pilate got there. Meanwhile Vitellius, after he had removed Pilate, came to Jerusalem at the time of the Passover, to visit that province as well as others at the start of his time in office; and in place of Caiaphas, then high priest, he appointed Jonathas the son of Ananus, or Annas as he is called in scripture. Afterwards, when Vitellius had returned to Antioch, he received letters from Tiberius telling him to make peace with Artabanus, king of the Parthians. At the same time the Alans, at Tiberius's urging, invaded the kingdom of Artabanus; and soon after the subjects of Artabanus also rebelled, at Vitellius's prompting. For Tiberius thought that Artabanus, pressed this way by difficulties, would more readily accept the terms of peace. So Artabanus quickly gathered a larger army and crushed the rebels. He then met Vitellius at the Euphrates and made a treaty with the Romans. After this Tiberius ordered Vitellius to make war on Aretas, king of Arabia. So he led his army against Aretas and went with Herod to Jerusalem, to sacrifice at the public feast that was then to be celebrated. He was received with honor there, stayed three days, and in the meantime moved the high priesthood from Jonathas to his brother Theophilus. On the fourth day, receiving letters of the death of Tiberius, he made the people swear allegiance to Caius, the new emperor, and, recalling his army, sent them back to their quarters. Josephus tells all of this in Antiquities, book 18, chapters 6 and 7. Now Tiberius reigned 22 years and 7 months, and died on March 16, in the beginning of the year of Christ 37; and the feast of the Passover fell on the following April 20, that is, 35 days after the death of Tiberius. So there were about 36 or 38 days for the news of his death to come from Rome to Vitellius at Jerusalem. Since that is a fitting amount of time for such a message, it confirms that the feast which Vitellius and Herod now went up to was the Passover. If it had been the Pentecost, as is usually supposed, Vitellius would have gone on for three months without knowing of the emperor's death, which cannot be supposed. Still, the things done between this feast and the Passover which Vitellius had attended before—namely, stirring up a sedition in Parthia, calming that sedition, then making a treaty with the Parthians, sending news of that treaty to Rome, receiving new orders from there to go against the Arabians, and carrying out those orders—required far more time than the fifty days between the Passover and Pentecost of the same year. So the Passover which Vitellius first went up to was in the year before. Therefore Pilate was removed from office before the Passover A.C. 36, and so the passion of Christ was before that Passover: for he suffered not under Vitellius, nor under Vitellius and Pilate together, but under Pilate alone.

It is worth noticing that by this time the high priesthood had become an annual office, and the Passover was the time for making a new high priest. Josephus says that Gratus, the predecessor of Pilate, made Ismael high priest after Ananus; and a while later—say a year—he removed Ismael and put in Eleazar; a year after that, Simon; and after another year, Caiaphas. Then he gave way to Pilate. In the same way, Vitellius at one Passover made Jonathas successor to Caiaphas, and at the next made Theophilus successor to Jonathas. So Luke tells us that in the 15th year of Tiberius, Annas and Caiaphas were high priests: Annas until the Passover, and Caiaphas after that. John also speaks of the high priesthood as an annual office, for he tells us again and again that in the last year of Christ's preaching Caiaphas was high priest for that year, John xi. 49, 51. xviii. 13. And the next year Luke tells us that Annas was high priest, Acts iv. 6. So Theophilus was made high priest in the first year of Caius, Jonathas in the 22nd year of Tiberius, and Caiaphas in the 21st year of the same Emperor; and so, giving each of them one year, the Passion, when Annas succeeded Caiaphas, could not be later than the 20th year of Tiberius, A.C. 34.

Only the years 33 and 34 remain to be considered, and I rule out the year 33 with this argument. At the Passover two years before the Passion, Christ went through the grain and his disciples plucked the ears and rubbed them in their hands to eat. That the grain was ripe shows that the Passover then fell late; and so it did. The Passover A.C. 32, April 14, fell late, but the Passover A.C. 31, March 28th, fell very early. So Christ suffered not two years after the year 31, but two years after 32.

So all the signs of the Passion agree with the year 34, and that is the only year to which they all agree.

Notes to Chapter XI.

1 I observe that Christ and his forerunner John, in their parabolic discourses, often alluded to things present. The old Prophets, when they wanted to describe things emphatically, did not only draw parables from things which offered themselves, as from the rent of a garment, 1 Sam. xv.; from the sabbatic year, Isa. xxxvii.; from the vessels of a potter, Jer. xviii. etc.; but also, when such fitting objects were missing, they supplied them by their own actions: as by rending a garment, 1 Kings xi.; by shooting, 2 Kings xiii.; by baring their body, Isa. xx.; by giving significant names to their sons, Isa. viii. Hos. i.; by hiding a girdle in the bank of the Euphrates, Jer. xiii.; by breaking a potter's vessel, Jer. xix.; by putting on fetters and yokes, Jer. xxvii.; by binding a book to a stone and casting them both into the Euphrates, Jer. li.; by besieging a painted city, Ezek. iv.; by dividing the hair into three parts, Ezek. v.; by making a chain, Ezek. vii.; by carrying out household goods like a captive who trembles, Ezek. xii. etc. The Prophets loved to speak by such kinds of figures. And Christ, endowed with a nobler prophetic spirit than the rest, excelled also in this kind of speaking, yet so as not to speak by his own actions, which was less grave and proper, but to turn into parables such things as offered themselves. As the harvest approached, he warned his disciples again and again of the spiritual harvest, John iv. 35. Matth. ix. 37. Seeing the lilies of the field, he warned his disciples about fine clothing, Matth. vi. 28. Referring to the present season of fruits, he warned his disciples about knowing men by their fruits, Matth. vii. 16. At the time of the Passover, when trees put out leaves, he told his disciples to learn a parable from the fig tree: "when its branch is still tender and puts out leaves, you know that summer is near," etc. Matth. xxiv. 32. Luke xxi. 29. That same day, alluding both to the season of the year and to his passion, which was to be two days after, he formed a parable of the time of fruits approaching, and the murdering of the heir, Matth. xxi. 33. Alluding at the same time both to the money changers whom he had just driven out of the Temple and to his passion at hand, he made a parable of a nobleman going into a far country to receive a kingdom and return, and delivering his goods to his servants, and at his return condemning the lazy servant because he did not put his money with the exchangers, Matth. xxv. 14. Luke xix. 12. Being near the Temple, where sheep were kept in folds to be sold for the sacrifices, he spoke many things in parables about sheep, about the shepherd, and about the door of the sheepfold; and he shows that he alluded to the sheepfolds which were to be hired in the marketplace, by speaking of such folds as a thief could not enter by the door, nor the shepherd himself open, but a gatekeeper opened to the shepherd, John x. 1, 3. Being in the mount of Olives, Matth. xxxvi. 30. John xiv. 31. a place so fertile that it could not lack vines, he spoke many things in a hidden way about the farmer, and about the vine and its branches, John xv. Meeting a blind man, he warned of spiritual blindness, John ix. 39. At the sight of little children, he described again and again the innocence of the elect, Matth. xviii. 2. xix. 13. Knowing that Lazarus was dead and would be raised again, he spoke of the resurrection and life eternal, John xi. 25, 26. Hearing of the slaughter of some whom Pilate had killed, he warned of eternal death, Luke xiii. 1. To his fishermen he spoke of fishers of men, Matth. iv. 10. and he made another parable about fishes, Matth. xiii. 47. Being beside the Temple, he spoke of the Temple of his body, John ii. 19. At supper he spoke a parable about the spiritual supper to come in the kingdom of heaven, Luke xiv. On occasion of food for this life, he warned his disciples of spiritual food, and of eating his flesh and drinking his blood in a spiritual sense, John vi. 27, 53. When his disciples wanted bread, he told them to beware of the yeast of the Pharisees, Matth. xvi. 6. Being asked to eat, he answered that he had other food, John iv. 31. In the great day of the feast of Tabernacles, when the Jews, as their custom was, brought a great quantity of water from the river Shiloah into the Temple, Christ stood and cried out, "If anyone is thirsty, let him come to me and drink. Whoever believes in me, out of his heart shall flow rivers of living water," John vii. 37. The next day, alluding to the servants who by reason of the sabbatical year were newly set free, he said, "If you continue in my word, the truth will make you free." Which the Jews understood literally, with respect to the present freeing of servants, and answered, "We are Abraham's seed, and were never in bondage to anyone: how can you say, you will be made free?" John viii. They assert their freedom by two arguments: first, because they were the seed of Abraham, and therefore newly made free, if they had ever been in bondage; and then, because they never were in bondage. In the last Passover, when Herod led his army through Judea against Aretas king of Arabia, because Aretas was the aggressor and the stronger in military forces, as appeared by the event; Christ, alluding to that state of things, composed the parable of a weaker king leading his army against a stronger who made war upon him, Luke xiv. 31. And I doubt not that many other parables were formed upon other occasions, the history of which we do not have.

2 Josephus, Antiquities, book 3, chapter 10.

Part I, Chapter 12, 1

Of the Prophecy of the Scripture of Truth.

The kingdoms represented by the second and third Beasts, or the Bear and Leopard, are again described by Daniel in his last Prophecy written in the third year of Cyrus over Babylon, the year in which he conquered Persia. For this Prophecy is a commentary upon the Vision of the Ram and He-Goat.

Behold, saith1 he, there shall stand up yet three kings in Persia, [Cyrus, Cambyses, and Darius Hystaspes] and the fourth [Xerxes] shall be far richer than they all: and by his strength thro' his riches he shall stir up all against the realm of Grecia. And a mighty king [Alexander the great] shall stand up, that shall rule with great dominion, and do according to his will. And when he shall stand up, his kingdom shall be broken, and shall be divided towards the four winds of heaven; and not to his posterity [but after their death,] nor according to his dominion which he ruled: for his kingdom shall be pluckt up, even for others besides those. Alexander the great having conquered all the Persian Empire, and some part of India, died at Babylon a month before the summer Solstice, in the year of Nabonassar 425: and his captains gave the monarchy to his bastard brother Philip Aridæus, a man disturbed in his understanding; and made Perdiccas administrator of the kingdom. Perdiccas with their consent made Meleager commander of the army, Seleucus master of the horse, Craterus treasurer of the kingdom, Antipater governor of Macedon and Greece, Ptolemy governor of Egypt; Antigonus governor of Pamphylia, Lycia, Lycaonia, and Phrygia major; Lysimachus governor of Thrace, and other captains governors of other Provinces; as many as had been so before in the days of Alexander the great. The Babylonians began now to count by a new Æra, which they called the Æra of Philip, using the years of Nabonassar, and reckoning the 425th year of Nabonassar to be the first year of Philip. Roxana the wife of Alexander being left big with child, and about three or four months after brought to bed of a son, they called him Alexander, saluted him King, and joined him with Philip, whom they had before placed in the throne. Philip reigned three years under the administratorship of Perdiccas, two years more under the administratorship of Antipater, and above a year more under that of Polyperchon; in all six years and four months; and then was slain with his Queen Eurydice in September by the command of Olympias the mother of Alexander the great. The Greeks being disgusted at the cruelties of Olympias, revolted to Cassander the son and successor of Antipater. Cassander affecting the dominion of Greece, slew Olympias; and soon after shut up the young king Alexander, with his mother Roxana, in the castle of Amphipolis, under the charge of Glaucias, An. Nabonass. 432. The next year Ptolemy, Cassander and Lysimachus, by means of Seleucus, form'd a league against Antigonus; and after certain wars made peace with him, An. Nabonass. 438, upon these conditions: that Cassander should command the forces of Europe till Alexander the son of Roxana came to age; and that Lysimachus should govern Thrace, Ptolemy Egypt and Lybia, and Antigonus all Asia. Seleucus had possest himself of Mesopotamia, Babylonia, Sustana and Media, the year before. About three years after Alexander's death he was made governor of Babylon by Antipater; then was expelled by Antigonus; but now he recovered and enlarged his government over a great part of the East: which gave occasion to a new Æra, called Æra Seleucidarum. Not long after the peace made with Antigonus, Diodorus saith the same Olympic year; Cassander, seeing that Alexander the son of Roxana grew up, and that it was discoursed thro'out Macedonia that it was fit he should be set at liberty, and take upon him the government of his father's kingdom, commanded Glaucias the governor of the castle to kill Roxana and the young king Alexander her son, and conceal their deaths. Then Polyperchon set up Hercules, the son of Alexander the great by Barsinè, to be king; and soon after, at the sollicitation of Cassander, caused him to be slain. Soon after that, upon a great victory at sea got by Demetrius the son of Antigonus over Ptolemy, Antigonus took upon himself the title of king, and gave the same title to his son. This was An. Nabonass. 441. After his example, Seleucus, Cassander, Lysimachus and Ptolemy, took upon themselves the title and dignity of kings, having abstained from this honour while there remained any of Alexander's race to inherit the crown. Thus the monarchy of the Greeks for want of an heir was broken into several kingdoms; four of which, seated to the four winds of heaven, were very eminent. For Ptolemy reigned over Egypt, Lybia and Ethiopia; Antigonus over Syria and the lesser Asia; Lysimachus over Thrace; and Cassander over Macedon, Greece and Epirus, as above.

Seleucus at this time reigned over the nations which were beyond Euphrates, and belonged to the bodies of the two first Beasts; but after six years he conquered Antigonus, and thereby became possest of one of the four kingdoms. For Cassander being afraid of the power of Antigonus, combined with Lysimachus, Ptolemy and Seleucus, against him: and while Lysimachus invaded the parts of Asia next the Hellespont, Ptolemy subdued Phoenicia and Coelosyria, with the sea-coasts of Asia.

Seleucus came down with a powerful army into Cappadocia, and joining the confederate forces, fought Antigonus in Phrygia and flew him, and seized his kingdom, An. Nabonass. 447. After which Seleucus built Antioch, Seleucia, Laodicea, Apamea, Berrhæa, Edessa, and other cities in Syria and Asia; and in them granted the Jews equal privileges with the Greeks.

Demetrius the son of Antigonus retained but a small part of his father's dominions, and at length lost Cyprus to Ptolemy; but afterwards killing Alexander, the son and successor of Cassander king of Macedon, he seized his kingdom, An. Nabonass. 454. Sometime after, preparing a very great army to recover his father's dominions in Asia; Seleucus, Ptolemy, Lysimachus and Pyrrhus king of Epirus, combined against him; and Pyrrhus invading Macedon, corrupted the army of Demetrius, put him to flight, seized his kingdom, and shared it with Lysimachus. After seven months, Lysimachus beating Pyrrhus, took Macedon from him, and held it five years and a half, uniting the kingdoms of Macedon and Thrace. Lysimachus in his wars with Antigonus and Demetrius, had taken from them Caria, Lydia, and Phrygia; and had a treasury in Pergamus, a castle on the top of a conical hill in Phrygia, by the river Caicus, the custody of which he had committed to one Philetærus, who was at first faithful to him, but in the last year of his reign revolted. For Lysimachus, having at the instigation of his wife Arsinoe, slain first his own son Agathocles, and then several that lamented him; the wife of Agathocles fled with her children and brothers, and some others of their friends, and sollicited Seleucus to make war upon Lysimachus; whereupon Philetærus also, who grieved at the death of Agathocles, and was accused thereof by Arsinoe, took up arms, and sided with Seleucus. On this occasion Seleucus and Lysimachus met and fought in Phrygia; and Lysimachus being slain in the battel, lost his kingdom to Seleucus, An. Nabonass. 465. Thus the Empire of the Greeks, which at first brake into four kingdoms, became now reduced into two notable ones, henceforward called by Daniel the kings of the South and North. For Ptolemy now reigned over Egypt, Lybia, Ethiopia, Arabia, Phoenicia, Coelosyria, and Cyprus; and Seleucus, having united three of the four kingdoms, had a dominion scarce inferior to that of the Persian Empire, conquered by Alexander the great. All which is thus represented by Daniel:2 And the king of the South [Ptolemy] shall be strong, and one of his Princes [Seleucus, one of Alexander's Princes] shall be strong above him, and have dominion; his dominion shall be a great dominion.

After Seleucus had reigned seven months over Macedon, Greece, Thrace, Asia, Syria, Babylonia, Media, and all the East as far as India; Ptolemy Ceraunus, the younger brother of Ptolemy Philadelphus king of Egypt, slew him treacherously, and seized his dominions in Europe: while Antiochus Soter, the son of Seleucus, succeeded his father in Asia, Syria, and most of the East; and after nineteen or twenty years was succeeded by his son Antiochus Theos; who having a lasting war with Ptolemy Philadelphus, at length composed the same by marrying Berenice the daughter of Philadelphus: but after a reign of fifteen years, his first wife Laodice poisoned him, and set her son Seleucus Callinicus upon the throne. Callinicus in the beginning of his reign, by the impulse of his mother Laodice, besieged Berenice in Daphne near Antioch, and slew her with her young son and many of her women. Whereupon Ptolemy Euergetes, the son and successor of Philadelphus, made war upon Callinicus; took from him Phoenicia, Syria, Cilicia, Mesopotamia, Babylonia, Sustana, and some other regions; and carried back into Egypt 40000 talents of silver, and 2500 images of the Gods, amongst which were the Gods of Egypt carried away by Cambyses. Antiochus Hierax at first assisted his brother Callinicus, but afterwards contended with him for Asia. In the mean time Eumenes governor of Pergamus beat Antiochus, and took from them both all Asia westward of mount Taurus. This was in the fifth year of Callinicus, who after an inglorious reign of 20 years was succeeded by his son Seleucus Ceraunus; and Euergetes after four years more, An. Nabonass. 527, was succeeded by his son Ptolemy Philopator. All which is thus signified by Daniel:3 And in the end of years they [the kings of the South and North] shall join themselves together: for the king's daughter of the South [Berenice] shall come to the king of the North to make an agreement, but she shall not retain the power of the arm; neither shall she stand, nor her seed, but she shall be delivered up, and he [Callinicus] that brought her, and he whom she brought forth, and they that strengthned her in [those] times, [or defended her in the siege of Daphne.] But out of a branch of her roots shall one stand up in his seat [her brother Euergetes] who shall come with an army, and shall enter into the fortress [or fenced cities] of the king of the North, and shall act against them and prevail: and shall carry captives into Egypt, their Gods with their Princes and precious vessels of silver and gold; and he shall continue some years after the king of the North.

Seleucus Ceraunus, inheriting the remains of his father's kingdom, and thinking to recover the rest, raised a great army against the governor of Pergamus, now King thereof, but died in the third year of his reign. His brother and successor, Antiochus Magnus, carrying on the war, took from the King of Pergamus almost all the lesser Asia, recovering also the Provinces of Media, Persia and Babylonia, from the governors who had revolted: and in the fifth year of his reign invading Coelosyria, he with little opposition possest himself of a good part thereof; and the next year returning to invade the rest of Coelosyria and Phoenicia, beat the army of Ptolemy Philopator near Berytus; he then invaded Palestine and the neighbouring parts of Arabia, and the third year returned with an army of 78000: but Ptolemy coming out of Egypt with an army of 75000, fought and routed him at Raphia near Gaza, between Palestine and Egypt; and recovered all Phoenicia and Coelosyria, Ann. Nabonass. 532. Being puffed up with this victory, and living in all manner of luxury, the Egyptians revolted, and had wars with him, but were overcome; and in the broils sixty thousand Egyptian Jews were slain. All which is thus described by Daniel:4 But his sons [Seleucus Ceraunus, and Antiochus Magnus, the sons of Callinicus] shall be stirred up, and shall gather a great army; and he [Antiochus Magnus] shall come effectually and overflow, and pass thro' and return, and [again the next year] be stirred up [marching even] to his fortress, [the frontier towns of Egypt;] and the King of the South shall be moved with choler, and come forth [the third year] and fight with him, even with the King of the North; and he [the King of the North] shall lead forth a great multitude, but the multitude shall be given into his hand. And the multitude being taken away, his heart shall be lifted up, and he shall cast down many ten thousands; but he shall not be strengthned by it: for the king of the North shall return, &c.

About twelve years after the battle between Philopator and Antiochus, Philopator died; and left his kingdom to his young son Ptolemy Epiphanes, a child of five years old. Thereupon Antiochus Magnus confederated with Philip king of Macedon, that they should each invade the dominions of Epiphanes which lay next to them. Hence arose a various war between Antiochus and Epiphanes, each of them seizing Phoenicia and Coelosyria by turns; whereby those countries were much afflicted by both parties. First Antiochus seized them; then one Scopas being sent with the army of Egypt, recovered them from Antiochus: the next year, An. Nabonass. 550, Antiochus fought and routed Scopas near the fountains of Jordan, besieged him in Sidon, took the city, and recovered Syria and Phoenicia from Egypt, the Jews coming over to him voluntarily. But about three years after, preparing for a war against the Romans, he came to Raphia on the borders of Egypt; made peace with Epiphanes, and gave him his daughter Cleopatra: next autumn he passed the Hellespont to invade the cities of Greece under the Roman protection, and took some of them; but was beaten by the Romans the summer following, and forced to return back with his army into Asia. Before the end of the year the fleet of Antiochus was beaten by the fleet of the Romans near Phocæa: and at the same time Epiphanes and Cleopatra sent an embassy to Rome to congratulate the Romans on their success against their father Antiochus, and to exhort them to prosecute the war against him into Asia. The Romans beat Antiochus again at sea near Ephesus, past their army over the Hellespont, and obtain'd a great victory over him by land, took from him all Asia westward of mount Taurus, gave it to the King of Pergamus who assisted them in the war; and imposed a large tribute upon Antiochus. Thus the King of Pergamus, by the power of the Romans, recovered what Antiochus had taken from him; and Antiochus retiring into the remainder of his kingdom, was slain two years after by the Persians, as he was robbing the Temple of Jupiter Belus in Elymais, to raise money for the Romans. All which is thus described by Daniel.5 For the King of the North [Antiochus] shall return, and shall set forth a multitude greater than the former; and shall certainly come, after certain years, with a great army and with much riches. And in those times there shall many stand up against the King of the South, [particularly the Macedonians;] also the robbers of thy people [the Samaritans, &c.] shall exalt themselves to establish the vision, but they shall fall. So the King of the North shall come, and cast up a mount, and take the most fenced cities; and the arms of the South shall not withstand, neither his chosen people, neither shall there he any strength to withstand. But he that cometh against him shall do according to his own will, and none shall stand before him: and he shall stand in the glorious land, which shall fail in his hand. He shall also set his face to go with the strength [or army] of all his kingdom, and make an agreement with him [at Raphia;] and he shall give him the daughter of women corrupting her; but she shall not stand his side, neither be for him. After this he shall turn his face unto the Isles, and shall take many: but a Prince for his own behalf [the Romans] shall cause the reproach offered by him to cease; without his own reproach he shall cause it to turn upon him. Then he shall turn his face towards the fort of his own land: but he shall stumble and fall, and not be found.

Of the Prophecy of the Scripture of Truth.

Daniel describes the kingdoms of the second and third Beasts, the Bear and the Leopard, once more in his last Prophecy. He wrote it in the third year of Cyrus over Babylon, the year in which Cyrus conquered Persia. This Prophecy is a commentary on the Vision of the Ram and the He-Goat.

Look,1 he says, three more kings will stand up in Persia, [Cyrus, Cambyses, and Darius Hystaspes] and the fourth [Xerxes] will be far richer than all of them. By his strength, through his riches, he will stir up everyone against the realm of Grecia. Then a mighty king [Alexander the great] will stand up, rule with great dominion, and do as he wishes. When he stands up, his kingdom will be broken and divided toward the four winds of heaven; it will not go to his posterity [but after their death,] nor will it match the dominion he once ruled, for his kingdom will be torn up and given to others besides those. Alexander the great, having conquered the whole Persian Empire and part of India, died at Babylon a month before the summer solstice, in the year of Nabonassar 425. His captains gave the monarchy to his illegitimate brother Philip Aridæus, a man out of his mind, and made Perdiccas administrator of the kingdom. With their consent, Perdiccas made Meleager commander of the army, Seleucus master of the horse, Craterus treasurer of the kingdom, Antipater governor of Macedon and Greece, Ptolemy governor of Egypt; Antigonus governor of Pamphylia, Lycia, Lycaonia, and Phrygia major; Lysimachus governor of Thrace; and other captains governors of other provinces—as many as had held those posts before, in the days of Alexander the great. The Babylonians now began to count by a new era, which they called the Era of Philip. They kept the years of Nabonassar and counted the 425th year of Nabonassar as the first year of Philip. Roxana, the wife of Alexander, was left pregnant. About three or four months later she gave birth to a son. They called him Alexander, saluted him as king, and joined him with Philip, whom they had already placed on the throne. Philip reigned three years under the administratorship of Perdiccas, two more years under the administratorship of Antipater, and more than a year under that of Polyperchon—six years and four months in all. Then he and his Queen Eurydice were killed in September by order of Olympias, the mother of Alexander the great. The Greeks, disgusted at the cruelties of Olympias, revolted to Cassander, the son and successor of Antipater. Cassander, wanting dominion over Greece, killed Olympias; and soon after he shut up the young king Alexander, with his mother Roxana, in the castle of Amphipolis, under the charge of Glaucias, in the year of Nabonassar 432. The next year Ptolemy, Cassander and Lysimachus, by means of Seleucus, formed a league against Antigonus; and after certain wars they made peace with him in the year of Nabonassar 438, on these terms: Cassander would command the forces of Europe until Alexander the son of Roxana came of age; Lysimachus would govern Thrace, Ptolemy Egypt and Lybia, and Antigonus all Asia. The year before, Seleucus had taken possession of Mesopotamia, Babylonia, Sustana and Media. About three years after Alexander's death, Antipater made him governor of Babylon; then Antigonus expelled him; but now he recovered and enlarged his government over a great part of the East. This led to a new era, called the Era of Seleucidarum. Not long after the peace with Antigonus—Diodorus says in the same Olympic year—Cassander saw that Alexander the son of Roxana was growing up, and that talk ran all through Macedonia that he should be set free and take up the government of his father's kingdom. So Cassander ordered Glaucias, the governor of the castle, to kill Roxana and the young king Alexander her son, and to hide their deaths. Then Polyperchon set up Hercules, the son of Alexander the great by Barsinè, as king; and soon after, at the request of Cassander, had him killed. Soon after that, Demetrius the son of Antigonus won a great victory at sea over Ptolemy. Antigonus then took the title of king himself and gave the same title to his son. This was in the year of Nabonassar 441. Following his example, Seleucus, Cassander, Lysimachus and Ptolemy took on the title and dignity of kings. They had stayed away from this honor while any of Alexander's race remained to inherit the crown. In this way the monarchy of the Greeks, for lack of an heir, broke up into several kingdoms. Four of them, set at the four winds of heaven, were very prominent: Ptolemy ruled Egypt, Lybia and Ethiopia; Antigonus Syria and the lesser Asia; Lysimachus Thrace; and Cassander Macedon, Greece and Epirus, as above.

Seleucus at this time reigned over the nations beyond the Euphrates, which belonged to the bodies of the two first Beasts. After six years he conquered Antigonus and so gained one of the four kingdoms. For Cassander, afraid of the power of Antigonus, joined with Lysimachus, Ptolemy and Seleucus against him; and while Lysimachus invaded the parts of Asia next to the Hellespont, Ptolemy subdued Phoenicia and Coelosyria, along with the sea coasts of Asia.

Seleucus came down with a powerful army into Cappadocia. He joined the confederate forces, fought Antigonus in Phrygia, killed him, and seized his kingdom, in the year of Nabonassar 447. After that, Seleucus built Antioch, Seleucia, Laodicea, Apamea, Berrhæa, Edessa, and other cities in Syria and Asia. In them he granted the Jews the same privileges as the Greeks.

Demetrius the son of Antigonus kept only a small part of his father's dominions, and in time lost Cyprus to Ptolemy. Later he killed Alexander, the son and successor of Cassander king of Macedon, and seized his kingdom, in the year of Nabonassar 454. Sometime after, he prepared a very great army to recover his father's dominions in Asia. Seleucus, Ptolemy, Lysimachus and Pyrrhus king of Epirus joined together against him. Pyrrhus invaded Macedon, undermined the army of Demetrius, put him to flight, seized his kingdom, and shared it with Lysimachus. After seven months, Lysimachus beat Pyrrhus, took Macedon from him, and held it five years and a half, uniting the kingdoms of Macedon and Thrace. In his wars with Antigonus and Demetrius, Lysimachus had taken from them Caria, Lydia, and Phrygia. He had a treasury in Pergamus and a castle on the top of a conical hill in Phrygia, by the river Caicus. He entrusted the custody of it to one Philetærus, who was at first faithful to him but revolted in the last year of his reign. Lysimachus, at the instigation of his wife Arsinoe, first killed his own son Agathocles and then several others who mourned him. The wife of Agathocles fled with her children and brothers and some other friends, and urged Seleucus to make war on Lysimachus. Philetærus also, grieved at the death of Agathocles and accused of it by Arsinoe, took up arms and sided with Seleucus. On this occasion Seleucus and Lysimachus met and fought in Phrygia. Lysimachus was killed in the battle and lost his kingdom to Seleucus, in the year of Nabonassar 465. In this way the Empire of the Greeks, which at first broke into four kingdoms, was now reduced to two notable ones. Daniel from then on calls them the kings of the South and North. Ptolemy now reigned over Egypt, Lybia, Ethiopia, Arabia, Phoenicia, Coelosyria, and Cyprus. Seleucus had united three of the four kingdoms, and his dominion was hardly less than that of the Persian Empire conquered by Alexander the great. All of this is thus represented by Daniel:2 And the king of the South [Ptolemy] will be strong, and one of his Princes [Seleucus, one of Alexander's Princes] will be strong above him and have dominion; his dominion will be a great dominion.

After Seleucus had reigned seven months over Macedon, Greece, Thrace, Asia, Syria, Babylonia, Media, and all the East as far as India, Ptolemy Ceraunus—the younger brother of Ptolemy Philadelphus king of Egypt—killed him treacherously and seized his dominions in Europe. Antiochus Soter, the son of Seleucus, succeeded his father in Asia, Syria, and most of the East. After nineteen or twenty years his son Antiochus Theos succeeded him. He had a lasting war with Ptolemy Philadelphus and at last settled it by marrying Berenice, the daughter of Philadelphus. But after a reign of fifteen years, his first wife Laodice poisoned him and set her son Seleucus Callinicus on the throne. At the start of his reign Callinicus, pushed by his mother Laodice, besieged Berenice in Daphne near Antioch and killed her with her young son and many of her women. In response, Ptolemy Euergetes, the son and successor of Philadelphus, made war on Callinicus. He took from him Phoenicia, Syria, Cilicia, Mesopotamia, Babylonia, Sustana, and some other regions; and carried back into Egypt 40000 talents of silver and 2500 images of the Gods, among which were the Gods of Egypt that Cambyses had carried away. Antiochus Hierax first helped his brother Callinicus, but later contested with him for Asia. Meanwhile Eumenes, governor of Pergamus, beat Antiochus and took from them both all Asia west of mount Taurus. This was in the fifth year of Callinicus, who after 20 inglorious years was succeeded by his son Seleucus Ceraunus. Euergetes, after four years more, in the year of Nabonassar 527, was succeeded by his son Ptolemy Philopator. All of this is thus signified by Daniel:3 And at the end of years they [the kings of the South and North] will join themselves together: for the king's daughter of the South [Berenice] will come to the king of the North to make an agreement, but she will not keep the power of the arm; she will not stand, nor her seed, but she will be given up, and he [Callinicus] who brought her, and he whom she brought forth, and those who strengthened her in [those] times, [or defended her in the siege of Daphne.] But out of a branch of her roots one will stand up in his seat [her brother Euergetes], who will come with an army and enter the fortress [or fenced cities] of the king of the North, and act against them and prevail. He will carry captives into Egypt, their Gods with their Princes and precious vessels of silver and gold; and he will outlast the king of the North for some years.

Seleucus Ceraunus inherited what was left of his father's kingdom and thought to recover the rest. He raised a great army against the governor of Pergamus, who was by then King of Pergamus, but died in the third year of his reign. His brother and successor Antiochus Magnus went on with the war. He took almost all the lesser Asia from the King of Pergamus and also recovered the provinces of Media, Persia and Babylonia from the governors who had revolted. In the fifth year of his reign he invaded Coelosyria and, with little opposition, took possession of a good part of it. The next year he returned to invade the rest of Coelosyria and Phoenicia, and beat the army of Ptolemy Philopator near Berytus. He then invaded Pafor fear thatine and the neighboring parts of Arabia. In the third year he came back with an army of 78000. But Ptolemy came out of Egypt with an army of 75000, fought him and routed him at Raphia near Gaza, between Pafor fear thatine and Egypt; and recovered all Phoenicia and Coelosyria, in the year of Nabonassar 532. Puffed up by this victory and living in every kind of luxury, he saw the Egyptians revolt and fight him, but they were beaten; in the fighting sixty thousand Egyptian Jews were killed. All of this is thus described by Daniel:4 But his sons [Seleucus Ceraunus, and Antiochus Magnus, the sons of Callinicus] will be stirred up and gather a great army; and he [Antiochus Magnus] will come effectively and overflow, pass through, and return, and [again the next year] be stirred up [marching even] to his fortress, [the frontier towns of Egypt;] and the King of the South will be moved with anger and come out [the third year] and fight with him, the King of the North; and he [the King of the North] will lead out a great multitude, but the multitude will be given into his hand. Once the multitude is carried off, his heart will be lifted up and he will bring down many tens of thousands; but he will not be strengthened by it: for the king of the North will return, etc.

About twelve years after the battle between Philopator and Antiochus, Philopator died. He left his kingdom to his young son Ptolemy Epiphanes, a child of five years old. Then Antiochus Magnus made a treaty with Philip king of Macedon, that each would invade the parts of Epiphanes' dominions that lay next to him. This led to a shifting war between Antiochus and Epiphanes, each of them taking Phoenicia and Coelosyria in turn; and those countries were badly hurt by both sides. First Antiochus seized them. Then a man called Scopas, sent with the army of Egypt, recovered them from Antiochus. The next year, in the year of Nabonassar 550, Antiochus fought and routed Scopas near the fountains of Jordan, besieged him in Sidon, took the city, and recovered Syria and Phoenicia from Egypt, the Jews coming over to him on their own. About three years later, preparing for a war against the Romans, he came to Raphia on the borders of Egypt. He made peace with Epiphanes and gave him his daughter Cleopatra. The following autumn he crossed the Hellespont to invade the cities of Greece under Roman protection, and took some of them; but the Romans beat him the next summer and forced him to return to Asia with his army. Before the end of the year the fleet of Antiochus was beaten by the fleet of the Romans near Phocæa. At the same time Epiphanes and Cleopatra sent an embassy to Rome to congratulate the Romans on their success against their father Antiochus, and to urge them to carry the war against him into Asia. The Romans beat Antiochus again at sea near Ephesus, brought their army across the Hellespont, and won a great victory over him on land. They took from him all Asia west of mount Taurus and gave it to the King of Pergamus, who had helped them in the war; and they laid a heavy tribute on Antiochus. In this way the King of Pergamus, by Roman power, recovered what Antiochus had taken from him. Antiochus withdrew into the rest of his kingdom and was killed two years later by the Persians, as he was robbing the Temple of Jupiter Belus in Elymais to raise money for the Romans. All of this is thus described by Daniel.5 For the King of the North [Antiochus] will return and set out a multitude greater than the former; and he will certainly come, after certain years, with a great army and much riches. In those times many will stand up against the King of the South, [particularly the Macedonians;] and the robbers of your people [the Samaritans, etc.] will raise themselves up to establish the vision, but they will fall. So the King of the North will come, build a ramp, and take the most fortified cities; and the forces of the South will not withstand him, nor his chosen people, and there will be no strength to withstand him. But the one who comes against him will do as he wishes, and no one will stand before him. He will stand in the glorious land, and it will fail in his hand. He will also set his face to go with the strength [or army] of all his kingdom, and make an agreement with him [at Raphia;] and he will give him the daughter of women, corrupting her; but she will not stand by his side, nor be for him. After this he will turn his face toward the islands, and will take many; but a Prince for his own behalf [the Romans] will make the reproach that he offered cease; without his own reproach he will turn it back upon him. Then he will turn his face toward the fort of his own land; but he will stumble and fall, and not be found.

Part I, Chapter 12, 2

Seleucus Philopator succeeded his father Antiochus, Anno Nabonass. 561, and reigned twelve years, but did nothing memorable, being sluggish, and intent upon raising money for the Romans to whom he was tributary. He was slain by Heliodorus, whom he had sent to rob the Temple of Jerusalem. Daniel thus describes his reign.6 Then shall stand up in his estate a raiser of taxes in the glory of the kingdom, but within few days be shall be destroyed, neither in anger nor in battle.

A little before the death of Philopator, his son Demetrius was sent hostage to Rome, in the place of Antiochus Epiphanes, the brother of Philopator; and Antiochus was at Athens in his way home from Rome, when Philopator died: whereupon Heliodorus the treasurer of the kingdom, stept into the throne. But Antiochus so managed his affairs, that the Romans kept Demetrius at Rome; and their ally the King of Pergamus expelled Heliodorus, and placed Antiochus in the throne, while Demetrius the right heir remained an hostage at Rome. Antiochus being thus made King by the friendship of the King of Pergamus reigned powerfully over Syria and the neighbouring nations: but carried himself much below his dignity, stealing privately out of his palace, rambling up and down the city in disguise with one or two of his companions; conversing and drinking with people of the lowest rank, foreigners and strangers; frequenting the meetings of dissolute persons to feast and revel; clothing himself like the Roman candidates and officers, acting their parts like a mimick, and in publick festivals jesting and dancing with servants and light people, exposing himself by all manner of ridiculous gestures. This conduct made some take him for a madman, and call him Antiochus [Greek: Epimenês]. In the first year of his reign he deposed Onias the high-Priest, and sold the high-Priesthood to Jason the younger brother of Onias: for Jason had promised to give him 440 talents of silver for that office, and 15 more for a licence to erect a place of exercise for the training up of youth in the fashions of the heathen; which licence was granted by the King, and put in execution by Jason. Then the King sending one Apollonius into Egypt to the coronation of Ptolemy Philometor, the young son of Philometor and Cleopatra, and knowing Philometor not to be well affected to his affairs in Phoenicia, provided for his own safety in those parts; and for that end came to Joppa and Jerusalem, where he was honourably received; from thence he went in like manner with his little army to the cities of Phoenicia, to establish himself against Egypt, by courting the people, and distributing extraordinary favours amongst them. All which is thus represented by Daniel.7 And in his [Philometor's] estate shall stand up a vile person, to whom they [the Syrians who set up Heliodorus] shall not give the honour of the kingdom. Yet he shall come in peaceably, and obtain the kingdom by flatteries [made principally to the King of Pergamus;] and the arms [which in favour of Heliodorus oppose him] shall be overflowed with a food from before him, and be broken; yea also [Onias the high-Priest] the Prince of the covenant. And after the league made with him, [the King of Egypt, by sending Apollonius to his coronation] he shall work deceitfully [against the King of Egypt,] for he shall come up and shall become strong [in Phoenicia ] with a small people. And he shall enter into the quiet and plentiful cities of the Province [of Phoenicia;] and [to ingratiate himself with the Jews of Phoenicia and Egypt, and with their friends] he shall do that which his fathers have not done, nor his fathers fathers: he shall scatter among them the prey and the spoil, and the riches [exacted from other places;] and shall forecast his devices against the strong holds [of Egypt] even for a time.

These things were done in the first year of his reign, An. Nabonass. 573. And thenceforward he forecast his devices against the strong holds of Egypt, until the sixth year. For three years after, that is in the fourth year of his reign, Menelaus bought the high-Priesthood from Jason, but not paying the price was sent for by the King; and the King, before he could hear the cause, went into Cilicia to appease a sedition there, and left Andronicus his deputy at Antioch; in the mean time the brother of Menelaus, to make up the money, conveyed several vessels out of the Temple, selling some of them at Tyre, and sending others to Andronicus. When Menelaus was reproved for this by Onias, he caused Onias to be slain by Andronicus: for which fact the King at his return from Cilicia caused Andronicus to be put to death. Then Antiochus prepared his second expedition against Egypt, which he performed in the sixth year of his reign, An. Nabonass. 578: for upon the death of Cleopatra, the governors of her son the young King of Egypt claimed Phoenicia and Coelosyria from him as her dowry; and to recover those countries raised a great army. Antiochus considering that his father had not quitted the possession of those countries8, denied they were her dowry; and with another great army met and fought the Egyptians on the borders of Egypt, between Pelusium and the mountain Casius. He there beat them, and might have destroyed their whole army, but that he rode up and down, commanding his soldiers not to kill them, but to take them alive: by which humanity he gained Pelusium, and soon after all Egypt; entring it with a vast multitude of foot and chariots, elephants and horsemen, and a great navy. Then seizing the cities of Egypt as a friend, he marched to Memphis, laid the whole blame of the war upon Eulæus the King's governor, entred into outward friendship with the young King, and took upon him to order the affairs of the kingdom. While Aniochus was thus employ'd, a report being spread in Phoenicia that he was dead, Jason to recover the high-Priesthood assaulted Jerusalem with above a thousand men, and took the city: hereupon the King thinking Judea had revolted, came out of Egypt in a furious manner, re-took the city, slew forty thousand of the people, made as many prisoners, and sold them to raise money; went into the Temple, spoiled it of its treasures, ornaments, utensils, and vessels of gold and silver, amounting to 1800 talents; and carried all away to Antioch. This was done in the year of Nabonassar 578, and is thus described by Daniel.9 And he shall stir up his power, and his courage against the King of the South with a great army; and the King of the South shall be stirrd up to battle with a very great and mighty army; but he shall not stand: for they, even Antiochus and his friends, shall forecast devices against him, as is represented above; yea, they that feed of the portion of his meat, shall betray and destroy him, and his army shall be overthrown, and many shall fall down slain. And both these Kings hearts shall be to do mischief; and they, being now made friends, shall speak lyes at one table, against the Jews and against the holy covenant; but it shall not prosper: for yet the end, in which the setting up of the abomination of desolation is to prosper, shall be at the time appointed. Then shall he return into his land with great riches, and his heart shall be against the holy covenant; and he shall act, against it by spoiling the Temple, and return into his own land.

The Egyptians of Alexandria seeing Philometor first educated in luxury by the Eunuch Eulæus, and now in the hands of Antiochus, gave the kingdom to Euergetes, the younger brother of Philometor. Whereupon Antiochus pretending to restore Philometor, made war upon Euergetes; beat him at sea, and besieged him and his sister Cleopatra in Alexandria: while the besieged Princes sent to Rome to implore the assistance of the Senate. Antiochus finding himself unable to take the city that year, returned into Syria, leaving Philometor at Memphis to govern Egypt in his absence. But Philometor made friendship with his brother that winter; and Antiochus, returning the next spring An. Nabonass. 580, to besiege both the brothers in Alexandria, was met in the way by the Roman Ambassadors, Popilius Læna, C. Decimius, and C. Hostilius: he offered them his hand to kiss, but Popilius delivering to him the tables wherein the message of the Senate was written, bad him read those first. When he had read them, he replied he would consider with his friends what was fit to be done; but Popilius drawing a circle about him, bad him answer before he went out of it: Antiochus, astonished at this blunt and unusual imperiousness, made answer he would do what the Romans demanded; and then Popilius gave the King his hand to kiss, and he returned out of Egypt. The same year, An. Nabonass. 580, his captains by his order spoiled and slaughtered the Jews, profaned the Temple, set up the worship of the heathen Gods in all Judea, and began to persecute and make war upon those who would not worship them: which actions are thus described by Daniel.10 At the time appointed he shall come again towards the South, but the latter shall not be as the former. For the ships of Chittim shall come, with an embassy from Rome, against him. Therefore he shall be grieved, and return, and have indignation against the holy covenant. So shall he do; he shall even return, and have intelligence with them that forsake the holy covenant.

In the same year that Antiochus by the command of the Romans retired out of Egypt, and set up the worship of the Greeks in Judea; the Romans conquered the kingdom of Macedon, the fundamental kingdom of the Empire of the Greeks, and reduced it into a Roman Province; and thereby began to put an end to the reign of Daniel's third Beast. This is thus exprest by Daniel. And after him Arms, that is the Romans, shall stand up. As [Hebrew: MMLK] signifies after the King, Dan. xi. 8; so [Hebrew: MMNW] may signify after him. Arms are every where in this Prophecy of Daniel put for the military power of a kingdom: and they stand up when they conquer and grow powerful. Hitherto Daniel described the actions of the Kings of the North and South; but upon the conquest of Macedon by the Romans, he left off describing the actions of the Greeks, and began to describe those of the Romans in Greece. They conquered Macedon, Illyricum and Epirus, in the year of Nabonassar 580. 35 years after, by the last will and testament of Attalus the last King of Pergamus, they inherited that rich and flourishing kingdom, that is, all Asia westward of mount Taurus; 69 years after they conquered the kingdom of Syria, and reduced it into a Province, and 34 years after they did the like to Egypt. By all these steps the Roman Arms stood up over the Greeks: and after 95 years more, by making war upon the Jews, they polluted the sanctuary of strength, and took away the daily sacrifice, and then placed the abomination of desolation. For this abomination was placed after the days of Christ, Math. xxiv. 15. In the 16th year of the Emperor Adrian, A.C. 132, they placed this abomination by building a Temple to Jupiter Capitolinus, where the Temple of God in Jerusalem had stood. Thereupon the Jews under the conduct of Barchochab rose up in arms against the Romans, and in the war had 50 cities demolished, 985 of their best towns destroyed, and 580000 men slain by the sword; and in the end of the war, A.C. 136, were banished Judea upon pain of death, and thenceforward the land remained desolate of its old inhabitants.

In the beginning of the Jewish war in Nero's reign, the Apostles fled out of Judea with their flocks; some beyond Jordan to Pella and other places, some into Egypt, Syria, Mesopotamia, Asia minor, and elsewhere. Peter and John came into Asia, and Peter went thence by Corinth to Rome; but John staying in Asia, was banished by the Romans into Patmos, as the head of a party of the Jews, whose nation was in war with the Romans. By this dispersion of the Christian Jews, the Christian religion, which was already propagated westward as far as Rome, spred fast into all the Roman Empire, and suffered many persecutions under it till the days of Constantine the great and his sons: all which is thus described by Daniel.11 And such as do wickedly against the covenant, shall he, who places the abomination, cause to dissemble, and worship the heathen Gods; but the people among them who do know their God, shall be strong and act. And they that understand among the people, shall instruct many: yet they shall fall by the sword, and by flame, and by captivity, and by spoil many days. Now when they shall fall, they shall be holpen with a little help, viz. in the reign of Constantine the great; and at that time by reason of their prosperity, many shall come over to them from among the heathen, and cleave to them with dissimulation. But of those of understanding there shall still fall to try God's people by them and to purge them from the dissemblers, and to make them white even to the time of the end: because it is yet for a time appointed.

Hitherto the Roman Empire continued entire; and under this dominion, the little horn of the He-Goat continued mighty, but not by his own power. But now, by the building of Constantinople, and endowing it with a Senate and other like privileges with Rome; and by the division of the Roman Empire into the two Empires of the Greeks and Latins, headed by those two cities; a new scene of things commences, in which which12 a King, the Empire of the Greeks, doth according to his will, and, by setting his own laws above the laws of God, exalts and magnifies himself above every God, and speaks marvellous things against the God of Gods, and shall prosper till the indignation be accomplished.--Neither shall he regard the God of his fathers, nor the lawful desire of women in matrimony, nor any God, but shall magnify himself above all. And in his seat he shall honour Mahuzzims, that is, strong guardians, the souls of the dead; even with a God whom his fathers knew not shall he honour them, in their Temples, with gold and silver, and with precious stones and valuable things. All which relates to the overspreading of the Greek Empire with Monks and Nuns, who placed holiness in abstinence from marriage; and to the invocation of saints and veneration of their reliques, and such like superstitions, which these men introduced in the fourth and fifth centuries.13 And at the time of the end the King of the South, or the Empire of the Saracens, shall push at him; and the King of the North, or Empire of the Turks, shall come against him like a whirlwind, with chariots and with horsemen, and with many ships; and be shall enter into the countries of the Greeks, and shall overflow and pass over. He shall enter also into the glorious land, and many countries shall be overthrown; but these shall escape out of his hand, even Edom and Moab, and the chief of the children Ammon: that is, those to whom his Caravans pay tribute. He shall stretch forth his hand also upon the countries, and the land of Egypt shall not escape; but he shall have power over the treasures of gold and silver, and over all the precious things of Egypt; and the Lybians and Ethiopians shall be at his steps. All these nations compose the Empire of the Turks, and therefore this Empire is here to be understood by the King of the North. They compose also the body of the He-Goat; and therefore the Goat still reigns in his last horn, but not by his own power.

Notes to Chap. XII.

1 Chap. xi. 2, 3, 4.

2 Chap. xi. 5.

3 Chap. xi. 6, 7, 8.

4 Chap. xi. 10, &c.

5 Chap. xi. 13-19.

6 Chap. xi. 20.

7 Chap. xi. 21, &c.

8 2 Maccab. iii. 5, 8. & iv. 4.

9 Chap. xi. 25, &c.

10 Chap. xi. 29, 30.

11 Chap. xi. 32, &c.

12 Chap. xi. 36, &c.

13 Chap. xi. 40, &c.

Seleucus Philopator succeeded his father Antiochus in the year of Nabonassar 561 and reigned twelve years. He did nothing memorable: he was lazy, and set on raising money for the Romans, to whom he paid tribute. He was killed by Heliodorus, whom he had sent to rob the Temple of Jerusalem. Daniel describes his reign like this.6 In his place a man who raises taxes shall stand up in the glorious kingdom, but within a few days he shall be destroyed, not in anger and not in battle.

A little before Philopator died, his son Demetrius was sent to Rome as a hostage in place of Antiochus Epiphanes, the brother of Philopator; and Antiochus was at Athens on his way home from Rome when Philopator died. Then Heliodorus, the treasurer of the kingdom, took the throne. But Antiochus managed things so that the Romans kept Demetrius at Rome, and their ally the King of Pergamus drove Heliodorus out and set Antiochus on the throne, while Demetrius, the rightful heir, remained a hostage at Rome. Antiochus, made King this way by the friendship of the King of Pergamus, ruled powerfully over Syria and the neighboring nations. But he carried himself far below his dignity: he slipped secretly out of his palace, wandered around the city in disguise with one or two companions, ate and drank with people of the lowest rank, foreigners and strangers, joined the gatherings of dissolute people to feast and revel, dressed himself like Roman candidates and officers, played their parts like an actor, and at public festivals joked and danced with servants and low company, making himself ridiculous with every kind of gesture. This behavior made some people take him for a madman and call him Antiochus [Greek: Epimenês]. In the first year of his reign he removed Onias the high priest and sold the high priesthood to Jason, the younger brother of Onias: for Jason had promised to give him 440 talents of silver for that office, and 15 more for a license to build a place of exercise for training young men in the fashions of the heathen; the King granted the license, and Jason put it into effect. Then the King sent a man named Apollonius to Egypt for the coronation of Ptolemy Philometor, the young son of Philometor and Cleopatra; and knowing that Philometor was not well disposed toward his interests in Phoenicia, he looked after his own safety in those parts, and to that end came to Joppa and Jerusalem, where he was honorably received. From there he went in the same way with his little army to the cities of Phoenicia, to secure himself against Egypt by courting the people and handing out extraordinary favors among them. All of this is represented by Daniel.7 In his [Philometor's] place a vile person shall stand up, and they [the Syrians who set up Heliodorus] shall not give him the honor of the kingdom. Yet he shall come in peaceably and win the kingdom by flattery [made mainly to the King of Pergamus;] and the arms [which in favor of Heliodorus oppose him] shall be swept away by a flood from before him and be broken; yes, and also [Onias the high priest] the Prince of the covenant. And after the league made with him, [the King of Egypt, by sending Apollonius to his coronation] he shall work deceitfully [against the King of Egypt,] for he shall come up and become strong [in Phoenicia] with few people. And he shall enter the quiet and plentiful cities of the Province [of Phoenicia;] and [to win over the Jews of Phoenicia and Egypt, and their friends] he shall do what his fathers have not done, nor his fathers' fathers: he shall scatter among them the prey and the spoil, and the riches [taken from other places;] and he shall plan his schemes against the strongholds [of Egypt] even for a time.

These things were done in the first year of his reign, in the year of Nabonassar 573. From then on he planned his schemes against the strongholds of Egypt until the sixth year. Three years later, that is, in the fourth year of his reign, Menelaus bought the high priesthood from Jason; but he did not pay the price, and the King sent for him. The King, before he could hear the case, went into Cilicia to put down a rebellion there, and left Andronicus as his deputy at Antioch. In the meantime the brother of Menelaus, to make up the money, carried several vessels out of the Temple, selling some of them at Tyre and sending others to Andronicus. When Menelaus was called to account for this by Onias, he had Onias killed by Andronicus; for this deed the King, on his return from Cilicia, had Andronicus put to death. Then Antiochus prepared his second expedition against Egypt, which he carried out in the sixth year of his reign, in the year of Nabonassar 578: for when Cleopatra died, the guardians of her son, the young King of Egypt, claimed Phoenicia and Coelosyria from him as her dowry, and raised a great army to recover those countries. Antiochus, considering that his father had never given up possession of those countries8, denied that they were her dowry; and with another great army he met and fought the Egyptians on the borders of Egypt, between Pelusium and Mount Casius. He defeated them there, and could have destroyed their whole army, except that he rode up and down, commanding his soldiers not to kill them but to take them alive. By this mercy he gained Pelusium, and soon after all Egypt, entering it with a huge force of foot soldiers and chariots, elephants and horsemen, and a great fleet. Then he seized the cities of Egypt as a friend, marched to Memphis, laid the whole blame of the war on Eulæus, the King's governor, entered into outward friendship with the young King, and took it upon himself to manage the affairs of the kingdom. While Antiochus was thus occupied, a report spread through Phoenicia that he was dead. Jason, to get the high priesthood back, attacked Jerusalem with more than a thousand men and took the city. When the King heard of it, thinking that Judea had revolted, he came out of Egypt in a fury, recaptured the city, killed forty thousand of the people, took as many prisoners, and sold them to raise money. He went into the Temple and stripped it of its treasures, ornaments, utensils, and gold and silver vessels, amounting to 1800 talents, and carried it all away to Antioch. This was done in the year of Nabonassar 578, and Daniel describes it like this.9 And he shall stir up his power and his courage against the King of the South with a great army; and the King of the South shall be stirred up to battle with a very great and mighty army; but he shall not stand: for they, even Antiochus and his friends, shall plan against him, as shown above; yes, those who share his food shall betray and destroy him, and his army shall be thrown down, and many shall fall killed. And both these kings' hearts shall be set on doing harm; and they, now made friends, shall speak lies at one table against the Jews and against the holy covenant; but it shall not succeed: for the end, at which the abomination of desolation is to succeed, shall come at the appointed time. Then he shall return to his land with great riches, and his heart will be against the holy covenant; and he shall act against it by stripping the Temple, and shall return to his own land.

The Egyptians of Alexandria, seeing that Philometor had first been raised in luxury by the eunuch Eulæus and was now in the hands of Antiochus, gave the kingdom to Euergetes, the younger brother of Philometor. Antiochus then pretended to restore Philometor and made war on Euergetes: he beat him at sea and besieged him and his sister Cleopatra in Alexandria, while the besieged princes sent to Rome to beg the Senate for help. Antiochus, finding that he could not take the city that year, returned to Syria, leaving Philometor at Memphis to govern Egypt in his absence. But Philometor made peace with his brother that winter; and Antiochus, returning the next spring in the year of Nabonassar 580 to besiege both brothers in Alexandria, was met on the way by the Roman ambassadors, Popilius Læna, C. Decimius, and C. Hostilius. He offered them his hand to kiss, but Popilius handed him the tablets on which the Senate's message was written and told him to read those first. When he had read them, Antiochus replied that he would talk over with his friends what was fit to do; but Popilius drew a circle around him and told him to answer before he stepped out of it. Amazed at this blunt and unusual show of authority, Antiochus answered that he would do what the Romans demanded; and then Popilius gave the King his hand to kiss, and he withdrew from Egypt. That same year, in the year of Nabonassar 580, his captains, on his order, plundered and slaughtered the Jews, profaned the Temple, set up the worship of the heathen gods in all Judea, and began to persecute and make war on those who would not worship them. Daniel describes these actions like this.10 At the time appointed he shall come again toward the South, but the latter shall not be as the former. For the ships of Chittim shall come, with an embassy from Rome, against him. Therefore he shall be grieved, and return, and be angry at the holy covenant. So he shall do; he shall indeed return, and deal with those who forsake the holy covenant.

In the same year that Antiochus withdrew from Egypt by the Romans' command and set up the worship of the Greeks in Judea, the Romans conquered the kingdom of Macedon, the foundation kingdom of the Empire of the Greeks, and reduced it to a Roman province; and by that they began to bring the reign of Daniel's third Beast to an end. Daniel expresses it like this: And after him Arms, that is the Romans, shall stand up. As [Hebrew: MMLK] means after the King, Dan. xi. 8; so [Hebrew: MMNW] may mean after him. Arms stand everywhere in this Prophecy of Daniel for the military power of a kingdom; and they stand up when they conquer and grow powerful. Until now Daniel described the actions of the Kings of the North and South; but when the Romans conquered Macedon, he stopped describing the actions of the Greeks and began to describe the actions of the Romans in Greece. They conquered Macedon, Illyricum and Epirus in the year of Nabonassar 580. 35 years later, by the last will and testament of Attalus the last King of Pergamus, they inherited that rich and flourishing kingdom, that is, all Asia west of Mount Taurus; 69 years later they conquered the kingdom of Syria and reduced it to a province, and 34 years later they did the same to Egypt. By all these steps the Roman Arms stood up over the Greeks; and 95 years after that, by making war on the Jews, they polluted the sanctuary of strength, took away the daily sacrifice, and then set up the abomination of desolation. For this abomination was set up after the days of Christ, Math. xxiv. 15. In the 16th year of the Emperor Adrian, A.C. 132, they set up this abomination by building a Temple to Jupiter Capitolinus where the Temple of God in Jerusalem had stood. Thereupon the Jews, under the leadership of Barchochab, rose in arms against the Romans; and in the war 50 cities were demolished, 985 of their best towns destroyed, and 580000 men killed by the sword; and at the end of the war, A.C. 136, they were banished from Judea on pain of death, and from then on the land lay desolate of its old inhabitants.

At the beginning of the Jewish war in Nero's reign, the Apostles fled out of Judea with their flocks; some beyond Jordan to Pella and other places, some into Egypt, Syria, Mesopotamia, Asia Minor, and elsewhere. Peter and John came into Asia, and Peter went from there by way of Corinth to Rome; but John, staying in Asia, was banished by the Romans to Patmos as the leader of a party of the Jews, whose nation was at war with the Romans. Through this scattering of the Christian Jews, the Christian religion, which had already spread westward as far as Rome, spread fast through the whole Roman Empire, and suffered many persecutions under it until the days of Constantine the great and his sons. Daniel describes all of it like this.11 And those who do wickedly against the covenant shall he who sets up the abomination cause to pretend, and to worship the heathen gods; but the people among them who do know their God shall be strong and act. And those who understand among the people shall teach many; yet they shall fall by the sword, and by flame, and by captivity, and by plunder for many days. Now when they fall they shall be helped with a little help, namely in the reign of Constantine the great; and at that time, because of their prosperity, many shall come over to them from among the heathen and join them in pretense. But some of those of understanding shall still fall, to test God's people through them and to purge them of the pretenders, and to make them white until the time of the end; because it is still for an appointed time.

Until now the Roman Empire had remained whole; and under this rule the little horn of the He-Goat stayed mighty, but not by his own power. But now, with the building of Constantinople and the granting of it a Senate and other privileges like Rome's, and with the division of the Roman Empire into the two Empires of the Greeks and Latins, headed by those two cities, a new scene of things begins. In it12 a King, the Empire of the Greeks, does as he will; and, by setting his own laws above the laws of God, he raises and magnifies himself above every God, and speaks marvelous things against the God of Gods, and shall prosper until the indignation is accomplished. Neither shall he regard the God of his fathers, nor the lawful desire of women in marriage, nor any God, but shall magnify himself above all. And in his seat he shall honor Mahuzzims, that is, strong guardians, the souls of the dead; even with a God whom his fathers did not know shall he honor them, in their Temples, with gold and silver, and with precious stones and valuable things. All of this relates to the overspreading of the Greek Empire with Monks and Nuns, who placed holiness in abstinence from marriage; and to the invocation of saints and the veneration of their relics, and similar superstitions, which these men introduced in the fourth and fifth centuries.13 And at the time of the end the King of the South, or the Empire of the Saracens, shall push at him; and the King of the North, or the Empire of the Turks, shall come against him like a whirlwind, with chariots and with horsemen, and with many ships; and he shall enter the countries of the Greeks, and shall overflow and pass over. He shall also enter the glorious land, and many countries shall be overthrown; but these shall escape out of his hand: even Edom and Moab, and the chief of the children of Ammon, that is, those to whom his Caravans pay tribute. He shall also stretch out his hand over the countries, and the land of Egypt shall not escape; but he shall have power over the treasures of gold and silver, and over all the precious things of Egypt; and the Libyans and Ethiopians shall be at his steps. All these nations make up the Empire of the Turks, and therefore this Empire is what is meant here by the King of the North. They also make up the body of the He-Goat; and so the Goat still reigns in his last horn, but not by his own power.

Notes to Chap. XII.

1 Chap. xi. 2, 3, 4.

2 Chap. xi. 5.

3 Chap. xi. 6, 7, 8.

4 Chap. xi. 10, etc.

5 Chap. xi. 13–19.

6 Chap. xi. 20.

7 Chap. xi. 21, etc.

8 2 Maccab. iii. 5, 8. & iv. 4.

9 Chap. xi. 25, etc.

10 Chap. xi. 29, 30.

11 Chap. xi. 32, etc.

12 Chap. xi. 36, etc.

13 Chap. xi. 40, etc.

Part I, Chapter 13

Of the King who did according to his will, and magnified himself above every God, and honoured Mahuzzims, and regarded not the desire of women.

In the first ages of the Christian religion the Christians of every city were governed by a Council of Presbyters, and the President of the Council was the Bishop of the city. The Bishop and Presbyters of one city meddled not with the affairs of another city, except by admonitory letters or messages. Nor did the Bishops of several cities meet together in Council before the time of the Emperor Commodus: for they could not meet together without the leave of the Roman governors of the Provinces. But in the days of that Emperor they began to meet in Provincial Councils, by the leave of the governors; first in Asia, in opposition to the Cataphrygian Heresy, and soon after in other places and upon other occasions. The Bishop of the chief city, or Metropolis of the Roman Province, was usually made President of the Council; and hence came the authority of Metropolitan Bishops above that of other Bishops within the same Province. Hence also it was that the Bishop of Rome in Cyprian's days called himself the Bishop of Bishops. As soon as the Empire became Christian, the Roman Emperors began to call general Councils out of all the Provinces of the Empire; and by prescribing to them what points they should consider, and influencing them by their interest and power, they set up what party they pleased. Hereby the Greek Empire, upon the division of the Roman Empire into the Greek and Latin Empires, became the King who, in matters of religion, did according to his will; and, in legislature, exalted and magnified himself above every God: and at length, by the seventh general Council, established the worship of the images and souls of dead men, here called Mahuzzims.

The same King placed holiness in abstinence from marriage. Eusebius in his Ecclesiastical history1 tells us, that Musanus wrote a tract against those who fell away to the heresy of the Encratites, which was then newly risen, and had introduced pernicious errors; and that Tatian, the disciple of Justin, was the author thereof; and that Irenæus in his first book against heresies teaches this, writing of Tatian and his heresy in these words: A Saturnino & Marcione profecti qui vocantur Continentes, docuerunt non contrahendum esse matrimonium; reprobantes scilicet primitivum illud opificium Dei, & tacitè accusantes Deum qui masculum & fæminam condidit ad procreationem generis humani. Induxerunt etiam abstinentiam ab esu eorum quæ animalia appellant, ingratos se exhibentes ergo eum qui universa creavit Deum. Negant etiam primi hominis salutem. Atque hoc nuper apud illos excogitatum est, Tatiano quodam omnium primo hujus impietatis auctore: qui Justini auditor, quamdiu cum illo versatus est, nihil ejusmodi protulit. Post martyrium autem illius, ab Ecclesia se abrumpens, doctoris arrogantia elatus ac tumidus, tanquam præstantior cæteris, novam quandam formam doctrinæ conflavit: Æonas invisibiles commentus perinde ac Valentinus: asserens quoque cum Saturnino & Marcione, matrimonium nihil aliud esse quam corruptionem ac stuprum: nova præterea argumenta ad subvertendam Adami salutem excogitans. Hæc Irenæus de Hæresi quæ tunc viguit Encratitarum. Thus far Eusebius. But altho the followers of Tatian were at first condemned as hereticks by the name of Encratites, or Continentes; their principles could not be yet quite exploded: for Montanus refined upon them, and made only second marriages unlawful; he also introduced frequent fastings, and annual, fasting days, the keeping of Lent, and feeding upon dried meats. The Apostolici, about the middle of the third century, condemned marriage, and were a branch of the disciples of Tatian. The Hierocitæ in Egypt, in the latter end of the third century, also condemned marriage. Paul the Eremite fled into the wilderness from the persecution of Decius, and lived there a solitary life till the reign of Constantine the great, but made no disciples. Antony did the like in the persecution of Dioclesian, or a little before, and made disciples; and many others soon followed his example.

Hitherto the principles of the Encratites had been rejected by the Churches; but now being refined by the Monks, and imposed not upon all men, but only upon those who would voluntarily undertake a monastic life, they began to be admired, and to overflow first the Greek Church, and then the Latin also, like a torrent. Eusebius tells us,2 that Constantine the great had those men in the highest veneration, who dedicated themselves wholly to the divine philosophy; and that he almost venerated the most holy company of Virgins perpetually devoted to God; being certain that the God to whom he had consecrated himself did dwell in their minds. In his time and that of his sons, this profession of a single life was propagated in Egypt by Antony, and in Syria by Hilarion; and spred so fast, that soon after the time of Julian the Apostate a third part of the Egyptians were got into the desarts of Egypt. They lived first singly in cells, then associated into coenobia or convents; and at length came into towns, and filled the Churches with Bishops, Presbyters and Deacons. Athanasius in his younger days poured water upon the hands of his master Antony; and finding the Monks faithful to him, made many of them Bishops and Presbyters in Egypt: and these Bishops erected new Monasteries, out of which they chose Presbyters of their own cities, and sent Bishops to others. The like was done in Syria, the superstition being quickly propagated thither out of Egypt by Hilarion a disciple of Antony. Spiridion and Epiphanius of Cyprus, James of Nisibis, Cyril of Jerusalem, Eustathius of Sebastia in Armenia, Eusebius of Emisa, Titus of Bostra, Basilius of Ancyra, Acacius of Cæsarea in Palestine, Elpidius of Laodicea, Melitius and Flavian of Antioch, Theodorus of Tyre, Protogenes of Carrhæ, Acacius of Berrhæa, Theodotus of Hierapolis, Eusebius of Chalcedon, Amphilochius of Iconium, Gregory Nazianzen, Gregory Nyssen, and John Chrysostom of Constantinople, were both Bishops and Monks in the fourth century. Eustathius, Gregory Nazianzen, Gregory Nyssen, Basil, &c. had Monasteries of Clergymen in their cities, out of which Bishops were sent to other cities; who in like manner erected Monasteries there, till the Churches were supplied with Bishops out of these Monasteries. Hence Jerome, in a Letter written about the year 385,3 saith of the Clergy: Quasi & ipsi aliud sint quam Monachi, & non quicquid in Monachos dicitur redundet in Clericos qui patres sunt Monachorum. Detrimentum pecoris pastoris ignominia est. And in his book against Vigilantius: Quid facient Orientis Ecclesiæ? Quæ aut Virgines Clericos accipiunt, aut Continentes, aut si uxores habuerint mariti esse desistunt. Not long after even the Emperors commanded the Churches to chuse Clergymen out of the Monasteries by this Law.

Impp. Arcad & Honor. AA. Cæsario PF. P.

4 Si quos forte Episcopi deesse sibi Clericos arbitrantur, ex monachorum numero rectius ordinabunt: non obnoxios publicis privatisque rationibus cum invidia teneant, sed habeant jam probatos. Dat. vii. Kal. Aug. Honorio A. iv. & Eutychianio Coss. A.C. 598. The Greek Empire being now in the hands of these Encratites, and having them in great admiration, Daniel makes it a characteristick of the King who doth according to his will, that he should not regard the desire of Women.

Thus the Sect of the Encratites, set on foot by the Gnosticks, and propagated by Tatian and Montanus near the end of the second century; which was condemned by the Churches of that and the third century, and refined upon by their followers; overspread the Eastern Churches in the fourth century, and before the end of it began to overspread the Western. Henceforward the Christian Churches having a form of godliness, but denying the power thereof, came into the hands of the Encratites: and the Heathens, who in the fourth century came over in great numbers to the Christians, embraced more readily this sort of Christianity, as having a greater affinity with their old superstitions, than that of the sincere Christians; who by the lamps of the seven Churches of Asia, and not by the lamps of the Monasteries, had illuminated the Church Catholic during the three first centuries.

The Cataphrygians brought in also several other superstitions: such as were the doctrine of Ghosts, and of their punishment in Purgatory, with prayers and oblations for mitigating that punishment, as Tertullian teaches in his books De Anima and De Monogamia. They used also the sign of the cross as a charm. So Tertullian in his book de Corona militis: Ad omnem progressum atque promotum, ad omnem aditum & exitum, ad vestitum, ad calceatum, ad lavacra, ad mensas, ad lamina, ad cubilia, ad sedilia, quacunque nos conversatio exercet, frontem crucis signaculo terimus. All these superstitions the Apostle refers to, where he saith: Now the Spirit speaketh expresly, that in the latter times some shall depart from the faith, giving heed to seducing spirits, and doctrines of devils, the Dæmons and Ghosts worshipped by the heathens, speaking lyes in hypocrisy, about their apparitions, the miracles done by them, their reliques, and the sign of the cross, having consciences seared with a hot iron; forbidding to marry, and commanding to abstain from meats, &c. 1 Tim. iv. 1,2,3. From the Cataphrygians these principles and practices were propagated down to posterity. For the mystery of iniquity did already work in the Apostles days in the Gnosticks, continued to work very strongly in their offspring the Tatianists and Cataphrygians, and was to work till that man of sin should be revealed; whose coming is after the working of Satan, with all power and signs, and lying wonders, and all deceivableness of unrighteousness; coloured over with a form of Christian godliness, but without the power thereof, 2 Thess. ii. 7-10.

For tho some stop was put to the Cataphrygian Christianity, by Provincial Councils, till the fourth century; yet the Roman Emperors then turning Christians, and great multitudes of heathens coming over in outward profession, these found the Cataphrygian Christianity more suitable to their old principles, of placing religion in outward forms and ceremonies, holy-days, and doctrines of Ghosts, than the religion of the sincere Christians: wherefore they readily sided with the Cataphrygian Christians, and established that Christianity before the end of the fourth century. By this means those of understanding, after they had been persecuted by the heathen Emperors in the three first centuries, and were holpen with a little help, by the conversion of Constantine the great and his sons to the Christian religion, fell under new persecutions, to purge them from the dissemblers, and to make them white, even to the time of the end.

Notes to Chap. XIII.

1 Lib. 4. c. 28, 29.

2 In vita Constantini, l. 4. c. 28.

3 Epist. 10.

4 L. 32. de Episcopis.

Of the King who did according to his will, and magnified himself above every God, and honored Mahuzzims, and regarded not the desire of women.

In the early ages of the Christian religion the Christians of each city were governed by a Council of Presbyters, and the president of the Council was the Bishop of the city. The Bishop and Presbyters of one city did not interfere in the affairs of another city, except by letters or messages of warning. Nor did the Bishops of different cities meet in Council before the time of the Emperor Commodus, because they could not meet without the permission of the Roman governors of the Provinces. But in the days of that Emperor they began to meet in Provincial Councils, with the permission of the governors: first in Asia, to oppose the Cataphrygian Heresy, and soon after in other places and on other occasions. The Bishop of the chief city, or Metropolis, of a Roman Province was usually made president of the Council; and from this came the authority of Metropolitan Bishops over other Bishops in the same Province. This is also why, in Cyprian's days, the Bishop of Rome called himself the Bishop of Bishops. As soon as the Empire became Christian, the Roman Emperors began to call general Councils from all the Provinces of the Empire; and by telling them which points they should consider, and by influencing them with their interest and power, they set up whichever party they wished. In this way the Greek Empire, when the Roman Empire was divided into the Greek and Latin Empires, became the King who, in matters of religion, did as he wished; and, in lawmaking, raised and magnified himself above every God; and at last, by the seventh general Council, established the worship of the images and the souls of dead men, called Mahuzzims here.

The same King treated abstinence from marriage as holiness. Eusebius in his Ecclesiastical history1 tells us that Musanus wrote a tract against those who fell away to the heresy of the Encratites, which had just then arisen and had introduced harmful errors; and that Tatian, one of Justin’s disciples, started it; and that Irenæus, in his first book against heresies, teaches this, writing of Tatian and his heresy in these words: A Saturnino & Marcione profecti qui vocantur Continentes, docuerunt non contrahendum esse matrimonium; reprobantes scilicet primitivum illud opificium Dei, & tacitè accusantes Deum qui masculum & fæminam condidit ad procreationem generis humani. Induxerunt etiam abstinentiam ab esu eorum quæ animalia appellant, ingratos se exhibentes ergo eum qui universa creavit Deum. Negant etiam primi hominis salutem. Atque hoc nuper apud illos excogitatum est, Tatiano quodam omnium primo hujus impietatis auctore: qui Justini auditor, quamdiu cum illo versatus est, nihil ejusmodi protulit. Post martyrium autem illius, ab Ecclesia se abrumpens, doctoris arrogantia elatus ac tumidus, tanquam præstantior cæteris, novam quandam formam doctrinæ conflavit: Æonas invisibiles commentus perinde ac Valentinus: asserens quoque cum Saturnino & Marcione, matrimonium nihil aliud esse quam corruptionem ac stuprum: nova præterea argumenta ad subvertendam Adami salutem excogitans. Hæc Irenæus de Hæresi quæ tunc viguit Encratitarum. Thus far Eusebius. But although the followers of Tatian were at first condemned as heretics by the name of Encratites, or Continentes, their principles could not yet be rooted out: for Montanus refined on them and made only second marriages unlawful; he also introduced frequent fastings, annual fasting days, the keeping of Lent, and eating dried meats. Around the middle of the third century the Apostolici condemned marriage. They were a branch of Tatian’s disciples. The Hierocitæ in Egypt, near the end of the third century, also condemned marriage. Paul the Hermit ran from Decius’s persecution into the desert and lived there alone until Constantine the Great’s reign, without taking disciples. Antony did the same during Dioclesian’s persecution, or a little before it, and he did take disciples; and many others soon copied him.

Until now the principles of the Encratites had been rejected by the Churches; but now, refined by the Monks and imposed not on all men but only on those who would voluntarily take up a monastic life, they began to be admired, and to overflow first the Greek Church and then the Latin too, like a torrent. Eusebius reports that Constantine the Great held in the highest honor the men who gave themselves wholly to the divine philosophy; and that he almost venerated the most holy company of Virgins perpetually devoted to God, being certain that the God to whom he had consecrated himself lived in their minds. In his time and that of his sons, this way of a single life was spread in Egypt by Antony and in Syria by Hilarion; and it spread so fast that soon after the time of Julian the Apostate a third of the Egyptians had gone into the deserts of Egypt. They lived first alone in cells, then joined together into coenobia or convents; and at last came into towns, and filled the Churches with Bishops, Presbyters and Deacons. Athanasius in his younger days poured water on the hands of his master Antony; and finding the Monks faithful to him, made many of them Bishops and Presbyters in Egypt. These Bishops built new Monasteries, out of which they chose Presbyters for their own cities and sent Bishops to others. The same happened in Syria, the superstition being quickly carried there from Egypt by Hilarion, a disciple of Antony. Spiridion and Epiphanius of Cyprus, James of Nisibis, Cyril of Jerusalem, Eustathius of Sebastia in Armenia, Eusebius of Emisa, Titus of Bostra, Basilius of Ancyra, Acacius of Cæsarea in Pafor fear thatine, Elpidius of Laodicea, Melitius and Flavian of Antioch, Theodorus of Tyre, Protogenes of Carrhæ, Acacius of Berrhæa, Theodotus of Hierapolis, Eusebius of Chalcedon, Amphilochius of Iconium, Gregory Nazianzen, Gregory Nyssen, and John Chrysostom of Constantinople, were both Bishops and Monks in the fourth century. Eustathius, Gregory Nazianzen, Gregory Nyssen, Basil, etc. had Monasteries of clergymen in their cities, out of which Bishops were sent to other cities; who in the same way built Monasteries there, until the Churches were supplied with Bishops out of these Monasteries. Hence Jerome, in a letter written about the year 385,3 says of the Clergy: Quasi & ipsi aliud sint quam Monachi, & non quicquid in Monachos dicitur redundet in Clericos qui patres sunt Monachorum. Detrimentum pecoris pastoris ignominia est. And in his book against Vigilantius: Quid facient Orientis Ecclesiæ? Quæ aut Virgines Clericos accipiunt, aut Continentes, aut si uxores habuerint mariti esse desistunt. Soon after, even the Emperors ordered the Churches to take their clergy from the monasteries under this law.

Impp. Arcad & Honor. AA. Cæsario PF. P.

4 Si quos forte Episcopi deesse sibi Clericos arbitrantur, ex monachorum numero rectius ordinabunt: non obnoxios publicis privatisque rationibus cum invidia teneant, sed habeant jam probatos. Dat. vii. Kal. Aug. Honorio A. iv. & Eutychianio Coss. A.C. 598. The Greek Empire being now in the hands of these Encratites, and holding them in great admiration, Daniel makes it a characteristic of the King who does as he will that he should not regard the desire of Women.

Thus the Sect of the Encratites, set on foot by the Gnostics and propagated by Tatian and Montanus near the end of the second century; which was condemned by the Churches of that century and the third, and refined on by their followers; spread over the Eastern Churches in the fourth century, and before that century ended began to spread over the Western. From then on the Christian Churches, having a form of godliness but denying its power, came into the hands of the Encratites; and the Heathens, who in the fourth century came over in great numbers to the Christians, more readily adopted this sort of Christianity, because it had more in common with their old superstitions, than the Christianity of sincere Christians; who, by the lamps of the seven Churches of Asia and not by the lamps of the Monasteries, had lit up the Church Catholic during the first three centuries.

The Cataphrygians also brought in several other superstitions: such as the doctrine of Ghosts and of their punishment in Purgatory, with prayers and offerings to lessen that punishment, as Tertullian teaches in his books De Anima and De Monogamia. They also used the cross as a charm. So Tertullian writes in his book de Corona militis: Ad omnem progressum atque promotum, ad omnem aditum & exitum, ad vestitum, ad calceatum, ad lavacra, ad mensas, ad lamina, ad cubilia, ad sedilia, quacunque nos conversatio exercet, frontem crucis signaculo terimus. The Apostle points to all these superstitions when he says: Now the Spirit speaks expressly, that in the latter times some shall depart from the faith, giving heed to seducing spirits, and doctrines of devils, the demons and ghosts worshipped by the heathens, speaking lies in hypocrisy about their apparitions, the miracles done by them, their relics, and the sign of the cross, having consciences seared with a hot iron; forbidding to marry, and commanding to abstain from foods, etc. 1 Tim. iv. 1,2,3. From the Cataphrygians these principles and practices were passed down to later times. For the mystery of iniquity did already work in the Apostles' days in the Gnostics, continued to work very strongly in their offspring the Tatianists and Cataphrygians, and was to work until that man of sin should be revealed; whose coming is after the working of Satan, with all power and signs, and lying wonders, and all deceivableness of unrighteousness; covered over with a form of Christian godliness, but without its power, 2 Thess. ii. 7–10.

For although some stop was put to Cataphrygian Christianity by Provincial Councils until the fourth century; yet when the Roman Emperors then turned Christian, and great multitudes of heathens came over in outward profession, these people found the Cataphrygian Christianity better suited to their old principles, of placing religion in outward forms and ceremonies, holy days, and doctrines of ghosts, than the religion of sincere Christians: so they readily took the side of the Cataphrygian Christians and set up that Christianity before the fourth century ended. By this means those of understanding, after they had been persecuted by the heathen Emperors in the first three centuries and were helped with a little help, by the conversion of Constantine the great and his sons to the Christian religion, fell under new persecutions, to purge them of the pretenders and to make them white until the time of the end.

Notes to Chap. XIII.

1 Lib. 4. c. 28, 29.

2 In vita Constantini, l. 4. c. 28.

3 Epist. 10.

4 L. 32. de Episcopis.

Part I, Chapter 14, 1

Of the Mahuzzims, honoured by the King who doth according to his will.

In scripture we are told of some trusting in God and others trusting in idols, and that God is our refuge, our strength, our defense. In this sense God is the rock of his people, and false Gods are called the rock of those that trust in them, Deut. xxxii. 4, 15, 18, 30, 31, 37. In the same sense the Gods of the King who shall do according to his will are called Mahuzzims, munitions, fortresses, protectors, guardians, or defenders. In his estate, saith1 Daniel, shall he honour Mahuzzims; even with a God whom his fathers knew not, shall he honour them with gold and silver, and with precious stones, and things of value. Thus shall he do in the most strong holds or temples;--and he shall cause them to rule over many, and divide the land among them for a possession. Now this came to pass by degrees in the following manner.

Gregory Nyssen2 tells us, that after the persecution of the Emperor Decius, Gregory Bishop of Neocæsarea in Pontus, instituted among all people, as an addition or corollary of devotion towards God, that festival days and assemblies should be celebrated to them who had contended for the faith, that is, to the Martyrs. And he adds this reason for the institution: When he observed, saith Nyssen, that the simple and unskilful multitude, by reason of corporeal delights, remained in the error of idols; that the principal thing might be corrected among them, namely, that instead of their vain worship they might turn their eyes upon God; he permitted that at the memories of the holy Martyrs they might make merry and delight themselves, and be dissolved into joy. The heathens were delighted with the festivals of their Gods, and unwilling to part with those delights; and therefore Gregory, to facilitate their conversion, instituted annual festivals to the Saints and Martyrs. Hence it came to pass, that for exploding the festivals of the heathens, the principal festivals of the Christians succeeded in their room: as the keeping of Christmas with ivy and feasting, and playing and sports, in the room of the Bacchanalia and Saturnalia; the celebrating of May-day with flowers, in the room of the Floralia; and the keeping of festivals to the Virgin Mary, John the Baptist, and divers of the Apostles, in the room of the solemnities at the entrance of the Sun into the signs of the Zodiac in the old Julian Calendar. In the same persecution of Decius, Cyprian ordered the passions of the Martyrs in Africa to be registred, in order to celebrate their memories annually with oblations and sacrifices: and Felix Bishop of Rome, a little after, as Platina relates, Martyrum gloria consulens, constituit at quotannis sacrificia eorum nomine celebrarentur; "consulting the glory of the Martyrs, ordained that sacrifices should be celebrated annually in their name." By the pleasures of these festivals the Christians increased much in number, and decreased as much in virtue, until they were purged and made white by the persecution of Dioclesian. This was the first step made in the Christian religion towards the veneration of the Martyrs: and tho it did not yet amount to an unlawful worship; yet it disposed the Christians towards such a further veneration of the dead, as in a short time ended in the invocation of Saints.

The next step was the affecting to pray at the sepulchres of the Martyrs: which practice began in Dioclesian's persecution. The Council of Eliberis in Spain, celebrated in the third or fourth year of Dioclesian's persecution, A.C. 305, hath these Canons. Can. 34. Cereos per diem placuit in Coemeterio non incendi: inquietandi enim spiritus sanctorum non sunt. Qui hæc non observârint, arceantur ab Ecclesiæ communione. Can. 35. Placuit prohiberi ne fæminæ in Coemeterio pervigilent, eò quod sæpe sub obtentu orationis latentèr scelera committant. Presently after that persecution, suppose about the year 314, the Council of Laodicea in Phrygia, which then met for restoring the lapsed discipline of the Church, has the following Canons. Can. 9. Those of the Church are not allowed to go into the Coemeteries or Martyries, as they are called, of hereticks, for the sake of prayer or recovery of health: but such as go, if they be of the faithful, shall be excommunicated for a time. Can. 34. A Christian must not leave the Martyrs of Christ, and go to false Martyrs, that is, to the Martyrs of the hereticks; for these are alien from God: and therefore let those be anathema who go to them. Can. 51. The birth-days of the Martyrs shall not be celebrated in Lent, but their commemoration shall be made on the Sabbath-days and Lords days. The Council of Paphlagonia, celebrated in the year 324, made this Canon: If any man being arrogant, abominates the congregations of the Martyrs, or the Liturgies performed therein, or the memories of the Martyrs, let him be anathema. By all which it is manifest that the Christians in the time of Dioclesian's persecution used to pray in the Coemeteries or burying-places of the dead; for avoiding the danger of the persecution, and for want of Churches, which were all thrown down: and after the persecution was over, continued that practice in honour of the Martyrs, till new Churches could be built: and by use affected it as advantageous to devotion, and for recovering the health of those that were sick. It also appears that in these burying-places they commemorated the Martyrs yearly upon days dedicated to them, and accounted all these practices pious and religious, and anathematized those men as arrogant who opposed them, or prayed in the Martyries of the hereticks. They also lighted torches to the Martyrs in the day-time, as the heathens did to their Gods; which custom, before the end of the fourth century, prevailed much in the West. They sprinkled the worshipers of the Martyrs with holy-water, as the heathens did the worshipers of their Gods; and went in pilgrimage to see Jerusalem and other holy places, as if those places conferred sanctity on the visiters. From the custom of praying in the Coemeteries and Martyries, came the custom of translating the bodies of the Saints and Martyrs into such Churches as were new built: the Emperor Constantius began this practice about the year 359, causing the bodies of Andrew the Apostle, Luke and Timothy, to be translated into a new Church at Constantinople: and before this act of Constantius, the Egyptians kept the bodies of their Martyrs and Saints unburied upon beds in their private houses, and told stories of their souls appearing after death and ascending up to heaven, as Athanasius relates in the life of Antony. All which gave occasion to the Emperor Julian, as Cyril relates, to accuse the Christians in this manner: Your adding to that antient dead man, Jesus, many new dead men, who can sufficiently abominate? You have filled all places with sepulchres and monuments, altho you are no where bidden to prostrate yourselves to sepulchres, and to respect them officiously. And a little after: Since Jesus said that sepulchres are full of filthiness, how do you invoke God upon them? and in another place he saith, that if Christians had adhered to the precepts of the Hebrews, they would have worshiped one God instead of many, and not a man, or rather not many unhappy men: And that they adored the wood of the cross, making its images on their foreheads, and before their houses.

After the sepulchres of Saints and Martyrs were thus converted into places of worship like the heathen temples, and the Churches into sepulchres, and a certain sort of sanctity attributed to the dead bodies of the Saints and Martyrs buried in them, and annual festivals were kept to them, with sacrifices offered to God in their name; the next step towards the invocation of Saints, was the attributing to their dead bodies, bones and other reliques, a power of working miracles, by means of the separate souls, who were supposed to know what we do or say, and to be able to do us good or hurt, and to work those miracles. This was the very notion the heathens had of the separate souls of their antient Kings and Heroes, whom they worshiped under the names of Saturn, Rhea, Jupiter, Juno, Mars, Venus, Bacchus, Ceres, Osiris, Isis, Apollo, Diana, and the rest of their Gods. For these Gods being male and female, husband and wife, son and daughter, brother and sister, are thereby discovered to be antient men and women. Now as the first step towards the invocation of Saints was set on foot by the persecution of Decius, and the second by the persecution of Dioclesian; so this third seems to have been owing to the proceedings of Constantius and Julian the Apostate. When Julian began to restore the worship of the heathen Gods, and to vilify the Saints and Martyrs; the Christians of Syria and Egypt seem to have made a great noise about the miracles done by the reliques of the Christian Saints and Martyrs, in opposition to the powers attributed by Julian and the heathens to their Idols. For Sozomen and Ruffinus tell us, that when he opened the heathen Temples, and consulted the Oracle of Apollo Daphnæus in the suburbs of Antioch, and pressed by many sacrifices for an answer; the Oracle at length told him that the bones of the Martyr Babylas which were buried there hinder'd him from speaking. By which answer we may understand, that some Christian was got into the place where the heathen Priests used to speak thro' a pipe in delivering their Oracles: and before this, Hilary in his book against Constantius, written in the last year of that Emperor, makes the following mention of what was then doing in the East where he was. Sine martyrio persequeris. Plus crudelitati vestræ Nero, Deci, Maximiane, debemus. Diabolum enim per vos vicimus. Sanctus ubique beatorum martyrum sanguis exceptus est, dum in his Dæmones mugiunt, dum ægritudines depelluntur, dum miraculorum opera cernuntur, elevari sine laqueis corpora, & dispensis pede fæminis vestes non defluere in faciem, uri sine ignibus spiritus, confiteri sine interrogantis incremento fidei. And Gregory Nazianzen, in his first Oration against the Emperor Julian then reigning, writes thus: Martyres non extimuisti quibus præclari honores & festa constituta, à quibus Dæmones propelluntur & morbi curantur; quorum sunt apparitiones & prædictiones; quorum vel sola corpora idem possunt quod animæ sanctæ, sive manibus contrectentur, sive honorentur: quorum vel solæ sanguinis guttæ atque exigua passionis signa idem possunt quod corpora. Hæc non colis sed contemnis & aspernaris. These things made the heathens in the reign of the same Emperor demolish the sepulchre of John the Baptist in Phoenicia, and burn his bones; when several Christians mixing themselves with the heathens, gathered up some of his remains, which were sent to Athanasius, who hid them in the wall of a Church; foreseeing by a prophetic spirit, as Ruffinus tells us, that they might be profitable to future generations.

Of the Mahuzzims, honored by the King who does according to his will.

In scripture we are told that some trust in God and others trust in idols, and that God is our refuge, our strength, and our defense. In this sense God is the rock of his people, and false Gods are called the rock of those who trust in them, Deut. xxxii. 4, 15, 18, 30, 31, 37. In the same sense the Gods of the King who shall do according to his will are called Mahuzzims: munitions, fortresses, protectors, guardians, or defenders. "In his position," says1 Daniel, "he shall honor Mahuzzims; with a god his fathers did not know he shall honor them with gold and silver, with precious stones, and things of value. He shall do this in the strongest holds or temples; and he shall cause them to rule over many, and divide the land among them as a possession." This is how it came to pass, step by step, in the following manner.

Gregory Nyssen2 tells us that after the persecution of the Emperor Decius, Gregory, Bishop of Neocæsarea in Pontus, established among all people, as an addition or consequence of devotion toward God, that festival days and assemblies should be celebrated for those who had contended for the faith, that is, for the Martyrs. And he gives this reason for the institution: when he saw, Nyssen says, that the simple and unskilled multitude, because of bodily pleasures, remained in the error of idols; so that the main thing among them might be corrected, namely that instead of their empty worship they might turn their eyes to God; he allowed that at the memorials of the holy Martyrs they might make merry and enjoy themselves, and give way to joy. The heathens delighted in the festivals of their Gods and were unwilling to give up those pleasures; so Gregory, to make their conversion easier, established annual festivals for the Saints and Martyrs. From this it came about that, in place of the festivals of the heathens, the chief festivals of the Christians took over: such as keeping Christmas with ivy, with feasting, playing, and sports, in place of the Bacchanalia and Saturnalia; celebrating May-day with flowers, in place of the Floralia; and keeping festivals to the Virgin Mary, John the Baptist, and several of the Apostles, in place of the solemnities for the entrance of the Sun into the signs of the Zodiac in the old Julian Calendar. In that same persecution of Decius, Cyprian ordered the accounts of the sufferings of the Martyrs in Africa to be registered, so that their memorials could be celebrated each year with offerings and sacrifices; and Felix, Bishop of Rome, a little later, as Platina relates, "consulting the glory of the Martyrs, ordained that sacrifices should be celebrated each year in their name." By the pleasures of these festivals the Christians grew much in number and fell away just as much in virtue, until they were purged and made white by the persecution of Dioclesian. This was the first step taken in the Christian religion toward the veneration of the Martyrs; and though it did not yet amount to unlawful worship, it prepared the Christians for a further veneration of the dead that in a short time ended in the invocation of Saints.

The next step was the choice to pray at the tombs of the Martyrs; this practice began in Dioclesian's persecution. The Council of Eliberis in Spain, held in the third or fourth year of Dioclesian's persecution, A.C. 305, has these Canons. Can. 34. "It was decided that candles should not be burned in the cemetery by day: for the spirits of the saints are not to be disturbed. Those who do not observe this are to be kept from the communion of the Church." Can. 35. "It was decided to forbid women from keeping watch in the cemetery, because under the cover of prayer they often commit crimes in secret." Right after that persecution, about the year 314, the Council of Laodicea in Phrygia, which then met to restore the broken discipline of the Church, has the following Canons. Can. 9. "Those of the Church are not allowed to go into the cemeteries, or Martyries as they are called, of heretics, for the sake of prayer or recovery of health; but those who go, if they are among the faithful, shall be excommunicated for a time." Can. 34. "A Christian must not leave the Martyrs of Christ and go to false Martyrs, that is, to the Martyrs of the heretics; for these are alien from God; and so let those be anathema who go to them." Can. 51. "The birthdays of the Martyrs shall not be celebrated in Lent, but their commemoration shall be made on the Sabbath days and the Lord's days." The Council of Paphlagonia, held in the year 324, made this Canon: "If any man, being arrogant, hates the gatherings of the Martyrs, or the Liturgies performed in them, or the memorials of the Martyrs, let him be anathema." All of this makes it clear that the Christians in the time of Dioclesian's persecution used to pray in the cemeteries or burying places of the dead, to avoid the danger of the persecution and for want of Churches, which were all thrown down; and after the persecution was over they kept up that practice in honor of the Martyrs until new Churches could be built; and by use they came to value it as helpful to devotion and to the recovery of the sick. It also appears that in these burying places they remembered the Martyrs each year on days set apart for them, and they accounted all these practices pious and religious, and anathematized as arrogant the men who opposed them or prayed in the Martyries of the heretics. They also lit torches to the Martyrs in the daytime, as the heathens did to their Gods; and this custom, before the end of the fourth century, became common in the West. They sprinkled the worshipers of the Martyrs with holy water, as the heathens did the worshipers of their Gods; and they went on pilgrimage to see Jerusalem and other holy places, as if those places conferred sanctity on the visitors. From the custom of praying in the cemeteries and Martyries came the custom of moving the bodies of the Saints and Martyrs into Churches that were newly built: the Emperor Constantius began this practice about the year 359, having the bodies of Andrew the Apostle, Luke, and Timothy moved into a new Church at Constantinople; and before this act of Constantius, the Egyptians kept the bodies of their Martyrs and Saints unburied on beds in their private houses, and told stories of their souls appearing after death and going up to heaven, as Athanasius relates in the life of Antony. All of this gave occasion to the Emperor Julian, as Cyril relates, to accuse the Christians in this way: "Your adding to that old dead man, Jesus, many new dead men, who can sufficiently abominate? You have filled all places with tombs and monuments, even though you are nowhere told to bow down to tombs and to treat them with careful respect." And a little later: "Since Jesus said that tombs are full of filthiness, how do you invoke God upon them?" And in another place he says that if Christians had kept to the precepts of the Hebrews, they would have worshiped one God instead of many, and not a man, or rather not many wretched men; and that they adored the wood of the cross, making its images on their foreheads and in front of their houses.

After the tombs of Saints and Martyrs were turned into places of worship like the heathen temples, and the Churches into tombs, and a certain kind of sanctity was attributed to the dead bodies of the Saints and Martyrs buried in them, and annual festivals were kept for them with sacrifices offered to God in their name; the next step toward the invocation of Saints was attributing to their dead bodies, bones, and other relics a power of working miracles, by way of the separate souls, who were thought to know what we do or say, and to be able to do us good or harm, and to work those miracles. This was exactly the idea the heathens had of the separate souls of their old Kings and Heroes, whom they worshiped under the names of Saturn, Rhea, Jupiter, Juno, Mars, Venus, Bacchus, Ceres, Osiris, Isis, Apollo, Diana, and the rest of their Gods. Since these Gods are male and female, husband and wife, son and daughter, brother and sister, they are shown by that to be old men and women. As the first step toward the invocation of Saints was set off by the persecution of Decius, and the second by the persecution of Dioclesian, so this third seems to be owing to the actions of Constantius and Julian the Apostate. When Julian began to restore the worship of the heathen Gods and to belittle the Saints and Martyrs, the Christians of Syria and Egypt seem to have made a great deal of noise about the miracles done by the relics of the Christian Saints and Martyrs, in answer to the powers that Julian and the heathens gave to their Idols. For Sozomen and Ruffinus tell us that when he opened the heathen Temples, and consulted the Oracle of Apollo Daphnæus in the outskirts of Antioch, and pressed for an answer with many sacrifices; the Oracle at last told him that the bones of the Martyr Babylas, which were buried there, kept him from speaking. By this answer we may understand that some Christian had gotten into the place where the heathen Priests used to speak through a pipe when they gave out their Oracles; and before this, Hilary, in his book against Constantius, written in the last year of that Emperor, says the following about what was then being done in the East where he was: "You persecute without any martyrdom. We owe more to your cruelty, Nero, Decius, and Maximian, than to anything else; for by you we have conquered the Devil. The holy blood of the blessed martyrs is received everywhere: while in it Demons roar, while sicknesses are driven away, while works of miracles are seen, bodies raised up without ropes, women with feet suspended whose clothes do not fall down on their faces, spirits burned without fires, and confessions of faith without any prompting from the questioner." And Gregory Nazianzen, in his first Oration against the Emperor Julian, then reigning, writes this: "You did not hold in awe the Martyrs, to whom glorious honors and festivals have been set apart, by whom Demons are driven out and diseases cured; who have appearances and predictions; whose very bodies alone can do what holy souls can do, whether they are handled by hands or honored; whose very drops of blood and small signs of their suffering can do what their bodies do. You do not worship these things but despise and reject them." These things made the heathens, in the reign of that same Emperor, destroy the tomb of John the Baptist in Phoenicia and burn his bones; when several Christians, mixing with the heathens, gathered up some of his remains, which were sent to Athanasius, who hid them in the wall of a Church, foreseeing by a prophetic spirit, as Ruffinus tells us, that they might be useful to future generations.

Part I, Chapter 14, 2

The cry of these miracles being once set on foot, continued for many years, and encreased and grew more general. Chrysostom, in his second Oration on St. Babylas, twenty years after the silencing of the Oracle of Apollo Daphnæus as above, viz. A.C. 382, saith of the miracles done by the Saints and their reliques3: Nulla est nostri hujus Orbis seu regio, seu gens, seu urbs, ubi nova & inopinata miracula hæc non decantentur; quæ quidem si figmenta fuissent, prorsus in tantam hominum admirationem non venissent. And a little after: Abunde orationi nostræ fidem faciunt quæ quotidiana à martyribus miracula eduntur, magna affatim ad illa hominum multitudine affluente. And in his 66th Homily, describing how the Devils were tormented and cast out by the bones of the Martyrs, he adds: Ob eam causam multi plerumque Reges peregrè profecti sunt, ut hoc spectaculo fruerentur. Siquidem sanctorum martyrum templa futuri judicii vestigia & signa exhibent, dum nimirum Dæmones flagris cæduntur, hominesque torquentur & liberantur. Vide quæ sanctorum vitâ functorum vis sit? And Jerom in his Epitaph on Paula, thus4 mentions the same things. Paula vidit Samariam: ibi siti sunt Elisæus & Abdias prophetæ, & Joannes Baptista, ubi multis intremuit consternata miraculis. Nam cernebat variis dæmones rugire cruciatibus, & ante sepulchra sanctorum ululare, homines more luporum vocibus latrare canum, fremere leonum, sibilare serpentum, mugire taurorum, alios rotare caput & post tergum terram vertice tangere, suspensisque pede fæminis vestes non defluere in faciem. This was about the year 384: and Chrysostom in his Oration on the Egyptian Martyrs, seems to make Egypt the ringleader in these matters, saying5: Benedictus Deus quandoquidem ex Ægypto prodeunt martyres, ex Ægypto illa cum Deo pugnante ac insanissima, & unde impia ora, unde linguæ blasphemæ; ex Ægypto martyres habentur; non in Ægypto tantum, nec in finitima vicinaque regione, sed UBIQUE TERRARUM. Et quemadmodum in annonæ summa ubertate, cum viderunt urbium incolæ majorem quam usus habitatorum postulat esse proventum, ad peregrinas etiam urbes transmittunt: cum & suam comitatem & liberalitatem ostendant, tum ut præter horum abundantiam cum facilitate res quibus indigent rursus ab illis sibi comparent: sic & Ægyptii, quod attinet ad religionis athletas, fecerunt. Cum apud se multam eorum Dei benignitate copiam cernerent, nequaquam ingens Dei munus sua civitate concluserunt, sed in OMNES TERRÆ PARTES bonorum thesauros effuderunt: cum ut suum in fratres amorem ostenderent, tum ut communem omnium dominum honore afficerent, ac civitati suæ gloriam apud omnes compararent, totiusque terrarum ORBIS esse METROPOLIN declararent.--Sanctorum enim illorum corpora quovis adamantino & inexpugnabili muro tutiùs nobis urbem communiunt, & tanquam excelsi quidam scopuli undique prominentes, non horum qui sub sensus cadunt & oculis cernuntur hostium impetus propulsant tantùm, sed etiam invisibilium dæmonum insidias, omnesque diaboli fraudes subvertunt ac dissipant.--Neque vero tantùm adversus hominum insidias aut adversus fallacias dæmonum utilis nobis est hæc possessio, sed si nobis communis dominus ob peccatorum multitudinem irascatur, his objectis corporibus continuo poterimus eum propitium reddere civitati. This Oration was written at Antioch, while Alexandria was yet the Metropolis of the East, that is, before the year 381, in which Constantinople became the Metropolis: and it was a work of some years for the Egyptians to have distributed the miracle-working reliques of their Martyrs over all the world, as they had done before that year. Egypt abounded most with the reliques of Saints and Martyrs, the Egyptians keeping them embalmed upon beds even in their private houses; and Alexandria was eminent above all other cities for dispersing them, so as on that account to acquire glory with all men, and manifest herself to be the Metropolis of the world. Antioch followed the example of Egypt, in dispersing the reliques of the forty Martyrs: and the examples of Egypt and Syria were soon followed by the rest of the world.

The reliques of the forty Martyrs at Antioch were distributed among the Churches before the year 373; for Athanasius who died in that year, wrote an Oration upon them. This Oration is not yet published, but Gerard Vossius saw it in MS. in the Library of Cardinal Ascanius in Italy, as he says in his commentary upon the Oration of Ephræm Syrus on the same forty Martyrs. Now since the Monks of Alexandria sent the reliques of the Martyrs of Egypt into all parts of the earth, and thereby acquired glory to their city, and declared her in these matters the Metropolis of the whole world, as we have observed out of Chrysostom; it may be concluded, that before Alexandria received the forty Martyrs from Antioch, she began to send out the reliques of her own Martyrs into all parts, setting the first example to other cities. This practice therefore began in Egypt some years before the death of Athanasius. It began when the miracle-working bones of John the Baptist were carried into Egypt, and hid in the wall of a Church, that they might be profitable to future generations. It was restrained in the reign of Julian the Apostate: and then it spred from Egypt into all the Empire, Alexandria being the Metropolis of the whole world, according to Chrysostom, for propagating this sort of devotion, and Antioch and other cities soon following her example.

In propagating these superstitions, the ring-leaders were the Monks, and Antony was at the head of them: for in the end of the life of Antony, Athanasius relates that these were his dying words to his disciples who then attended him. Do you take care, said Antony, to adhere to Christ in the first place, and then to the Saints, that after death they may receive you as friends and acquaintance into the everlasting tabernacles, Think upon these things, perceive these things; and if you have any regard to me, remember me as a father. This being delivered in charge to the Monks by Antony at his death, A.C. 356, could not but inflame their whole body with devotion towards the Saints, as the ready way to be received, by them into the eternal Tabernacles after death. Hence came that noise about the miracles, done by the reliques of the Saints in the time of Constantius: hence came the dispersion of the miracle-working reliques into all the Empire; Alexandria setting the example, and being renowned, for it above all other cities. Hence it came to pass in the days of Julian, A.C. 362, that Athanasius by a prophetic spirit, as Ruffinus tells us, hid the bones of John the Baptist from the Heathens, not in the ground to be forgotten, but in the hollow wall of a Church before proper witnesses, that they might be profitable to future generations. Hence also came the invocation of the Saints for doing such miracles, and for assisting men in their devotions, and mediating with God. For Athanasius, even from his youth, looked upon the dead Saints and Martyrs as mediators of our prayers: in his Epistle to Marcellinus, written in the days of Constantine the great, he saith that the words of the Psalms are not to be transposed or any wise changed, but to be recited and sung without any artifice, as they are written, that the holy men who delivered them, knowing them to be their own words, may pray with us; or rather, that the Holy Ghost who spake in the holy men, seeing his own words with which he inspired them, may join with them in assisting us.

Whilst Egypt abounded with Monks above any other country, the veneration of the Saints began sooner, and spred faster there than in other places. Palladius going into Egypt in the year 388 to visit the Monasteries, and the sepulchres of Apollonius and other Martyrs of Thebais who had suffered under Maximinus, saith of them: Iis omnibus Christiani fecerunt ædem unam, ubi nunc multæ virtutes peraguntur. Tanta autem fuit viri gratia, ut de iis quæ esset precatus statim exaudiretur, eum sic honorante servatore: quem etiam nos in martyrio precati vidimus, cum iis qui cum ipso fuerunt martyrio affecti; & Deum adorantes, eorum corpora salutavimus. Eunapius also, a heathen, yet a competent witness of what was done in his own times, relating how the soldiers delivered the temples of Egypt into the hands of the Monks, which was done in the year 389, rails thus in an impious manner at the Martyrs, as succeeding in the room of the old Gods of Egypt. Illi ipsi, milites, Monachos Canobi quoque collocârunt, ut pro Diis qui animo cernuntur, servos & quidem flagitiosos divinis honoribus percolerent, hominum mentibus ad cultum ceremoniasque obligatis. Ii namque condita & salita eorum capita, qui ob scelerum multitudinem à judicibus extremo judicio fuerant affecti, pro Divis ostentabant; iis genua submittebant, eos in Deorum numerum receptabant, ad illorum sepulchra pulvere sordibusque conspurcati. Martyres igitur vocabantur, & ministri quidem & legati arbitrique precum apud Deos; cum fuerint servilia infida & flagris pessimè subacta, quæ cicatrices scelerum ac nequitiæ vestigia corporibus circumferunt; ejusmodi tamen Deos fert tellus. By these instances we may understand the invocation of Saints was now of some standing in Egypt, and that it was already generally received and practised there by the common people.

Thus Basil a Monk, who was made Bishop of Cæsarea in the year 369, and died in the year 378, in his Oration on the Martyr Mamas, saith: Be ye mindful of the Martyr; as many of you as have enjoyed him in your dreams, as many as in this place have been assisted by him in prayer, as many of you as upon invoking him by name have had him present in your works, as many as he has reduced into the way from wandering, as many as he has restored to health, as, many as have had their dead children restored by him to life, as many as have had their lives prolonged by him: and a little after, he thus expresses the universality of this superstition in the regions of Cappadocia and Bithynia: At the memory of the Martyr, saith he, the whole region is moved; at his festival the whole city is transported with joy. Nor do the kindred of the rich turn aside to the sepulchres of their ancestors, but all go to the place of devotion. Again, in the end of the Homily he prays, that God would preserve the Church, thus fortified with the great towers of the Martyrs: and in his Oration on the forty Martyrs; These are they, saith he, who obtaining our country, like certain towers afford us safety against our enemies. Neither are they shut up in one place only, but being distributed are sent into many regions, and adorn many countries.--You have often endeavoured, you have often laboured to find one who might pray for you: here are forty, emitting one voice of prayer.--He that is in affliction flies to these, he that rejoices has recourse to these: the first, that he may be freed from evil, the last that he may continue in happiness. Here a woman praying for her children is heard; she obtains a safe return for her husband from abroad, and health for him in his sickness.--O ye common keepers of mankind, the best companions of our cares, suffragans and coadjutors of our prayers, most powerful embassadors to God, &c. By all which it is manifest, that before the year 378, the Orations and Sermons upon the Saints went much beyond the bounds of mere oratorical flourishes, and that the common people in the East were already generally corrupted by the Monks with Saint-worship.

Gregory Nazianzen a Monk, in his sixth Oration written A.C. 373, when he was newly made Bishop of Sasima, saith: Let us purify ourselves to the Martyrs, or rather to the God of the Martyrs: and a little after he calls the Martyrs mediators of obtaining an ascension or divinity. The same year, in the end of his Oration upon Athanasius then newly dead, he thus invokes him: Do thou look down upon us propitiously, and govern this people, as perfect adorers of the perfect Trinity, which in the Father, Son, and Holy Ghost, is contemplated and worshiped: if there shall be peace, preserve me, and feed my flock with me; but if war, bring me home, place me by thyself, and by those that are like thee; however great my request. And in the end of the funeral Oration upon Basil, written A.C. 378, he thus addresses him: But thou, O divine and sacred Head, look down upon us from heaven; and by thy prayers either take away that thorn of the flesh which is given us by God for exercise, or obtain that we may bear it with courage, and direct all our life to that which is most fitting for us. When we depart this life, receive us there in your Tabernacles, that living together and beholding the holy and blessed Trinity more purely and perfectly, whereof we have now but an imperfect view, we may there come to the end of our desires, and receive this reward of the wars which we have waged or suffered: and in his Oration upon Cyprian, not the Bishop of Carthage, but a Greek, he invokes him after the same manner; and tells us also how a pious Virgin named Justina, was protected by invoking the Virgin Mary, and how miracles were done by the ashes of Cyprian.

The report of these miracles, once started, continued for many years, and increased and grew more general. Chrysostom, in his second Oration on St. Babylas, twenty years after the silencing of the Oracle of Apollo Daphnæus as above, that is, A.C. 382, says this of the miracles done by the Saints and their relics3: "There is no part of this world of ours, whether region, people, or city, where these new and unexpected miracles are not celebrated; and if they had been fictions, they would never have won such great wonder from men." And a little later: "The miracles worked daily by the martyrs give abundant credit to our prayer, great crowds of people flocking to them in full measure." And in his 66th Homily, describing how the Devils were tortured and cast out by the bones of the Martyrs, he adds: "For this reason many Kings have often traveled abroad, so that they might enjoy this sight. For the temples of the holy martyrs show the traces and signs of the future judgment, while demons are beaten with whips, and men are tortured and set free. See what power the saints who have left this life have?" And Jerom, in his Epitaph on Paula, mentions the same things in this way4: "Paula saw Samaria: there are buried Elisha and Obadiah the prophets, and John the Baptist, where she stood trembling, overcome by many miracles. For she saw demons groaning in various tortures, and howling before the tombs of the saints; men barking with the voices of dogs like wolves, roaring like lions, hissing like serpents, bellowing like bulls; others spinning the head around and touching the ground behind their backs with the crown; and women with suspended feet, whose clothes did not fall down over their faces." This was about the year 384; and Chrysostom, in his Oration on the Egyptian Martyrs, seems to make Egypt the ringleader in these matters, saying5: "Blessed is God, since from Egypt come martyrs; from Egypt, that country which fought against God and was the most mad, and from where come impious mouths and blasphemous tongues; from Egypt come martyrs, not in Egypt only, nor in the neighboring region around it, but everywhere in the world. And as when the inhabitants of cities see, in a great plenty of grain, a supply greater than the use of the inhabitants requires, they send it to foreign cities as well: both showing their own courtesy and generosity, and so that beyond their own abundance they may easily get back from those cities the things they need; so have the Egyptians also done, in regard to the athletes of religion. When they saw among themselves a great supply of them by God's goodness, they did not at all shut God's great gift within their own city, but poured out these treasuries of good men into all parts of the earth: both to show their love for their brothers, and to honor the common master of all, and to gain glory for their city in the sight of all, and to declare her to be the chief city of the whole world. For the bodies of those saints fortify our city more safely than any adamantine and unconquerable wall; and like certain high rocks standing out on every side, they drive off not only the attacks of the enemies that come under our senses and are seen with our eyes, but also the plots of the invisible demons and all the frauds of the devil, overturning and scattering them. And this possession is useful to us not only against the plots of men or the deceptions of demons, but if our common master grows angry with us because of the multitude of our sins, by setting these bodies before him we can at once make him favorable to the city." This Oration was written at Antioch, while Alexandria was still the chief city of the East, that is, before the year 381, in which Constantinople became the chief city; and it took the Egyptians several years to spread the miracle-working relics of their Martyrs over all the world, as they had done before that year. Egypt had the greatest supply of the relics of Saints and Martyrs, the Egyptians keeping them embalmed on beds even in their private houses; and Alexandria was outstanding above all other cities for spreading them, so that on that account she gained glory in the sight of all, and showed herself to be the chief city of the world. Antioch followed the example of Egypt in spreading the relics of the forty Martyrs; and the examples of Egypt and Syria were soon followed by the rest of the world.

The relics of the forty Martyrs at Antioch were distributed among the Churches before the year 373; for Athanasius, who died in that year, wrote an Oration about them. This Oration has not yet been published, but Gerard Vossius saw it in manuscript in the Library of Cardinal Ascanius in Italy, as he says in his commentary upon the Oration of Ephræm Syrus on the same forty Martyrs. Now since the Monks of Alexandria sent the relics of the Martyrs of Egypt into all parts of the earth, and by that gained glory for their city, and declared her in these matters the chief city of the whole world, as we have noted from Chrysostom; it can be concluded that before Alexandria received the forty Martyrs from Antioch, she began to send out the relics of her own Martyrs into all parts, setting the first example to other cities. This practice therefore began in Egypt some years before the death of Athanasius. It began when the miracle-working bones of John the Baptist were carried into Egypt, and hidden in the wall of a Church, so that they might be useful to future generations. It was stopped in the reign of Julian the Apostate; and then it spread from Egypt into all the Empire, Alexandria being the chief city of the whole world, according to Chrysostom, for spreading this kind of devotion, and Antioch and other cities soon following her example.

In spreading these superstitions, the ringleaders were the Monks, and Antony was at the head of them; for at the end of the life of Antony, Athanasius relates that these were his dying words to his disciples who were then attending him. "Take care," said Antony, "to cling to Christ first, and then to the Saints, so that after death they may receive you as friends and acquaintances into the everlasting tabernacles. Think on these things, grasp these things; and if you have any regard for me, remember me as a father." This, given as a charge to the Monks by Antony at his death, A.C. 356, could not fail to set the whole body on fire with devotion toward the Saints, as the ready way to be received by them into the eternal Tabernacles after death. From this came the noise about the miracles done by the relics of the Saints in the time of Constantius; from this came the spreading of the miracle-working relics into all the Empire, Alexandria setting the example, and being famous for it above all other cities. From this it came about in the days of Julian, A.C. 362, that Athanasius, by a prophetic spirit, as Ruffinus tells us, hid the bones of John the Baptist from the Heathens; not in the ground to be forgotten, but in the hollow wall of a Church before proper witnesses, so that they might be useful to future generations. From this also came the invocation of the Saints to do such miracles, and to assist men in their devotions, and to mediate with God. For Athanasius, even from his youth, looked on the dead Saints and Martyrs as mediators of our prayers: in his Epistle to Marcellinus, written in the days of Constantine the Great, he says that the words of the Psalms are not to be transposed or changed in any way, but to be recited and sung without any artifice, as they are written, so that the holy men who handed them down, knowing them to be their own words, may pray with us; or rather, so that the Holy Spirit who spoke in the holy men, seeing his own words with which he inspired them, may join with them in assisting us.

While Egypt had more Monks than any other country, the veneration of the Saints began sooner and spread faster there than in other places. Palladius, going into Egypt in the year 388 to visit the Monasteries, and the tombs of Apollonius and other Martyrs of Thebais who had suffered under Maximinus, says of them: "The Christians made all of them into one temple, where now many miracles are performed. So great was the grace of the man, that whatever he prayed for he was at once heard, the Savior honoring him thus: whom we also saw praying in his martyrdom, together with those who were judged worthy of martyrdom with him; and worshiping God, we greeted their bodies." Eunapius also, a heathen, yet a trustworthy witness of what was done in his own times, relating how the soldiers delivered the temples of Egypt into the hands of the Monks, which was done in the year 389, rails in this impious way at the Martyrs, as taking the place of the old Gods of Egypt: "Those same soldiers set up Monks at Canopus too, so that instead of the Gods that are seen by the mind, they might honor with divine honors slaves, and ones too of the worst crimes, the minds of men being bound to their worship and ceremonies. For they displayed the pickled and salted heads of those who had been condemned by the judges to the extreme penalty for the multitude of their crimes, as those of divine men; they bent the knee to them, they received them into the number of Gods, defiled with dust and dirt at their tombs. And so they were called Martyrs, and indeed ministers and ambassadors and judges of prayer with the Gods; when they have been servile, faithless, and most cruelly beaten with whips, carrying on their bodies the scars of crimes and the traces of wickedness; and yet such Gods the earth produces." By these examples we may understand that the invocation of Saints had by then been established for some time in Egypt, and that it was already generally received and practiced there by the common people.

In this way Basil, a Monk who was made Bishop of Cæsarea in the year 369, and died in the year 378, in his Oration on the Martyr Mamas, says: "Be mindful of the Martyr; as many of you as have enjoyed him in your dreams, as many as in this place have been assisted by him in prayer, as many of you as upon invoking him by name have had him present in your works, as many as he has led back into the way from wandering, as many as he has restored to health, as many as have had their dead children restored to life by him, as many as have had their lives prolonged by him." And a little later he describes how widespread this superstition was in the regions of Cappadocia and Bithynia: "At the memorial of the Martyr," says he, "the whole region is moved; at his festival the whole city is filled with joy. Nor do the kindred of the rich turn aside to the tombs of their ancestors, but all go to the place of devotion." Again, at the end of the Homily he prays that God would preserve the Church, fortified with such great towers of the Martyrs; and in his Oration on the forty Martyrs: "These are they," says he, "who, holding our country like certain towers, give us safety against our enemies. Nor are they shut up in one place only; but being distributed, they are sent into many regions, and adorn many countries. You have often tried, you have often worked, to find one who might pray for you: here are forty, giving out one voice of prayer. He who is in trouble flees to these; he who rejoices turns to these: the one so that he may be freed from evil, the other so that he may continue in happiness. Here a woman praying for her children is heard; she obtains a safe return for her husband from abroad, and health for him in his sickness. O you common keepers of mankind, the best companions of our cares, helpers and partners of our prayers, most powerful ambassadors to God, and so on." All of which makes it clear that before the year 378 the Orations and Sermons upon the Saints went far beyond the bounds of mere oratorical flourishes, and that the common people in the East had already been generally corrupted by the Monks with Saint-worship.

Gregory Nazianzen, a Monk, in his sixth Oration written A.C. 373, when he had just been made Bishop of Sasima, says: "Let us make ourselves pure for the Martyrs, or rather for the God of the Martyrs;" and a little later he calls the Martyrs mediators of obtaining an ascension or divinity. The same year, at the end of his Oration upon Athanasius, then newly dead, he invokes him in this way: "Look down on us with favor, and govern this people, as perfect worshipers of the perfect Trinity, which in the Father, Son, and Holy Spirit is contemplated and worshiped: if there is to be peace, preserve me, and feed my flock with me; but if war, bring me home, place me by yourself, and by those who are like you; great as my request is." And at the end of the funeral Oration upon Basil, written A.C. 378, he addresses him in this way: "But you, O divine and sacred Head, look down on us from heaven; and by your prayers either take away that thorn of the flesh which is given us by God for our training, or obtain for us that we may bear it with courage, and direct all our life to what is most fitting for us. When we leave this life, receive us there in your Tabernacles; so that living together and looking the holy and blessed Trinity more purely and perfectly, of which we now have but an incomplete view, we may there come to the end of our desires, and receive this reward of the wars we have waged or suffered." And in his Oration upon Cyprian, not the Bishop of Carthage, but a Greek, he invokes him in the same way; and he also tells us how a pious Virgin named Justina was protected by invoking the Virgin Mary, and how miracles were done by the ashes of Cyprian.

Part I, Chapter 14, 3

Gregory Nyssen, another eminent Monk and Bishop, in the life of Ephræm Syrus, tells how a certain man returning from a far country, was in great danger, by reason all the ways were intercepted by the armies of barbarous nations; but upon invoking Ephræm by name, and saying, Holy Ephræm assist me, he escaped the danger, neglected the fear of death, and beyond his hope got safe home. In the end of this Oration Gregory calls upon Ephræm after the following manner: But thou, O Ephræm, assisting now at the divine altar, and sacrificing to the Prince of life, and to the most holy Trinity, together with the Angels; remember us all, and obtain for us pardon of our sins, that we may enjoy the eternal happiness of the kingdom of heaven. The same Gregory, in his Oration on the Martyr Theodorus written A.C. 381, thus describes the power of that Martyr, and the practice of the people. This Martyr, saith he, the last year quieted the barbarous tempest, and put a stop to the horrid war of the fierce and cruel Scythians.--If any one is permitted to carry away the dust with which the tomb is covered, wherein the body of the Martyr rests; the dust is accepted as a gift, and gathered to be laid up as a thing of great price. For to touch the reliques themselves, if any such prosperous fortune shall at any time happen; how great a favour that is, and not to be obtained without the most earnest prayers, they know well who have obtained it. For as a living and florid body, they who behold it embrace it, applying to it the eyes, mouth, ears, and all the organs of sense; and then with affection pouring tears upon the Martyr, as if he was whole and appeared to them: they offer prayers with supplication, that he would intercede for them as an advocate, praying to him as an Officer attending upon God, and invoking him as receiving gifts whenever he will. At length Gregory concludes the Oration with this prayer: O Theodorus, we want many blessings; intercede and beseech for thy country before the common King and Lord: for the country of the Martyr is the place of his passion, and they are his citizens, brethren and kindred, who have him, defend, adorn and honour him. We fear afflictions, we expect dangers: the wicked Scythians are not far off, ready to make war against us. As a soldier fight for us, as a Martyr use liberty of speech for thy fellow-servants. Pray for peace, that these publick meetings may not cease, that the furious and wicked barbarian may not rage against the temples and altars, that the profane and impious may not trample upon the holy things. We acknowledge it a benefit received from thee, that we are preserved safe and entire, we pray for freedom from danger in time to come: and if there shall be need of greater intercession and deprecation, call together the choir of thy brethren the Martyrs, and in conjunction with them all intercede for us. Let the prayers of many just ones attone for the sins of the multitudes and the people; exhort Peter, excite Paul, and also John the divine and beloved disciple, that they may be sollicitous for the Churches which they have erected, for which they have been in chains, for which they have undergone dangers and deaths; that the worship of idols may not lift up its head against us, that heresies may not spring up like thorns in the vineyard, that tares grown up may not choak the wheat, that no rock void of the fatness of true dew may be against us, and render the fruitful power of the word void of a root; but by the power of the prayers of thyself and thy companions, O admirable man and eminent among the Martyrs, the commonwealth of Christians may become a field of corn. The same Gregory Nyssen, in his sermon upon the death of Meletius Bishop of Antioch, preached at Constantinople the same year, A.C. 381, before the Bishops of all the East assembled in the second general Council, spake thus of Meletius. The Bridegroom, saith he, is not taken from us: he stands in the midst of us, tho we do not see him: he is a Priest in the most inward places, and face to face intercedes before God for us and the sins of the people. This was no oratorical flourish, but Gregory's real opinion, as may be understood by what we have cited out of him concerning Ephræm and Theodorus: and as Gregory preached this before the Council of Constantinople, you may thence know, saith6 Baronius, that he professed what the whole Council, and therewith the whole Church of those parts believed, namely, that the Saints in heaven offer prayers for us before God.

Ephræm Syrus, another eminent Monk, who was contemporary with Basil, and died the same year; in the end of his Encomium or Oration upon Basil then newly dead, invokes him after this manner: Intercede for me, a very miserable man; and recal me by thy intercessions, O father; thou who art strong, pray for me who am weak; thou who art diligent, for me who am negligent; thou who art chearful, for me who am heavy; thou who art wise, for me who am foolish. Thou who hast treasured up a treasure of all virtues, be a guide to me who am empty of every good work. In the beginning of his Encomium upon the forty Martyrs, written at the same time, he thus invokes them: Help me therefore, O ye Saints, with your intercession; and O ye beloved, with your holy prayers, that Christ by his grace may direct my tongue to speak, &c. and afterwards mentioning the mother of one of these forty Martyrs, he concludes the Oration with this prayer: I entreat thee, O holy, faithful, and blessed woman, pray for me to the Saints, saying; Intercede ye that triumph in Christ, for the most little and miserable Ephræm, that he may find mercy, and by the grace of Christ may be saved. Again, in his second Sermon or Oration on the praises of the holy Martyrs of Christ, he thus addresses them: We entreat you most holy Martyrs, to intercede with the Lord for us miserable sinners, beset with the filthiness of negligence, that he would infuse his divine grace into us: and afterwards, near the end of the same discourse; Now ye most holy men and glorious Martyrs of God, help me a miserable sinner with your prayers, that in that dreadful hour I may obtain mercy, when the secrets of all hearts shall be made manifest. I am to day become to you, most holy Martyrs of Christ, as it were an unprofitable and unskilful cup-bearer: for I have delivered to the sons and brothers of your faith, a cup of the excellent wine of your warfare, with the excellent table of your victory, replenished with all sorts of dainties. I have endeavoured, with the whole affection and desire of my mind, to recreate your fathers and brothers, kindred and relations, who daily frequent the table. For behold they sing, and with exultation and jubilee glorify God, who has crown'd your virtues, by setting on your most sacred heads incorruptible and celestial crowns; they with excessive joy stand about the sacred reliques of your martyrdoms, wishing for a blessing, and desiring to bear away holy medicines both for the body and the mind. As good disciples and faithful ministers of our benign Lord and Saviour, bestow therefore a blessing on them all: and on me also, tho weak and feeble, who having received strength by your merits and intercessions, have with the whole devotion of my mind, sung a hymn to your praise and glory before your holy reliques. Wherefore I beseech you stand before the throne of the divine Majesty for me Ephræm, a vile and miserable sinner, that by your prayers I may deserve to obtain salvation, and with you enjoy eternal felicity by the grace and benignity and mercy of our Lord and Saviour Jesus Christ, to whom with the Father and Holy Ghost be praise, honour and glory for ever and ever. Amen.

By what has been cited out of Basil, the two Gregories and Ephræm, we may understand that Saint-worship was established among the Monks and their admirers in Egypt, Phoenicia, Syria and Cappadocia, before the year 378, this being the year in which Basil and Ephræm died. Chrysostom was not much later; he preached at Antioch almost all the time of Theodosius the great, and in his Sermons are many exhortations to this sort of superstition, as may be seen in the end of his Orations on S. Julia, on St. Pelagia, on the Martyr Ignatius, on the Egyptian Martyrs, on Fate and Providence, on the Martyrs in general, on St. Berenice and St. Prosdoce, on Juventinus and Maximus, on the name of Coemetery, &c. Thus in his Sermon on Berenice and Prosdoce: Perhaps, saith he, you are inflamed with no small love towards these Martyrs; therefore with this ardour let us fall down before their reliques, let us embrace their coffins. For the coffins of the Martyrs have great virtue, even as the bones of the Martyrs have great power. Nor let us only on the day of this festival, but also on other days apply to them, invoke them, and beseech them to be our patrons: for they have great power and efficacy, not only whilst alive, but also after death; and much more after death than before. For now they bear the marks or brands of Christ; and when they shew these marks, they can obtain all things of the King. Seeing therefore they abound with such efficacy, and have so much friendship with him; we also, when by continual attendance and perpetual visitation of them we have insinuated ourselves into their familiarity, may by their assistance obtain the mercy of God.

Constantinople was free from these superstitions till Gregory Nazianzen came thither A.D. 379; but in a few years it was also inflamed with it. Ruffinus7 tells us, that when the Emperor Theodosius was setting out against the tyrant Eugenius, which was in the year 394, he went about with the Priests and people to all the places of prayer; lay prostrate in haircloth before the shrines of the Martyrs and Apostles, and pray'd for assistance by the intercession of the Saints. Sozomen8 adds, that when the Emperor was marched seven miles from Constantinople against Eugenius, he went into a Church which he had built to John the Baptist, and invoked the Baptist for his assistance. Chrysostom9 says: He that is clothed in purple, approaches to embrace these sepulchres; and laying aside his dignity, stands supplicating the Saints to intercede for him with God: and he who goes crowned with a diadem, offers his prayers to the tent-maker and the fisher-man as his Protestors. And in10 another place: The cities run together to the sepulchres of the Martyrs, and the people are inflamed with the love of them.

This practice of sending reliques from place to place for working miracles, and thereby inflaming the devotion of the nations towards the dead Saints and their reliques, and setting up the religion of invoking their souls, lasted only till the middle of the reign of the Emperor Theodosius the great; for he then prohibited it by the following Edict. Humatum corpus, nemo ad alterum locum transferat; nemo Martyrem distrahat, nemo mercetur: Habeant verò in potestate, si quolibet in loco sanctorum est aliquis conditus, pro ejus veneratione, quod Martyrium vocandum sit, addant quod voluerint fabricarum. Dat. iv. Kal. Mart. Constantinopoli, Honorio nob. puero & Euodio Coss. A.C. 386. After this they filled the fields and high-ways with altars erected to Martyrs, which they pretended to discover by dreams and revelations: and this occasioned the making the fourteenth Canon of the fifth Council of Carthage, A.C. 398. Item placuit, ut altaria, quæ passim per agros aut vias, tanquam memoriæ Martyrum constituuntur, in quibus nullum corpus aut reliquiæ Martyrum conditæ probantur, ab Episcopis, qui illis locis præsunt, si fieri potest, evertantur. Si autem hoc propter tumultus populares non sinitur, plebes tamen admoneantur, ne illa loca frequentent, ut qui rectè sapiunt, nullâ ibi superstitione devincti teneantur. Et omnino nulla memoria Martyrum probabiliter acceptetur, nisi aut ibi corpus aut aliquæ certæ reliquiæ sint, aut ubi origo alicujus habitationis, vel possessionis, vel passionis fidelissima origine traditur. Nam quæ per somnia, & per inanes quasi revelationes quorumlibet hominum ubique constituuntur altaria, omnimodè reprobentur. These altars were for invoking the Saints or Martyrs buried or pretended to be buried under them. First they filled the Churches in all places with the reliques or pretended reliques of the Martyrs, for invoking them in the Churches; and then they filled the fields and high-ways with altars, for invoking them every where: and this new religion was set up by the Monks in all the Greek Empire before the expedition of the Emperor Theodosius against Eugenius, and I think before his above-mentioned Edict, A.C. 386.

The same religion of worshiping Mahuzzims quickly spred into the Western Empire also: but Daniel in this Prophecy describes chiefly the things done among the nations comprehended in the body of his third Beast.

Notes to Chap. XIV.

1 Chap. xi. 38, 39

2 Orat. de vita Greg. Thaumaturg. T. 3. p. 574.

3 Vide Hom. 47. in. S. Julian.

4 Epist. 27. ad Eustochium.

5 Edit. Frontonis Ducæi, Tom. 1.

6 Ad. an. 381, Sect. 41.

7 Hist. Eccl. l. 2. c. 23.

8 L. 4. c. 24.

9 Hom. 66. ad. populum, circa finem. & Hom. 8, 27. in Matth. Hom. 42, 43. in Gen. Hom. 1. in 1 Thess.

10 Exposit. in Psal. 114. sub finem.

The end of the first Part.

PART II.

OBSERVATIONS UPON THE APOCALYPSE OF St. JOHN.

Gregory Nyssen, another well-known monk and bishop, tells in the life of Ephræm Syrus how a certain man returning from a far country was in great danger, because all the roads were blocked by the armies of barbarian nations. But when he called on Ephræm by name and said, "Holy Ephræm, help me," he escaped the danger, put the fear of death behind him, and got home safely against all hope. At the end of this speech Gregory calls on Ephræm in these words: "But you, O Ephræm, who assist now at the divine altar, and sacrifice to the Prince of life, and to the most holy Trinity, together with the Angels, remember us all, and win for us pardon of our sins, that we may enjoy the eternal happiness of the kingdom of heaven." The same Gregory, in his Oration on the Martyr Theodorus, written A.C. 381, describes the power of that Martyr and the practice of the people in this way. This Martyr, he says, last year calmed the barbarian storm and put a stop to the horrid war of the fierce and cruel Scythians.—If anyone is allowed to carry away the dust that covers the tomb where the body of the Martyr rests, the dust is accepted as a gift and gathered up to be kept as something of great value. For to touch the relics themselves, if that good fortune should ever happen, how great a favor that is, and how impossible to get without the most earnest prayers, they know well who have obtained it. For just as with a living, healthy body, those who look it embrace it, bringing to it their eyes, mouth, ears, and all the organs of sense; and then pour tears of affection on the Martyr, as if he were whole and had appeared to them: so they offer prayers, asking him to intercede for them as an advocate, praying to him as an officer attending upon God, and calling on him as one who receives gifts whenever he will. At length Gregory ends the Oration with this prayer: "O Theodorus, we are in need of many blessings; intercede and plead for your country before the common King and Lord: for the country of the Martyr is the place of his suffering, and they are his citizens, brothers and kindred, who have him, defend, adorn and honor him. We fear afflictions, we expect dangers: the wicked Scythians are not far off, ready to make war against us. As a soldier fight for us, as a Martyr speak freely for your fellow servants. Pray for peace, that these public meetings may not stop, that the furious and wicked barbarian may not rage against the temples and altars, that the profane and impious may not trample on the holy things. We take it as a benefit received from you, that we are kept safe and whole; we pray for freedom from danger in time to come: and if a stronger plea is needed to turn away the harm, gather the choir of your brethren the Martyrs, and together with them all intercede for us. Let the prayers of many righteous ones pay for the sins of the multitudes and the people; urge Peter, stir up Paul, and also John the divine and beloved disciple, that they may care for the Churches which they have planted, for which they have been in chains, for which they have undergone dangers and deaths; that the worship of idols may not lift its head against us, that heresies may not spring up like thorns in the vineyard, that tares grown up may not choke the wheat, that no rock lacking the richness of the true dew may stand against us, and leave the fruitful power of the word without a root; but by the power of the prayers of you and your companions, O admirable man and eminent among the Martyrs, the community of Christians may become a field of corn."

The same Gregory Nyssen, in his sermon on the death of Meletius Bishop of Antioch, preached at Constantinople the same year, A.C. 381, before the Bishops of all the East assembled in the second general Council, spoke thus of Meletius: "The Bridegroom, he says, is not taken from us: he stands in the midst of us, though we do not see him: he is a Priest in the innermost places, and face to face intercedes before God for us and the sins of the people." This was no display of eloquence, but Gregory's real opinion, as may be understood from what we have quoted from him about Ephræm and Theodorus: and since Gregory preached this before the Council of Constantinople, you may know from it, says6 Baronius, that he professed what the whole Council, and with it the whole Church of those parts believed, namely, that the Saints in heaven offer prayers for us before God.

Ephræm Syrus, another well-known monk, was a contemporary of Basil and died the same year; at the end of his Encomium or Oration upon Basil, then newly dead, he calls on him in these words: "Intercede for me, a very miserable man; and call me back through your intercessions, O father; you who are strong, pray for me who am weak; you who are diligent, for me who am lazy; you who are cheerful, for me who am downcast; you who are wise, for me who am foolish. You who have treasured up a store of every virtue, be a guide to me who have no good work in me." At the beginning of his Encomium upon the forty Martyrs, written at the same time, he calls on them in this way: "Help me then, O Saints, with your intercession; and, O beloved, with your holy prayers, that Christ by his grace may guide my tongue to speak," etc. Later, mentioning the mother of one of these forty Martyrs, he ends the Oration with this prayer: "I beg you, O holy, faithful and blessed woman, pray for me to the Saints, saying: You who triumph in Christ, intercede for the lowliest and most miserable Ephræm, that he may find mercy, and by the grace of Christ may be saved." Again, in his second Sermon or Oration on the praises of the holy Martyrs of Christ, he addresses them in this way: "We ask you most holy Martyrs to intercede with the Lord for us miserable sinners, covered in the filth of negligence, that he would pour his divine grace into us:" and later, near the end of the same speech: "Now you most holy men and glorious Martyrs of God, help me a miserable sinner with your prayers, that in that dreadful hour I may obtain mercy, when the secrets of all hearts shall be made plain. I have become today to you, most holy Martyrs of Christ, like a useless and unskillful cup-bearer: for I have handed to the sons and brothers of your faith a cup of the excellent wine of your warfare, with the excellent table of your victory, filled with all kinds of delicacies. I have tried, with all the affection and desire of my mind, to delight your fathers and brothers, kindred and relations, who come daily to the table. For see, they sing, and with joy and celebration glorify God, who has crowned your virtues by setting on your most sacred heads incorruptible and heavenly crowns; they stand around the sacred relics of your martyrdoms with great joy, wishing for a blessing, and wanting to carry away holy medicines both for the body and the mind. As good disciples and faithful ministers of our kind Lord and Savior, give therefore a blessing to them all: and to me also, though weak and feeble, who having received strength by your merits and intercessions, have with all the devotion of my mind sung a hymn to your praise and glory before your holy relics. So I beg you to stand before the throne of the divine Majesty for me, Ephræm, a vile and miserable sinner, that by your prayers I may deserve to obtain salvation, and with you enjoy eternal happiness through the grace and kindness and mercy of our Lord and Savior Jesus Christ, to whom with the Father and Holy Ghost be praise, honor and glory for ever and ever. Amen."

From what has been quoted from Basil, the two Gregories and Ephræm, we may understand that the worship of Saints was established among the Monks and their admirers in Egypt, Phoenicia, Syria and Cappadocia before the year 378, this being the year in which Basil and Ephræm died. Chrysostom was not much later; he preached at Antioch almost all the time of Theodosius the great, and his Sermons contain many encouragements to this kind of superstition, as may be seen at the end of his Orations on S. Julia, on St. Pelagia, on the Martyr Ignatius, on the Egyptian Martyrs, on Fate and Providence, on the Martyrs in general, on St. Berenice and St. Prosdoce, on Juventinus and Maximus, on the name of Coemetery, etc. Thus in his Sermon on Berenice and Prosdoce: "Perhaps, he says, you are inflamed with no small love towards these Martyrs; therefore with this ardor let us fall down before their relics, let us embrace their coffins. For the coffins of the Martyrs have great virtue, just as the bones of the Martyrs have great power. And let us not only on the day of this festival, but also on other days turn to them, call on them, and beg them to be our patrons: for they have great power and effect, not only while alive, but also after death; and much more after death than before. For now they bear the marks or brands of Christ; and when they show these marks, they can obtain all things from the King. Since then they abound with such power, and have so much friendship with him; we also, when by steady attendance and constant visits we have won a place in their friendship, may by their help obtain the mercy of God."

Constantinople was free of these superstitions until Gregory Nazianzen came there A.D. 379; but in a few years it too was caught up in them. Ruffinus7 tells us that when the Emperor Theodosius was setting out against the tyrant Eugenius, in the year 394, he went around with the Priests and people to all the places of prayer; lay prostrate in haircloth before the shrines of the Martyrs and Apostles, and prayed for help through the intercession of the Saints. Sozomen8 adds that when the Emperor had marched seven miles from Constantinople against Eugenius, he went into a Church he had built to John the Baptist, and called on the Baptist for his help. Chrysostom9 says: "He who is clothed in purple comes to embrace these tombs; and laying aside his dignity, stands begging the Saints to intercede for him with God: and he who goes crowned with a diadem offers his prayers to the tent-maker and the fisherman as his advocates." And in10 another place: "The cities run together to the tombs of the Martyrs, and the people are inflamed with love for them."

This practice of sending relics from place to place to work miracles, and so inflaming the devotion of the nations towards the dead Saints and their relics, and setting up the practice of calling on their souls, lasted only until the middle of the reign of the Emperor Theodosius the great; for he then banned it with the following Edict: "Let no one move a buried body to another place; let no one break up a Martyr, let no one buy or sell one: but they shall have the power, if any saint is buried in any place, to add to it, in his honor, whatever buildings they wish, to be called a Martyr's shrine. Given at Constantinople on the 4th before the Kalends of March, Honorius, our noble boy, and Euodius being consuls, A.C. 386." After that they filled the fields and highways with altars set up to Martyrs, which they claimed to have found through dreams and revelations: and this led to the making of the fourteenth Canon of the fifth Council of Carthage, A.C. 398: "It was also agreed that altars set up everywhere through fields or roads, as if they were memorials of Martyrs, in which no body or relics of Martyrs are shown to be buried, shall be torn down by the bishops in charge of those places, if it can be done. If this is not allowed because of uproar among the people, the people shall at least be warned not to visit those places, so that those who think rightly are not held bound by any superstition there. And no memorial of a Martyr shall be accepted as genuine unless there is a body or certain relics there, or unless the origin of some dwelling, possession or suffering is passed down on the most trustworthy account. For altars set up everywhere through dreams and empty, seeming revelations of any people whatever are to be rejected entirely." These altars were for calling on the Saints or Martyrs buried, or claimed to be buried, under them. First they filled the Churches everywhere with the relics, or pretended relics, of the Martyrs, to call on them in the Churches; and then they filled the fields and highways with altars, to call on them everywhere: and this new religion was set up by the Monks in all the Greek Empire before the expedition of the Emperor Theodosius against Eugenius, and I think before his above-mentioned Edict, A.C. 386.

The same religion of worshiping Mahuzzims quickly spread into the Western Empire too: but Daniel in this Prophecy describes chiefly the things done among the nations included in the body of his third Beast.

Notes to Chap. XIV.

1 Chap. xi. 38, 39

2 Orat. de vita Greg. Thaumaturg. T. 3. p. 574.

3 Vide Hom. 47. in. S. Julian.

4 Epist. 27. ad Eustochium.

5 Edit. Frontonis Ducæi, Tom. 1.

6 Ad. an. 381, Sect. 41.

7 Hist. Eccl. l. 2. c. 23.

8 L. 4. c. 24.

9 Hom. 66. ad. populum, circa finem. & Hom. 8, 27. in Matth. Hom. 42, 43. in Gen. Hom. 1. in 1 Thess.

10 Exposit. in Psal. 114. sub finem.

The end of the first Part.

PART II.

OBSERVATIONS UPON THE APOCALYPSE OF St. JOHN.

Part II, Chapter 1, 1

Introduction, concerning the time when the Apocalypse was written.

Irenæus introduced an opinion that the Apocalypse was written in the time of Domitian; but then he also postponed the writing of some others of the sacred books, and was to place the Apocalypse after them: he might perhaps have heard from his master Polycarp that he had received this book from John about the time of Domitian's death; or indeed John might himself at that time have made a new publication of it, from whence Irenæus might imagine it was then but newly written. Eusebius in his Chronicle and Ecclesiastical History follows Irenoeus; but afterwards1 in his Evangelical Demonstrations, he conjoins the banishment of John into Patmos, with the deaths of Peter and Paul: and so do2 Tertullian and Pseudo-Prochorus, as well as the first author, whoever he was, of that very antient fable, that John was put by Nero into a vessel of hot oil, and coming out unhurt, was banished by him into Patmos. Tho this story be no more than a fiction yet was it founded on a tradition of the first churches, that John was banished into Patmos in the days of Nero. Epiphanius represents the Gospel of John as written in the time of Domitian, and the Apocalypse even before that of Nero.3 Arethas in the beginning of his Commentary quotes the opinion of Irenæus from Eusebius, but follows it not: for he afterwards affirms the Apocalypse was written before the destruction of Jerusalem, and that former commentators had expounded the sixth seal of that destruction.

With the opinion of the first Commentators agrees the tradition of the Churches of Syria, preserved to this day in the title of the Syriac Version of the Apocalypse, which title is this: The Revelation which was made to John the Evangelist by God in the Island Patmos, into which he was banished by Nero the Cæsar. The fame is confirmed by a story told by4 Eusebius out of Clemens Alexandrinus, and other antient authors, concerning a youth, whom John some time after his return from Patmos committed to the care of the Bishop of a certain city. The Bishop educated, instructed, and at length baptized him; but then remitting of his care, the young man thereupon got into ill company, and began by degrees first to revel and grow vitious, then to abuse and spoil those he met in the night; and at last grew so desperate, that his companions turning a band of high-way men, made him their Captain: and, saith5 Chrysostom, he continued their Captain a long time. At length John returning to that city, and hearing what was done, rode to the thief; and, when he out of reverence to his old master fled, John rode after him, recalled him, and restored him to the Church. This is a story of many years, and requires that John should have returned from Patmos rather at the death of Nero than at that of Domitian; because between the death of Domitian and that of John there were but two years and an half; and John in his old age was6 so infirm as to be carried to Church, dying above 90 years old, and therefore could not be then suppos'd able to ride after the thief.

This opinion is further supported by the allusions in the Apocalypse to the Temple and Altar, and holy City, as then standing; and to the Gentiles, who were soon after to tread under foot the holy City and outward Court. 'Tis confirmed also by the style of the Apocalypse itself, which is fuller of Hebraisms than his Gospel. For thence it may be gathered, that it was written when John was newly come out of Judea, where he had been used to the Syriac tongue; and that he did not write his Gospel, till by long converse with the Asiatick Greeks he had left off most of the Hebraisms. It is confirmed also by the many false Apocalypses, as those of Peter, Paul, Thomas, Stephen, Elias and Cerinthus, written in imitation of the true one. For as the many false Gospels, false Acts, and false Epistles were occasioned by true ones; and the writing many false Apocalypses, and ascribing them to Apostles and Prophets, argues that there was a true Apostolic one in great request with the first Christians: so this true one may well be suppos'd to have been written early, that there may be room in the Apostolic age for the writing of so many false ones afterwards, and fathering them upon Peter, Paul, Thomas and others, who were dead before John. Caius, who was contemporary with Tertullian,7 tells us that Cerinthus wrote his Revelations as a great Apostle, and pretended the visions were shewn him by Angels, asserting a millennium of carnal pleasures at Jerusalem after the resurrection; so that his Apocalypse was plainly written in imitation of John's: and yet he lived so early, that8 he resisted the Apostles at Jerusalem in or before the first year of Claudius, that is, 26 years before the death of Nero, and9 died before John.

These reasons may suffice for determining the time; and yet there is one more, which to considering men may seem a good reason, to others not. I'll propound it, and leave it to every man's judgment. The Apocalypse seems to be alluded to in the Epistles of Peter and that to the Hebrews and therefore to have been written before them. Such allusions in the Epistle to the Hebrews, I take to be the discourses concerning the High-Priest in the heavenly Tabernacle, who is both Priest and King, as was Melchisedec; and those concerning the word of God, with the sharp two-edged sword, the [Greek: sabbatismos], or millennial rest, the earth whose end is to be burned, suppose by the lake of fire, the judgment and fiery indignation which shall devour the adversaries, the heavenly City which hath foundations whose builder and maker is God, the cloud of witnesses, mount Sion, heavenly Jerusalem, general assembly, spirits of just men made perfect, viz. by the resurrection, and the shaking of heaven and earth, and removing them, that the new heaven, new earth and new kingdom which cannot be shaken, may remain. In the first of Peter occur these:10 The Revelation of Jesus Christ, twice or thrice repeated;11 the blood of Christ as of a Lamb foreordained before the foundation of the world;12 the spiritual building in heaven, 1 Pet. ii. 5. an inheritance incorruptible and undefiled and that fadeth not away, reserved in heaven for us, who are kept unto the salvation, ready to be revealed in the last time, 1 Pet. i. 4, 5.13 the royal Priesthood,14 the holy Priesthood,15 the judgment beginning at the house of God, and16 the Church at Babylon. These are indeed obscurer allusions; but the second Epistle, from the 19th verse of the first Chapter to the end, seems to be a continued Commentary upon the Apocalypse. There, in writing to the Churches in Asia, to whom John was commanded to send this Prophecy, he tells them, they have a more sure word of Prophecy, to be heeded by them, as a light that shineth in a dark place, until the day dawn, and the day-star arise in their hearts, that is, until they begin to understand it: for no Prophecy, saith he, of the scripture is of any private interpretation; the Prophecy came not in old time by the will of man, but holy men of God spake, as they were moved by the Holy Ghost. Daniel17 himself professes that he understood not his own Prophecies; and therefore the Churches were not to expect the interpretation from their Prophet John, but to study the Prophecies themselves. This is the substance of what Peter says in the first chapter; and then in the second he proceeds to describe, out of this sure word of Prophecy, how there should arise in the Church false Prophets, or false teachers, expressed collectively in the Apocalypse by the name of the false Prophet; who should bring in damnable heresies, even denying the Lord that bought them, which is the character of Antichrist: And many, saith he, shall follow their lusts18; they that dwell on the earth19 shall be deceived by the false Prophet, and be made drunk with the wine of the Whore's fornication, by reason of whom the way of truth shall be blasphemed; for20 the Beast is full of blasphemy: and thro' covetousness shall they with feigned words make merchandize of you; for these are the Merchants of the Earth, who trade with the great Whore, and their merchandize21 is all things of price, with the bodies and souls of men: whose judgment--lingreth not, and their damnation22 slumbreth not, but shall surely come upon them at the last day suddenly, as the flood upon the old world, and fire and brimstone upon Sodom and Gomorrha, when the just shall be delivered23 like Lot; for the Lord knoweth how to deliver the godly out of temptations, and to reserve the unjust unto the day of judgment to be punished, in the lake of fire; but chiefly them that walk after the flesh in the lust of uncleanness,24 being made drunk with the wine of the Whore's fornication; who despise dominion, and are not afraid to blaspheme glories; for the beast opened his mouth against God25 to blaspheme his name and his tabernacle, and them that dwell in heaven. These, as natural brute beasts, the ten-horned beast and two-horned beast, or false Prophet, made to be taken and destroyed, in the lake of fire, blaspheme the things they understand not:--they count it pleasure to riot in the day-time--sporting themselves with their own deceivings, while they feast26 with you, having eyes full of an27 Adulteress: for the kingdoms of the beast live deliciously with the great Whore, and the nations are made drunk with the wine of her fornication. They are gone astray, following the way of Balaam, the son of Beor, who loved the wages of unrighteousness, the false Prophet28 who taught Balak to cast a stumbling-block before the children of Israel. These are, not fountains of living water, but wells without water; not such clouds of Saints as the two witnesses ascend in, but clouds that are carried with a tempest, &c. Thus does the author of this Epistle spend all the second Chapter in describing the qualities of the Apocalyptic Beasts and false Prophet: and then in the third he goes on to describe their destruction more fully, and the future kingdom. He saith, that because the coming of Christ should be long deferred, they should scoff, saying, where is the promise of his coming? Then he describes the sudden coming of the day of the Lord upon them, as a thief in the night, which is the Apocalyptic phrase; and the millennium, or thousand years, which are with God but as a day; the passing away of the old heavens and earth, by a conflagration in the lake of fire, and our looking for new heavens and a new earth, wherein dwelleth righteousness.

Seeing therefore Peter and John were Apostles of the circumcision, it seems to me that they staid with their Churches in Judea and Syria till the Romans made war upon their nation, that is, till the twelfth year of Nero; that they then followed the main body of their flying Churches into Asia, and that Peter went thence by Corinth to Rome; that the Roman Empire looked upon those Churches as enemies, because Jews by birth; and therefore to prevent insurrections, secured their leaders, and banished John into Patmos. It seems also probable to me that the Apocalypse was there composed, and that soon after the Epistle to the Hebrews and those of Peter were written to these Churches, with reference to this Prophecy as what they were particularly concerned in. For it appears by these Epistles, that they were written in times of general affliction and tribulation under the heathens, and by consequence when the Empire made war upon the Jews; for till then the heathens were at peace with the Christian Jews, as well as with the rest. The Epistle to the Hebrews, since it mentions Timothy as related to those Hebrews, must be written to them after their flight into Asia, where Timothy was Bishop; and by consequence after the war began, the Hebrews in Judea being strangers to Timothy. Peter seems also to call Rome Babylon, as well with respect to the war made upon Judea, and the approaching captivity, like that under old Babylon, as with respect to that name in the Apocalypse: and in writing to the strangers scattered thro'out Pontus, Galatia, Cappadocia, Asia and Bithynia, he seems to intimate that they were the strangers newly scattered by the Roman wars; for those were the only strangers there belonging to his care.

Introduction, concerning the time when the Apocalypse was written.

Irenæus started the opinion that the Apocalypse was written in the time of Domitian; but then he also put off the writing of some other sacred books, and placed the Apocalypse after them: he may perhaps have heard from his master Polycarp that he received this book from John around the time of Domitian's death; or John may himself have made a new edition of it at that time, from which Irenæus might have imagined it was only newly written. Eusebius in his Chronicle and Ecclesiastical History follows Irenæus; but afterwards1 in his Evangelial Demonstrations, he joins the banishment of John into Patmos with the deaths of Peter and Paul: and so do2 Tertullian and Pseudo-Prochorus, as well as the first author, whoever he was, of that very ancient fable, that John was put by Nero into a vessel of hot oil, and coming out unhurt, was banished by him into Patmos. Though this story is no more than a fiction, it was founded on a tradition of the first churches, that John was banished into Patmos in the days of Nero. Epiphanius says that the Gospel of John was written in the time of Domitian, and the Apocalypse even before that, in the time of Nero.3 Arethas at the start of his Commentary quotes the opinion of Irenæus from Eusebius, but does not follow it: for he later states that the Apocalypse was written before the destruction of Jerusalem, and that earlier commentators explained the sixth seal as that destruction.

The opinion of the first Commentators agrees with the tradition of the Churches of Syria, preserved to this day in the title of the Syriac Version of the Apocalypse, which title is this: "The Revelation which was made to John the Evangelist by God in the Island Patmos, into which he was banished by Nero the Cæsar." The same is confirmed by a story told by4 Eusebius out of Clemens Alexandrinus, and other ancient authors, concerning a youth, whom John some time after his return from Patmos handed over to the care of the Bishop of a certain city. The Bishop raised him, taught him, and at last baptized him; but then relaxing his care, the young man got into bad company, and began by degrees first to revel and turn vicious, then to attack and rob those he met at night; and at last grew so desperate that his companions, turning into a band of highwaymen, made him their Captain: and, says5 Chrysostom, he stayed their Captain a long time. At last John came back to that city, and hearing what had happened, rode after the thief; and when the young man, out of respect for his old master, ran away, John rode him down, called him back, and restored him to the Church. This is a story of many years, and requires that John returned from Patmos rather at the death of Nero than at that of Domitian; because between the death of Domitian and that of John there were only two years and a half; and John in his old age was6 so weak that he had to be carried to Church, dying above 90 years old, and so could not then be thought able to ride after the thief.

This opinion is further supported by the allusions in the Apocalypse to the Temple and Altar and holy City, as then standing; and to the Gentiles, who were soon after to tread under foot the holy City and the outer Court. It is confirmed also by the style of the Apocalypse itself, which is fuller of Hebrewisms than his Gospel. From this it may be gathered that it was written when John had just come out of Judea, where he had been used to the Syriac language; and that he did not write his Gospel until, after long company with the Asiatic Greeks, he had dropped most of the Hebrewisms. It is confirmed also by the many false Apocalypses, such as those of Peter, Paul, Thomas, Stephen, Elias and Cerinthus, written in imitation of the true one. For just as the many false Gospels, false Acts, and false Epistles were caused by true ones; and the writing of many false Apocalypses, and crediting them to Apostles and Prophets, shows that there was a true Apostolic one in great demand with the first Christians: so this true one may well be supposed to have been written early, so that there is room in the Apostolic age for the writing of so many false ones afterwards, and fathering them on Peter, Paul, Thomas and others, who were dead before John. Caius, who was a contemporary of Tertullian,7 tells us that Cerinthus wrote his Revelations as a great Apostle, and claimed the visions were shown to him by Angels, teaching a millennium of bodily pleasures at Jerusalem after the resurrection; so that his Apocalypse was plainly written in imitation of John's: and yet he lived so early that8 he opposed the Apostles at Jerusalem in or before the first year of Claudius, that is, 26 years before the death of Nero, and9 died before John.

These reasons may be enough to settle the time; and yet there is one more, which to thoughtful people may seem a good reason, to others not. I will set it out, and leave it to every man's judgment. The Apocalypse seems to be alluded to in the Epistles of Peter and in that to the Hebrews, and therefore to have been written before them. Such allusions in the Epistle to the Hebrews, I take to be the passages about the High-Priest in the heavenly Tabernacle, who is both Priest and King, as was Melchisedec; and those about the word of God, with the sharp two-edged sword, the [Greek: sabbatismos], or millennial rest, the earth whose end is to be burned, suppose by the lake of fire, the judgment and fiery anger which shall devour the adversaries, the heavenly City which has foundations whose builder and maker is God, the cloud of witnesses, mount Sion, heavenly Jerusalem, general assembly, spirits of righteous men made perfect, that is, by the resurrection, and the shaking of heaven and earth, and removing them, that the new heaven, new earth and new kingdom which cannot be shaken, may remain. In the first Epistle of Peter occur these:10 The Revelation of Jesus Christ, twice or thrice repeated;11 the blood of Christ as of a Lamb foreordained before the foundation of the world;12 the spiritual building in heaven, 1 Pet. ii. 5. an inheritance incorruptible and undefiled and that does not fade away, reserved in heaven for us, who are kept for the salvation, ready to be revealed in the last time, 1 Pet. i. 4, 5.13 the royal Priesthood,14 the holy Priesthood,15 the judgment beginning at the house of God, and16 the Church at Babylon. These are indeed more obscure allusions; but the second Epistle, from the 19th verse of the first Chapter to the end, seems to be a running Commentary upon the Apocalypse. There, writing to the Churches in Asia, to whom John was commanded to send this Prophecy, he tells them that they have a more sure word of Prophecy, to be heeded by them, as a light that shines in a dark place, until the day dawns, and the day-star rises in their hearts, that is, until they begin to understand it: for no Prophecy, he says, of the scripture is of any private interpretation; the Prophecy did not come in old time by the will of man, but holy men of God spoke, as they were moved by the Holy Spirit. Daniel17 himself says that he did not understand his own Prophecies; and therefore the Churches were not to wait for the interpretation from their Prophet John, but to study the Prophecies themselves. This is the substance of what Peter says in the first chapter; and then in the second he goes on to describe, out of this sure word of Prophecy, how there should arise in the Church false Prophets, or false teachers, named together in the Apocalypse by the name of the false Prophet; who should bring in damnable heresies, even denying the Lord that bought them, which is the character of Antichrist: "And many," he says, "shall follow their lusts18; they that dwell on the earth19 shall be deceived by the false Prophet, and be made drunk with the wine of the Whore's fornication, because of whom the way of truth shall be blasphemed; for20 the Beast is full of blasphemy: and through greed shall they with made-up words trade on you; for these are the Merchants of the Earth, who deal with the great Whore, and their merchandise21 is all things of price, with the bodies and souls of men: whose judgment does not wait, and their damnation22 does not sleep, but shall surely come upon them at the last day suddenly, as the flood upon the old world, and fire and brimstone upon Sodom and Gomorrha, when the righteous shall be rescued23 like Lot; for the Lord knows how to rescue the godly out of temptations, and to keep the unjust until the day of judgment to be punished, in the lake of fire; but above all those who walk after the flesh in the lust of uncleanness,24 being made drunk with the wine of the Whore's fornication; who despise rule, and are not afraid to blaspheme glories; for the beast opened its mouth against God25 to blaspheme his name and his dwelling, and those that live in heaven. These, like unreasoning animals, the ten-horned beast and the two-horned beast, or false Prophet, made to be caught and destroyed in the lake of fire, blaspheme the things they do not understand: they count it a pleasure to riot in the daytime: amusing themselves with their own deceptions, while they feast26 with you, having eyes full of an27 Adulteress: for the kingdoms of the beast live in luxury with the great Whore, and the nations are made drunk with the wine of her fornication. They have gone astray, following the way of Balaam, the son of Beor, who loved the wages of unrighteousness, the false Prophet28 who taught Balak to cast a stumbling-block before the children of Israel. These are not fountains of living water, but wells without water; not such clouds of Saints as the two witnesses rise in, but clouds driven by a storm," etc. So the author of this Epistle spends all the second Chapter describing the qualities of the Apocalyptic Beasts and false Prophet: and then in the third he goes on to describe their destruction more fully, and the future kingdom. He says that because the coming of Christ would be long delayed, they would scoff, saying, where is the promise of his coming? Then he describes the sudden coming of the day of the Lord upon them, as a thief in the night, which is the Apocalyptic phrase; and the millennium, or thousand years, which are with God but as a day; the passing away of the old heavens and earth, by a burning in the lake of fire, and our looking for new heavens and a new earth, in which dwells righteousness.

So since Peter and John were Apostles of the circumcision, it seems to me that they stayed with their Churches in Judea and Syria until the Romans made war on their nation, that is, until the twelfth year of Nero; that they then followed the main body of their fleeing Churches into Asia, and that Peter went from there by Corinth to Rome; that the Roman Empire treated those Churches as enemies because they were Jews by birth; and therefore, to prevent uprisings, arrested their leaders, and banished John into Patmos. It also seems likely to me that the Apocalypse was composed there, and that soon after, the Epistle to the Hebrews and the Epistles of Peter were written to these Churches, with reference to this Prophecy as what they were especially concerned in. For it appears by these Epistles that they were written in times of general affliction and trouble under the heathens, and therefore when the Empire made war on the Jews; for until then the heathens were at peace with the Christian Jews as well as with the rest. The Epistle to the Hebrews, since it mentions Timothy as related to those Hebrews, must be written to them after their flight into Asia, where Timothy was Bishop; and therefore after the war began, the Hebrews in Judea being strangers to Timothy. Peter also seems to call Rome Babylon, both with respect to the war made on Judea and the coming captivity, like that under old Babylon, and with respect to that name in the Apocalypse: and in writing to the strangers scattered throughout Pontus, Galatia, Cappadocia, Asia and Bithynia, he seems to hint that they were the strangers newly scattered by the Roman wars; for those were the only strangers there belonging to his care.

Part II, Chapter 1, 2

This account of things agrees best with history when duly rectified. For29 Justin and30 Irenæus say, that Simon Magus came to Rome in the reign of Claudius, and exercised juggling tricks there. Pseudo-Clemens adds, that he endeavoured there to fly, but broke his neck thro' the prayers of Peter. Whence31 Eusebius, or rather his interpolator Jerom, has recorded, that Peter came to Rome in the second year of Claudius: but32 Cyril Bishop of Jerusalem, Philastrius, Sulpitius, Prosper, Maximus Taurinensis, and Hegesippus junior, place this victory of Peter in the time of Nero. Indeed the antienter tradition was, that Peter came to Rome in the days of this Emperor, as may be seen in33 Lactantius. Chrysostom34 tells us, that the Apostles continued long in Judea, and that then being driven out by the Jews they went to the Gentiles. This dispersion was in the first year of the Jewish war, when the Jews, as Josephus tells us, began to be tumultuous and violent in all places. For all agree that the Apostles were dispersed into several regions at once; and Origen has set down the time,35 telling us that in the beginning of the Judaic war, the Apostles and disciples of our Lord were scattered into all nations; Thomas into Parthia, Andrew into Scythia, John into Asia, and Peter first into Asia, where he preacht to the dispersion, and thence into Italy.36 Dionysius Corinthius saith, that Peter went from Asia by Corinth to Rome, and all antiquity agrees that Peter and Paul were martyred there in the end of Nero's reign. Mark went with Timothy to Rome, 2 Tim. iv. 11. Colos. iv. 10. Sylvanus was Paul's assistant; and by the companions of Peter, mentioned in his first Epistle, we may know that he wrote from Rome; and the Antients generally agree, that in this Epistle he understood Rome by Babylon. His second Epistle was writ to the same dispersed strangers with the first, 2 Pet. iii. 1. and therein he saith, that Paul had writ of the same things to them, and also in his other Epistles, ver. 15, 16. Now as there is no Epistle of Paul to these strangers besides that to the Hebrews, so in this Epistle, chap. x. 11, 12. we find at large all those things which Peter had been speaking of, and here refers to; particularly the passing away of the old heavens and earth, and establishing an inheritance immoveable, with an exhortation to grace, because God, to the wicked, is a consuming fire, Heb. xii. 25, 26, 28, 29.

Having determined the time of writing the Apocalyse, I need not say much about the truth of it, since it was in such request with the first ages, that many endeavoured to imitate it, by feigning Apocalypses under the Apostles names; and the Apostles themselves, as I have just now shewed, studied it, and used its phrases; by which means the style of the Epistle to the Hebrews became more mystical than that of Paul's other Epistles, and the style of John's Gospel more figurative and majestical than that of the other Gospels. I do not apprehend that Christ was called the word of God in any book of the New Testament written before the Apocalypse; and therefore am of opinion, the language was taken from this Prophecy, as were also many other phrases in this Gospel, such as those of Christ's being the light which enlightens the world, the lamb of God which taketh away the sins of the world, the bridegroom, he that testifieth, he that came down from heaven, the Son of God, &c. Justin Martyr, who within thirty years after John's death became a Christian, writes expresly that a certain man among the Christians whose name was John, one of the twelve Apostles of Christ, in the Revelation which was shewed him, prophesied that those who believed in Christ should live a thousand years at Jerusalem. And a few lines before he saith: But I, and as many as are Christians, in all things right in their opinions, believe both that there shall be a resurrection of the flesh, and a thousand years life at Jerusalem built, adorned and enlarged. Which is as much as to say, that all true Christians in that early age received this Prophecy: for in all ages, as many as believed the thousand years, received the Apocalypse as the foundation of their opinion: and I do not know one instance to the contrary. Papias Bishop of Hierapolis, a man of the Apostolic age, and one of John's own disciples, did not only teach the doctrine of the thousand years, but also37 asserted the Apocalypse as written by divine inspiration. Melito, who flourished next after Justin,38 wrote a commentary upon this Prophecy; and he, being Bishop of Sardis one of the seven Churches, could neither be ignorant of their tradition about it, nor impose upon them. Irenæus, who was contemporary with Melito, wrote much upon it, and said, that the number 666 was in all the antient and approved copies; and that he had it also confirmed to him by those who had seen John face to face, meaning no doubt his master Polycarp for one. At the same time39 Theophilus Bishop of Antioch asserted it, and so did Tertullian, Clemens Alexandrinus, and Origen soon after; and their contemporary Hippolytus the Martyr, Metropolitan of the Arabians,40 wrote a commentary upon it. All these were antient men, flourishing within a hundred and twenty years after John's death, and of greatest note in the Churches of those times. Soon after did Victorinus Pictaviensis write another commentary upon it; and he lived in the time of Dioclesian. This may surely suffice to shew how the Apocalypse was received and studied in the first ages: and I do not indeed find any other book of the New Testament so strongly attested, or commented upon so early as this. The Prophecy said: Blessed is he that readeth, and they that hear the words of this Prophecy, and keep the things which are written therein. This animated the first Christians to study it so much, till the difficulty made them remit, and comment more upon the other books of the New Testament. This was the state of the Apocalypse, till the thousand years being misunderstood, brought a prejudice against it: and Dionysius of Alexandria, noting how it abounded with barbarisms, that is with Hebraisms, promoted that prejudice so far, as to cause many Greeks in the fourth century to doubt of the book. But whilst the Latins, and a great part of the Greeks, always retained the Apocalypse, and the rest doubted only out of prejudice, it makes nothing against its authority.

This Prophecy is called the Revelation, with respect to the scripture of truth, which Daniel41 was commanded to shut up and seal, till the time of the end. Daniel sealed it until the time of the end; and until that time comes, the Lamb is opening the seals: and afterwards the two Witnesses prophesy out of it a long time in sack-cloth, before they ascend up to heaven in a cloud. All which is as much as to say, that these Prophecies of Daniel and John should not be understood till the time of the end: but then some should prophesy out of them in an afflicted and mournful state for a long time, and that but darkly, so as to convert but few. But in the very end, the Prophecy should be so far interpreted as to convince many. Then, saith Daniel, many shall run to and fro, and knowledge shall be encreased. For the Gospel must be preached in all nations before the great tribulation, and end of the world. The palm-bearing multitude, which come out of this great tribulation, cannot be innumerable out of all nations, unless they be made so by the preaching of the Gospel before it comes. There must be a stone cut out of a mountain without hands, before it can fall upon the toes of the Image, and become a great mountain and fill the earth. An Angel must fly thro' the midst of heaven with the everlasting Gospel to preach to all nations, before Babylon falls, and the Son of man reaps his harvest. The two Prophets must ascend up to heaven in a cloud, before the kingdoms of this world become the kingdoms of Christ. 'Tis therefore a part of this Prophecy, that it should not be understood before the last age of the world; and therefore it makes for the credit of the Prophecy, that it is not yet understood. But if the last age, the age of opening these things, be now approaching, as by the great successes of late Interpreters it seems to be, we have more encouragement than ever to look into these things. If the general preaching of the Gospel be approaching, it is to us and our posterity that those words mainly belong:42 In the time of the end the wise shall understand, but none of the wicked shall understand.43 Blessed is he that readeth, and they that hear the words of this Prophecy, and keep those things which are written therein.

The folly of Interpreters has been, to foretel times and things by this Prophecy, as if God designed to make them Prophets. By this rashness they have not only exposed themselves, but brought the Prophecy also into contempt. The design of God was much otherwise. He gave this and the Prophecies of the Old Testament, not to gratify men's curiosities by enabling them to foreknow things, but that after they were fulfilled they might be interpreted by the event, and his own Providence, not the Interpreters, be then manifested thereby to the world. For the event of things predicted many ages before, will then be a convincing argument that the world is governed by providence. For as the few and obscure Prophecies concerning Christ's first coming were for setting up the Christian religion, which all nations have since corrupted; so the many and clear Prophecies concerning the things to be done at Christ's second coming, are not only for predicting but also for effecting a recovery and re-establishment of the long-lost truth, and setting up a kingdom wherein dwells righteousness. The event will prove the Apocalypse; and this Prophecy, thus proved and understood, will open the old Prophets, and all together will make known the true religion, and establish it. For he that will understand the old Prophets, must begin with this; but the time is not yet come for understanding them perfectly, because the main revolution predicted in them is not yet come to pass. In the days of the voice of the seventh Angel, when he shall begin to sound, the mystery of God shall be finished, as he hath declared to his servants the Prophets: and then the kingdoms of this world shall become the kingdoms of our Lord and his Christ, and he shall reign for ever, Apoc. x. 7. xi. 15. There is already so much of the Prophecy fulfilled, that as many as will take pains in this study, may see sufficient instances of God's providence: but then the signal revolutions predicted by all the holy Prophets, will at once both turn mens eyes upon considering the predictions, and plainly interpret them. Till then we must content ourselves with interpreting what hath been already fulfilled.

Amongst the Interpreters of the last age there is scarce one of note who hath not made some discovery worth knowing; and thence I seem to gather that God is about opening these mysteries. The success of others put me upon considering it; and if I have done any thing which may be useful to following writers, I have my design.

Notes to Chap. I.

1 Dem. Evang. l. 3.

2 Vid. Pamelium in notis ad Tertull. de Præscriptionbus, n. 215 & Hieron l. 1. contra Jovinianum, c. 14. Edit.Erasmi.

3 Areth. c. 18, 19.

4 Hist. Eccl. l. 3. c. 23.

5 Chrysost. ad Theodorum lapsum.

6 Hieron. in Epist. ad Gal. l. 3. c. 6.

7 Apud Euseb. Eccl. Hist. l. 3. c. 28. Edit. Valesii.

8 Epiphan. Hæres. 28.

9 Hieron. adv. Lucif.

10 1 Pet. i. 7, 13. iv. 13. & v. 1.

11 Apoc. xiii. 8.

12 Apoc. xxi.

13 Apoc. i. 6. & v. 10.

14 Apoc. xx. 6.

15 Apoc. xx. 4, 12.

16 Apoc. xvii.

17 Dan. viii. 15, 16, 27. & xii. 8, 9.

18 [Greek: aselgeias], in many of the best MSS.

19 Apoc. xiii. 7, 12.

20 Apoc. xiii. 1, 5, 6.

21 Apoc. xviii. 12, 13.

22 Apoc. xix. 20.

23 Apoc. xxi. 3, 4.

24 Apoc. ix. 21. and xvii. 2.

25 Apoc. xiii. 6.

26 Apoc. xviii. 3, 7, 9.

27 [Greek: moichalidos].

28 Apoc. ii. 14.

29 Apol. ad Antonin. Pium.

30 Hæres. l. 1. c. 20. Vide etiam Tertullianum, Apol. c. 13.

31 Euseb. Chron.

32 Cyril Catech. 6. Philastr. de hæres. cap. 30. Sulp. Hist. l. 2. Prosper de promiss. dimid. temp. cap. 13. Maximus serm. 5. in Natal. Apost. Hegesip. l. 2. c. 2.

33 Lactant de mortib. Persec. c. 2.

34 Hom. 70. in Matt. c. 22.

35 Apud Euseb. Eccl. Hist. l. 2. c. 25.

36 Euseb. Hist. l. 2. c. 25.

37 Arethas in Proæm. comment. in Apoc.

38 Euseb. Hist. l. 4. cap. 26. Hieron.

39 Euseb. Hist. l. 4. c. 24.

40 Hieron.

41 Dan. x. 21. xii. 4, 9.

42 Dan. xii. 4, 10.

43 Apoc. i. 3.

This account fits the history best once it is corrected.29 Justin and30 Irenaeus say that Simon Magus came to Rome in the reign of Claudius and did his juggling tricks there. Pseudo-Clemens adds that he tried to fly there, but broke his neck through Peter's prayers. So31 Eusebius, or rather his interpolator Jerom, recorded that Peter came to Rome in the second year of Claudius. But32 Cyril, Bishop of Jerusalem, Philastrius, Sulpitius, Prosper, Maximus Taurinensis, and Hegesippus junior place this victory of Peter in the time of Nero. The older tradition was that Peter came to Rome in the days of this emperor, as33 Lactantius shows.34 Chrysostom tells us that the Apostles stayed in Judea a long time, and that after the Jews drove them out they went to the Gentiles. This scattering began in the first year of the Jewish war, when the Jews, as Josephus tells us, started riots and turns of violence everywhere. All agree that the Apostles were scattered into several regions at once, and Origen fixes the time,35 telling us that at the beginning of the Jewish war the Apostles and disciples of our Lord were scattered into all nations: Thomas into Parthia, Andrew into Scythia, John into Asia, and Peter first into Asia, where he preached to the scattered people, and then into Italy.36 Dionysius Corinthius says that Peter went from Asia by way of Corinth to Rome, and all antiquity agrees that Peter and Paul were martyred there at the end of Nero's reign. Mark went with Timothy to Rome, 2 Tim. iv. 11. Colos. iv. 10. Sylvanus was Paul's assistant. From the companions of Peter named in his first Epistle we can tell that he wrote from Rome, and the ancients generally agree that in this Epistle he meant Rome when he wrote Babylon. His second Epistle went to the same scattered strangers as the first, 2 Pet. iii. 1. In it he says that Paul had written to them about the same things, and also in his other Epistles, ver. 15, 16. Paul wrote no Epistle to these strangers except the one to the Hebrews, and in that Epistle, chap. x. 11, 12, we find at length everything Peter had been speaking of and refers to here: the passing away of the old heavens and earth, the establishment of an unmovable inheritance, and the call to grace, because God is a consuming fire to the wicked, Heb. xii. 25, 26, 28, 29.

Now that I have settled when the Apocalypse was written, I need say little about its truth. It was so highly regarded in the early ages that many tried to copy it, writing fake Apocalypses under the names of the Apostles. The Apostles themselves, as I have just shown, studied it and used its phrases. Because of that, the Epistle to the Hebrews became more mystical in style than Paul's other Epistles, and John's Gospel became more figurative and majestic than the other Gospels. I do not think Christ was called the word of God in any book of the New Testament written before the Apocalypse, so I believe that language was taken from this Prophecy. Many other phrases in this Gospel came from it too, such as Christ being the light which enlightens the world, the lamb of God who takes away the sins of the world, the bridegroom, he who testifies, he who came down from heaven, the Son of God, and so on. Justin Martyr became a Christian within thirty years after John's death. He states plainly that a certain man among the Christians, named John, one of the twelve Apostles of Christ, prophesied in the Revelation shown to him that those who believed in Christ would live a thousand years at Jerusalem. A few lines earlier he writes: "But I, and as many as are Christians, who are right in all their opinions, believe both that there will be a resurrection of the flesh and a thousand years of life in a Jerusalem built, adorned and enlarged." That amounts to saying that all true Christians in that early age received this Prophecy. In every age, everyone who believed the thousand years received the Apocalypse as the foundation of that belief, and I do not know a single exception. Papias, Bishop of Hierapolis, a man of the Apostolic age and one of John's own disciples, not only taught the doctrine of the thousand years but also37 affirmed that the Apocalypse was written by divine inspiration. Melito, who came right after Justin,38 wrote a commentary on this Prophecy. He was Bishop of Sardis, one of the seven Churches, so he could neither be ignorant of their tradition about it nor deceive them. Irenaeus, a contemporary of Melito, wrote a great deal about it. He said the number 666 was in all the ancient and approved copies, and that people who had seen John face to face also confirmed it for him, meaning no doubt his master Polycarp among them. At the same time39 Theophilus, Bishop of Antioch, affirmed it, and so did Tertullian, Clemens Alexandrinus, and Origen soon after. Their contemporary Hippolytus the Martyr, Metropolitan of the Arabians,40 wrote a commentary on it. All these were early men, living within a hundred and twenty years after John's death, and they were the most noted figures in the Churches of those times. Soon after, Victorinus Pictaviensis wrote another commentary on it, and he lived in the time of Dioclesian. This is surely enough to show how the Apocalypse was received and studied in the first ages. I know of no other book of the New Testament that is so strongly attested, or commented on so early, as this one. The Prophecy said: "Blessed is the one who reads, and those who hear the words of this Prophecy and keep what is written in it." This is what drove the first Christians to study it so hard, until its difficulty made them ease off and comment more on the other books of the New Testament. That was the state of the Apocalypse until the thousand years was misunderstood and a prejudice turned against it. Dionysius of Alexandria noted how full it is of barbarisms, that is, Hebraisms, and he did much to spread that prejudice, so that many Greeks in the fourth century came to doubt the book. But the Latins, and a large part of the Greeks, always kept the Apocalypse, and the rest doubted only out of prejudice, so that does nothing to weaken its authority.

This Prophecy is called the Revelation in relation to the scripture of truth that Daniel41 was commanded to shut up and seal until the time of the end. Daniel sealed it until the time of the end, and until that time comes the Lamb is opening the seals. After that, the two Witnesses prophesy out of it for a long time in sackcloth before they ascend to heaven in a cloud. All of this means that these Prophecies of Daniel and John would not be understood until the time of the end. Some would then prophesy from them in an afflicted and mournful state for a long time, and only in a dark way, so that they would convert few. But in the very end, the Prophecy would be interpreted far enough to convince many. Then, Daniel says, many will run back and forth, and knowledge will increase. The Gospel must be preached in all nations before the great tribulation and the end of the world. The crowd with palm branches coming out of this great tribulation cannot be a countless number from all nations unless the preaching of the Gospel before it arrives makes them so. A stone must be cut out of a mountain without hands before it can fall on the toes of the Image, become a great mountain, and fill the earth. An Angel must fly through the middle of heaven with the everlasting Gospel to preach to all nations before Babylon falls and the Son of man reaps his harvest. The two Prophets must ascend to heaven in a cloud before the kingdoms of this world become the kingdoms of Christ. So part of this Prophecy is that it would not be understood before the last age of the world, and that actually supports the credit of the Prophecy, since it is not yet understood. But if the last age, the age of opening these things, is now approaching, as the great success of recent interpreters seems to show, we have more encouragement than ever to look into these things. If the general preaching of the Gospel is approaching, then those words mainly belong to us and our posterity:42 "In the time of the end the wise will understand, but none of the wicked will understand."43 "Blessed is the one who reads, and those who hear the words of this Prophecy and keep those things which are written in it."

The folly of interpreters has been to predict times and events from this Prophecy, as if God meant to make them prophets. By this rashness they not only exposed themselves but also brought the Prophecy into contempt. God's plan was very different. He gave this Prophecy and the Prophecies of the Old Testament not to feed men's curiosity by letting them foresee things, but so that after they were fulfilled they could be read by what happened, and his own Providence, not the interpreters, would then be shown to the world. For the outcome of things predicted many ages before will then be a convincing argument that the world is governed by providence. The few and obscure Prophecies about Christ's first coming were there to set up the Christian religion, which all nations have since corrupted. The many and clear Prophecies about the things to be done at Christ's second coming are not only for predicting but also for bringing about the recovery and re-establishment of long-lost truth, and for setting up a kingdom where righteousness dwells. The outcome will prove the Apocalypse, and this Prophecy, once proved and understood, will open the old Prophets; and together they will make the true religion known and establish it. Anyone who wants to understand the old Prophets must start with this one, but the time has not yet come to understand them perfectly, because the main change predicted in them has not yet happened. In the days of the voice of the seventh Angel, when he begins to sound, the mystery of God will be finished, as he has declared to his servants the Prophets; and then the kingdoms of this world will become the kingdoms of our Lord and his Christ, and he will reign forever, Apoc. x. 7. xi. 15. So much of the Prophecy is already fulfilled that anyone who takes the trouble to study it can see clear instances of God's providence. But then the striking revolutions predicted by all the holy Prophets will at once turn people's eyes onto the predictions and plainly interpret them. Until then we must make do with interpreting what has already been fulfilled.

Among the interpreters of the last age there is hardly one of note who has not made some discovery worth knowing, and from that I gather that God is about to open these mysteries. The success of others led me to study the question. If I have done anything that may be useful to later writers, I have achieved my purpose.

Notes to Chap. I.

1 Dem. Evang. l. 3.

2 Vid. Pamelium in notis ad Tertull. de Præscriptionbus, n. 215 & Hieron l. 1. contra Jovinianum, c. 14. Edit.Erasmi.

3 Areth. c. 18, 19.

4 Hist. Eccl. l. 3. c. 23.

5 Chrysost. ad Theodorum lapsum.

6 Hieron. in Epist. ad Gal. l. 3. c. 6.

7 Apud Euseb. Eccl. Hist. l. 3. c. 28. Edit. Valesii.

8 Epiphan. Hæres. 28.

9 Hieron. adv. Lucif.

10 1 Pet. i. 7, 13. iv. 13. & v. 1.

11 Apoc. xiii. 8.

12 Apoc. xxi.

13 Apoc. i. 6. & v. 10.

14 Apoc. xx. 6.

15 Apoc. xx. 4, 12.

16 Apoc. xvii.

17 Dan. viii. 15, 16, 27. & xii. 8, 9.

18 The Greek word "aselgeias" in many of the best manuscripts.

19 Apoc. xiii. 7, 12.

20 Apoc. xiii. 1, 5, 6.

21 Apoc. xviii. 12, 13.

22 Apoc. xix. 20.

23 Apoc. xxi. 3, 4.

24 Apoc. ix. 21. and xvii. 2.

25 Apoc. xiii. 6.

26 Apoc. xviii. 3, 7, 9.

27 The Greek word "moichalidos".

28 Apoc. ii. 14.

29 Apol. ad Antonin. Pium.

30 Hæres. l. 1. c. 20. Vide etiam Tertullianum, Apol. c. 13.

31 Euseb. Chron.

32 Cyril Catech. 6. Philastr. de hæres. cap. 30. Sulp. Hist. l. 2. Prosper de promiss. dimid. temp. cap. 13. Maximus serm. 5. in Natal. Apost. Hegesip. l. 2. c. 2.

33 Lactant de mortib. Persec. c. 2.

34 Hom. 70. in Matt. c. 22.

35 Apud Euseb. Eccl. Hist. l. 2. c. 25.

36 Euseb. Hist. l. 2. c. 25.

37 Arethas in Proæm. comment. in Apoc.

38 Euseb. Hist. l. 4. cap. 26. Hieron.

39 Euseb. Hist. l. 4. c. 24.

40 Hieron.

41 Dan. x. 21. xii. 4, 9.

42 Dan. xii. 4, 10.

43 Apoc. i. 3.

Part II, Chapter 2, 1

Of the relation which the Apocalypse of John hath to the Book of the Law of Moses, and to the worship of God in the Temple.

The Apocalypse of John is written in the same style and language with the Prophecies of Daniel, and hath the same relation to them which they have to one another, so that all of them together make but one complete Prophecy; and in like manner it consists of two parts, an introductory Prophecy, and an Interpretation thereof.

The Prophecy is distinguish'd into seven successive parts, by the opening of the seven seals of the book which Daniel was commanded to seal up: and hence it is called the Apocalypse or Revelation of Jesus Christ. The time of the seventh seal is sub-divided into eight successive parts by the silence in heaven for half an hour, and the sounding of seven trumpets successively: and the seventh trumpet sounds to the battle of the great day of God Almighty, whereby the kingdoms of this world become the kingdoms of the Lord and of his Christ, and those are destroyed that destroyed the earth.

The Interpretation begins with the words, And the temple of God was opened in heaven, and there was seen in his temple the Ark of his Testament: and it continues to the end of the Prophecy. The Temple is the scene of the visions, and the visions in the Temple relate to the feast of the seventh month: for the feasts of the Jews were typical of things to come. The Passover related to the first coming of Christ, and the feasts of the seventh month to his second coming: his first coming being therefore over before this Prophecy was given, the feasts of the seventh month are here only alluded unto.

On the first day of that month, in the morning, the High-Priest dressed the lamps: and in allusion hereunto, this Prophecy begins with a vision of one like the Son of man in the High-Priest's habit, appearing as it were in the midst of the seven golden candlesticks, or over against the midst of them, dressing the lamps, which appeared like a rod of seven stars in his right hand: and this dressing was perform'd by the sending seven Epistles to the Angels or Bishops of the seven Churches of Asia, which in the primitive times illuminated the Temple or Church Catholick. These Epistles contain admonitions against the approaching Apostacy, and therefore relate to the times when the Apostacy began to work strongly, and before it prevailed. It began to work in the Apostles days, and was to continue working till the man of sin should be revealed. It began to work in the disciples of Simon, Menander, Carpocrates, Cerinthas, and such sorts of men as had imbibed the metaphysical philosophy of the Gentiles and Cabalistical Jews, and were thence called Gnosticks. John calls them Antichrists, saying that in his days there were many Antichrists. But these being condemned by the Apostles, and their immediate disciples, put the Churches in no danger during the opening of the first four seals. The visions at the opening of these seals relate only to the civil affairs of the heathen Roman Empire. So long the Apostolic traditions prevailed, and preserved the Church in its purity: and therefore the affairs of the Church do not begin to be considered in this Prophecy before the opening of the fifth seal. She began then to decline, and to want admonitions; and therefore is admonished by these Epistles, till the Apostacy prevailed and took place, which was at the opening of the seventh seal. The admonitions therefore in these seven Epistles relate to the state of the Church in the times of the fifth and sixth seals. At the opening of the fifth seal, the Church is purged from hypocrites by a great persecution. At the opening of the sixth, that which letted is taken out of the way, namely the heathen Roman Empire. At the opening of the seventh, the man of sin is revealed. And to these times the seven Epistles relate.

The seven Angels, to whom these Epistles were written, answer to the seven Amarc-holim, who were Priests and chief Officers of the Temple, and had jointly the keys of the gates of the Temple, with those of the Treasuries, and the direction, appointment and oversight of all things in the Temple.

After the lamps were dresed, John saw the door of the Temple opened; and by the voice as it were of a trumpet, was called up to the eastern gate of the great court, to see the visions: and behold a throne was set, viz. the mercy-seat upon the Ark of the Testament, which the Jews respected as the throne of God between the Cherubims, Exod. xxv. 2. Psal. xcix. 1. And he that sat on it was to look upon like Jasper and Sardine stone, that is, of an olive colour, the people of Judea being of that colour. And, the Sun being then in the East, a rainbow was about the throne, the emblem of glory. And round about the throne were four and twenty seats; answering to the chambers of the four and twenty Princes of the Priests, twelve on the south side, and twelve on the north side of the Priests Court. And upon the seats were four and twenty Elders sitting, clothed in white rayment, with crowns on their heads; representing the Princes of the four and twenty courses of the Priests clothed in linen. And out of the throne proceeded lightnings and thunderings, and voices, viz. the flashes of the fire upon the Altar at the morning-sacrifice, and the thundering voices of those that sounded the trumpets, and sung at the Eastern gate of the Priests Court; for these being between John and the throne appeared to him as proceeding from the throne. And there were seven lamps of fire burning, in the Temple, before the throne, which are the seven spirits of God, or Angels of the seven Churches, represented in the beginning of this Prophecy by seven stars. And before the throne was a sea of glass clear as chrystal; the brazen sea between the porch of the Temple and the Altar, filled with clear water. And in the midst of the throne, and round about the throne, were four Beasts full of eyes before and behind: that is, one Beast before the throne and one behind it, appearing to John as in the midst of the throne, and one on either side in the circle about it, to represent by the multitude of their eyes the people standing in the four sides of the peoples court. And the first Beast was like a lion, and the second was like a calf, and the third had the face of a man, and the fourth was like a flying eagle. The people of Israel in the wilderness encamped round about the tabernacle, and on the east side were three tribes under the standard of Judah, on the west were three tribes under the standard of Ephraim, on the south were three tribes under the standard of Reuben, and on the north were three tribes under the standard of Dan, Numb. ii. And the standard of Judah was a Lion, that of Ephraim an Ox, that of Reuben a Man, and that of Dan an Eagle, as the Jews affirm. Whence were framed the hieroglyphicks of Cherubims and Seraphims, to represent the people of Israel. A Cherubim had one body with four faces, the faces of a Lion, an Ox, a Man and an Eagle, looking to the four winds of heaven, without turning about, as in Ezekiel's vision, chap. i. And four Seraphims had the same four faces with four bodies, one face to every body. The four Beasts are therefore four Seraphims standing in the four sides of the peoples court; the first in the eastern side with the head of a Lion, the second in the western side with the head of an Ox, the third in the southern side with the head of a Man, the fourth in the northern side with the head of an Eagle: and all four signify together the twelve tribes of Israel, out of whom the hundred forty and four thousand were sealed, Apoc. vii. 4. And the four Beasts had each of them six wings, two to a tribe, in all twenty and four wings, answering to the twenty and four stations of the people. And they were full of eyes within, or under their wings. And they rest not day and night, or at the morning and evening-sacrifices, saying, holy, holy, holy Lord God Almighty, which was, and is, and is to come. These animals are therefore the Seraphims, which appeared to Isaiah1 in a vision like this of the Apocalypse. For there also the Lord sat upon a throne in the temple; and the Seraphims each with six wings cried, Holy, holy, holy Lord God of hosts. And when those animals give glory and honour and thanks to him that sitteth upon the throne, who liveth for ever and ever, the four and twenty Elders go into the Temple, and there fall down before him that sitteth on the throne, and worship him that liveth for ever and ever, and cast their crowns before the throne, saying, Thou art worthy, O Lord, to receive glory and honour and power: for thou hast created all things, and for thy pleasure they are and were created. At the morning and evening-sacrifices, so soon as the sacrifice was laid upon the Altar, and the drink-offering began to be poured out, the trumpets sounded, and the Levites sang by course three times; and every time when the trumpets sounded, the people fell down and worshiped. Three times therefore did the people worship; to express which number, the Beasts cry Holy, holy, holy: and the song being ended, the people prayed standing, till the solemnity was finished. In the mean time the Priests went into the Temple, and there fell down before him that sat upon the throne, and worshiped.

And John saw, in the right hand of him that sat upon the throne, a book written within and on the backside, sealed with seven seals, viz. the book which Daniel was commanded to seal up, and which is here represented by the prophetic book of the Law laid up on the right side of the Ark, as it were in the right hand of him that sat on the throne: for the festivals and ceremonies of the Law prescribed to the people in this book, adumbrated those things which were predicted in the book of Daniel; and the writing within and on the backside of this book, relates to the synchronal Prophecies.2 And none was found worthy to open the book but the Lamb of God. And lo, in the midst of the throne and of the four Beasts, and in the midst of the Elders, that is, at the foot of the Altar, stood a lamb as it had been slain, the morning-sacrifice; having seven horns, which are the seven Churches, and seven eyes, which are the seven spirits of God sent forth into all the earth. And he came, and took the book out of the right hand of him that sat upon the throne: And when he had taken the book, the four Beasts and four and twenty Elders fell down before the Lamb, having every one of them harps, and golden vials full of odours, which are the prayers of saints. And they sung a new song, saying, Thou art worthy to take the book, and to open the seals thereof: for thou wast slain, and hast redeemed us to God by thy blood out of every kindred, and tongue, and people, and nation; and hast made us, unto our God, Kings and Priests, and we shall reign on the earth. The Beasts and Elders therefore represent the primitive Christians of all nations; and the worship of these Christians in their Churches is here represented under the form of worshiping God and the Lamb in the Temple: God for his benefaction in creating all things, and the Lamb for his benefaction in redeeming us with his blood: God as sitting upon the throne and living for ever, and the Lamb as exalted above all by the merits of his death. And I heard, saith John, the voice of many Angels round about the throne, and the Beasts and the Elders: and the number of them was ten thousand times ten thousand, and thousands of thousands; saying with a loud voice, Worthy is the Lamb that was slain to receive power, and riches, and wisdom, and strength, and honour, and glory, and blessing. And every creature which is in heaven, and on the earth, and under the earth, and such as are in the sea, and all that are in them, heard I, saying, Blessing, honour, glory, and power, be unto him that sitteth upon the throne, and unto the Lamb for ever and ever. And the four Beasts said, Amen. And the four and twenty Elders fell down and worshiped him that liveth for ever and ever. This was the worship of the primitive Christians.

It was the custom for the High-Priest, seven days before the fast of the seventh month, to continue constantly in the Temple, and study the book of the Law, that he might be perfect in it against the day of expiation; wherein the service, which was various and intricate, was wholly to be performed by himself; part of which service was reading the Law to the people: and to promote his studying it, there were certain Priests appointed by the Sanhedrim to be with him those seven days in one of his chambers in the Temple, and there to discourse with him about the Law, and read it to him, and put him in mind of reading and studying it himself. This his opening and reading the Law those seven days, is alluded unto in the Lamb's opening the seals. We are to conceive that those seven days begin in the evening before each day; for the Jews began their day in the evening, and that the solemnity of the fast begins in the morning of the seventh day.

The seventh seal was therefore opened on the day of expiation, and then there was silence in heaven for half an hour. And an Angel, the High-Priest, stood at the Altar, having a golden Censer; and there was given him much incense, that he should offer it with the prayers of all Saints, upon the golden Altar which was before the throne. The custom was on other days, for one of the Priests to take fire from the great Altar in a silver Censer; but on this day, for the High-Priest to take fire from the great Altar in a golden Censer: and when he was come down from the great Altar, he took incense from one of the Priests who brought it to him, and went with it to the golden Altar: and while he offered the incense, the people prayed without in silence, which is the silence in heaven for half an hour. When the High-Priest had laid the incense on the Altar, he carried a Censer of it burning in his hand, into the most holy place before the Ark. And the smoke of the incense, with the prayers of the Saints, ascended up before God out of the Angel's hand. On other days there was a certain measure of incense for the golden Altar: on this day there was a greater quantity for both the Altar and the most holy Place, and therefore it is called much incense. After this the Angel took the Censer, and filled it with fire from the great Altar, and cast it into the earth; that is, by the hands of the Priests who belong to his mystical body, he cast it to the earth without the Temple, for burning the Goat which was the Lord's lot. And at this and other concomitant sacrifices, until the evening-sacrifice was ended, there were voices, and thundrings, and lightnings, and an earthquake; that is, the voice of the High-Priest reading the Law to the people, and other voices and thundrings from the trumpets and temple-musick at the sacrifices, and lightnings from the fire of the Altar.

Of the relation which the Apocalypse of John has to the Book of the Law of Moses, and to the worship of God in the Temple.

The Apocalypse of John is written in the same style and language as the Prophecies of Daniel, and it relates to them the way they relate to one another, so that all of them together make one complete Prophecy. In the same way it has two parts: an introductory Prophecy and its Interpretation.

The opening of the seven seals of the book that Daniel was commanded to seal up divides the Prophecy into seven parts in order, and from this it is called the Apocalypse or Revelation of Jesus Christ. The time of the seventh seal is divided into eight parts in order: the silence in heaven for half an hour, and then the seven trumpets sounding one after another. The seventh trumpet sounds for the battle of the great day of God Almighty, when the kingdoms of this world become the kingdoms of the Lord and of his Christ, and those who destroyed the earth are destroyed.

The Interpretation begins with the words, "And the temple of God was opened in heaven, and there was seen in his temple the Ark of his Testament," and it runs to the end of the Prophecy. The Temple is the scene of the visions, and the visions in the Temple concern the feast of the seventh month, because the feasts of the Jews were shapes of things to come. The Passover stood for the first coming of Christ, and the feasts of the seventh month for his second coming. His first coming was already over before this Prophecy was given, so the feasts of the seventh month are only referred to here.

On the first day of that month, in the morning, the High-Priest trimmed the lamps. In connection with this, the Prophecy begins with a vision of one like the Son of man in the High-Priest's clothes, standing in the middle of the seven golden candfor fear thaticks, or right across from their middle, trimming the lamps, which appeared like a rod of seven stars in his right hand. This trimming was carried out by sending seven Epistles to the Angels or Bishops of the seven Churches of Asia, which in the early times gave light to the Temple or the universal Church. These Epistles warn against the coming Apostasy, so they concern the times when the Apostasy began to work hard, and the time before it took over. It began to work in the days of the Apostles, and it would keep working until the man of sin was revealed. It began in the disciples of Simon, Menander, Carpocrates, Cerinthas, and men like them who had taken in the metaphysical philosophy of the Gentiles and the Cabalistic Jews, and were for that reason called Gnostics. John calls them Antichrists, saying that in his days there were many Antichrists. But the Apostles and their own disciples condemned these people, and that left the Churches in no danger while the first four seals were being opened. The visions at the opening of those seals concern only the civil affairs of the pagan Roman Empire. As long as that lasted, the Apostolic traditions held and kept the Church pure, so the affairs of the Church are not considered in this Prophecy before the fifth seal is opened. The Church then began to decline and to need warnings, so these Epistles warn it until the Apostasy won out and took its place at the opening of the seventh seal. The warnings in these seven Epistles therefore concern the state of the Church in the times of the fifth and sixth seals. At the opening of the fifth seal, a great persecution purges the Church of hypocrites. At the opening of the sixth, whatever was holding things back is taken out of the way, namely the pagan Roman Empire. At the opening of the seventh, the man of sin is revealed. The seven Epistles belong to these times.

The seven Angels to whom these Epistles were written correspond to the seven Amarc-holim, who were Priests and chief Officers of the Temple. Together they held the keys of the gates of the Temple and of the Treasuries, and they directed, appointed, and oversaw everything in the Temple.

After the lamps were trimmed, John saw the door of the Temple open, and a voice like a trumpet called him up to the eastern gate of the great court to see the visions. And look, a throne was set: that is, the mercy-seat on the Ark of the Testament, which the Jews treated as the throne of God between the Cherubims, Exod. xxv. 2. Psal. xcix. 1. The one who sat on it looked like Jasper and Sardine stone, that is, olive-colored, and the people of Judea were that color. The Sun was then in the East, and a rainbow was around the throne, the emblem of glory. Around the throne were four and twenty seats, answering to the chambers of the four and twenty Princes of the Priests, twelve on the south side and twelve on the north side of the Priests Court. On the seats sat four and twenty Elders, clothed in white clothing, with crowns on their heads, representing the Princes of the four and twenty courses of the Priests, clothed in linen. Out of the throne came lightnings and thunderings and voices: the flashes of the fire on the Altar at the morning-sacrifice, and the thundering voices of those who sounded the trumpets and sang at the eastern gate of the Priests Court. Since these were between John and the throne, they looked to him as if they came from the throne. In the Temple, before the throne, were seven lamps of fire burning. These are the seven spirits of God, or the Angels of the seven Churches, shown at the start of this Prophecy by seven stars. Before the throne was a sea of glass clear as crystal: the brazen sea between the porch of the Temple and the Altar, filled with clear water. In the middle of the throne, and around the throne, were four Beasts full of eyes in front and behind: one Beast in front of the throne and one behind it, which to John appeared as in the middle of the throne, and one on each side in the circle around it, so that the multitude of their eyes represented the people standing on the four sides of the people's court. The first Beast was like a lion, the second was like a calf, the third had the face of a man, and the fourth was like a flying eagle. In the wilderness the people of Israel camped around the tabernacle: on the east side were three tribes under the standard of Judah, on the west three tribes under the standard of Ephraim, on the south three tribes under the standard of Reuben, and on the north three tribes under the standard of Dan, Numb. ii. The standard of Judah was a Lion, that of Ephraim an Ox, that of Reuben a Man, and that of Dan an Eagle, as the Jews say. From this were formed the pictures of Cherubims and Seraphims, to represent the people of Israel. A Cherubim had one body with four faces: the faces of a Lion, an Ox, a Man and an Eagle, looking toward the four winds of heaven without turning around, as in Ezekiel's vision, chap. i. Four Seraphims had those same four faces with four bodies, one face to each body. So the four Beasts are four Seraphims standing on the four sides of the people's court: the first on the east side with the head of a Lion, the second on the west side with the head of an Ox, the third on the south side with the head of a Man, and the fourth on the north side with the head of an Eagle. Together the four stand for the twelve tribes of Israel, out of whom the hundred forty and four thousand were sealed, Apoc. vii. 4. Each of the four Beasts had six wings, two for a tribe, twenty and four wings in all, answering to the twenty and four stations of the people. They were full of eyes within, or under their wings. They do not rest day and night, or at the morning and evening-sacrifices, saying, "Holy, holy, holy Lord God Almighty, which was, and is, and is to come." These animals are therefore the Seraphims who appeared to Isaiah1 in a vision like this of the Apocalypse. There too the Lord sat on a throne in the temple, and the Seraphims, each with six wings, cried, "Holy, holy, holy Lord God of hosts." When those animals give glory and honor and thanks to the one who sits on the throne, who lives forever and ever, the four and twenty Elders go into the Temple and there fall down before the one who sits on the throne. They worship the one who lives forever and ever and cast their crowns before the throne, saying: "You are worthy, O Lord, to receive glory and honor and power, for you have created all things, and by your pleasure they are and were created." At the morning and evening-sacrifices, as soon as the sacrifice was laid on the Altar and the drink-offering began to be poured out, the trumpets sounded and the Levites sang in turn three times. Every time the trumpets sounded, the people fell down and worshiped. So the people worshiped three times, and to express that number the Beasts cry Holy, holy, holy. When the song was over, the people prayed standing until the ceremony was finished. Meanwhile the Priests went into the Temple and there fell down before the one who sat on the throne and worshiped.

John saw, in the right hand of the one who sat on the throne, a book written inside and on the back, sealed with seven seals: the book which Daniel was commanded to seal up, and which is represented here by the prophetic book of the Law kept on the right side of the Ark, as if in the right hand of the one who sat on the throne. The festivals and ceremonies of the Law, set down for the people in this book, were pictures of the things predicted in the book of Daniel, and the writing inside and on the back of this book relates to the Prophecies that run at the same time.2 And no one was found worthy to open the book except the Lamb of God. And look, in the middle of the throne and of the four Beasts, and in the middle of the Elders, that is, at the foot of the Altar, stood a lamb as if it had been killed: the morning-sacrifice. It had seven horns, which are the seven Churches, and seven eyes, which are the seven spirits of God sent out into all the earth. He came and took the book from the right hand of the one who sat on the throne. When he had taken the book, the four Beasts and the four and twenty Elders fell down before the Lamb, each of them with harps and golden bowls full of odors, which are the prayers of the saints. They sang a new song, saying: "You are worthy to take the book and open its seals, for you were killed, and with your blood you have redeemed us to God out of every kindred and tongue and people and nation. You have made us, for our God, Kings and Priests, and we will reign on the earth." So the Beasts and Elders stand for the early Christians of all nations, and the worship of these Christians in their Churches is shown here in the form of worshiping God and the Lamb in the Temple: God for his gift in creating all things, and the Lamb for his gift in redeeming us with his blood. God sits on the throne and lives forever, and the Lamb is lifted above all by the merits of his death. And I heard, says John, the voice of many Angels around the throne, and the Beasts and the Elders, and the number of them was ten thousand times ten thousand, and thousands of thousands. They said with a loud voice: "Worthy is the Lamb that was killed to receive power, and riches, and wisdom, and strength, and honor, and glory, and blessing." Every creature in heaven, on the earth, under the earth, and in the sea, and all that are in them, I heard saying: "Blessing, honor, glory, and power be to the one who sits on the throne, and to the Lamb forever and ever." The four Beasts said, "Amen." The four and twenty Elders fell down and worshiped the one who lives forever and ever. This was the worship of the early Christians.

By custom, the High-Priest stayed in the Temple for the seven days before the fast of the seventh month and studied the book of the Law, so that he would know it perfectly by the day of expiation. On that day the whole service, which was varied and complicated, had to be performed by him, and part of it was reading the Law to the people. To help him study it, the Sanhedrim appointed certain Priests to be with him during those seven days in one of his rooms in the Temple, where they discussed the Law with him, read it to him, and reminded him to read and study it himself. The Lamb's opening of the seals points to this opening and reading of the Law during those seven days. We should understand that those seven days begin in the evening before each day, because the Jews began their day in the evening, and that the solemnity of the fast begins on the morning of the seventh day.

So the seventh seal was opened on the day of expiation, and then there was silence in heaven for half an hour. An Angel, the High-Priest, stood at the Altar with a golden Censer, and he was given much incense to offer with the prayers of all Saints on the golden Altar in front of the throne. On other days the custom was for one of the Priests to take fire from the great Altar in a silver Censer, but on this day the High-Priest took fire from the great Altar in a golden Censer. When he came down from the great Altar, he took incense from one of the Priests who brought it to him and carried it to the golden Altar. While he offered the incense, the people prayed outside in silence, and that is the silence in heaven for half an hour. When the High-Priest had laid the incense on the Altar, he carried a Censer with it burning in his hand into the most holy place in front of the Ark. The smoke of the incense, with the prayers of the Saints, rose before God out of the Angel's hand. On other days there was a set measure of incense for the golden Altar, but on this day there was a greater quantity for both the Altar and the most holy Place, so it is called much incense. After this the Angel took the Censer, filled it with fire from the great Altar, and cast it to the earth: that is, through the hands of the Priests who belong to his mystical body, he cast it to the earth outside the Temple, for burning the Goat which was the Lord's lot. At this and the other sacrifices that went with it, until the evening-sacrifice was ended, there were voices, and thunderings, and lightnings, and an earthquake: the voice of the High-Priest reading the Law to the people, other voices and thunderings from the trumpets and temple music at the sacrifices, and lightnings from the fire of the Altar.

Part II, Chapter 2, 2

The solemnity of the day of expiation being finished, the seven Angels found their trumpets at the great sacrifices of the seven days of the feast of tabernacles; and at the same sacrifices, the seven thunders utter their voices, which are the musick of the Temple, and singing of the Levites, intermixed with the soundings of the trumpets: and the seven Angels pour out their vials of wrath, which are the drink-offerings of those sacrifices.

When six of the seals were opened, John said:3 And after these things, that is, after the visions of the sixth seal, I saw four Angels standing on the four corners of the earth, holding the four winds of the earth, that the wind should not blow on the earth, nor on the sea, nor on any tree. And I saw another Angel ascending from the East, having the seal of the living God: and he cried with a loud voice to the four Angels, to whom it was given to hurt the earth and the sea, saying, Hurt not the earth, nor the sea, nor the trees, till we have sealed the servants of our God in their foreheads. This sealing alludes to a tradition of the Jews, that upon the day of expiation all the people of Israel are sealed up in the books of life and death. For the Jews in their Talmud4 tell us, that in the beginning of every new year, or first day of the month Tisri, the seventh month of the sacred year, three books are opened in judgment; the book of life, in which the names of those are written who are perfectly just; the book of death, in which the names of those are written who are Atheists or very wicked; and a third book, of those whose judgment is suspended till the day of expiation, and whose names are not written in the book of life or death before that day. The first ten days of this month they call the penitential days; and all these days they fast and pray very much, and are very devout, that on the tenth day their sins may be remitted, and their names may be written in the book of life; which day is therefore called the day of expiation. And upon this tenth day, in returning home from the Synagogues, they say to one another, God the creator seal you to a good year. For they conceive that the books are now sealed up, and that the sentence of God remains unchanged henceforward to the end of the year. The same thing is signified by the two Goats, upon whose foreheads the High-Priest yearly, on the day of expiation, lays the two lots inscribed, For God and For Azazel; God's lot signifying the people who are sealed with the name of God in their foreheads; and the lot Azazel, which was sent into the wilderness, representing those who receive the mark and name of the Beast, and go into the wilderness with the great Whore.

The servants of God being therefore sealed in the day of expiation, we may conceive that this sealing is synchronal to the visions which appear upon opening the seventh seal; and that when the Lamb had opened six of the seals and seen the visions relating to the inside of the sixth, he looked on the backside of the seventh leaf, and then saw the four Angels holding the four winds of heaven, and another Angel ascending from the East with the seal of God. Conceive also, that the Angels which held the four winds were the first four of the seven Angels, who upon opening the seventh seal were seen standing before God; and that upon their holding the winds, there was silence in heaven for half an hour; and that while the servants of God were sealing, the Angel with the golden Censer offered their prayers with incense upon the golden Altar, and read the Law: and that so soon as they were sealed, the winds hurt the earth at the sounding of the first trumpet, and the sea at the sounding of the second; these winds signifying the wars, to which the first four trumpets sounded. For as the first four seals are distinguished from the three last by the appearance of four horsemen towards the four winds of heaven; so the wars of the first four trumpets are distinguished from those of the three last, by representing these by four winds, and the others by three great woes.

In one of Ezekiel's visions, when the Babylonian captivity was at hand, six men appeared with slaughter-weapons; and a seventh, who5 appeared among them clothed in white linen and a writer's ink-horn by his side, is commanded to go thro' the midst of Jerusalem, and set a mark upon the foreheads of the men that sigh and cry for all the abominations done in the midst thereof: and then the six men, like the Angels of the first six trumpets, are commanded to slay those men who are not marked. Conceive therefore that the hundred forty and four thousand are sealed, to preserve them from the plagues of the first six trumpets; and that at length by the preaching of the everlasting gospel, they grow into a great multitude, which no man could number, of all nations, and kindreds, and people and tongues: and at the sounding of the seventh trumpet come out of the great tribulation with Palms in their hands: the kingdoms of this world, by the war to which that trumpet sounds, becoming the kingdoms of God and his Christ. For the solemnity of the great Hosannah was kept by the Jews upon the seventh or last day of the feast of tabernacles; the Jews upon that day carrying Palms in their hands, and crying Hosannah.

After six of the Angels, answering to the six men with slaughter-weapons, had sounded their trumpets, the Lamb in the form of a mighty Angel cane down from heaven clothed with a cloud, and a rainbow was upon his head, and his face was as it were the Sun, and his feet as pillars of fire, the shape in which Christ appeared in the beginning of this Prophecy; and he had in his hand a little book open, the book which he had newly opened; for he received but one book from him that sitteth upon the throne, and he alone was worthy to open and look on this book. And he set his right foot upon the sea and his left foot on the earth, and cried with a loud voice, as when a lion roareth. It was the custom for the High-Priest on the day of expiation, to stand in an elevated place in the peoples court, at the Eastern gate of the Priests court, and read the Law to the people, while the Heifer and the Goat which was the Lord's lot, were burning without the Temple. We may therefore suppose him standing in such a manner, that his right foot might appear to John as it were standing on the sea of glass, and his left foot on the ground of the house; and that he cried with a loud voice, in reading the Law on the day of expiation. And when he had cried, seven thunders uttered their voices. Thunders are the voice of a cloud, and a cloud signifies a multitude; and this multitude may be the Levites, who sang with thundering voices, and played with musical instruments at the great sacrifices, on the seven days of the feast of Tabernacles: at which times the trumpets also sounded. For the trumpets sounded, and the Levites sang alternately, three times at every sacrifice. The Prophecy therefore of the seven thunders is nothing else than a repetition of the Prophecy of the seven trumpets in another form. And the Angel which I saw stand upon the sea and upon the earth, lifted up his hand to heaven, and sware by him that liveth for ever and ever, that after the seven thunders there should be time no longer; but in the days of the voice of the seventh Angel, when he shall begin to sound, the mystery of God should be finished, as he hath declared to his servants the Prophets. The voices of the thunders therefore last to the end of this world, and so do those of the trumpets.

And the voice which I heard from heaven, saith John, spake unto me again and said, Go and take the little book, &c. And I took the little book out of the Angel's hand, and ate it up; and it was in my mouth sweet as honey, and as soon as I had eaten it, my belly was bitter. And he said unto me, Thou must prophesy again before many peoples, and nations, and tongues, and kings. This is an introduction to a new Prophecy, to a repetition of the Prophecy of the whole book; and alludes to Ezekiel's eating a roll or book spread open before him, and written within and without, full of lamentations and mourning and woe, but sweet in his mouth. Eating and drinking signify acquiring and possessing; and eating the book is becoming inspired with the Prophecy contained in it. It implies being inspired in a vigorous and extraordinary manner with the Prophecy of the whole book, and therefore signifies a lively repetition of the whole Prophecy by way of interpretation, and begins not till the first Prophecy, that of the seals and trumpets, is ended. It was sweet in John's mouth, and therefore begins not with the bitter Prophecy of the Babylonian captivity, and the Gentiles being in the outward court of the Temple, and treading the holy city under foot; and the prophesying of the two Witnesses in sackcloth, and their smiting the earth with all plagues, and being killed by the Beast; but so soon as the Prophecy of the trumpets is ended, it begins with the sweet Prophecy of the glorious Woman in heaven, and the victory of Michael over the Dragon; and after that, it is bitter in John's belly, by a large description of the times of the great Apostacy.

And the Angel stood, upon the earth and sea, saying, Rise and measure the Temple of God and the Altar, and them that worship therein, that is, their courts with the buildings thereon, viz. the square court of the Temple called the separate place, and the square court of the Altar called the Priests court, and the court of them that worship in the Temple called the new court: but the great court which is without the Temple, leave out, and measure it not, for it is given to the Gentiles, and the holy city shall they tread under foot forty and two months. This measuring hath reference to Ezekiel's measuring the Temple of Solomon: there the whole Temple, including the outward court, was measured, to signify that it should be rebuilt in the latter days. Here the courts of the Temple and Altar, and they who worship therein, are only measured, to signify the building of a second Temple, for those that are sealed out of all the twelve tribes of Israel, and worship in the inward court of sincerity and truth: but John is commanded to leave out the outward court, or outward form of religion and Church-government, because it is given to the Babylonian Gentiles. For the glorious woman in heaven, the remnant of whole seed kept the commandments of God, and had the testimony of Jesus, continued the same woman in outward form after her flight into the wilderness, whereby she quitted her former sincerity and piety, and became the great Whore. She lost her chastity, but kept her outward form and shape. And while the Gentiles tread the holy city underfoot, and worship in the outward court, the two witnesses, represented perhaps by the two feet of the Angel standing on the sea and earth, prophesied against them, and had power, like Elijah and Moses, to consume their enemies with fire proceeding out of their mouth, and to shut heaven that it rain not in the days of their Prophecy, and to turn the waters into blood, and to smite the earth with all plagues as often as they will, that is, with the plagues of the trumpets and vials of wrath; and at length they are slain, rise again from the dead, and ascend up to heaven in a cloud; and then the seventh trumpet sounds to the day of judgment.

The Prophecy being finished, John is inspired anew by the eaten book, and begins the Interpretation thereof with these words, And the Temple of God was opened in heaven, and there was seen in his Temple the Ark of the Testament. By the Ark, we may know that this was the first Temple; for the second Temple had no Ark. And there were lightnings, and voices, and thundrings, and an earthquake, and great hail. These answer to the wars in the Roman Empire, during the reign of the four horsemen, who appeared upon opening the first four seals. And there appeared a great wonder in heaven, a woman clothed with the Sun. In the Prophecy, the affairs of the Church begin to be considered at the opening of the fifth seal; and in the Interpretation, they begin at the same time with the vision of the Church in the form of a woman in heaven: there she is persecuted, and here she is pained in travail. The Interpretation proceeds down first to the sealing of the servants of God, and marking the rest with the mark of the Beast; and then to the day of judgment, represented by a harvest and vintage. Then it returns back to the times of opening the seventh seal, and interprets the Prophecy of the seven trumpets by the pouring out of seven vials of wrath. The Angels who pour them out, come out of the Temple of the Tabernacle; that is, out of the second Temple, for the Tabernacle had no outward court. Then it returns back again to the times of measuring the Temple and Altar, and of the Gentiles worshiping in the outward court, and of the Beast killing the witnesses in the streets of the great city; and interprets these things by the vision of a woman sitting on the Beast, drunken with the blood of the Saints; and proceeds in the interpretation downwards to the fall of the great city and the day of judgment.

The whole Prophecy of the book, represented by the book of the Law, is therefore repeated, and interpreted in the visions which follow those of sounding the seventh trumpet, and begin with that of the Temple of God opened in heaven. Only the things, which the seven thunders uttered, were not written down, and therefore not interpreted.

Notes to Chap. II.

1 Isa. vi.

2 Apoc. v.

3 Apoc. vii

4 Buxtorf in Synogoga Judaica, c. 18, 21.

5 Ezek. ix.

The solemnity of the day of expiation being finished, the seven Angels sounded their trumpets at the great sacrifices of the seven days of the Feast of Tabernacles. At those same sacrifices the seven thunders speak with their voices. They are the music of the Temple and the singing of the Levites, mixed with the sounding of the trumpets. And the seven Angels pour out their vials of wrath, which are the drink offerings of those sacrifices.

When six of the seals had been opened, John said:3 "After these things—that is, after the visions of the sixth seal—I saw four Angels standing at the four corners of the earth, holding back the four winds of the earth, so that no wind would blow on the earth, or on the sea, or on any tree. And I saw another Angel rising from the East, with the seal of the living God. He cried out with a loud voice to the four Angels who were given the power to harm the earth and the sea, saying, 'Do not harm the earth, or the sea, or the trees, until we have sealed the servants of our God on their foreheads.'" This sealing points to a tradition of the Jews, that on the day of expiation all the people of Israel are sealed up in the books of life and death. For the Jews in their Talmud4 tell us that in the beginning of every new year, on the first day of the month Tisri, the seventh month of the sacred year, three books are opened for judgment: the book of life, in which the names of those who are perfectly righteous are written; the book of death, in which the names of atheists or very wicked people are written; and a third book, for those whose judgment is put off until the day of expiation, and whose names are written in neither the book of life nor the book of death before that day. The first ten days of this month they call the penitential days, and during all these days they fast and pray a great deal, and are very devout, so that on the tenth day their sins may be forgiven and their names written in the book of life. That day is therefore called the day of expiation. On this tenth day, as they return home from the Synagogues, they say to one another, "May God the creator seal you for a good year." For they believe that the books are now sealed up, and that the judgment of God stays unchanged from then on until the end of the year. The same thing is shown by the two Goats. Once a year, on the day of expiation, the High Priest places on their foreheads the two lots inscribed, "For God" and "For Azazel". The lot for God stands for the people who are sealed with the name of God on their foreheads; and the lot of Azazel, which was sent into the wilderness, stands for those who receive the mark and name of the Beast and go into the wilderness with the great Whore.

Since the servants of God are sealed on the day of expiation, we may think of this sealing as happening at the same time as the visions that appear when the seventh seal is opened, and that when the Lamb had opened six of the seals and seen the visions about the inside of the sixth, he looked at the back of the seventh leaf, and then saw the four Angels holding the four winds of heaven, and another Angel rising from the East with the seal of God. We may also think that the Angels who held the four winds were the first four of the seven Angels, who were seen standing before God when the seventh seal was opened. When they held the winds, there was silence in heaven for half an hour. And while the servants of God were being sealed, the Angel with the golden Censer offered their prayers with incense on the golden Altar, and read the Law. And as soon as they were sealed, the winds harmed the earth at the sounding of the first trumpet, and the sea at the sounding of the second. These winds stand for the wars announced by the first four trumpets. For just as the first four seals are set apart from the last three by the appearance of four horsemen toward the four winds of heaven, so the wars of the first four trumpets are set apart from those of the last three, by showing these as four winds and those as three great woes.

In one of Ezekiel's visions, when the Babylonian captivity was near, six men appeared with weapons of slaughter. And a seventh, who5 appeared among them clothed in white linen, with a writer's ink-horn at his side, was commanded to go through the middle of Jerusalem, and set a mark on the foreheads of the men who sigh and cry over all the abominations done in the middle of the city. Then the six men, like the Angels of the first six trumpets, were commanded to kill the men who had no mark. So we may think that the hundred forty and four thousand are sealed to keep them from the plagues of the first six trumpets, and that in time, through the preaching of the everlasting gospel, they grow into a great crowd of all nations, and families, and peoples, and tongues, which no man could number. At the sounding of the seventh trumpet they come out of the great tribulation with palms in their hands, the kingdoms of this world, by the war announced by that trumpet, becoming the kingdoms of God and his Christ. For the Jews kept the great Hosannah on the seventh and last day of the Feast of Tabernacles. On that day they carried palms in their hands and cried Hosannah.

After six of the Angels—those answering the six men with weapons of slaughter—had sounded their trumpets, the Lamb, in the form of a mighty Angel, came down from heaven clothed with a cloud. A rainbow was on his head, his face was like the Sun, and his feet like pillars of fire: the shape in which Christ appeared at the beginning of this Prophecy. And he had in his hand a little book opened, the book which he had just opened. For he received only one book from him who sits on the throne, and he alone was worthy to open it and look into it. And he set his right foot on the sea and his left foot on the earth, and cried with a loud voice, like a lion roaring. It was the custom of the High Priest, on the day of expiation, to stand in an elevated place in the people's court, at the Eastern gate of the Priests court, and read the Law to the people, while the Heifer and the Goat that was the Lord's lot were burning outside the Temple. So we may suppose him standing in such a way that his right foot looked to John as if it stood on the sea of glass, and his left foot on the floor of the house, and that he cried with a loud voice, reading the Law on the day of expiation. And when he had cried out, seven thunders uttered their voices. Thunder is the voice of a cloud, and a cloud stands for a crowd; and this crowd may be the Levites, who sang with thundering voices and played musical instruments at the great sacrifices on the seven days of the Feast of Tabernacles, at which times the trumpets also sounded. For the trumpets sounded and the Levites sang in turn, three times at every sacrifice. So the Prophecy of the seven thunders is nothing but the Prophecy of the seven trumpets repeated in another form. And the Angel whom I saw standing on the sea and on the earth lifted his hand to heaven, and swore by him who lives forever and ever, that after the seven thunders there would be time no longer; but in the days of the voice of the seventh Angel, when he begins to sound, the mystery of God would be finished, as he has declared to his servants the Prophets. So the voices of the thunders last to the end of this world, and so do those of the trumpets.

And the voice which I heard from heaven, John says, spoke to me again and said: "Go and take the little book, and so on." So I took the little book out of the Angel's hand and ate it; and in my mouth it was sweet as honey, and as soon as I had eaten it, my stomach turned bitter. And he said to me, "You must prophesy again before many peoples, and nations, and tongues, and kings." This is the beginning of a new Prophecy, a repetition of the Prophecy of the whole book, and it points to Ezekiel's eating a roll or book spread open before him, written inside and outside, full of lamentation and mourning and woe, but sweet in his mouth. Eating and drinking stand for acquiring and possessing, and eating the book means becoming filled with the Prophecy it contains. It means being filled in a strong and unusual way with the Prophecy of the whole book, and so it stands for a vivid repetition of the whole Prophecy in the form of an interpretation; and it does not begin until the first Prophecy, that of the seals and trumpets, is ended. It was sweet in John's mouth, and so it does not begin with the bitter Prophecy of the Babylonian captivity, or with the Gentiles in the outward court of the Temple and the holy city trampled underfoot, or with the two Witnesses prophesying in sackcloth, striking the earth with every plague, and being killed by the Beast. But as soon as the Prophecy of the trumpets is ended, it begins with the sweet Prophecy of the glorious woman in heaven and the victory of Michael over the Dragon; and after that it is bitter in John's stomach, with a long description of the times of the great Apostasy.

And the Angel stood on the earth and sea, saying: "Rise and measure the Temple of God and the Altar, and those who worship in it"—that is, their courts with the buildings on them: the square court of the Temple called the separate place, the square court of the Altar called the Priests court, and the court of those who worship in the Temple called the new court. "But leave out the great court which is outside the Temple, and do not measure it, for it is given to the Gentiles; and they will trample the holy city underfoot for forty and two months." This measuring looks back to Ezekiel's measuring of the Temple of Solomon. There the whole Temple, including the outward court, was measured, to show that it would be rebuilt in the last days. Here only the courts of the Temple and the Altar, and those who worship in them, are measured, to show that a second Temple would be built for those sealed out of all the twelve tribes of Israel, who worship in the inward court of sincerity and truth. But John is commanded to leave out the outward court, the outward form of religion and Church government, because it is given to the Babylonian Gentiles. For the glorious woman in heaven, whose seed kept the commandments of God and had the testimony of Jesus, stayed the same woman in outward form after her flight into the wilderness, and so she gave up her former sincerity and piety and became the great Whore. She lost her purity but kept her outward form and shape. And while the Gentiles trample the holy city underfoot and worship in the outward court, the two Witnesses—perhaps shown by the two feet of the Angel standing on the sea and the earth—prophesy against them, and have power, like Elijah and Moses, to consume their enemies with fire coming out of their mouths, to shut heaven so that it does not rain in the days of their Prophecy, to turn the waters into blood, and to strike the earth with every plague as often as they wish: that is, with the plagues of the trumpets and the vials of wrath. At last they are killed, rise again from the dead, and go up to heaven in a cloud; and then the seventh trumpet sounds on to the day of judgment.

When the Prophecy was finished, John was inspired afresh by the book he had eaten, and begins its Interpretation with these words: "And the Temple of God was opened in heaven, and the Ark of the Testament was seen in his Temple." By the Ark we can tell that this was the first Temple, for the second Temple had no Ark. "And there were lightnings, and voices, and thunderings, and an earthquake, and great hail." These answer to the wars in the Roman Empire during the reign of the four horsemen, who appeared when the first four seals were opened. "And there appeared a great sign in heaven, a woman clothed with the Sun." In the Prophecy, the affairs of the Church begin to be considered at the opening of the fifth seal; and in the Interpretation they begin at the same point, with the vision of the Church in the form of a woman in heaven. There she is persecuted, and here she is in the pain of childbirth. The Interpretation goes on first to the sealing of the servants of God, and the marking of the rest with the mark of the Beast; and then to the day of judgment, represented by a harvest and a vintage. Then it goes back to the times of opening the seventh seal, and interprets the Prophecy of the seven trumpets by the pouring out of seven vials of wrath. The Angels who pour them out come out of the Temple of the Tabernacle—that is, out of the second Temple, for the Tabernacle had no outward court. Then it goes back again to the times of measuring the Temple and the Altar, of the Gentiles worshiping in the outward court, and of the Beast killing the witnesses in the streets of the great city; and interprets these things by the vision of a woman sitting on the Beast, drunk with the blood of the Saints. And it moves on in the interpretation to the fall of the great city and the day of judgment.

So the whole Prophecy of the book, represented by the book of the Law, is repeated and interpreted in the visions which follow those of sounding the seventh trumpet, and which begin with that of the Temple of God opened in heaven. Only the things which the seven thunders uttered were not written down, and so are not interpreted.

Notes to Chap. II.

1 Isa. vi.

2 Apoc. v.

3 Apoc. vii

4 Buxtorf in Synogoga Judaica, c. 18, 21.

5 Ezek. ix.

Part II, Chapter 3, 1

Of the relation which the Prophecy of John hath to those of Daniel; and of the Subject of the Prophecy.

The whole scene of sacred Prophecy is composed of three principal parts: the regions beyond Euphrates, represented by the two first Beasts of Daniel; the Empire of the Greeks on this side of Euphrates, represented by the Leopard and by the He-Goat; and the Empire of the Latins on this side of Greece, represented by the Beast with ten horns. And to these three parts, the phrases of the third part of the earth, sea, rivers, trees, ships, stars, sun, and moon, relate. I place the body of the fourth Beast on this side of Greece, because the three first of the four Beasts had their lives prolonged after their dominion was taken away, and therefore belong not to the body of the fourth. He only stamped them with his feet.

By the earth, the Jews understood the great continent of all Asia and Africa, to which they had access by land: and by the Isles of the sea, they understood the places to which they sailed by sea, particularly all Europe: and hence in this Prophecy, the earth and sea are put for the nations of the Greek and Latin Empires.

The third and fourth Beasts of Daniel are the same with the Dragon and ten-horned Beast of John, but with this difference: John puts the Dragon for the whole Roman Empire while it continued entire, because it was entire when that Prophecy was given; and the Beast he considers not till the Empire became divided: and then he puts the Dragon for the Empire of the Greeks, and the Beast for the Empire of the Latins. Hence it is that the Dragon and Beast have common heads and common horns: but the Dragon hath crowns only upon his heads, and the Beast only upon his horns; because the Beast and his horns reigned not before they were divided from the Dragon: and when the Dragon gave the Beast his throne, the ten horns received power as Kings, the same hour with the Beast. The heads are seven successive Kings. Four of them were the four horsemen which appeared at the opening of the first four seals. In the latter end of the sixth head, or seal, considered as present in the visions, it is said, five of the seven Kings are fallen, and one is, and another is not yet come; and the Beast that was and is not, being wounded to death with a sword, he is the eighth, and of the seven: he was therefore a collateral part of the seventh. The horns are the same with those of Daniel's fourth Beast, described above.

The four horsemen which appear at the opening of the first four seals, have been well explained by Mr. Mede; excepting that I had rather continue the third to the end of the reign of the three Gordians and Philip the Arabian, those being Kings from the South, and begin the fourth with the reign of Decius, and continue it till the reign of Dioclesian. For the fourth horseman sat upon a pale horse, and his name was Death; and hell followed with him; and power was given them to kill unto the fourth part of the earth, with the sword, and with famine, and with the plague, and with the Beasts of the earth, or armies of invaders and rebels: and as such were the times during all this interval. Hitherto the Roman Empire continued in an undivided monarchical form, except rebellions; and such it is represented by the four horsemen. But Dioclesian divided it between himself and Maximianus, A.C. 285; and it continued in that divided state, till the victory of Constantine the great over Licinius, A.C. 323, which put an end to the heathen persecutions set on foot by Dioclesian and Maximianus, and described at the opening of the fifth seal. But this division of the Empire was imperfect, the whole being still under one and the same Senate. The same victory of Constantine over Licinius a heathen persecutor, began the fall of the heathen Empire, described at the opening of the sixth seal: and the visions of this seal continue till after the reign of Julian the Apostate, he being a heathen Emperor, and reigning over the whole Roman Empire.

The affairs of the Church begin to be considered at the opening of the fifth seal, as was said above. Then she is represented by a woman in the Temple of heaven, clothed with the sun of righteousness, and the moon of Jewish ceremonies under her feet, and upon her head a crown of twelve stars relating to the twelve Apostles and to the twelve tribes of Israel. When she fled from the Temple into the wilderness, she left in the Temple a remnant of her seed, who kept the commandments of God, and had the testimony of Jesus Christ; and therefore before her flight she represented the true primitive Church of God, tho afterwards she degenerated like Aholah and Aholibah. In Diocesian's persecution she cried, travelling in birth, and pained to be delivered. And in the end of that persecution, by the victory of Constantine over Maxentius A.C. 312, she brought forth a man-child, such a child as was to rule all nations with a rod of iron, a Christian Empire. And her child, by the victory of Constantine over Licinius, A.C. 323, was caught up unto God and to his throne. And the woman, by the division of the Roman Empire into the Greek and Latin Empires, fled from the first Temple into the wilderness, or spiritually barren Empire of the Latins, where she is found afterwards sitting upon the Beast and upon the seven mountains; and is called the great city which reigneth over the Kings of the earth, that is, over the ten Kings who give their kingdom to her Beast.

But before her flight there was war in heaven between Michael and the Dragon, the Christian and the heathen religions; and the Dragon, that old serpent, called the Devil and Satan, who deceiveth the whole world, was cast out to the earth, and his Angels were cast out with him. And John heard a voice in heaven, saying, Now is come salvation and strength, and the kingdom of our God, and the power of his Christ: for the accuser of our brethren is cast down. And they overcame him by the blood of the Lamb, and by the word of their testimony. And they loved not their lives unto the death. Therefore rejoice, ye heavens, and ye that dwell in them. Woe be to the inhabiters of the earth and sea, or people of the Greek and Latin Empires, for the devil is come down amongst you, having great wrath, because he knoweth that he hath but a short time.

And when the Dragon saw that he was cast down from the Roman throne, and the man-child caught up thither, he persecuted the woman which brought forth the man-child; and to her, by the division of the Roman Empire between the cities of Rome and Constantinople A.C. 330, were given two wings of a great eagle, the symbol of the Roman Empire, that she might flee from the first Temple into the wilderness of Arabia, to her place at Babylon mystically so called. And the serpent, by the division of the same Empire between the sons of Constantine the great, A.C. 337, cast out of his mouth water as a flood, the Western Empire, after the woman; that he might cause her to be carried away by the flood. And the earth, or Greek Empire, helped the woman, and the earth opened her mouth, and swallowed up the flood, by the victory of Constantius over Magnentius, A.C. 353, and thus the Beast was wounded to death with a sword. And the Dragon was wroth with the woman, in the reign of Julian the Apostate A.C. 361, and, by a new division of the Empire between Valentinian and Valens, A.C. 364, went from her into the Eastern Empire to make war with the remnant of her seed, which she left behind her when she fled: and thus the Beast revived. By the next division of the Empire, which was between Gratian and Theodosius A.C. 379, the Beast with ten horns rose out of the sea, and the Beast with two horns out of the earth: and by the last division thereof, which was between the sons of Theodosius, A.C. 395, the Dragon gave the Beast his power and throne, and great authority. And the ten horns received power as Kings, the same hour with the Beast.

At length the woman arrived at her place of temporal as well as spiritual dominion upon the back of the Beast, where she is nourished a time, and times, and half a time, from the face of the serpent; not in his kingdom, but at a distance from him. She is nourished by the merchants of the earth, three times or years and an half, or 42 months, or 1260 days: and in these Prophecies days are put for years. During all this time the Beast acted, and she sat upon him, that is, reigned over him, and over the ten Kings who gave their power and strength, that is, their kingdom to the Beast; and she was drunken with the blood of the Saints. By all these circumstances she is the eleventh horn of Daniel's fourth Beast, who reigned with a look more stout than his fellows, and was of a different kind from the rest, and had eyes and a mouth like the woman; and made war with the saints, and prevailed against them, and wore them out, and thought to change times and laws, and had them given into his hand, until a time, and times, and half a time. These characters of the woman, and little horn of the Beast, agree perfectly: in respect of her temporal dominion, she was a horn of the Beast; in respect of her spiritual dominion, she rode upon him in the form of a woman, and was his Church, and committed fornication with the ten Kings.

The second Beast, which rose up out of the earth, was the Church of the Greek Empire: for it had two horns like those of the Lamb, and therefore was a Church; and it spake as the Dragon, and therefore was of his religion; and it came up out of the earth, and by consequence in his kingdom. It is called also the false Prophet who wrought miracles before the first Beast, by which he deceived them that received his mark, and worshiped his image. When the Dragon went from the woman to make war with the remnant of her seed, this Beast arising out of the earth assisted in that war, and caused the earth and them which dwell therein to worship the authority of the first Beast, whose mortal wound was healed, and to make an Image to him, that is, to assemble a body of men like him in point of religion. He had also power to give life and authority to the Image, so that it could both speak, and by dictating cause that all religious bodies of men, who would not worship the authority of the Image, should be mystically killed. And he causeth all men to receive a mark in their right hand or in their forehead, and that no man might buy or sell save he that had the mark, or the name of the Beast, or the number of his name; all the rest being excommunicated by the Beast with two horns. His mark is [Cross] [Cross] [Cross], and his name [Greek: LATEINOS], and the number of his name 666.

Thus the Beast, after he was wounded to death with a sword and revived, was deified, as the heathens used to deify their Kings after death, and had an Image erected to him; and his worshipers were initiated in this new religion, by receiving the mark or name of this new God, or the number of his name. By killing all that will not worship him and his Image, the first Temple, illuminated by the lamps of the seven Churches, is demolished, and a new Temple built for them who will not worship him; and the outward court of this new Temple, or outward form of a Church, is given to the Gentiles, who worship the Beast and his Image: while they who will not worship him, are sealed with the name of God in their foreheads, and retire into the inward court of this new Temple. These are the 144000 sealed out of all the twelve tribes of Israel, and called the two Witnesses, as being derived from the two wings of the woman while she was flying into the wilderness, and represented by two of the seven candlesticks. These appear to John in the inward court of the second Temple, standing on mount Sion with the Lamb, and as it were on the sea of glass. These are the Saints of the most High, and the host of heaven, and the holy people spoken of by Daniel, as worn out and trampled under foot, and destroyed in the latter times by the little horns of his fourth Beast and He-Goat.

While the Gentiles tread the holy city under foot, God gives power to his two Witnesses, and they prophesy a thousand two hundred and threescore days clothed in sackcloth. They are called the two Olive-trees, with relation to the two Olive-trees, which in Zechary's vision, chap. iv. stand on either side of the golden candlestick to supply the lamps with oil: and Olive-trees, according to the Apostle Paul, represent Churches, Rom. xi. They supply the lamps with oil, by maintaining teachers. They are also called the two candlesticks; which in this Prophecy signify Churches, the seven Churches of Asia being represented by seven candlesticks. Five of these Churches were found faulty, and threatned if they did not repent; the other two were without fault, and so their candlesticks were fit to be placed in the second Temple. These were the Churches in Smyrna and Philadelphia. They were in a state of tribulation and persecution, and the only two of the seven in such a state: and so their candlesticks were fit to represent the Churches in affliction in the times of the second Temple, and the only two of the seven that were fit. The two Witnesses are not new Churches: they are the posterity of the primitive Church, the posterity of the two wings of the woman, and so are fitly represented by two of the primitive candlesticks. We may conceive therefore, that when the first Temple was destroyed, and a new one built for them who worship in the inward court, two of the seven candlesticks were placed in this new Temple.

The affairs of the Church are not considered during the opening of the first four seals. They begin to be consider'd at the opening of the fifth seal, as was said above; and are further considered at the opening of the sixth seal; and the seventh seal contains the times of the great Apostacy. And therefore I refer the Epistles to the seven Churches unto the times of the fifth and sixth seals: for they relate to the Church when she began to decline, and contain admonitions against the great Apostacy then approaching.

Of the relation which the Prophecy of John has to those of Daniel; and of the Subject of the Prophecy.

The whole scene of sacred Prophecy is made up of three main parts: the regions beyond the Euphrates, represented by the two first Beasts of Daniel; the Empire of the Greeks on this side of the Euphrates, represented by the Leopard and by the He-Goat; and the Empire of the Latins on this side of Greece, represented by the Beast with ten horns. The phrases about the third part of the earth, sea, rivers, trees, ships, stars, sun, and moon refer to these three parts. I place the body of the fourth Beast on this side of Greece, because the first three of the four Beasts had their lives prolonged after their dominion was taken away, and so they do not belong to the body of the fourth. It only stamped them with its feet.

By the earth, the Jews understood the great continent of all Asia and Africa, which they could reach by land; and by the isles of the sea they understood the places to which they sailed by sea, particularly all Europe. So in this Prophecy, the earth and sea stand for the nations of the Greek and Latin Empires.

The third and fourth Beasts of Daniel are the same as the Dragon and the ten-horned Beast of John, but with this difference: John uses the Dragon for the whole Roman Empire while it still remained entire, because it was entire when that Prophecy was given; and he does not consider the Beast until the Empire became divided. Then he uses the Dragon for the Empire of the Greeks, and the Beast for the Empire of the Latins. That is why the Dragon and the Beast have common heads and common horns. But the Dragon has crowns only on its heads, and the Beast only on its horns, because the Beast and its horns did not reign before they were divided from the Dragon; and when the Dragon gave the Beast its throne, the ten horns received power as Kings, in the same hour as the Beast. The heads are seven Kings, one after another. Four of them were the four horsemen which appeared at the opening of the first four seals. Near the end of the sixth head, or seal, taken as present in the visions, it is said: "five of the seven Kings are fallen, and one is, and another is not yet come; and the Beast that was and is not, being wounded to death with a sword, is the eighth, and yet of the seven." He was therefore a side-branch of the seventh. The horns are the same as those of Daniel's fourth Beast, described above.

The four horsemen which appear at the opening of the first four seals have been well explained by Mr. Mede, except that I would rather carry the third to the end of the reigns of the three Gordians and Philip the Arabian—those being Kings from the South—and begin the fourth with the reign of Decius, carrying it on to the reign of Dioclesian. For the fourth horseman sat upon a pale horse, and his name was Death; and Hell followed with him; and power was given to them to kill a fourth part of the earth, with the sword, famine, plague, and the Beasts of the earth—that is, with invading armies and rebels. And such were the times throughout this whole interval. Until then the Roman Empire continued in an undivided, single form of rule, apart from rebellions, and the four horsemen represent it in that form. But Dioclesian divided it between himself and Maximianus, A.C. 285; and it remained in that divided state until the victory of Constantine the Great over Licinius, A.C. 323, which ended the heathen persecutions begun by Dioclesian and Maximianus, described at the opening of the fifth seal. But this division of the Empire was incomplete, the whole still being under one and the same Senate. That same victory of Constantine over Licinius, a heathen persecutor, began the fall of the heathen Empire, described at the opening of the sixth seal; and the visions of this seal continue until after the reign of Julian the Apostate, he being a heathen Emperor, and reigning over the whole Roman Empire.

The affairs of the Church begin to be considered at the opening of the fifth seal, as was said above. Then she is shown as a woman in the Temple of heaven, clothed with the sun of righteousness, and the moon of Jewish ceremonies under her feet, and with a crown of twelve stars on her head, relating to the twelve Apostles and the twelve tribes of Israel. When she fled from the Temple into the wilderness, she left in the Temple a remnant of her seed, who kept the commandments of God and had the testimony of Jesus Christ; and so before her flight she stood for the true early Church of God, though later she degenerated, like Aholah and Aholibah. In Dioclesian's persecution she cried out, in the pains of childbirth, and in agony to give birth. And at the end of that persecution, by the victory of Constantine over Maxentius, A.C. 312, she brought forth a man-child, a child such as was to rule all nations with a rod of iron: a Christian Empire. And her child, by the victory of Constantine over Licinius, A.C. 323, was caught up to God and to his throne. And the woman, by the division of the Roman Empire into the Greek and Latin Empires, fled from the first Temple into the wilderness, the spiritually barren Empire of the Latins, where she is later found sitting upon the Beast and upon the seven mountains; and is called the great city which reigns over the Kings of the earth, that is, over the ten Kings who give their kingdom to her Beast.

But before her flight there was war in heaven between Michael and the Dragon, the Christian and the heathen religions. And the Dragon, that old serpent, called the Devil and Satan, who deceives the whole world, was thrown down to the earth, and his Angels were thrown down with him. And John heard a voice in heaven saying: "Now has come salvation and strength, and the kingdom of our God, and the power of his Christ. For the accuser of our brothers has been thrown down. They overcame him by the blood of the Lamb, and by the word of their testimony. They did not love their lives, even to death. So rejoice, heavens, and you who dwell in them. Disaster is coming on the people living on the earth and sea—the people of the Greek and Latin Empires. For the devil has come down among you, with great wrath, because he knows that he has only a short time."

And when the Dragon saw that he was thrown down from the Roman throne, and the man-child was caught up there, he persecuted the woman who brought forth the man-child. And to her—by the division of the Roman Empire between the cities of Rome and Constantinople, A.C. 330—were given two wings of a great eagle, the symbol of the Roman Empire, so that she might flee from the first Temple into the wilderness of Arabia, to her place at Babylon, a name used here in a figure. And the serpent—by the division of the same Empire between the sons of Constantine the Great, A.C. 337—cast out of his mouth water like a flood after the woman, the Western Empire, so that he might have her carried away by the flood. But the earth, the Greek Empire, helped the woman: the earth opened its mouth and swallowed the flood, by the victory of Constantius over Magnentius, A.C. 353, and in this way the Beast was wounded to death with a sword. And the Dragon became furious with the woman in the reign of Julian the Apostate, A.C. 361, and, by a new division of the Empire between Valentinian and Valens, A.C. 364, he left her and went into the Eastern Empire to make war with the remnant of her seed, which she left behind her when she fled. In this way the Beast revived. By the next division of the Empire, between Gratian and Theodosius, A.C. 379, the Beast with ten horns rose out of the sea, and the Beast with two horns out of the earth; and by the last division, between the sons of Theodosius, A.C. 395, the Dragon gave the Beast his power and throne, and great authority. And the ten horns received power as Kings, in the same hour as the Beast.

At last the woman reached her place of temporal as well as spiritual rule, on the back of the Beast, where she is nourished a time, and times, and half a time, from the face of the serpent—not in his kingdom, but at a distance from him. She is nourished by the merchants of the earth, for three times or years and a half, or 42 months, or 1260 days; and in these Prophecies days stand for years. Throughout all this time the Beast acted, and she sat on him—that is, she ruled him, and the ten Kings who gave their power and strength, that is their kingdom, to the Beast; and she was drunk with the blood of the Saints. By all these circumstances she is the eleventh horn of Daniel's fourth Beast, which ruled with a look more bold than its fellows, and was of a different kind from the rest. It had eyes and a mouth like the woman; it made war with the saints and defeated them; it wore them out; it planned to change times and laws; and they were given into its hand, until a time, and times, and half a time. These features of the woman and of the little horn of the Beast agree exactly: in respect of her temporal rule she was a horn of the Beast; in respect of her spiritual rule she rode on him in the form of a woman, was his Church, and committed fornication with the ten Kings.

The second Beast, which rose up out of the earth, was the Church of the Greek Empire: for it had two horns like those of the Lamb, and so was a Church; and it spoke like the Dragon, and so was of his religion; and it came up out of the earth, and so within his kingdom. It is also called the false Prophet, who performed miracles before the first Beast, by which it deceived those who received its mark and worshiped its image. When the Dragon left the woman to make war with the remnant of her seed, this Beast, rising out of the earth, assisted in that war, and caused the earth and those who live on it to worship the authority of the first Beast, whose mortal wound was healed, and to make an Image to him—that is, to gather a body of men like him in religion. It also had power to give life and authority to the Image, so that the Image could speak; and by dictating to it, it caused all religious bodies of men who would not worship the authority of the Image to be killed in a figure. And it causes all men to receive a mark on their right hand or on their forehead; and no man may buy or sell unless he has the mark, or the name of the Beast, or the number of his name, all the rest being excommunicated by the Beast with two horns. His mark is three crosses, his name is LATEINOS in Greek letters, and the number of his name is 666.

In this way the Beast, after he was wounded to death with a sword and revived, was made a god, as the heathens used to make gods of their Kings after death, and an Image was set up to him; and his worshipers were initiated into this new religion by receiving the mark or name of this new god, or the number of his name. By killing all who will not worship him and his Image, the first Temple, lit by the lamps of the seven Churches, is torn down; and a new Temple is built for those who will not worship him. And the outward court of this new Temple, the outward form of a Church, is given to the Gentiles, who worship the Beast and his Image; while those who will not worship him are sealed with the name of God on their foreheads, and withdraw into the inward court of this new Temple. These are the 144000 sealed out of all the twelve tribes of Israel, and called the two Witnesses, as being descended from the two wings of the woman while she was flying into the wilderness, and shown by two of the seven candfor fear thaticks. These appear to John in the inward court of the second Temple, standing on mount Sion with the Lamb, and as it were on the sea of glass. These are the Saints of the most High, and the host of heaven, and the holy people spoken of by Daniel, as worn out and trampled underfoot, and destroyed in the later times by the little horns of his fourth Beast and He-Goat.

While the Gentiles trample the holy city underfoot, God gives power to his two Witnesses, and they prophesy a thousand two hundred and threescore days, clothed in sackcloth. They are called the two Olive-trees, in relation to the two Olive-trees which in Zechary's vision, chap. iv., stand on either side of the golden candfor fear thatick, to supply the lamps with oil; and Olive-trees, according to the Apostle Paul, stand for Churches, Rom. xi. They supply the lamps with oil by supporting teachers. They are also called the two candfor fear thaticks; and in this Prophecy candfor fear thaticks stand for Churches, the seven Churches of Asia being represented by seven candfor fear thaticks. Five of these Churches were found faulty, and were threatened if they did not repent; the other two were without fault, and so their candfor fear thaticks were fit to be placed in the second Temple. These were the Churches in Smyrna and Philadelphia. They were in a state of tribulation and persecution, and they were the only two of the seven in such a state; and so their candfor fear thaticks were fit to represent the Churches in affliction in the times of the second Temple, and they were the only two of the seven that were fit. The two Witnesses are not new Churches: they are the descendants of the early Church, the descendants of the two wings of the woman, and so are fittingly shown by two of the early candfor fear thaticks. We may therefore think that when the first Temple was destroyed, and a new one built for those who worship in the inward court, two of the seven candfor fear thaticks were placed in this new Temple.

The affairs of the Church are not considered during the opening of the first four seals. They begin to be considered at the opening of the fifth seal, as was said above; they are considered further at the opening of the sixth seal; and the seventh seal contains the times of the great Apostasy. So I place the Epistles to the seven Churches in the times of the fifth and sixth seals. For they have to do with the Church when she began to decline, and they contain warnings against the great Apostasy which was then approaching.

Part II, Chapter 3, 2

When Eusebius had brought down his Ecclesiatical History to the reign of Dioclesian, he thus describes the state of the Church: Qualem quantamque gloriam simul ac libertatem doctrina veræ erga supremum Deum pietatis à Christo primùm hominibus annunciata, apud omnes Græcos pariter & barbaros ante persecutionem nostrâ memoriâ excitatam, consecuta sit, nos certè pro merito explicare non possumus. Argumento esse possit Imperatorum benignitas erga nostros: quibus regendas etiam provincias committebant, omni sacrificandi metu eos liberantes ob singularem, qua in religionem nostram affecti erant, benevolentiam. And a little after: Jam vero quis innumerabilem hominum quotidiè ad fidem Christi confugientium turbam, quis numerum ecclesiarum in singulis urbibus, quis illustres populorum concursus in ædibus sacris, cumulatè possit describere? Quo factum est, ut priscis ædificiis jam non contenti, in singulis urbibus spatiosas ab ipsis fundamentis exstruerent ecclesias. Atque hæc progressii temporis increscentia, & quotidiè in majus & melius proficiscentia, nec livor ullus atterere, nec malignitas dæmonis fascinare, nec hominum insidiæ prohibere unquam potuerunt, quamdiu omnipotentis Dei dextra populum suum, utpote tali dignum præsidio, texit atque custodiit. Sed cum ex nimia libertate in negligentiam ac desidiam prolapsi essemus; cum alter alteri invidere atque obtrectare cæpisset; cum inter nos quasi bella intestina gereremus, verbis, tanquam armis quibusdam hastisque, nos mutuò vulnerantes; cum Antistites adversus Antistites, populi in populos collisi, jurgia ac tumultus agitarent; denique cum fraus & simulatio ad summum malitiæ culmen adolevisset: tum divina ultio, levi brachio ut solet, integro adhuc ecclesiæ statu, & fidelium turbis liberè convenientibus, sensim ac moderatè in nos cæpit animadvertere; orsà primùm persecutione ab iis qui militabant. Cum verò sensu omni destituti de placando Dei numine ne cogitaremus quidem; quin potius instar impiorum quorundam res humanas nullâ providentiâ gubernari rati, alia quotidiè crimina aliis adjiceremus: cum Pastores nostri spretâ religionis regulâ, mutuis inter se contentionibus decertarent, nihil aliud quam jurgia, minas, æmulationem, odia, ac mutuas inimicitias amplificare studentes; principatum quasi tyrannidem quandam contentissimè sibi vindicantes: tunc demùm juxta dictum Hieremiæ, obscuravit Dominus in ira sua filiam Sion, & dejecit de cælo gloriam Israel,--per Ecclesiarum scilicet subversionem, &c. This was the state of the Church just before the subversion of the Churches in the beginning of Dioclesian's persecution: and to this state of the Church agrees the first of the seven Epistles to the Angel of the seven Churches,1 that to the Church in Ephesus. I have something against thee, saith Christ to the Angel of that Church, because thou hast left thy first love. Remember therefore from whence thou art fallen, and repent, and do the first works; or else I will come unto thee quickly, and will remove thy candlestick out of its place, except thou repent. But this thou hast, that thou hatest the deeds of the Nicolaitans, which I also hate. The Nicolaitans are the Continentes above described, who placed religion in abstinence from marriage, abandoning their wives if they had any. They are here called Nicolaitans, from Nicolas one of the seven deacons of the primitive Church of Jerusalem; who having a beautiful wife, and being taxed with uxoriousness, abandoned her, and permitted her to marry whom she pleased, saying that we must disuse the flesh; and thenceforward lived a single life in continency, as his children also. The Continentes afterwards embraced the doctrine of Æons and Ghosts male and female, and were avoided by the Churches till the fourth century; and the Church of Ephesus is here commended for hating their deeds.

The persecution of Dioclesian began in the year of Christ 302, and lasted ten years in the Eastern Empire and two years in the Western. To this state of the Church the second Epistle, to the Church of Smyrna, agrees. I know, saith2 Christ, thy works, and tribulation, and poverty, but thou art rich; and I know the blasphemy of them, which say they are Jews and are not, but are the synagogue of Satan. Fear none of those things which thou shalt suffer: Behold, the Devil shall call some of you into prison, that ye may be tried; and ye shall have tribulation ten days. Be thou faithful unto death, and I will give thee a crown of life. The tribulation of ten days can agree to no other persecution than that of Dioclesian, it being the only persecution which lasted ten years. By the blasphemy of them which say they are Jews and are not, but are the synagogue of Satan, I understand the Idolatry of the Nicolaitans, who falsly said they were Christians.

The Nicolaitans are complained of also in3 the third Epistle, as men that held the doctrine of Balaam, who taught Balac to cast a stumbling-block before the children of Israel, to eat things sacrificed to Idols, and4 to commit spiritual fornication. For Balaam taught the Moabites and Midianites to tempt and invite Israel by their women to commit fornication, and to feast with them at the sacrifices of their Gods. The Dragon therefore began now to come down among the inhabitants of the earth and sea.

The Nicolaitans are also complained of in the fourth Epistle, under the name of the woman Jezabel, who calleth herself a Prophetess, to teach and to seduce the servants of Christ to commit fornication, and to eat things sacrificed to Idols. The woman therefore began now to fly into the wilderness.

The reign of Constantine the great from the time of his conquering Licinius, was monarchical over the whole Roman Empire. Then the Empire became divided between the sons of Constantine: and afterwards it was again united under Constantius, by his victory over Magnentius. To the affairs of the Church in these three successive periods of time, the third, fourth, and fifth Epistles, that is, those to the Angels of the Churches in Pergamus, Thyatira, and Sardis, seem to relate. The next Emperor was Julian the Apostate.

In the sixth Epistle,5 to the Angel of the Church in Philadelphia, Christ saith: Because in the reign of the heathen Emperor Julian, thou hast kept the word of my patience, I also will keep thee from the hour of temptation, which by the woman's flying into the wilderness, and the Dragon's making war with the remnant of her seed, and the killing of all who will not worship the Image of the Beast, shall come upon all the world, to try them that dwell upon the earth, and to distinguish them by sealing the one with the name of God in their foreheads, and marking the other with the mark of the Beast. Him that overcometh, I will make a pillar in the Temple of my God; and he shall go no more out of it. And I will write upon him the name of my God in his forehead. So the Christians of the Church of Philadelphia, as many of them as overcome, are sealed with the seal of God, and placed in the second Temple, and go no more out. The same is to be understood of the Church in Smyrna, which also kept the word of God's patience, and was without fault. These two Churches, with their posterity, are therefore the two Pillars, and the two Candlesticks, and the two Witnesses in the second Temple.

After the reign of the Emperor Julian, and his successor Jovian who reigned but five months, the Empire became again divided between Valentinian and Valens. Then the Church Catholick, in the Epistle to the Angel of the Church of Laodicea, is reprehended as lukewarm, and6 threatned to be spewed out of Christ's mouth. She said, that she was rich and increased with goods, and had need of nothing, being in outward prosperity; and knew not that she was inwardly wretched, and miserable, and poor, and blind, and naked. She is therefore spewed out of Christ's mouth at the opening of the seventh seal: and this puts an end to the times of the first Temple.

About one half of the Roman Empire turned Christians in the time of Constantine the great and his sons. After Julian had opened the Temples, and restored the worship of the heathens, the Emperors Valentinian and Valens tolerated it all their reign; and therefore the Prophecy of the sixth seal was not fully accomplished before the reign of their successor Gratian. It was the custom of the heathen Priests, in the beginning of the reign of every sovereign Emperor, to offer him the dignity and habit of the Pontifex Maximus. This dignity all Emperors had hitherto accepted: but Gratian rejected it, threw down the idols, interdicted the sacrifices, and took away their revenues with the salaries and authority of the Priests. Theodosius the great followed his example; and heathenism afterwards recovered itself no more, but decreased so fast, that Prudentius, about ten years after the death of Theodosius, called the heathens, vix pauca ingenia & pars hominum rarissima. Whence the affairs of the sixth seal ended with the reign of Valens, or rather with the beginning of the reign of Theodosius, when he, like his predecessor Gratian, rejected the dignity of Pontifex Maximus. For the Romans were very much infested by the invasions of foreign nations in the reign of Valentinian and Valens: Hoc tempore, saith Ammianus, velut per universum orbem Romanum bellicum canentibus buccinis, excitæ gentes sævissimæ limites sibi proximos persultabant: Gallias Rhætiasque simul Alemanni populabantur: Sarmatæ Pannonias & Quadi: Picti, Saxones, & Scoti & Attacotti Britannos ærumnis vexavere continuis: Austoriani, Mauricæque aliæ gentes Africam solito acriùs incursabant: Thracias diripiebant prædatorii globi Gotthorum: Persarum Rex manus Armeniis injectabat. And whilst the Emperors were busy in repelling these enemies, the Hunns and Alans and Goths came over the Danube in two bodies, overcame and slew Valens, and made so great a slaughter of the Roman army, that Ammianus saith: Nec ulla Annalibus præter Cannensem ita ad internecionem res legitur gesta. These wars were not fully stopt on all sides till the beginning of the reign of Theodosius, A.C. 379 & 380: but thenceforward the Empire remained quiet from foreign armies, till his death, A.C. 395. So long the four winds were held: and so long there was silence in heaven. And the seventh seal was opened when this silence began.

Mr. Mede hath explained the Prophecy of the first six trumpets not much amiss: but if he had observed, that the Prophecy of pouring out the vials of wrath is synchronal to that of sounding the trumpets, his explanation would have been yet more complete.

The name of Woes is given to the wars to which the three last trumpets sound, to distinguish them from the wars of the four first. The sacrifices on the first four days of the feast of Tabernacles, at which the first four trumpets sound, and the first four vials of wrath are poured out, are slaughters in four great wars; and these wars are represented by four winds from the four corners of the earth. The first was an east wind, the second a west wind, the third a south wind, and the fourth a north wind, with respect to the city of Rome, the metropolis of the old Roman Empire. These four plagues fell upon the third part of the Earth, Sea, Rivers, Sun, Moon and Stars; that is, upon the Earth, Sea, Rivers, Sun, Moon and Stars of the third part of the whole scene of these Prophecies of Daniel and John.

The plague of the eastern wind7 at the sounding of the first trumpet, was to fall upon the Earth, that is, upon the nations of the Greek Empire. Accordingly, after the death of Theodosius the great, the Goths, Sarmatians, Hunns, Isaurians, and Austorian Moors invaded and miserably wasted Greece, Thrace, Asia minor, Armenia, Syria, Egypt, Lybia, and Illyricum, for ten or twelve years together.

The plague of the western wind at the sounding of the second trumpet, was to fall upon the Sea, or Western Empire, by means of a great mountain burning with fire cast into it, and turning it to blood. Accordingly in the year 407, that Empire began to be invaded by the Visigoths, Vandals, Alans, Sueves, Burgundians, Ostrogoths, Heruli, Quadi, Gepides; and by these wars it was broken into ten kingdoms, and miserably wasted: and Rome itself, the burning mountain, was besieged and taken by the Ostrogoths, in the beginning of these miseries.

The plague of the southern wind at the sounding of the third trumpet, was to cause a great star, burning as it were a lamp, to fall from heaven upon the rivers and fountains of waters, the Western Empire now divided into many kingdoms, and to turn them to wormwood and blood, and make them bitter. Accordingly Genseric, the King of the Vandals and Alans in Spain, A.C. 427, enter'd Africa with an army of eighty thousand men; where he invaded the Moors, and made war upon the Romans, both there and on the sea-coasts of Europe, for fifty years together, almost without intermission, taking Hippo A.C. 431, and Carthage the capital of Africa A.C. 439. In A.C. 455, with a numerous fleet and an army of three hundred thousand Vandals and Moors, he invaded Italy, took and plundered Rome, Naples, Capua, and many other cities; carrying thence their wealth with the flower of the people into Africa: and the next year, A.C. 456, he rent all Africa from the Empire, totally expelling the Romans. Then the Vandals invaded and took the Islands of the Mediterranean, Sicily, Sardinia, Corsica, Ebusus, Majorca, Minorca, &c. and Ricimer besieged the Emperer Anthemius in Rome, took the city, and gave his soldiers the plunder, A.C. 472. The Visigoths about the same time drove the Romans out of Spain: and now the Western Emperor, the great star which fell from heaven, burning as it were a lamp, having by all these wars gradually lost almost all his dominions, was invaded, and conquered in one year by Odoacer King of the Heruli, A.C. 476. After this the Moors revolted A.C. 477, and weakned the Vandals by several wars, and took Mauritania from them. These wars continued till the Vandals were conquered by Belisarius, A.C. 534. and by all these wars Africa was almost depopulated, according to Procopius, who reckons that above five millions of men perished in them. When the Vandals first invaded Africa, that country was very populous, consisting of about 700 bishopricks, more than were in all France, Spain and Italy together: but by the wars between the Vandals, Romans and Moors, it was depopulated to that degree, that Procopius tells us, it was next to a miracle for a traveller to see a man.

In pouring out the third vial it is8 said: Thou art righteous, O Lord,--because thou hast judged thus: for they have shed the blood of thy Saints and Prophets, and thou hast given them blood to drink, for they are worthy. How they shed the blood of Saints, may be understood by the following Edict of the Emperor Honorius, procured by four Bishops sent to him by a Council of African Bishops, who met at Carthage 14 June, A.C. 410.

Impp. Honor. &. Theod. AA. Heracliano Com. Afric.

Oraculo penitus remoto, quo ad ritus suos hæreticæ superstitionis abrepserant, sciant omnes sanctæ legis inimici, plectendos se poena & proscriptionis & sanguinis, si ultra convenire per publicum, execrandâ sceleris sui temeritate temptaverint. Dat. viii. Kal. Sept. Varano V.C. Cons. A.C. 410.

Which Edict was five years after fortified by the following.

Impp. Honor. & Theod. AA. Heracliano Com. Afric.

When Eusebius had brought his Ecclesiastical History down to the reign of Dioclesian, he thus describes the state of the Church: Qualem quantamque gloriam simul ac libertatem doctrina veræ erga supremum Deum pietatis à Christo primùm hominibus annunciata, apud omnes Græcos pariter & barbaros ante persecutionem nostrâ memoriâ excitatam, consecuta sit, nos certè pro merito explicare non possumus. Argumento esse possit Imperatorum benignitas erga nostros: quibus regendas etiam provincias committebant, omni sacrificandi metu eos liberantes ob singularem, qua in religionem nostram affecti erant, benevolentiam. And a little after: Jam vero quis innumerabilem hominum quotidiè ad fidem Christi confugientium turbam, quis numerum ecclesiarum in singulis urbibus, quis illustres populorum concursus in ædibus sacris, cumulatè possit describere? Quo factum est, ut priscis ædificiis jam non contenti, in singulis urbibus spatiosas ab ipsis fundamentis exstruerent ecclesias. Atque hæc progressii temporis increscentia, & quotidiè in majus & melius proficiscentia, nec livor ullus atterere, nec malignitas dæmonis fascinare, nec hominum insidiæ prohibere unquam potuerunt, quamdiu omnipotentis Dei dextra populum suum, utpote tali dignum præsidio, texit atque custodiit. Sed cum ex nimia libertate in negligentiam ac desidiam prolapsi essemus; cum alter alteri invidere atque obtrectare cæpisset; cum inter nos quasi bella intestina gereremus, verbis, tanquam armis quibusdam hastisque, nos mutuò vulnerantes; cum Antistites adversus Antistites, populi in populos collisi, jurgia ac tumultus agitarent; denique cum fraus & simulatio ad summum malitiæ culmen adolevisset: tum divina ultio, levi brachio ut solet, integro adhuc ecclesiæ statu, & fidelium turbis liberè convenientibus, sensim ac moderatè in nos cæpit animadvertere; orsà primùm persecutione ab iis qui militabant. Cum verò sensu omni destituti de placando Dei numine ne cogitaremus quidem; quin potius instar impiorum quorundam res humanas nullâ providentiâ gubernari rati, alia quotidiè crimina aliis adjiceremus: cum Pastores nostri spretâ religionis regulâ, mutuis inter se contentionibus decertarent, nihil aliud quam jurgia, minas, æmulationem, odia, ac mutuas inimicitias amplificare studentes; principatum quasi tyrannidem quandam contentissimè sibi vindicantes: tunc demùm juxta dictum Hieremiæ, obscuravit Dominus in ira sua filiam Sion, & dejecit de cælo gloriam Israel,--per Ecclesiarum scilicet subversionem, &c. This was the state of the Church just before the Churches were overthrown at the start of Dioclesian's persecution, and the first of the seven Epistles to the Angel of the seven Churches,1 the one to the Church in Ephesus, agrees with it. "I have something against you," says Christ to the Angel of that Church, "because you have left your first love. Remember where you have fallen, and repent, and do the things you did at first; or else I will come to you quickly and take your candfor fear thatick out of its place, unless you repent. But this you have: you hate the deeds of the Nicolaitans, which I also hate." The Nicolaitans are the Continentes described above, who made religion consist in abstaining from marriage and left their wives if they had any. They are called Nicolaitans here after Nicolas, one of the seven deacons of the early Church at Jerusalem. He had a beautiful wife and was charged with loving her too much, so he left her and let her marry whoever she wanted, saying that people must turn away from the flesh. From then on he lived alone and kept from sex, and so did his children. Later the Continentes took up the doctrine of Æons and of male and female spirits, and the Churches kept away from them until the fourth century. The Church of Ephesus is praised here for hating their deeds.

The persecution of Dioclesian began in the year of Christ 302 and lasted ten years in the Eastern Empire and two years in the Western. The second Epistle, to the Church of Smyrna, agrees with this state of the Church. "I know,"2 says Christ, "your works, your trouble, and your poverty, yet you are rich. And I know the blasphemy of those who say they are Jews and are not, but are the synagogue of Satan. Do not fear any of the things you are about to suffer. Look, the Devil will throw some of you into prison so that you may be tested, and you will have trouble for ten days. Be faithful until death, and I will give you the crown of life." The trouble of ten days fits no persecution but that of Dioclesian, because it was the only persecution that lasted ten years. By the blasphemy of those who say they are Jews and are not, but are the synagogue of Satan, I mean the idolatry of the Nicolaitans, who falsely said they were Christians.

The Nicolaitans are also complained of in3 the third Epistle as men who held the doctrine of Balaam, who taught Balac to put a stumbling block in front of the children of Israel, to eat food sacrificed to idols, and4 to commit spiritual fornication. Balaam taught the Moabites and Midianites to tempt and invite Israel through their women to commit fornication, and to feast with them at the sacrifices of their gods. So the Dragon now began to come down among the people of the earth and sea.

The Nicolaitans are also complained of in the fourth Epistle under the name of the woman Jezabel, who calls herself a Prophetess, to teach and seduce the servants of Christ into fornication and into eating food sacrificed to idols. So the woman now began to fly into the wilderness.

From the time he conquered Licinius, Constantine the great ruled the whole Roman Empire as one monarch. Then the Empire was divided between the sons of Constantine, and later it was joined together again under Constantius through his victory over Magnentius. The third, fourth and fifth Epistles, that is, the ones to the Angels of the Churches in Pergamus, Thyatira and Sardis, seem to fit the affairs of the Church in these three periods of time in a row. The next Emperor was Julian the Apostate.

In the sixth Epistle,5 to the Angel of the Church in Philadelphia, Christ says: "Because in the reign of the heathen Emperor Julian you kept the word of my patience, I will also keep you from the hour of temptation, which shall come upon all the world by the woman's flying into the wilderness, the Dragon's making war with the rest of her seed, and the killing of all who will not worship the Image of the Beast, to test those who live on the earth and to tell them apart: by sealing the one with the name of God on their foreheads, and marking the other with the mark of the Beast. The one who overcomes I will make a pillar in the Temple of my God, and he will never go out of it again. And I will write on him the name of my God and his forehead." So the Christians of the Church in Philadelphia, as many of them as overcome, are sealed with the seal of God, placed in the second Temple, and never go out again. The same is to be understood of the Church in Smyrna, which also kept the word of God's patience and was without fault. So these two Churches, along with their children, are the two Pillars, the two Candfor fear thaticks and the two Witnesses in the second Temple.

After the Emperor Julian reigned, and his successor Jovian reigned for only five months, the Empire was again divided between Valentinian and Valens. Then the Catholic Church, in the Epistle to the Angel of the Church of Laodicea, is criticized as lukewarm and6 threatened with being spit out of Christ's mouth. She said that she was rich, had grown wealthy, and did not need anything, because she was doing well on the outside, and she did not know that inside she was wretched, miserable, poor, blind and naked. So she is spit out of Christ's mouth when the seventh seal is opened, and this brings the times of the first Temple to an end.

About half of the Roman Empire turned Christian in the time of Constantine the great and his sons. After Julian opened the Temples and restored the worship of the heathens, the Emperors Valentinian and Valens allowed it for their whole reigns, and so the Prophecy of the sixth seal was not fully carried out before the reign of their successor Gratian. It was the custom of the heathen Priests, at the start of the reign of every sovereign Emperor, to offer him the dignity and the robes of the Pontifex Maximus. Every Emperor had accepted this honor until then, but Gratian turned it down, threw down the idols, banned the sacrifices, and took away their revenues along with the salaries and authority of the Priests. Theodosius the great followed his example, and after that heathenism never recovered. It declined so fast that Prudentius, about ten years after the death of Theodosius, called the heathens vix pauca ingenia & pars hominum rarissima. So the affairs of the sixth seal ended with the reign of Valens, or rather with the beginning of the reign of Theodosius, when he, like Gratian before him, refused the dignity of Pontifex Maximus. For the Romans were much troubled by the invasions of foreign nations in the reign of Valentinian and Valens: Hoc tempore, says Ammianus, velut per universum orbem Romanum bellicum canentibus buccinis, excitæ gentes sævissimæ limites sibi proximos persultabant: Gallias Rhætiasque simul Alemanni populabantur: Sarmatæ Pannonias & Quadi: Picti, Saxones, & Scoti & Attacotti Britannos ærumnis vexavere continuis: Austoriani, Mauricæque aliæ gentes Africam solito acriùs incursabant: Thracias diripiebant prædatorii globi Gotthorum: Persarum Rex manus Armeniis injectabat. And while the Emperors were busy driving these enemies off, the Hunns and Alans and Goths crossed the Danube in two bodies, defeated and killed Valens, and slaughtered the Roman army so badly that Ammianus says: Nec ulla Annalibus præter Cannensem ita ad internecionem res legitur gesta. These wars were not fully stopped on every side until the beginning of the reign of Theodosius, A.C. 379 & 380. After that the Empire stayed quiet and free from foreign armies until his death, A.C. 395. For that long the four winds were held back, and for that long there was silence in heaven. And the seventh seal was opened when this silence began.

Mr. Mede has explained the Prophecy of the first six trumpets fairly well. But if he had noticed that the Prophecy of pouring out the vials of wrath happens at the same time as the Prophecy of sounding the trumpets, his explanation would have been more complete.

The name of Woes is given to the wars that come with the last three trumpets, to tell them apart from the wars of the first four. The sacrifices on the first four days of the feast of Tabernacles, at which the first four trumpets sound and the first four vials of wrath are poured out, are slaughters in four great wars, and these wars are shown as four winds from the four corners of the earth. The first was an east wind, the second a west wind, the third a south wind, and the fourth a north wind, measured from the city of Rome, the capital of the old Roman Empire. These four plagues fell on the third part of the Earth, Sea, Rivers, Sun, Moon and Stars. That is, on the Earth, Sea, Rivers, Sun, Moon and Stars of the third part of the whole scene of these Prophecies of Daniel and John.

The plague of the eastern wind7 at the sounding of the first trumpet was to fall on the Earth, that is, on the nations of the Greek Empire. So after the death of Theodosius the great, the Goths, Sarmatians, Hunns, Isaurians and Austorian Moors invaded Greece, Thrace, Asia minor, Armenia, Syria, Egypt, Lybia and Illyricum and ruined them miserably, ten or twelve years in a row.

The plague of the western wind at the sounding of the second trumpet was to fall on the Sea, or Western Empire, by means of a great mountain burning with fire thrown into it, turning it to blood. So in the year 407 that Empire began to be invaded by the Visigoths, Vandals, Alans, Sueves, Burgundians, Ostrogoths, Heruli, Quadi and Gepides, and these wars broke it into ten kingdoms and ruined it. Rome itself, the burning mountain, was besieged and taken by the Ostrogoths at the start of these disasters.

The plague of the southern wind at the sounding of the third trumpet was to make a great star, burning like a lamp, fall from heaven onto the rivers and fountains of waters, the Western Empire by then divided into many kingdoms, and to turn them to wormwood and blood and make them bitter. So Genseric, the King of the Vandals and Alans in Spain, A.C. 427, entered Africa with an army of eighty thousand men. There he invaded the Moors and made war on the Romans, both there and on the sea coasts of Europe, fifty years in a row, almost without a break, taking Hippo A.C. 431 and Carthage, the capital of Africa, A.C. 439. In A.C. 455, with a large fleet and an army of three hundred thousand Vandals and Moors, he invaded Italy, took and plundered Rome, Naples, Capua and many other cities, carrying off their wealth and the best of their people to Africa. The next year, A.C. 456, he tore all Africa away from the Empire and drove the Romans out completely. Then the Vandals invaded and took the islands of the Mediterranean: Sicily, Sardinia, Corsica, Ebusus, Majorca, Minorca, etc. Ricimer besieged the Emperor Anthemius in Rome, took the city and gave the plunder to his soldiers, A.C. 472. The Visigoths at about the same time drove the Romans out of Spain. By now the Western Emperor, the great star that fell from heaven burning like a lamp, had gradually lost almost all his dominions through these wars. He was invaded and conquered in one year by Odoacer King of the Heruli, A.C. 476. After that the Moors revolted A.C. 477, weakened the Vandals through several wars, and took Mauritania from them. These wars went on until the Vandals were conquered by Belisarius, A.C. 534. Through all these wars Africa was almost emptied of people, according to Procopius, who reckons that more than five million men died in them. When the Vandals first invaded Africa, that country was very crowded, with about 700 bishoprics, more than all France, Spain and Italy had together. But the wars between the Vandals, Romans and Moors emptied it so completely that Procopius tells us it was almost a miracle for a traveler to see a man.

In pouring out the third vial it is8 said: "You are righteous, O Lord, because you have judged this way: they have shed the blood of your Saints and Prophets, and you have given them blood to drink, for they are worthy." How they shed the blood of Saints can be seen from the following Edict of the Emperor Honorius, obtained by four Bishops who were sent to him by a Council of African Bishops, who met at Carthage 14 June, A.C. 410.

Impp. Honor. &. Theod. AA. Heracliano Com. Afric.

Oraculo penitus remoto, quo ad ritus suos hæreticæ superstitionis abrepserant, sciant omnes sanctæ legis inimici, plectendos se poena & proscriptionis & sanguinis, si ultra convenire per publicum, execrandâ sceleris sui temeritate temptaverint. Dat. viii. Kal. Sept. Varano V.C. Cons. A.C. 410.

Five years later this Edict was reinforced by the following one.

Impp. Honor. & Theod. AA. Heracliano Com. Afric.

Part II, Chapter 3, 3

Sciant cuncti qui ad ritus suos hæresis superstitionibus obrepserant sacrosanctæ legis inimici, plectendos se poenâ & proscriptionis & sanguinis, si ultra convenire per publicum exercendi sceleris sui temeritate temptaverint: ne quâ vera divinaque reverentia contagione temeretur. Dat. viii. Kal. Sept. Honorio x. & Theod. vi. AA. Coss. A.C. 415.

These Edicts being directed to the governor of Africa, extended only to the Africans. Before these there were many severe ones against the Donatists, but they did not extend to blood. These two were the first which made their meetings, and the meetings of all dissenters, capital: for by hereticks in these Edicts are meant all dissenters, as is manifest by the following against Euresius a Luciferan Bishop.

Impp. Arcad. & Honor. AA. Aureliano Proc. Africæ.

Hæreticorum vocabulo continentur, & latis adversus eos sanctionibus debent succumbere, qui vel levi argumento à judicio Catholicæ religionis & tramite detecti fuerint deviare: ideoque experientia tua Euresium hæreticum esse cognoscat. Dat. iii. Non. Sept. Constantinop. Olybrio & Probino Coss. A.C. 395.

The Greek Emperor Zeno adopted Theoderic King of the Ostrogoths to be his son, made him master of the horse and Patricius, and Consul of Constantinople; and recommending to him the Roman people and Senate, gave him the Western Empire, and sent him into Italy against Odoacer King of the Heruli. Theoderic thereupon led his nation into Italy, conquered Odoacer, and reigned over Italy, Sicily, Rhætia, Noricum, Dalmatia, Liburnia, Istria, and part of Suevia, Pannonia and Gallia. Whence Ennodius said, in a Panegyric to Theoderic: Ad limitem suum Romana regna remeâsse. Theoderic reigned with great prudence, moderation and felicity; treated the Romans with singular benevolence, governed them by their own laws, and restored their government under their Senate and Consuls, he himself supplying the place of Emperor, without assuming the title. Ita sibi parentibus præfuit, saith Procopius, ut vere Imperatori conveniens decus nullum ipsi abesset: Justitiæ magnus ei cultus, legumque diligens custodia: terras à vicinis barbaris servavit intactas, &c. Whence I do not reckon the reign of this King, amongst the plagues of the four winds.

The plague of the northern wind, at the sounding of the fourth trumpet, was to cause the Sun, Moon and Stars, that is, the King, kingdom and Princes of the Western Empire, to be darkned, and to continue some time in darkness. Accordingly Belisarius, having conquered the Vandals, invaded Italy A.C. 535, and made war upon the Ostrogoths in Dalmatia, Liburnia, Venetia, Lombardy, Tuscany, and other regions northward from Rome, twenty years together. In this war many cities were taken and retaken. In retaking Millain from the Romans, the Ostrogoths slew all the males young and old, amounting, as Procopius reckons, to three hundred thousand, and sent the women captives to their allies the Burgundians. Rome itself was taken and retaken several times, and thereby the people were thinned; the old government by a Senate ceased, the nobles were ruined, and all the glory of the city was extinguish'd: and A.C. 552, after a war of seventeen years, the kingdom of the Ostrogoths fell; yet the remainder of the Ostrogoths, and an army of Germans called in to their assistance, continued the war three or four years longer. Then ensued the war of the Heruli, who, as Anastasius tells us, perimebant cunctam Italiam, slew all Italy. This was followed by the war of the Lombards, the fiercest of all the Barbarians, which began A.C. 568, and lasted for thirty eight years together; factâ tali clade, saith Anastasius, qualem à sæculo nullus meminit; ending at last in the Papacy of Sabinian, A.C. 605, by a peace then made with the Lombards. Three years before this war ended, Gregory the great, then Bishop of Rome, thus speaks of it: Qualiter enim & quotidianis gladiis & quantis Longobardorum incursionibus, ecce jam per triginta quinque annorum longitudinem premimur, nullis explere vocibus suggestionis valemus: and in one of his Sermons to the people, he thus expresses the great consumption of the Romans by these wars: Ex illa plebe innumerabili quanti remanseritis aspicitis, & tamen adhuc quotidiè flagella urgent, repentini casus opprimunt, novæ res & improvisæ clades affligunt. In another Sermon he thus describes the desolations: Destructæ urbes, eversa sunt castra, depopulati agri, in solitudinem terra redacta est. Nullus in agris incola, penè nullus in urbibus habitator remansit. Et tamen ipsæ parvæ generis humani reliquiæ adhuc quotidiè & sine cessatione feriuntur, & finem non habent flagella coelestis justitiæ. Ipsa autem quæ aliquando mundi Domina esse videbatur, qualis remansit Roma conspicimus innumeris doloribus multipliciter attrita, defolatione civium, impressione hostium, frequentiâ ruinarum.--Ecce jam de illa omnes hujus fæculi potentes ablati sunt.--Ecce populi defecerunt.--Ubi enim Senatus? Ubi jam populus? Contabuerunt ossa, consumptæ sunt carnes. Omnis enim sæcularium dignitatum ordo extinctus est, & tamen ipsos vos paucos qui remansimus, adhuc quotidié gladii, adhuc quotidié innumeræ tribulationes premunt.--Vacua jam ardet Roma. Quid autem ista de hominibus dicimus? Cum ruinis crebrescentibus ipsa quoque destrui ædificia videmus. Postquam defecerunt homines etiam parietes cadunt. Jam ecce desolata, ecce contrita, ecce gemitibus oppressa est, &c. All this was spoken by Gregory to the people of Rome, who were witnesses of the truth of it. Thus by the plagues of the four winds, the Empire of the Greeks was shaken, and the Empire of the Latins fell; and Rome remained nothing more than the capital of a poor dukedom, subordinate to Ravenna, the seat of the Exarchs.

The fifth trumpet sounded to the wars, which the King of the South, as he is called by Daniel, made in the time of the end, in pushing at the King who did according to his will. This plague began with the opening of the bottomless pit, which denotes the letting out of a false religion: the smoke which came out of the pit, signifying the multitude which embraced that religion; and the locusts which came out of the smoke, the armies which came out of that multitude. This pit was opened, to let out smoke and locusts into the regions of the four monarchies, or some of them. The King of these locusts was the Angel of the bottomless pit, being chief governor as well in religious as civil affairs, such as was the Caliph of the Saracens. Swarms of locusts often arise in Arabia fælix, and from thence infest the neighbouring nations: and so are a very fit type of the numerous armies of Arabians invading the Romans. They began to invade them A.C. 634, and to reign at Damascus A.C. 637. They built Bagdad A.C. 766, and reigned over Persia, Syria, Arabia, Egypt, Africa and Spain. They afterwards lost Africa to Mahades, A.C. 910; Media, Hircania, Chorasan, and all Persia, to the Dailamites, between the years 927 and 935; Mesopotamia and Miafarekin to Nasiruddaulas, A.C. 930; Syria and Egypt to Achsjid, A.C. 935, and now being in great distress, the Caliph of Bagdad, A.C. 936, surrendred all the rest of his temporal power to Mahomet the son of Rajici, King of Wasit in Chaldea, and made him Emperor of Emperors. But Mahomet within two years lost Bagdad to the Turks; and thenceforward Bagdad was sometimes in the hands of the Turks, and sometimes in the hands of the Saracens, till Togrul-beig, called also Togra, Dogrissa, Tangrolipix, and Sadoc, conquered Chorasan and Persia; and A.C. 1055, added Bagdad to his Empire, making it the seat thereof. His successors Olub-Arflan and Melechschah, conquered the regions upon Euphrates; and these conquests, after the death of Melechschah, brake into the kingdoms of Armenia, Mesopotamia, Syria, and Cappadocia. The whole time that the Caliphs of the Saracens reigned with a temporal dominion at Damascus and Bagdad together, was 300 years, viz. from the year 637 to the year 936 inclusive. Now locusts live but five months; and therefore, for the decorum of the type, these locusts are said to hurt men five months and five months, as if they had lived about five months at Damascus, and again about five months at Bagdad; in all ten months, or 300 prophetic days, which are years.

The sixth trumpet sounded to the wars, which Daniel's King of the North made against the King above-mentioned, who did according to his will. In these wars the King of the North, according to Daniel, conquered the Empire of the Greeks, and also Judea, Egypt, Lybia, and Ethiopia: and by these conquests the Empire of the Turks was set up, as may be known by the extent thereof. These wars commenced A.C. 1258, when the four kingdoms of the Turks seated upon Euphrates, that of Armenia major seated at Miyapharekin, Megarkin or Martyropolis, that of Mesopotamia seated at Mosul, that of all Syria seated at Aleppo, and that of Cappadocia seated at Iconium, were invaded by the Tartars under Hulacu, and driven into the western parts of Asia minor, where they made war upon the Greeks, and began to erect the present Empire of the Turks. Upon the sounding of the sixth trumpet,9 John heard a voice from the four horns of the golden Altar which is before God, saying to the sixth Angel which had the trumpet, Loose the four Angels which are bound at the great river Euphrates. And the four Angels were loosed, which were prepared for an hour and a day, and a month and a year, for to slay the third part of men. By the four horns of the golden Altar, is signified the situation of the head cities of the said four kingdoms, Miyapharekin, Mosul, Aleppo, and Iconium, which were in a quadrangle. They slew the third part of men, when they conquered the Greek Empire, and took Constantinople, A.C. 1453. and they began to be prepared for this purpose, when Olub-Arslan began to conquer the nations upon Euphrates, A.C. 1063. The interval is called an hour and a day, and a month and a year, or 391 prophetic days, which are years. In the first thirty years, Olub-Arslan and Melechschah conquered the nations upon Euphrates, and reigned over the whole. Melechschah died A.C. 1092, and was succeeded by a little child; and then this kingdom broke into the four kingdoms above-mentioned.

Notes to Chap. III.

1 Apoc. ii. 4, &c.

2 Apoc. ii. 9, 10.

3 Ver. 14.

4 Numb. xxv. 1, 2, 18, & xxi. 16.

5 Apoc. iii. 10, 12.

6 Apoc. iii. 16, 17.

7 Apoc. viii. 7, &c.

8 Apoc. xvi. 5, 6.

9 Apoc. ix. 13, &c.

THE END.

Advertisement.

The last pages of these Observations having been differently drawn up by the Author in another copy of his Work; they are here inserted as they follow in that copy, after the 22d line of the 261st page foregoing.

And none was found worthy to open the book till the Lamb of God appeared; the great High-Priest represented by a lamb slain at the foot of the Altar in the morning-sacrifice. And he came, and took the book out of the hand of him that sat upon the throne. For the High-Priest, in the feast of the seventh month, went into the most holy place, and took the book of the law out of the right side of the Ark, to read it to the people: and in order to read it well, he studied it seven days, that is, upon the fourth, fifth, sixth, seventh, eighth, ninth and tenth days, being attended by some of the priests to hear him perform. These seven days are alluded to, by the Lamb's opening the seven seals successively.

Upon the tenth day of the month, a young bullock was offered for a sin-offering for the High-Priest, and a goat for a sin-offering for the people: and lots were cast upon two goats to determine which of them should be God's lot for the sin-offering; and the other goat was called Azazel, the scape-goat. The High-Priest in his linen garments, took a censer full of burning coals of fire from the Altar, his hand being full of sweet incense beaten small; and went into the most holy place within the veil, and put the incense upon the fire, and sprinkled the blood of the bullock with his finger upon the mercy-seat and before the mercy-seat seven times; and then he killed the goat which fell to God's lot, for a sin-offering for the people, and brought his blood within the veil, and sprinkled it also seven times upon the mercy-seat and before the mercy-seat. Then he went out to the Altar, and sprinkled it also seven times with the blood of the bullock, and as often with the blood of the goat. After this he laid both his hands upon the head of the live goat; and confessed over him all the iniquities of the children of Israel, and all their transgressions in all their sins, putting them upon the head of the goat; and sent him away into the wilderness by the hands of a fit man: and the goat bore upon him all their iniquities into a land not inhabited, Levit. chap. iv. & chap. xvi. While the High-Priest was doing these things in the most holy place and at the Altar, the people continued at their devotion quietly and in silence. Then the High-Priest went into the holy place, put off his linen garments, and put on other garments; then came out, and sent the bullock and the goat of the sin-offering to be burnt without the camp, with fire taken in a censer from the Altar: and as the people returned home from the Temple, they said to one another, God seal you to a good new year.

In allusion to all this, when he had opened the seventh seal, there was silence in heaven about the space of half an hour. And an Angel stood at the Altar having a golden Censer, and there was given unto him much incense, that he should offer it with the prayers of all Saints, upon the golden Altar which was before the throne. And the smoke of the incense with the prayers of the Saints ascended up before God out of the Angel's hand. And the Angel took the Censer, and filled it with fire of the Altar, and cast it to the earth, suppose without the camp, for sacrificing the goat which fell to God's lot. For the High-Priest being Christ himself, the bullock is omitted. At this sacrifice there were voices and thundrings, of the musick of the Temple, and lightnings of the sacred fire, and an earthquake: and synchronal to these things was the sealing of the 144000 out of all the twelve tribes of the children of Israel with the seal of God in their foreheads, while the rest of the twelve tribes received the mark of the Beast, and the Woman fled from the Temple into the wilderness to her place upon this Beast. For this sealing and marking was represented by casting lots upon the two goats, sacrificing God's lot on mount Sion, and sending the scape-goat into the wilderness loaden with the sins of the people.

Sciant cuncti qui ad ritus suos hæresis superstitionibus obrepserant sacrosanctæ legis inimici, plectendos se poenâ & proscriptionis & sanguinis, si ultra convenire per publicum exercendi sceleris sui temeritate temptaverint: ne quâ vera divinaque reverentia contagione temeretur. Dat. viii. Kal. Sept. Honorio x. & Theod. vi. AA. Coss. A.C. 415.

Because these Edicts were sent to the governor of Africa, they applied only to the Africans. Before these there were many harsh ones against the Donatists, but they did not go as far as blood. These two were the first to make their meetings, and the meetings of all dissenters, a capital crime. In these Edicts, heretics means all dissenters, as is clear from the following one against Euresius, a Luciferan Bishop.

Impp. Arcad. & Honor. AA. Aureliano Proc. Africæ.

Hæreticorum vocabulo continentur, & latis adversus eos sanctionibus debent succumbere, qui vel levi argumento à judicio Catholicæ religionis & tramite detecti fuerint deviare: ideoque experientia tua Euresium hæreticum esse cognoscat. Dat. iii. Non. Sept. Constantinop. Olybrio & Probino Coss. A.C. 395.

The Greek Emperor Zeno adopted Theoderic King of the Ostrogoths as his son, made him master of the horse, Patricius and Consul of Constantinople, and, handing over to him the Roman people and Senate, gave him the Western Empire and sent him into Italy against Odoacer King of the Heruli. Theoderic then led his people into Italy, conquered Odoacer, and ruled over Italy, Sicily, Rhætia, Noricum, Dalmatia, Liburnia, Istria, and part of Suevia, Pannonia and Gallia. So Ennodius said, in a Panegyric to Theoderic: Ad limitem suum Romana regna remeâsse. Theoderic ruled with great prudence, moderation and success. He treated the Romans with unusual kindness, governed them by their own laws, and restored their government under their Senate and Consuls, taking the place of Emperor himself without taking the title. Ita sibi parentibus præfuit, says Procopius, ut vere Imperatori conveniens decus nullum ipsi abesset: Justitiæ magnus ei cultus, legumque diligens custodia: terras à vicinis barbaris servavit intactas, &c. So I do not count the reign of this King among the plagues of the four winds.

The plague of the northern wind at the sounding of the fourth trumpet was to darken the Sun, Moon and Stars, that is, the King, kingdom and Princes of the Western Empire, and to keep them in darkness for some time. So Belisarius, after conquering the Vandals, invaded Italy A.C. 535 and fought the Ostrogoths in Dalmatia, Liburnia, Venetia, Lombardy, Tuscany and other regions north of Rome, twenty years in a row. In this war many cities were taken and taken back. When Millain was taken back from the Romans, the Ostrogoths killed all the males, young and old, amounting, as Procopius reckons, to three hundred thousand, and sent the women captives to their allies the Burgundians. Rome itself was taken and retaken several times, and the people were thinned out. The old government by a Senate ended, the nobles were ruined, and all the glory of the city was extinguished. Then, A.C. 552, after a war of seventeen years, the kingdom of the Ostrogoths fell, yet the rest of the Ostrogoths and an army of Germans they called in to help them kept the war going three or four years longer. Then came the war of the Heruli, who, as Anastasius tells us, perimebant cunctam Italiam, killed all Italy. That was followed by the war of the Lombards, the fiercest of all the Barbarians, which began A.C. 568 and lasted thirty eight years in a row, factâ tali clade, says Anastasius, qualem à sæculo nullus meminit. It ended at last with the Papacy of Sabinian, A.C. 605, through a peace made with the Lombards at that time. Three years before this war ended, Gregory the great, then Bishop of Rome, spoke of it like this: Qualiter enim & quotidianis gladiis & quantis Longobardorum incursionibus, ecce jam per triginta quinque annorum longitudinem premimur, nullis explere vocibus suggestionis valemus: and in one of his Sermons to the people he describes how badly the Romans were used up by these wars: Ex illa plebe innumerabili quanti remanseritis aspicitis, & tamen adhuc quotidiè flagella urgent, repentini casus opprimunt, novæ res & improvisæ clades affligunt. In another Sermon he describes the desolations this way: Destructæ urbes, eversa sunt castra, depopulati agri, in solitudinem terra redacta est. Nullus in agris incola, penè nullus in urbibus habitator remansit. Et tamen ipsæ parvæ generis humani reliquiæ adhuc quotidiè & sine cessatione feriuntur, & finem non habent flagella coefor fear thatis justitiæ. Ipsa autem quæ aliquando mundi Domina esse videbatur, qualis remansit Roma conspicimus innumeris doloribus multipliciter attrita, defolatione civium, impressione hostium, frequentiâ ruinarum.--Ecce jam de illa omnes hujus fæculi potentes ablati sunt.--Ecce populi defecerunt.--Ubi enim Senatus? Ubi jam populus? Contabuerunt ossa, consumptæ sunt carnes. Omnis enim sæcularium dignitatum ordo extinctus est, & tamen ipsos vos paucos qui remansimus, adhuc quotidié gladii, adhuc quotidié innumeræ tribulationes premunt.--Vacua jam ardet Roma. Quid autem ista de hominibus dicimus? Cum ruinis crebrescentibus ipsa quoque destrui ædificia videmus. Postquam defecerunt homines etiam parietes cadunt. Jam ecce desolata, ecce contrita, ecce gemitibus oppressa est, &c. All this was said by Gregory to the people of Rome, who had seen that it was true. So through the plagues of the four winds the Empire of the Greeks was shaken and the Empire of the Latins fell, and Rome was nothing more than the capital of a poor dukedom, under Ravenna, the seat of the Exarchs.

The fifth trumpet sounded to the wars that the King of the South, as Daniel calls him, made in the time of the end by pushing at the King who did according to his will. This plague began with the opening of the bottomless pit, which means a false religion being let out: the smoke coming out of the pit stands for the crowd that embraced that religion, and the locusts coming out of the smoke stand for the armies that came out of that crowd. The pit was opened to let smoke and locusts out into the regions of the four monarchies, or some of them. The King of these locusts was the Angel of the bottomless pit, the chief governor in religious as well as civil affairs, such as the Caliph of the Saracens. Swarms of locusts often rise up in Arabia fælix and from there infest the neighboring nations, so they are a very fitting picture of the large armies of Arabians invading the Romans. They began to invade them A.C. 634 and to rule at Damascus A.C. 637. They built Bagdad A.C. 766 and ruled over Persia, Syria, Arabia, Egypt, Africa and Spain. Later they lost Africa to Mahades, A.C. 910; Media, Hircania, Chorasan and all Persia to the Dailamites, between the years 927 and 935; Mesopotamia and Miafarekin to Nasiruddaulas, A.C. 930; Syria and Egypt to Achsjid, A.C. 935. And now in great distress, the Caliph of Bagdad, A.C. 936, handed over all the rest of his temporal power to Mahomet the son of Rajici, King of Wasit in Chaldea, and made him Emperor of Emperors. But Mahomet lost Bagdad to the Turks within two years, and from then on Bagdad was sometimes in the hands of the Turks and sometimes in the hands of the Saracens, until Togrul-beig, also called Togra, Dogrissa, Tangrolipix and Sadoc, conquered Chorasan and Persia and, A.C. 1055, added Bagdad to his Empire and made it his seat. His successors Olub-Arflan and Melechschah conquered the regions upon the Euphrates, and after the death of Melechschah these conquests broke into the kingdoms of Armenia, Mesopotamia, Syria and Cappadocia. The whole time that the Caliphs of the Saracens ruled with a temporal dominion at Damascus and Bagdad together was 300 years, that is, from the year 637 to the year 936 inclusive. Now locusts live only five months, and so, to keep the picture right, these locusts are said to hurt men five months and five months, as if they had lived about five months at Damascus and again about five months at Bagdad: ten months in all, or 300 prophetic days, which are years.

The sixth trumpet sounded to the wars that Daniel's King of the North made against the King mentioned above, who did according to his will. In these wars the King of the North, according to Daniel, conquered the Empire of the Greeks and also Judea, Egypt, Lybia and Ethiopia, and by these conquests the Empire of the Turks was set up, as can be known from its size. These wars began A.C. 1258, when the four kingdoms of the Turks seated upon the Euphrates—the kingdom of Armenia major seated at Miyapharekin, Megarkin or Martyropolis, the kingdom of Mesopotamia seated at Mosul, the kingdom of all Syria seated at Aleppo, and the kingdom of Cappadocia seated at Iconium—were invaded by the Tartars under Hulacu and driven into the western parts of Asia minor, where they made war on the Greeks and began to build the present Empire of the Turks. When the sixth trumpet sounded,9 John heard a voice from the four horns of the golden Altar which is before God, saying to the sixth Angel who had the trumpet: "Loosen the four Angels who are bound at the great river Euphrates." And the four Angels were let loose. They had been prepared for an hour and a day, and a month and a year, to kill a third part of men. The four horns of the golden Altar stand for where the head cities of those four kingdoms sat, Miyapharekin, Mosul, Aleppo and Iconium, which were in a quadrangle. They killed a third part of men when they conquered the Greek Empire and took Constantinople, A.C. 1453. And they began to be prepared for this purpose when Olub-Arslan began to conquer the nations upon the Euphrates, A.C. 1063. The time in between is called an hour and a day, and a month and a year, or 391 prophetic days, which are years. In the first thirty years, Olub-Arslan and Melechschah conquered the nations upon the Euphrates and ruled over all of them. Melechschah died A.C. 1092 and was succeeded by a little child, and then this kingdom broke into the four kingdoms mentioned above.

Notes to Chap. III.

1 Apoc. ii. 4, &c.

2 Apoc. ii. 9, 10.

3 Ver. 14.

4 Numb. xxv. 1, 2, 18, & xxi. 16.

5 Apoc. iii. 10, 12.

6 Apoc. iii. 16, 17.

7 Apoc. viii. 7, &c.

8 Apoc. xvi. 5, 6.

9 Apoc. ix. 13, &c.

THE END.

Advertisement.

The last pages of these Observations were written in a different form by the Author in another copy of his Work, and they are inserted here as they follow in that copy, after the 22d line of the 261st page above.

And no one was found worthy to open the book until the Lamb of God appeared: the great High-Priest shown as a lamb killed at the foot of the Altar in the morning sacrifice. And he came and took the book from the hand of the one sitting on the throne. For the High-Priest, in the feast of the seventh month, went into the most holy place and took the book of the law out of the right side of the Ark to read it to the people, and in order to read it well he studied it seven days, that is, on the fourth, fifth, sixth, seventh, eighth, ninth and tenth days, with some of the priests attending to hear him perform. These seven days are referred to by the Lamb opening the seven seals one after another.

On the tenth day of the month, a young bullock was offered as a sin-offering for the High-Priest, and a goat as a sin-offering for the people, and lots were cast on two goats to decide which of them should be God's lot for the sin-offering, while the other goat was called Azazel, the scape-goat. The High-Priest, in his linen garments, took a censer full of burning coals of fire from the Altar, his hand full of sweet incense beaten small, and went into the most holy place inside the veil. He put the incense on the fire and sprinkled the blood of the bullock with his finger on the mercy-seat and in front of the mercy-seat seven times. Then he killed the goat that fell to God's lot as a sin-offering for the people, brought its blood inside the veil, and sprinkled it seven times as well on the mercy-seat and in front of the mercy-seat. Then he went out to the Altar and sprinkled it seven times with the blood of the bullock, and just as often with the blood of the goat. After that he laid both his hands on the head of the live goat and confessed over him all the wrongs of the children of Israel and all their transgressions in all their sins, putting them on the head of the goat, and sent him away into the wilderness by the hands of a fit man, and the goat carried all their wrongs into a land that is not inhabited, Levit. chap. iv. & chap. xvi. While the High-Priest was doing these things in the most holy place and at the Altar, the people stayed at their devotion quietly and in silence. Then the High-Priest went into the holy place, took off his linen garments and put on other garments, then came out and sent the bullock and the goat of the sin-offering to be burned outside the camp, with fire taken in a censer from the Altar. And as the people went home from the Temple they said to one another, "God seal you to a good new year."

In allusion to all this, when he had opened the seventh seal, there was silence in heaven for about half an hour. And an Angel stood at the Altar with a golden Censer, and there was given to him much incense, so that he should offer it with the prayers of all Saints on the golden Altar which was before the throne. And the smoke of the incense with the prayers of the Saints went up before God out of the Angel's hand. And the Angel took the Censer, filled it with fire of the Altar, and threw it to the earth, suppose outside the camp, to sacrifice the goat which fell to God's lot. For the High-Priest being Christ himself, the bullock is left out. At this sacrifice there were voices and thunderings, from the music of the Temple, and lightnings of the sacred fire, and an earthquake, and at the same time as these things the 144000 out of all the twelve tribes of the children of Israel were sealed with the seal of God in their foreheads, while the rest of the twelve tribes received the mark of the Beast, and the Woman fled from the Temple into the wilderness to her place on this Beast. For this sealing and marking was shown by casting lots on the two goats, sacrificing God's lot on mount Sion, and sending the scape-goat into the wilderness loaded with the sins of the people.

Part II, Chapter 3, 4

Upon the fifteenth day of the month, and the six following days, there were very great sacrifices. And in allusion to the sounding of trumpets, and singing with thundring voices, and pouring out drink-offerings at those sacrifices, seven trumpets are sounded, and seven thunders utter their voices, and seven vials of wrath are poured out. Wherefore the sounding of the seven trumpets, the voices of the seven thunders, and the pouring out of the seven vials of wrath, are synchronal, and relate to one and the same division of the time of the seventh seal following the silence, into seven successive parts. The seven days of this feast were called the feast of Tabernacles; and during these seven days the children of Israel dwelt in booths, and rejoiced with palm-branches in their hands. To this alludes the multitude with palms in their hands, which appeared after the sealing of the 144000, and came out of the great tribulation with triumph at the battle of the great day, to which the seventh trumpet sounds. The visions therefore of the 144000, and of the palm-bearing multitude, extend to the sounding of the seventh trumpet, and therefore are synchronal to the times of the seventh seal.

When the 144000 are sealed out of all the twelve tribes of Israel, and the rest receive the mark of the Beast, and thereby the first temple is destroyed; John is bidden to measure the temple and altar, that is, their courts, and them that worship therein, that is, the 144000 standing on mount Sion and on the sea of glass: but the court that is without the temple, that is, the peoples court, to leave out and measure it not, because it is given to the Gentiles, those who receive the mark of the Beast; and the holy city they shall tread under foot forty and two months, that is, all the time that the Beast acts under the woman Babylon: and the two witnesses prophesy 1260 days, that is, all the same time, clothed in sackcloth. These have power, like Elijah, to shut heaven that it rain not, at the sounding of the first trumpet; and, like Moses, to turn the waters into blood at the sounding of the second; and to smite the earth with all plagues, those of the trumpets, as often as they will. These prophesy at the building of the second temple, like Haggai and Zechary. These are the two Olive-trees, or Churches, which supplied the lamps with oil, Zech. iv. These are the two candlesticks, or Churches, standing before the God of the earth. Five of the seven Churches of Asia, those in prosperity, are found fault with, and exhorted to repent, and threatned to be removed out of their places, or spewed out of Christ's mouth, or punished with the sword of Christ's mouth, except they repent: the other two, the Churches of Smyrna and Philadelphia, which were under persecution, remain in a state of persecution, to illuminate the second temple. When the primitive Church catholick, represented by the woman in heaven, apostatized, and became divided into two corrupt Churches, represented by the whore of Babylon and the two-horned Beast, the 144000 who were sealed out of all the twelve tribes, became the two Witnesses, in opposition to those two false Churches: and the name of two Witnesses once imposed, remains to the true Church of God in all times and places to the end of the Prophecy.

In the interpretation of this Prophecy, the woman in heaven clothed with the sun, before she flies into the wilderness, represents the primitive Church catholick, illuminated with the seven lamps in the seven golden candlesticks, which are the seven Churches of Asia. The Dragon signifies the same Empire with Daniel's He-goat in the reign of his last horn, that is, the whole Roman Empire, until it became divided into the Greek and Latin Empires; and all the time of that division it signifies the Greek Empire alone: and the Beast is Daniel's fourth Beast, that is, the Empire of the Latins. Before the division of the Roman Empire into the Greek and Latin Empires, the Beast is included in the body of the Dragon; and from the time of that division, the Beast is the Latin Empire only. Hence the Dragon and Beast have the same heads and horns; but the heads are crowned upon the Dragon, and the horns upon the Beast. The horns are ten kingdoms, into which the Beast becomes divided presently after his separation from the Dragon, as hath been described above. The heads are seven successive dynasties, or parts, into which the Roman Empire becomes divided by the opening of the seven seals. Before the woman fled into the wilderness, she being with child of a Christian Empire, cried travelling, viz. in the ten years persecution of Dioclesian, and pained to be delivered: and the Dragon, the heathen Roman Empire, stood before her, to devour her child as soon as it was born. And she brought forth a man child, who at length was to rule all nations with a rod of iron. And her child was caught up unto God, and to his throne in the Temple, by the victory of Constantine the great over Maxentius: and the woman fled from the Temple into the wilderness of Arabia to Babylon, where she hath a place of riches and honour and dominion, upon the back of the Beast, prepared of God, that they should feed her there 1260 days. And there was war in heaven, between the heathens under Maximinus and the new Christian Empire; and the great Dragon was cast out, that old serpent, which deceiveth the whole world, the spirit of heathen idolatry; he was cast out of the throne into the earth. And they overcame him by the blood of the Lamb, and by the word of their testimony; and they loved not their lives unto the death.

And when the Dragon saw that he was cast unto the earth, he persecuted the woman which brought forth the man child, stirring up a new persecution against her in the reign of Licinius. And to the woman, by the building of Constantinople and equalling it to Rome, were given two wings of a great eagle, that she might flee into the wilderness into her place upon the back of her Beast, where she is nourished for a time, and times, and half a time, from the face of the serpent. And the serpent, upon the death of Constantine the great, cast out of his mouth water as a flood, viz. the Western Empire under Constantine junior and Constans, after the woman: that he might cause her to be carried away of the flood. And the earth, the nations of Asia now under Constantinople, helped the woman; and by conquering the Western Empire, now under Magnentius, swallowed up the flood which the Dragon cast out of his mouth. And the Dragon was wroth with the woman, and went to make war with the remnant of her seed, which keep the commandments of God, and have the testimony of Jesus Christ, which in that war were sealed out of all the twelve tribes of Israel, and remained upon mount Sion with the Lamb, being in number 144000, and having their father's name written in their foreheads.

When the earth had swallowed up the flood, and the Dragon was gone to make war with the remnant of the woman's seed, John stood upon the sand of the sea, and saw a Beast rise out of the sea, having seven heads and ten horns. And the Beast was like unto a Leopard, and his feet were as the feet of a Bear, and his mouth as the mouth of a Lion. John here names Daniel's four Beasts in order, putting his Beast in the room of Daniel's fourth Beast, to shew that they are the same. And the Dragon gave this Beast his power and his seat and great authority, by relinquishing the Western Empire to him. And one of his heads, the sixth, was as it were wounded to death, viz. by the sword of the earth, which swallowed up the waters cast out of the mouth of the Dragon; and his deadly wound was healed, by a new division of the Empire between Valentinian and Valens, An. 364. John saw the Beast rise out of the sea, at the division thereof between Gratian and Theodosius, An. 379. The Dragon gave the Beast his power, and his seat and great authority, at the death of Theodosius, when Theodosius gave the Western Empire to his son Honorius. After which the two Empires were no more united: but the Western Empire became presently divided into ten kingdoms, as above; and these kingdoms at length united in religion under the woman, and reign with her forty and two months.

And I beheld, saith John, another Beast coming up out of the earth. When the woman fled from the Dragon into the kingdom of the Beast, and became his Church, this other Beast rose up out of the earth, to represent the Church of the Dragon. For he had two horns like the Lamb, such as were the bishopricks of Alexandria and Antioch: and he spake as the Dragon in matters of religion: and he causeth the earth, or nations of the Dragon's kingdom, to worship the first Beast, whose deadly wound was healed, that is, to be of his religion. And he doth great wonders, so that he maketh fire come down from heaven on the earth in the sight of men; that is, he excommunicateth those who differ from him in point of religion: for in pronouncing their excommunications, they used to swing down a lighted torch from above. And he said to them that dwell on the earth, that they should make an image to the Beast, which had the wound by a sword, and did live; that is, that they should call a Council of men of the religion of this Beast. And he had power to give life unto the image of the Beast, that the image of the Beast should both speak, and cause that as many as would not worship the image of the Beast should be killed, viz. mystically, by dissolving their Churches. And he causeth all both small and great, rich and poor, free and bond, to receive a mark in their right band or in their foreheads, and that no man might buy or sell, save he that had the mark, or the name of the Beast, or the number of his name; that is, the mark [Cross], or the name [Greek: LATEINOS], or the number thereof [Greek: chxs], 666. All others were excommunicated.

When the seven Angels had poured out the seven vials of wrath, and John had described them all in the present time, he is called up from the time of the seventh vial to the time of the sixth seal, to take a view of the woman and her Beast, who were to reign in the times of the seventh seal. In respect of the latter part of time of the sixth seal, then considered as present, the Angel tells John: The Beast that thou sawest, was and is not, and shall ascend out of the abyss, and go into perdition; that is, he was in the reign of Constans and Magnentius, until Constantius conquered Magnentius, and re-united the Western Empire to the Eastern. He is not during the reunion, and he shall ascend out of the abyss or sea at a following division of the Empire. The Angel tells him further: Here is the mind which hath wisdom: the seven heads are seven mountains, on which the woman sitteth; Rome being built upon seven hills, and thence called the seven-hilled city. Also there are seven Kings: five are fallen, and one is, and the other is not yet come; and when he cometh, he must continue a short space: and the Beast that was and is not, even he is the eighth, and is of the seven, and goeth into perdition. Five are fallen, the times of the five first seals being past; and one is, the time of the sixth seal being considered as present; and another is not yet come, and when he cometh, which will be at the opening of the seventh seal, he must continue a short space: and the Beast that was and is not, even he is the eighth, by means of the division of the Roman Empire into two collateral Empires; and is of the seven, being one half of the seventh, and shall go into perdition. The words, five are fallen, and one is, and the other is not yet come, are usually referred by interpreters to the time of John the Apostle, when the Prophecy was given: but it is to be considered, that in this Prophecy many things are spoken of as present, which were not present when the Prophecy was given, but which would be present with respect to some future time, considered as present in the visions. Thus where it is said upon pouring out the seventh vial of wrath, that great Babylon came in remembrance before God, to give unto her the cup of the wine of the fierceness of his wrath; this relates not to the time of John the Apostle, but to the time of pouring out the seventh vial of wrath. So where it is said, Babylon is fallen, is fallen; and thrust in thy sickle and reap, for the time is come for thee to reap; and the time of the dead is come, that they should be judged; and again, I saw the dead small and great stand before God: these sayings relate not to the days of John the Apostle, but to the latter times considered as present in the visions. In like manner the words, five are fallen, and one is, and the other is not yet come, and the Beast that was and is not, he is the eighth, are not to be referred to the age of John the Apostle, but relate to the time when the Beast was to be wounded to death with a sword, and shew that this wound was to be given him in his sixth head: and without this reference we are not told in what head the Beast was wounded. And the ten horns which thou sawest, are ten Kings, which have received no kingdom as yet, but receive power as Kings one hour with the Beast. These have one mind, being all of the whore's religion, and shall give their power and strength unto the Beast. These shall make war with the Lamb, at the sounding of the seventh trumpet; and the Lamb shall overcome them: for he is Lord of Lords and King of Kings; and they that are with him are called and chosen and faithful. And he saith unto me, the waters which thou sawest where the whore sitteth, are peoples and multitudes and nations and tongues, composing her Beast. And the ten horns which thou sawest upon the Beast, these shall hate the whore, and shall make her desolate and naked, and shall eat her flesh, and burn her with fire, at the end of the 1260 days. For God hath put in their hearts to fulfil his will, and to agree and give their kingdom unto the Beast, until the words of God shall be fulfilled. And the woman which thou sawest, is that great city which reigneth over the Kings of the earth, or the great city of the Latins, which reigneth over the ten Kings till the end of those days.

On the fifteenth day of the month, and on the six days that followed, there were very great sacrifices. To copy the sounding of trumpets, the singing with thundering voices, and the pouring out of drink offerings at those sacrifices, seven trumpets are sounded, seven thunders speak with their voices, and seven vials of wrath are poured out. So the sounding of the seven trumpets, the voices of the seven thunders, and the pouring out of the seven vials of wrath happen at the same time, and they all belong to one and the same division of the time of the seventh seal after the silence, split into seven parts in order. The seven days of this feast were called the Feast of Tabernacles, and during those seven days the children of Israel lived in booths and rejoiced with palm branches in their hands. The crowd with palms in their hands points to this. It appeared after the sealing of the 144000, and it came out of the great tribulation in triumph at the battle of the great day, to which the seventh trumpet sounds. So the visions of the 144000 and of the crowd carrying palms reach as far as the sounding of the seventh trumpet, and so they happen at the same time as the times of the seventh seal.

When the 144000 are sealed out of all the twelve tribes of Israel, and the rest receive the mark of the Beast, and as a result the first temple is destroyed, John is told to measure the temple and the altar. That means their courts, and the people who worship in them, that is, the 144000 standing on mount Sion and on the sea of glass. He is to leave out the court that is outside the temple, the people's court, and not measure it, because it is given to the Gentiles, those who receive the mark of the Beast. And they shall trample the holy city under foot forty and two months, that is, all the time that the Beast acts under the woman Babylon. And the two witnesses prophesy 1260 days, that is, all that same time, clothed in sackcloth. These have power, like Elijah, to shut the sky so that it does not rain, at the sounding of the first trumpet; and, like Moses, to turn the waters into blood at the sounding of the second; and to strike the earth with all the plagues, those of the trumpets, as often as they wish. They prophesy at the building of the second temple, like Haggai and Zechary. They are the two olive trees, or Churches, that supplied the lamps with oil, Zech. iv. They are the two candfor fear thaticks, or Churches, standing before the God of the earth. Five of the seven Churches of Asia, the ones in prosperity, are found fault with, told to repent, and threatened with being removed from their places, or spit out of Christ's mouth, or punished with the sword of Christ's mouth, unless they repent. The other two, the Churches of Smyrna and Philadelphia, which were under persecution, stay under persecution, to light up the second temple. When the early universal Church, represented by the woman in heaven, turned away and split into two corrupt Churches, represented by the whore of Babylon and the two-horned Beast, the 144000 who were sealed out of all the twelve tribes became the two Witnesses, set against those two false Churches. Once the name of two Witnesses has been given, it stays with the true Church of God in all times and places until the end of the Prophecy.

In the interpretation of this Prophecy, the woman in heaven clothed with the sun, before she flies into the wilderness, stands for the early universal Church, lit by the seven lamps in the seven golden candfor fear thaticks, which are the seven Churches of Asia. The Dragon stands for the same Empire as Daniel's He-goat in the reign of its last horn, that is, the whole Roman Empire, until it split into the Greek and Latin Empires. For all the time of that division it stands for the Greek Empire alone. The Beast is Daniel's fourth Beast, that is, the Empire of the Latins. Before the Roman Empire split into the Greek and Latin Empires, the Beast was part of the body of the Dragon. From the time of that split on, the Beast is the Latin Empire only. So the Dragon and the Beast have the same heads and horns, but the heads are crowned on the Dragon and the horns on the Beast. The horns are ten kingdoms, which the Beast splits into right after it separates from the Dragon, as described above. The heads are seven dynasties, or parts, one after another, into which the Roman Empire splits as the seven seals are opened. Before the woman fled into the wilderness, she was pregnant with a Christian Empire, and she cried out in labor, in the ten years persecution of Dioclesian, in pain to give birth. The Dragon, the heathen Roman Empire, stood in front of her to devour her child as soon as it was born. She brought forth a man child, who was to rule all nations with a rod of iron. Her child was caught up to God, and to his throne in the Temple, by the victory of Constantine the great over Maxentius. The woman fled from the Temple into the wilderness of Arabia to Babylon, where she has a place of riches and honor and dominion, on the back of the Beast, prepared by God, so that they would feed her there 1260 days. There was war in heaven, between the heathens under Maximinus and the new Christian Empire. The great Dragon was cast out, that old serpent which deceives the whole world, the spirit of heathen idolatry. He was cast out of the throne down to the earth. They overcame him by the blood of the Lamb, and by the word of their testimony, and they did not love their own lives even to the death.

When the Dragon saw that he was thrown down to the earth, he persecuted the woman who brought forth the man child, stirring up a new persecution against her in the reign of Licinius. To the woman, by the building of Constantinople and making it equal to Rome, were given two wings of a great eagle, so that she could flee into the wilderness to her place on the back of her Beast, where she is fed for a time, and times, and half a time, away from the serpent. The serpent, after the death of Constantine the great, cast water out of his mouth like a flood, that is, the Western Empire under Constantine junior and Constans, in pursuit of the woman, so that he would sweep her away with the flood. The earth, the nations of Asia now under Constantinople, helped the woman, and by conquering the Western Empire, now under Magnentius, swallowed up the flood that the Dragon cast out of his mouth. The Dragon was angry with the woman, and went to make war with the rest of her seed, those who keep the commandments of God and have the testimony of Jesus Christ. In that war they were sealed out of all the twelve tribes of Israel, and they stayed on mount Sion with the Lamb, 144000 in number, with their father's name written on their foreheads.

After the earth had swallowed up the flood, and the Dragon had gone to make war with the rest of the woman's seed, John stood on the sand of the sea and saw a Beast rise out of the sea, with seven heads and ten horns. The Beast was like a Leopard, its feet were like the feet of a Bear, and its mouth like the mouth of a Lion. John here names Daniel's four Beasts in order, putting his own Beast in the place of Daniel's fourth Beast, to show that they are the same. The Dragon gave this Beast his power, his seat, and great authority, by handing over the Western Empire to him. One of his heads, the sixth, was as if wounded to death, that is, by the sword of the earth, which swallowed the waters cast out of the mouth of the Dragon. His deadly wound was healed by a new division of the Empire between Valentinian and Valens, A.D. 364. John saw the Beast rise out of the sea at the division of the Empire between Gratian and Theodosius, A.D. 379. The Dragon gave the Beast his power, and his seat and great authority, at the death of Theodosius, when Theodosius gave the Western Empire to his son Honorius. After that the two Empires were never joined again, but the Western Empire was soon divided into ten kingdoms, as above. These kingdoms finally united in religion under the woman, and reign with her forty and two months.

And I saw, said John, another Beast coming up out of the earth. When the woman fled from the Dragon into the kingdom of the Beast and became his Church, this other Beast rose up out of the earth to represent the Church of the Dragon. He had two horns like the Lamb; those were the bishoprics of Alexandria and Antioch. He spoke like the Dragon in matters of religion, and he makes the earth, the nations of the Dragon's kingdom, worship the first Beast whose deadly wound was healed, that is, join his religion. He does great wonders, so that he makes fire come down from heaven onto the earth in the sight of people. That means he excommunicates those who differ from him in religion: when they pronounced excommunication, they used to swing a lit torch down from above. He said to the people who live on the earth that they should make an image for the Beast which had the wound by a sword and lived. That means they should call a Council of men who follow this Beast's religion. He had power to give life to the image of the Beast, so that the image could speak, and so that everyone who would not worship the image of the Beast would be killed, that is, in a mystical sense, by having their Churches dissolved. He makes everyone, small and great, rich and poor, free and enslaved, to receive a mark on their right hand or on their foreheads, and so that no one could buy or sell unless he had the mark, the name of the Beast, or the number of his name. That is, the cross as the mark, the name LATEINOS in Greek, or the number of his name in Greek, 666. All others were excommunicated.

When the seven Angels had poured out the seven vials of wrath, and John had described them all as present events, he is taken up from the time of the seventh vial to the time of the sixth seal, to look at the woman and her Beast, who were to reign in the times of the seventh seal. Looking at the later part of the time of the sixth seal, then treated as present, the Angel tells John: "The Beast you saw was and is not, and shall come up out of the abyss and go into perdition." That is, he was there in the reign of Constans and Magnentius, until Constantius conquered Magnentius and joined the Western Empire back to the Eastern. He is not there during the reunion, and he shall come up out of the abyss or the sea at a later division of the Empire. The Angel tells him further: "Here is the mind that has wisdom: the seven heads are seven mountains, on which the woman sits; Rome being built on seven hills, and therefore called the seven-hilled city. There are also seven Kings: five have fallen, one is, and the other has not yet come; and when he comes, he must continue for a short space; and the Beast that was and is not, he is the eighth, and is of the seven, and goes into perdition." Five have fallen, the times of the five first seals being past; one is, the time of the sixth seal being treated as present; and another has not yet come, and when he comes, which will be at the opening of the seventh seal, he must continue for a short space; and the Beast that was and is not, he is the eighth, because the Roman Empire was divided into two parallel Empires; and he is of the seven, being one half of the seventh, and shall go into perdition. Interpreters usually take the words, "five have fallen, and one is, and the other has not yet come," to refer to the time of John the Apostle, when the Prophecy was given; but it should be noticed that in this Prophecy many things are spoken of as present which were not present when the Prophecy was given, but which would be present with respect to some future time treated as present in the visions. So where it says, on the pouring out of the seventh vial of wrath, that "great Babylon came to mind before God, to give her the cup of the wine of the fury of his wrath," this does not relate to the time of John the Apostle, but to the time when the seventh vial of wrath is poured out. So where it says, "Babylon is fallen, is fallen; and put in your sickle and reap, for the time has come for you to reap; and the time of the dead has come, so they may be judged; and again, I saw the dead, small and great, stand before God," these sayings do not relate to the days of John the Apostle, but to the later times treated as present in the visions. In the same way, the words, "five have fallen, and one is, and the other has not yet come, and the Beast that was and is not, he is the eighth," are not to be referred to the age of John the Apostle, but relate to the time when the Beast was to be wounded to death with a sword, and they show that this wound was to be given to him in his sixth head; and without this reference we are not told in which head the Beast was wounded. And the ten horns you saw are ten Kings, which have received no kingdom as yet, but receive power as Kings for one hour with the Beast. They have one mind, being all of the whore's religion, and they shall give their power and strength to the Beast. They shall make war with the Lamb, at the sounding of the seventh trumpet; and the Lamb shall overcome them, for he is Lord of Lords and King of Kings; and those who are with him are called and chosen and faithful. And he said to me, "the waters you saw, where the whore sits, are peoples and multitudes and nations and tongues, which make up her Beast." And the ten horns you saw on the Beast, these shall hate the whore, and shall make her desolate and naked, and shall eat her flesh and burn her with fire, at the end of the 1260 days. For God has put it in their hearts to fulfill his will, and to agree and to give their kingdom to the Beast, until the words of God are fulfilled. And the woman you saw is that great city which rules over the Kings of the earth, or the great city of the Latins, which rules over the ten Kings until the end of those days.

Download Observations upon the Prophecies of Daniel, and the Apocalypse of St. John